SPECIFICATIONS - Beverly Hills, CaliforniaSpecifications).pdf · SPECIFICATIONS City of Beverly Hills – 3RD STREET TOUR BUS STATION & RESTROOM FACILITY WEST THIRD STREET BEVERLY

SPECIFICATIONS

City of Beverly Hills – 3RD STREET TOUR BUS STATION & RESTROOM FACILITY WEST THIRD STREET BEVERLY HILLS, CALIFORNIA

07.12.2018 UAL PROJECT NO. 17006 Prepared by: URBAN ARCHITECTSURE LAB 1657 Alvira Street, Second Floor, Los Angeles, California 90035

City of Beverly Hills – 3RD Street Tour Bus Station Project Directory - 00 01 03 - 1

SECTION 00 01 03

PROJECT DIRECTORY

Owner: CITY OF BEVERLY HILLS Department of Public Works Mandana Motahari– City Architect 345 North Foothill Road Beverly Hills, CA 90210 Tel: 310.288.2866 Email: [email protected] Architect: URBAN ARCHITECTURE LAB Contact: Phil Trigas, Architect 1675 Alvira Street, Second Floor Los Angeles, CA 90035 Tel: 323.954.9996 Email: [email protected] Structural Engineer: BRANDOW & JOHNSON ENGINEERS Contact: Kim Caravalho 700 S. Flower Street, Suite 1800 Los Angeles, Ca 90017 Tel: 213.596.4504 Email: [email protected] Electrical Engineer: TEK ENGINEERING GROUP Contact: Masoud Varimanzadeh 6345 Balboa Blvd. # 288 Encino, Ca 91316 Tel: 818.783.6965 X 212 Email: [email protected] Mechanical & Plumbing Engineer: SPEC ENGINEERING GROUP Contact: Sia Garestani 6345 Balboa Blvd. # 288 Encino, Ca 91316 Tel: 818.783.6965 Email: [email protected] Landscape Designer: KSA – Landscape Design Studio Contact: Jake Patton, Principal 4212 ½ Glencore Avenue Marina Del Rry, CA 90292 Tel: 310.574.4460 x 223 Email: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]


City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station

Table of Contents - 00 01 10 -1

SECTION 00 01 10

TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTORY PAGES 00 00 00 Cover 00 01 03 Project Directory

00 01 10 Table of Contents SPECIFICATIONS Division 1 – General Requirements 01 10 00 Summary 01 21 00 Allowances 01 22 13 Unit Price Measurement 01 23 00 Alternatives 01 26 13 Requests for Information 01 31 19 Project Meetings 01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedules 01 33 23 Submittal and Substitutions 01 40 00 Quality Requirements 01 41 00 Regulatory Requirements 01 42 00 Reference Standards 01 53 00 Temporary Construction 01 66 00 Product Storage and Handling Requirements 01 70 00 Execution & Closeout Requirements 01 71 23 Field Engineering

01 73 23 Bracing and Anchoring 01 73 29 Cutting and Patching

01 74 00 Clearing & Waste Management 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 01 78 33 Warranties and Bonds Division 2 – Site Construction

02 30 00 Subsurface Investigation 02 41 13 Selective Site Demolition 02 50 00 Site Remediation

Division 3 – Concrete 03 30 00 Cast-In Place Concrete 03 33 00 Architectural Concrete Division 4 – Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry Division 5 – Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 05 12 13 Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing 05 31 00 Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 7 - Thermal, Moisture and Acoustical 07 14 16 Cold Fluid – Applied Waterproofing



07 19 00 Water Repellants 07 26 00 Concrete Slab Vapor Emissions Treatment 07 54 19 PVC Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing Adhered (Sika Sarnafil) 07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 92 00 Joint Sealant Division 8 - Doors and Windows

08 11 00 Steel Doors and Frames 08 63 00 Metal-Framed Skylights 08 65 00 Glazed Canopies (Refer to Architectural Drawings) 08 71 00 Door Hardware 08 81 00 Glazing

Division 9 – Finishes 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing 09 29 00 Gypsum Board / Dens Glass 09 30 00 Ceramic Tiling

09 96 00 Industrial Interior Exterior Painting Division 10 – Specialties 10 14 00 Signage 10 28 13 Washroom Room Accessories

Division 21 – Fire Suppression 21 11 00 Design/Build – Deferred Approval Item

Division 22 – Plumbing

22 05 11 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 05 19 Meters & Gauges for Plumbing Piping 22 05 23 General Duty Valve for Plumbing Piping 22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary & Vent Piping 22 14 00 Facility Storm Drainage

Division 26 – Electrical

26 05 00 Electrical General Requirements 26 05 01 Basic Electrical Requirements 26 05 02 Basic Electrical Materials & Methods 26 05 13 Conductors & Cables 26 05 19 Building Wiring & Cable 26 05 26 Grounding & Bonding 26 05 29 Supporting Devices 26 05 33 Raceway Boxes 26 05 34 Boxes 26 05 35 Conduit 26 05 48 Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems 26 05 53 Electrical Identification 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Enclosed Switches & Circuit Breakers 26 28 17 Disconnect Switches 26 51 00 Interior Lighting



Division 31 – Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing Division 32 – Exterior Improvements 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation System 32 93 00 Landscape 32 94 43 Tree Grates 32 90 00 Planting

32 95 10 Exterior Planting Support Structures

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Summary - 01 10 00 -1

SECTION 01 10 00

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 PROJECT

A. Project Name: Tour- Bus Station and Restrooms

B. Owner's Name: City of Beverly Hills

C. Contacts: Mandana Motahari– City Architect

D. Design Professional's Name: Urban Architecture Lab Inc.

E. Contact: Phillip Trigas for Bid and Construction Admin Phases.

F. The Project consists of the new Restroom Facility of two single occupancy toilet rooms, Tour bus

Station Canopy, Seating Area, site Furnishing, Landscape and Irrigation.

1.02 CONTRACT DESCRIPTION

A. Contract Type: A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in Document 00500 - Agreement.

1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERATIONS WORK

A. Scope of demolition and removal work is shown on drawings and specified in Section 02225.

B. Scope of alterations work is shown on drawings.

C. Plumbing: Alter existing system, keeping existing in operation.

D. Electrical Power and Lighting: Alter existing system and add new construction, keeping existing in operation.

E. Fire Suppression Sprinklers: Keeping existing in operation

F. Fire Alarm: Keeping existing in operation.

G. Owner will remove the following items before start of work:

1. Furniture 2. Miscellaneous Accessories 3. Personal Items

1.04 WORK BY OWNER

B. Owner will supply and install the following: 1. Security system.

2. CCTV/ WIFI Equipment

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Summary - 01 10 00 -2

1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES

A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.

B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: 1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others. 3. Work by Owner.

4. Use of site and premises by the public.

C. Pro vide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner:

1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open

during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily

altered.

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

D. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage.

E. Time Restrictions: 1. Limit work to weekdays, 8 a.m. to 6 p.m.

F. Utility Outages and Shutdown:

1. All utility shut-downs shall occur off-hours between 6 p.m. and 8 a.m. 2. Contractor to provide a 24-hour notice to owner’s representative for utility shut-downs.

1.06 WORK SEQUENCE

A. Coordinate construction schedule, phasing plan as required, and operations with Owner and

Architect.

1.07 SPECIFICATION SECTIONS APPLICABLE TO ALL CONTRACTS

A. Unless otherwise noted, all provisions of the sections listed below apply to all contracts. Specific items of work listed under individual contract descriptions constitute exceptions.

B. Section 01 21 00 - Allowances. C. Section 01 22 00 – Unit Price Measurements D. Section 01 23 00 - Alternatives. E. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. F. Section 01 42 00 - Reference Standards. G. Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. H. Section 01 65 00 – Project Storage and Handling I. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements. J. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Allowances - 01 21 00 -1

SECTION 01 21 00

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Cash allowances.

B. Contingency allowance.

C. Inspecting and testing allowances.

D. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures: Additional payment and modification procedures.

1.03 CASH ALLOWANCES

A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable trade discounts, less cost of delivery to site, less applicable taxes.

B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product delivery to site and handling at the site, including unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and finishing.

C. Design Professional Responsibilities: 1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products, suppliers, and

installers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. 3. Prepare Change Order.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Design Professional in selection of products, suppliers, and installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with

designated supplier and installer. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit

claims for transportation damage.

E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.04 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE – Not Used.

1.05 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES – Not Used.

1.06 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE

A. Allowance # 1 Include an allowance of $ 8,500.00 for custom made Kiosk (Ref. item: K-1, site Amenities schedule, sheet # LH-1.0) allowance to include fabrication, tax, transportation and installation. The allowance above does not include foundation work.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Allowances - 01 21 00 -1

B. Allowance # 2 Include an allowance of $ 4,500.00 for Trash Bins (Ref. item: TR-1, site Amenities - schedule, sheet # LH-1.0) allowance is for material only and does not include tax, delivery and installation.

C. Allowance # 3

Include an allowance of $ 6,500.00 to provide and install Access Control System Including 1 card key pad and 4 reader AMMAG controller (Reference Sheet # E-2.0) The above allowance does not include conduits and back boxes.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 – EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Unit Price Measurement - 01 22 13-1

SECTION 01 22 13

UNIT PRICE MEASUREMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. To provide adequate budget and bonding to cover items not precisely determined by the Owner prior

to bidding, state Unit Costs in the Bid as separate line items and as described in this Section.

B. Related work: 1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General

Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division l of these Specifications. 2. Other provisions concerning Unit Costs are stated in the General Conditions.

1.2 SPECIFIC UNIT PRICE

A. Indicate in the contract unit cost allowances for the following items:

1. This section identifies each Unit Cost and describes basic changes to the Work only when that

Unit Cost is made a part of the Work by specific provision in the Agreement.

2. Schedule of Unit Costs:

ITEM ESTIMATED

NO. DESCRIPTION QUANTITY UNIT

1 Remove and Replace Sidewalk at Existing Location of Sidewalk 1,100 SF

2 Remove and Replace Sidewalk at Existing Location of Parkway 5,060 SF

3 Remove and Replace Curb and Gutter 705 LF

4 Remove and Replace Driveway Approach 235 SF

5 Remove and Replace Curb Ramp with ADA Compliant Curb Ramp 3 LS

3. Except as otherwise specifically provided by the City, the Work described in Unit Costs shall be

completed with no increase in Contract Time. 4. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to accurately and

completely integrate the Unit Costs into the Work.

B. Unit Prices quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner’s- Option. Accepted Unit costs will be identified in the owner-Contractor Agreement.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Unit Price Measurement - 01 22 13-1

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Alternates - 01 23 00 -1

SECTION 01 23 00

ALTERNATIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Alternative submission procedures. B. Documentation of changes to Contract Sum and Contract Time.


A. Document 00200 - Instructions to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for alternatives.

B. Document 00433 - Supplement C - Alternatives: List of alternatives as supplement to Bid Form.

C. Document 00500 - Agreement: Incorporating monetary value of accepted alternatives. 1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATIVES

A. Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option. Accepted alternatives will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement.

B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternative.

1.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATIVES

A. Alternative No. 1: Alternative Item: Refer to key note#23, sheet# A-1.01 indicate a row of skylights at roof as base bid, provide a deductive alternate for only one skylight module per restroom (total of 2), refer to Roof plan on sheet# A-1.02

B. Alternative No. 2: Alternative Item: Refer to key note#1, sheet# A-1.12, base bid shall include painting of the interior of CMU walls, as an alternate cost provide large format porcelain tile as specified on the drawings.

C. Alternative No. 3: Alternative Item: Refer to keynotes # 4, 9 and 17 sheet# A-2.02, removal and replacement of curb and gutter, sidewalks and concrete driveway shall be an alternate cost item and shall be itemized in the bid. A unit cost matrix has been included in the bid form for cost break down per item.

C. Alternative No. 4: Alternative Item: Refer to keynotes # , sheet# A-, painting of the Edison yard wall facing the sidewalk shall be an alternate cost item.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Request for Information - 01 26 13 -1

SECTION 01 26 13

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes procedures for requesting information other than that shown in the

Contract Documents, and discusses conditions under which such requests will be considered.

1.02 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION

A. Assumption of prior knowledge:

1. Instructions to Bidders for this Work state requirements that, prior to submitting a bid, bidders become thoroughly familiar with the proposed Contract Documents and that they request and secure clarification of all matters on which there may be any question as to design intent.

2. Reasons for these requirements include the Owner's wish: a. That bidders have complete and adequate knowledge of the proposed Work in order to

propose a fair and proper bid price; b. To avoid unnecessary time-consuming and effort-consuming requests for information

during progress of the Work; and c. To discourage frivolous requests for information while encouraging acquisition of

complete familiarity with the Drawings, Specifications, and other Documents of the Contract.

B. However, the Owner and the Architect recognize that data may inadvertently have been omitted

from the Contract Documents or require clarification of alleged conflict of data, and the following procedures are established for requesting such data.

C. Procedures:

1. Prior to requesting information, conduct a thorough search of the Contract Documents and determine that the information is apparently missing from the Contract Documents or requires clarification of an alleged conflict of data.

2. Fill out a "Request for Information" form and deliver it to the Architect. 3. The Architect will conduct the necessary search. 4. Within five (5) calendar days, the Architect will respond to the Request for Information.

a. Should the information be missing, or require clarification, the Architect will respond by giving the proper information to the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Project Meetings - 01 31 19 -1

SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Work included: To enable orderly review during progress of the Work, and to provide for

systematic discussion of problems, the Construction Manager will conduct project meetings throughout the construction period.


Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 2. The Contractor's relations with his subcontractors and materials suppliers, and discussions

relative thereto, are the Contractor's responsibility and normally are not part of project meetings content.

1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Agenda items: To the maximum extent practicable, advise the Architect at least 24 hours in

advance of project meetings regarding items to be added to the agenda. B. Minutes: 1. The Construction Manager will compile minutes of each project meeting, and will furnish

required copies to the Contractor and required copies to the Owner. 2. Recipients of copies may make and distribute such other copies as they wish. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For those persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in project meetings,

provide required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon in the project meetings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (No products are required in this Section) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MEETING SCHEDULE A. Except as noted below for Preconstruction Meeting, project meetings will be held weekly, or as

designated by the Construction manager. B. Coordinate as necessary to establish mutually acceptable schedule for meetings. 3.02 MEETING LOCATION A. The Construction manager will establish meeting location. To the maximum extent practicable,

meetings will be held at the job site.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Project Meetings - 01 31 19 -2

3.03 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Preconstruction Meeting will be scheduled to be held within -- working days after the Owner has

issued the Notice to Proceed. 1. Provide attendance by authorized representatives of the Contractor and major

subcontractors. 2. The Architect will advise other interested parties, including the Owner, and request their

attendance. B. Minimum agenda: Data will be distributed and discussed on at least the following items: 1. Organizational arrangement of Contractor's forces and personnel, and those of

subcontractors, materials suppliers, Construction manager and Architect. 2. Channels and procedures for communications. 3. Construction schedule, including sequence of critical work. 4. Contract Documents, including distribution of required copies of original Documents and

revisions. 5. Processing of Shop Drawings and other data submitted to the Architect for review. 6. Processing of Bulletins, field decisions, and Change Orders. 7. Rules and regulations governing performance of the Work; and 8. Procedures for safety and first aid, security, quality control, housekeeping, and related

matters. 9. Record drawings and payment schedules.

3.04 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Attendance: 1. To the maximum extent practicable, assign the same person or persons to represent the

Contractor at project meetings throughout progress of the Work. 2. Subcontractors, materials suppliers, and others may be invited to attend those project

meetings in which their aspect of the Work is involved. B. Minimum agenda: 1. Review, revise as necessary, and approve minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review progress of the Work since last meeting, including status of submittals for approval. 3. Identify problems which impede planned progress. 4. Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule. 5. Complete other current business. C. Revisions to minutes: 1. Unless published minutes are challenged in writing prior to the next regularly scheduled

progress meeting, they will be accepted as properly stating the activities and decisions of the meeting.

2. Persons challenging published minutes shall reproduce and distribute copies of the challenge to all indicated recipients of the particular set of minutes.

3. Challenge to minutes shall be settled as priority portions of "old business" at the next regularly scheduled meeting.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Construction Progress Schedules - 01 32 16 - 1

SECTION 01 32 16

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. To assure adequate planning and execution of the Work so that the Work is completed

within the number of calendar days allowed in the Contract, and to assist the Architect in appraising the reasonableness of the proposed schedule and in evaluating progress of the Work, prepare and maintain the schedules and reports described in this Section.

B. Related work: 1. Requirements for progress schedule: Bid Package. 2. Construction period: Form of Agreement. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 23..

B. Preliminary analysis: Within ten calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit one digital file and four prints of a preliminary construction schedule prepared in accordance with Part 3 of this Section.

C. Construction schedule: Within 30 calendar days after the Contractor has received the

Owner's Notice to Proceed, submit one reproducible copy and four prints of a construction schedule prepared in accordance with Part 3 of this Section.

D. Periodic reports: On the first working day of each month following the submittal

described in Paragraph 1.2-C above, submit four prints of the construction schedule updated as described in Part 3 of this Section.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Employ a scheduler who is thoroughly trained and experienced in compiling construction

schedule data, and in preparing and issuing periodic reports as required below. B. Reliance upon the approved schedule: 1. The construction schedule as approved by the Architect and the Owner will be an

integral part of the Contract and will establish interim completion dates for the various activities under the Contract.

2. Should any activity not be completed within 15 days after the stated scheduled date, the Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to expedite completion of the activity by whatever means the Owner deems appropriate and necessary, without additional compensation to the Contractor.

3. Should any activity be 30 days or more behind schedule, the Owner shall have the right to perform the activity or have the activity performed by whatever method the Owner deems appropriate.

4. Costs incurred by the Owner and by the Architect in connection with expediting construction activity under this Article shall be reimbursed by the Contractor.

5. It is expressly understood and agreed that failure by the Owner to exercise the option either to order the Contractor to expedite an activity or to expedite the activity by other means shall not be considered to set a precedent for any other activities.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Construction Progress Schedules - 01 32 16 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION ANALYSIS

A. Graphically show by bar-chart, or other means acceptable to the Architect, the order and interdependence of all activities necessary to complete the Work, and the sequence in which each activity is to be accomplished, as planned by the Contractor and his project field superintendent in coordination with all subcontractors whose work is shown on the diagram.

B. Include, but do not necessarily limit indicated activities to: 1. Project mobilization; 2. Submittal and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Procurement of equipment and critical materials; 4. Fabrication of special material and equipment, and its installation and testing. 5. Final cleanup; 6. Final inspecting and testing; and 7. All activities by the Architect that effect progress, required dates for completion,

or both, for all and each part of the Work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY ANALYSIS A. Contents: 1. Show all activities of the Contractor under this Work for the period between

receipt of Notice to Proceed and submittal of construction schedule required under Paragraph 1.2-C above;

2. Show the Contractor's general approach to remainder of the Work; 3. Show cost of all activities scheduled for performance before submittal and

approval of the construction schedule. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. As required under Paragraph 1.2-D above, update the approved construction schedule. 1. Indicate "actual" progress in percent completion for each activity; 2. Provide written narrative summary of revisions causing delay in the program, and

an explanation of corrective actions taken or proposed. 3.03 REVISIONS A. Make only those revisions to approved construction schedule as are approved in

advance by the Architect.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Submittal & Substitutions - 01 33 23 -1

SUBMITTALS & SUBSTITUTIONS SCHEDULE FOR SUBMITTALS

01 33 23

Sh

op

Dra

win

gs

Sa

mp

les

Ma

nu

factu

rer

lite

ratu

re

Ma

teri

al L

ist

Te

sts

Division 4 – Masonry

042200 Concrete Unit Masonry X X X X X

Division 7 - Thermal, Moisture and Acoustical

076000 Flashing and Sheet Metal X X

079200 Sealant & Caulking X X X X

Division 8 - Doors and Windows

081100 Steel Doors and Frames X X X X X

083100 Access Doors and Panels X X X

086300 Metal – Framed Skylights X X X X X

086500 Canopy Glazing X X X X

087100 Door Hardware X X X

088100 Glass Glazing X X X X X

Division 9 – Finishes

092216 Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing X X X

092900 Gypsum Board Assemblies X X X X X

093000 Tiling X X X X X

099000 Painting and Coatings X X X X X

Division 10 – Specialties

102813 Toilet Accessories X X X X

Division 21, 22, 23 – Mechanical and Plumbing

211100 Fire Protection (Design/Build – Deferred Approval Item) X X X X

223000 Plumbing X X X X

230593 Air System Test & Balance X

233600 Air Terminals X X X

235000 HVAC Systems X X X X

Division 26 – Electrical

260000 Electrical X X X X X

Division 32 – Exterior Improvements

329443 Tree Grates X X X X X

329000 Planting X X X

329510 Planting X X X

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Quality Requirements - 01 40 00 -1

SECTION 01 40 00

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. References and standards.

B. Quality assurance submittals.

C. Mock-ups.

D. Control of installation.

E. Tolerances.

F. Testing and inspection services.

G. Manufacturers' field services.


A. Document 00700 - General Conditions: Inspections and approvals required by public authorities.

B. Section 01 21 00 - Allowances: Allowance for payment of testing services.

C. Section 01 33 23 – Submittal and Substitutions: Submittal procedures.

D. Section 01 42 00 - Reference Standards.

E. Section 01 65 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ASTM C 1021 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2001.

B. ASTM C 1077 - Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2005b.

C. ASTM C 1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry; 2006.

D. ASTM D 3740 - Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2004a.

E. ASTM E 329 - Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or Testing; 2005b.

F. ASTM E 543 - Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2004.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Testing Agency (Services retained by the owner): 1. Prior to start of Work, agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full

time registered Engineer and responsible officer will be published.


2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction

Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

B. Design Data: Submit for Design Professional's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Design Professional and to Contractor. 1. Include:

a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Design Professional, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test reports are submitted for Design Professional's knowledge as contract administrator or for the Owner, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Design Professional, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit

supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Design Professional.

E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Design Professional's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Design Professional for

information. 2. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Design Professional's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information

given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. 2. Data indicating inappropriate or unacceptable Work may be subject to action by Design

Professional or Owner.

1.05 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS

A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except


where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.

D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Design Professional before proceeding.

F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Design Professional shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.06 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES

A. Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform specified and other required testing.

B. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.

C. As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner or Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified testing.

D. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Contractor Employed Agency: 1. Testing agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543, ASTM C 1021,

ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. 2. Inspection agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in Project Location. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST

established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Design Professional before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.


3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Design Professional and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Design Professional before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. See individual specification sections for testing required.

B. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Design Professional and Contractor in

performance of services. 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Design Professional and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-

conformance of Work or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Design Professional. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be

used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to

manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Design Professional and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional

samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections

required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.


E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Design Professional. Payment for re testing will be charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price.

3.05 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES

A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Submit qualifications of observer to Design Professional 30 days in advance of required observations. 1. Observer subject to approval of Design Professional. 2. Observer subject to approval of Owner.

C. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.06 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Regulatory Requirements - 01 41 00 -1

SECTION 01 41 00

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section describes testing and inspecting to be provided by the Contractor. B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.

2. Requirements for testing may be described in various Sections of these Specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PAYMENT FOR TESTING

A. The Owner will pay for all testing and inspecting required under this Section of these Specifications, and to cover all testing and inspecting required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction. Testing and inspecting specifically requested by the Architect over and above those described above.

B. When tests requested by the Architect indicate noncompliance with the Contract

Documents, all testing and subsequent retesting occasioned by the noncompliance shall be performed by the same testing laboratory and the costs thereof shall be paid by the Contractor.

2.02 SPECIFIC TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Tests and inspections will be performed where required by governmental agencies having jurisdiction, required by provisions of the Contract Documents, and such other tests and inspections as are directed by the Architect.

B. Tests include, but are not necessarily limited to, those described in detail in Part 3 of this

Section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 TAKING SPECIMENS

A. Except as may be specifically otherwise approved by the Architect, have the testing laboratory secure and handle all samples and specimens for testing.

3.02 COOPERATION WITH TESTING LABORATORY

A. Provide access to the Work at all times and at all locations where the Work is in progress. Provide facilities for such access to enable the laboratory to perform its functions properly.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Regulatory Requirements - 01 41 00- 2

3.03 SOIL INSPECTING AND TESTING A. Make required inspections and tests including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Visually inspect on-site and imported fill and backfill, making such tests and retests as are necessary to determine compliance with the Contract requirements and suitability for the proposed purpose;

2. Make field density tests on samples from in-place material as required; 3. As pertinent, inspect and test the scarifying and recompacting of cleaned

subgrade; inspect the progress of excavating, filling, and grading; make 90% density tests at fills and backfills; and verify compliance with provisions of the Contract Documents and governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

B. Make and distribute necessary reports and certificates. 3.04 CONCRETE INSPECTING AND TESTING A. Portland cement:

1. Secure from the cement manufacturer Certificates of Compliance delivered directly to the concrete producer for further delivery directly to the testing laboratory.

2. Require the Certificates of Compliance to positively identify the cement as to production lot, bin or silo number, dating and routing of shipment, and compliance with the specified standards.

3. If so required by the Architect, promptly provide such other specific physical and chemical data as requested.

B. Aggregate:

1. Provide one test unless character of material changes, material is substituted, or additional test is requested by the Architect.

2. Sample from conveyor belts or batching gates at the ready-mix plant: a. Sieve analysis to determine compliance with specified standards and

grading; b. Specific gravity test for compliance with specified standards. C. Laboratory design mix:

1. After approval of aggregate, and whenever character or source of materials is changed, provide mix design in accordance with ACI 613.

2. Provide designs for all mixes prepared and signed by a registered California engineer.

D. Molded concrete cylinders:

1. Provide three test cylinders for each 115 cu m (150 cu yds), or fraction thereof, of each class of concrete of each day's placement.

2. Test one cylinder at seven days, one at 28 days, and one when so directed. 3. Report the mix, slump, gage, location of concrete in the structure, and test results. 4. Take specimens and make tests in accordance with the applicable ASTM

standard specifications. E. Core tests:

1. Provide only when specifically so directed by the Architect because of low cylinder test results.

2. Cut from locations directed by the Architect, securing in accordance with ASTM C42, and prepare and test in accordance with ASTM C39.

F. Placement inspections: 1. Provide continuous or other inspection of concrete if required by governmental

agencies having jurisdiction.


2. Throughout progress of concrete placement, make slump tests to verify conformance with specified slump.

3. Using all required personnel and equipment, throughout progress of concrete placement verify that finished concrete surfaces will have the level or slope that is required by the Contract Documents.

3.05 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT INSPECTING AND TESTING A. Prior to use, test all reinforcement steel bars for compliance with the specified standards. 1. Material identified by mill test reports, and certified by the testing laboratory, does

not require additional testing. 2. Require the supplier to furnish mill test reports to the testing laboratory for

certification. 3. Tag identified steel at the supplier's shop. 4. When steel arrives at the job site without such tags, test it as unidentified steel. B. Unidentified steel:

1. Have the testing laboratory select samples consisting of two pieces, each 450 mm (18") long, of each size.

2. Have the testing laboratory make one tensile test and one bend test for each 2250 kg (2-1/2 tons) or fraction thereof of each size of unidentified steel.

C. Provide continuous inspection for all welding of reinforcement steel. 3.06 STRUCTURAL STEEL INSPECTING AND TESTING A. Prior to use, test all structural steel for compliance with the specified standards. 1. Material identified by mill test reports, and certified by the testing laboratory, does

not require additional testing. 2. Require the supplier to furnish mill test reports to the laboratory for certification. 3. Tag identified steel at the supplier's shop. 4. When steel arrives at the job site without such tags, test it as unidentified steel. B. Unidentified steel:

1. Have testing laboratory make one tensile test and one bend test for each 4500 kg (five tons) or fraction thereof of each shape and size of unidentified structural steel.

C. Shop welding: 1. Provide qualified testing laboratory inspector. 2. On single pass welds, inspect after completion of welding and prior to painting. 3. On multiple pass welds, and on butt welds with cover pass on the back side,

provide continuous inspection. D. Field welding: Continuous inspection will be required. 3.07 ROOFING AND WATERPROOFING INSPECTING AND TESTING

A. Prior to start of membrane waterproofing and membrane roofing installation, conduct a job site meeting attended by representatives of the installing subcontractors, the Contractor's field superintendent, the testing laboratory inspector, the manufacturers representative and the Architect, to agree upon procedures to be followed.


B. Prior to start of installation, verify that materials at the job site comply with the specified standards, that the subcontractor is qualified to the extent specified, and that the installing personnel are fully informed as to procedures to be followed.

C. During installation, verify that materials are installed in strict accordance with the

manufacturers' recommendations as approved by the Architect.

D. When so directed by the Architect, make test cuts to verify conformance with the specified requirements.

3.08 WAIVER OF INSPECTION AND/OR TESTS

A. Specified inspections and/or tests may be waived only by the specific approval of the Architect.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Reference Standards - 01 42 00 -1

SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work included: 1. Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to codes and standards which

establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and reporting on the pertinent characteristics.

2. Where materials or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard, it is the Contractor's responsibility to provide materials and workmanship which meet or exceed the specifically named code or standard.

3. Proof: a. It is also the Contractor's responsibility, when so required by the Contract Documents

or by written request from the Architect, to deliver to the Architect all required proof that the materials or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specifically named code or standard.

b. Such proof shall be in the form requested by the Architect, and generally will be required to be copies of a certified report of tests conducted by a testing agency approved for that purpose by the Architect.


Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Sections of Division One of these Specifications.

2. Specific naming of codes or standards occurs on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. In procuring all items used in this Work, it is the Contractor's responsibility to verify the detailed

requirements of the specifically named codes and standards and to verify that the items procured for use in this Work meet or exceed the specified requirements.

B. Rejection of non-complying items:

1. The Architect reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the Work which fail to meet the specified minimum requirements.

2. The Architect further reserves the right, and without prejudice to other recourse the Architect may take, to accept non-complying items subject to an adjustment in the Contract Amount as approved by the Architect and the Owner.

C. Applicable reference standards include, but are not necessarily limited to, standards of agencies

and associations who may be referred to in the Specifications by the following abbreviations. 1. "AA" = Aluminum Association 2. "AABC" = Associated Air Balance Council 3. "AAMA" = American Architectural Manufacturers' Association 4. "AASHTO" = American Assoc. of State Highway and Transportation Officials 5. "ACI" = American Concrete Institute

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Reference Standards - 01 42 00 -2

6. "ADC" = Air Diffusion Council 7. "AGC" = Associated General Contractors of America 8. "AI" = Asphalt Institute 9. "AIA" = American Institute of Architects 10. "AISC" = American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 11. "AISE" = Association of Iron and Steel Engineers 12. "AISI" = American Iron and Steel Institute 13. "AITC" = American Institute of Timber Construction 14. "ANSI" = American National Standards Institute 15. "APA" = American Plywood Association 16. "API" = American Petroleum Institute 17. "ARI" = Air Cond. and Refrigeration Institute 18. "ASCE" = American Society of Civil Engineers 19. "ASHRAE" = American Institute of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers 20. "ASME" = American Society of Mechanical Engineers 21. "ASTM" = American Society for Testing and Materials 22. "AWI" = Architectural Woodwork Institute 23. "AWS" = American Welding Society 24. "AWWA" = American Water Works Association 25. "BIA" = Brick Institute of America 26. "BOCA" = Building Officials and Code Administrators, International 27. "CDA" = Copper Development Association 28. "CRSI" = Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 29. "CS" = "Commercial Standards" of the U. S. Department of Commerce Office of

Industry and Commerce Commodity Standards Division 30. "CSA/CAN" = Canadian Standards Association 31. "DOE" = United States Department of Energy 32. "DOT" = United States Department of Transportation 33. "FGMA" = Flat Glass Marketing Association 34. "NEMA" = National Electrical Manufacturers' Assoc. 35. "NFPA" = National Fire Protection Association 36. "PCI" = Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute 37. "SMACNA" = Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 38. "SSPC" = Steel Structures Painting Council 39. "TCA" = Tile Council of America, Inc. 40. "UL" = Underwriters Laboratory END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Temporary Construction - 01 53 00 -1

SECTION 01 53 00

TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Temporary telephone and facsimile service.

B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing.

C. Security requirements.

D. Vehicular access and parking.

E. Project identification sign.

F. Field offices.


A. Section 01525 - Field Offices.

B. Section 01550 - Vehicular Access and Parking.

C. Section 01565 - Security Measures.

D. Section 01585 - Project Signs.

1.03 TEMPROARY UTILITIES – NOT USED

1.04 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES – Not Used

1.05 BARRIERS

A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Provide protection for plants designated to remain. Replace damaged plants.

D. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.06 FENCING

A. Construction: Contractor's option.

B. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence.

C. Provide 6 foot (1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks.

1.07 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES

A. Contractor to provide barricades and temporary construction in order to provide access to the building during work on the exterior improvements of the building.

1.08 SECURITY - See Section 01 53 00

A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, existing facilities, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Temporary Construction - 01 53 00 -2

B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.

1.09 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING -

A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner.

B. For contractor’s parking, see ---------------------------

C. Do not allow vehicle parking on existing pavement.

1.10 WASTE REMOVAL

A. See Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management, for additional requirements.

B. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly condition.

C. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.

D. locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

1.11 PROJECT SIGNS -

1.12 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings.

B. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

1.13 FIELD OFFICES –

1.14 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS

A. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition.

B. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.


PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Product Storage & Handling Requirements - 01 66 00 -1

SECTION 01 66 00 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDELING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Protect products scheduled for use in the Work by means including, but not necessarily limited to, those described in this Section.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division l of these Specifications.

2. Additional procedures also may be prescribed in other Sections of these Specifications. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Include within the Contractor's quality assurance program such procedures as are required to assure full protection of work and materials.

1.03 MANUFACTURERS' RECOMMENDATIONS

A. Except as otherwise approved by the Architect, determines and comply with manufacturers' recommendations on product handling, storage, and protection.

1.04 PACKAGING

A. Deliver products to the job site in their manufacturer's original container, with labels intact and legible. 1. Maintain packaged materials with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. 2. Promptly remove damaged material and unsuitable items from the job site, and promptly replace

with material meeting the specified requirements, at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. The Architect may reject as non-complying such material and products that do not bear identification satisfactory to the Architect as to manufacturer, grade, quality, and other pertinent information.

1.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished surfaces, including jambs and soffits of openings used as passageways, through which equipment and materials are handled.

B. Provide protection for finished floor surfaces in traffic areas prior to allowing equipment or materials to

be moved over such surfaces.

C. Maintain finished surfaces clean, unmarred, and suitably protected until accepted by the Owner. 1.06 REPAIRS AND REPLACEMENTS

A. In event of damage, promptly make replacements and repairs to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Additional time required to secure replacements and to make repairs will not be considered by the

Architect to justify an extension in the Contract Time of Completion.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Execution and Closeout Requirements - 01 70 00 -1

SECTION 01 70 00

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures.

B. Requirements for alterations work, including selective demolition, except removal, disposal, and/or remediation of hazardous materials and toxic substances.

C. Pre-installation meetings.

D. Cutting and patching.

E. Surveying for laying out the work.

F. Cleaning and protection.

G. Starting of systems and equipment.

H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel.

I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.


A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials.

B. Section 01 33 32 – Submittal and Substitutions: Submittals procedures.

C. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.

D. Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary exterior enclosures.

E. Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary interior partitions.

F. Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Utilities: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating facilities.

G. Section 01 74 00 - Waste Management: Additional procedures for trash/waste removal, recycling, salvage, and reuse.

H. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds.

I. Section 02 41 13 – Selective Site Demolition: Demolition of whole structures and parts thereof; site utility demolition.

J. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those sections. 2. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 23 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and

locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.


C. Demolition Plan: Submit demolition plan as specified by OSHA and local authorities. 1. Indicate extent of demolition, removal sequence, bracing and shoring, and location and

construction of barricades and fences. 2. Identify demolition firm and submit qualifications. 3. Include a summary of safety procedures.

D. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Date and time work will be executed.

E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required.

B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in Project Location and acceptable to Design Professional. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

C. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in Project Location.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

E. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage

from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or

clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly

apply corrective measures.

F. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.

G. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work.


H. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. See Section 01 10 00 for occupancy-related requirements.

B. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

C. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

D. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

E. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

F. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

G. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01 33 23.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or mis-fabrication.


E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Notify Design Professional four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Design Professional, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK – Not Used

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.

B. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.


C. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

D. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

E. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

F. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

G. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

H. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

I. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

J. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed

or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.

C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-site; do not burn or bury.

3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK

A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.

H. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.09 STARTING SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.


B. Notify Design Professional and owner seven days prior to start-up of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions which may cause damage.

D. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer.

E. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.

G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of Substantial Completion.

B. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.

C. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within six months.

D. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and instruction of owner personnel.

E. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owner's personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.

G. The amount of time required for instruction on each item of equipment and system is that specified in individual sections.

3.11 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.

B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing HVAC systems: See Section 15950 and 01400.

3.12 FINAL CLEANING

A. Owner will provide comprehensive cleaning after final acceptance.

B. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment. 1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy.

C. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.

D. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.

E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface and material being cleaned.

F. Clean filters of operating equipment.

G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.


H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

J. Clean Owner-occupied areas of work.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Field Engineering - 01 71 23 -1

SECTION 01 71 23

FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide such field engineering services as are required for proper completion of the Work

including, but not necessarily limited to: 1. Establishing and maintaining lines and levels; 2. Structural design of shores, forms, and similar items provided by the Contractor as part of

his means and methods of construction. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 23.

B. Upon request of the Architect, submit: 1. Data demonstrating qualifications of persons proposed to be engaged for field engineering

services. 2. Documentation verifying accuracy of field engineering work. 3. Certification, signed by the Contractor's retained field engineer, certifying that elevations

and locations of improvements are in conformance or nonconformance with requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.04 PROCEDURES

A. In addition to procedures directed by the Contractor for proper performance of the Contractor's responsibilities:

1. Locate and protect control points before starting work on the site. 2. Preserve permanent reference points during progress of the Work. 3. Do not change or relocate reference points or items of the Work without specific approval

from the Architect. 4. Promptly advise the Architect when a reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires

relocation because of other changes in the Work. a. Upon direction of the Architect, require the field engineer to replace reference stakes

or markers. b. Locate such replacements according to the original survey control.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Bracing & Anchoring - 01 73 23 -1

SECTION 01 73 23

BRACING AND ANCHORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide bracing and anchoring for all cabinets, casework, wall-hung and ceiling-hung equipment

and specialties, floor-supported and floor-attached equipment, conveying systems, mechanical

equipment, electrical equipment, and all other non-portable items essential to operation and use

of the facility including items furnished by the Contractor and items furnished by the Owner but

installed by the Contractor.

B. For Owner-Furnished-Contractor-Installed items, the Owner will furnish such additional

information as is required by the Contractor for preparation of Shop Drawings and calculations.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Where design of bracing and anchoring is completely shown on the Drawings, no submittal is

required.

B. Where design of bracing and anchoring is not completely shown on the Drawings, and for

equipment and/or items shown as "deferred," prepare and submit the following in accordance with

the approved Contract Schedule:

1. Shop Drawings clearly defining the proposed method for bracing and anchoring the pertinent

item or items, and interface of the bracing and anchoring with adjacent materials;

2. Calculations, prepared, signed, and stamped by a registered civil or structural engineer,

employed and paid by the Contractor, supporting the proposed bracing and anchoring

design and demonstrating its adequacy.

C. Secure the Architect's approval and approval of all governmental agencies having jurisdiction

prior to fabrication and installation.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary

crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper

performance of the work of this Section.

B. In addition to complying with pertinent requirements of governmental agencies having jurisdiction,

brace and anchor to resist horizontal forces acting in any direction using the following criteria:

1. Light fixtures 100% of weight;

2. Fixed equipment 50% of operating weight;

3. Emergency power and communication 75% of operating weight;

4. Flexibly-mounted equipment Use two times the above values;

5. Simultaneous vertical force Use 1/3 times the horizontal force.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide materials, equipment, labor, and all other items as needed to comply with requirements of

the governmental agencies having jurisdiction.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Bracing & Anchoring - 01 73 23 -2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 FABRICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate and install bracing and anchoring in accordance with the approved design and all other

requirements of the Contract.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Cutting and Patching - 01 73 29-1

SECTION 01 73 29

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section establishes general requirements pertaining to cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to:

1. Make the several parts fit properly; 2. Uncover work to provide for installing, inspecting, or both, of ill-timed work; 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents; and 4. Remove and replace defective work.

B. Related work:

1. In addition to other requirements specified, upon the Architect's request uncover work to provide for inspection by the Architect of covered work, and remove samples of installed materials for testing.

2. Do not cut or alter work performed under separate contracts without the Architect's written permission.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Request for Architect's consent:

1. Prior to cutting which effects structural safety, submit written request to the Architect for permission to proceed with cutting.

2. Should conditions of the Work, or schedule, indicate a required change of materials or methods for cutting and patching, so notify the Architect and secure his written permission and the required Change Order prior to proceeding.

B. Notices to the Architect:

1. Prior to cutting and patching performed pursuant to the Architect's instructions, submit cost estimate to the Architect. Secure the Architect's approval of cost estimates and type of reimbursement before proceeding with cutting and patching.

2. Submit written notice to the Architect designating the time the Work will be uncovered, to provide for the Architect's observation.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. For replacement of items removed, use materials complying with pertinent Sections of these Specifications.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Cutting and Patching - 01 73 29-2

2.02 PAYMENT FOR COSTS

A. The Owner will reimburse the Contractor for cutting and patching performed pursuant to a written Change Order, after claim for such reimbursement is submitted by the Contractor. Perform other cutting and patching needed to comply with the Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Inspection:

1. Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting, excavating, patching, and backfilling.

2. After uncovering the work, inspect conditions affecting installation of new work.

B. Discrepancies: 1. If uncovered conditions are not as anticipated, immediately notify the Architect

and secure needed directions. 2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION PRIOR TO CUTTING

A. Provide required protection including, but not necessarily limited to, shoring, bracing, and

support to maintain structural integrity of the Work.

3.03 PERFORMANCE

A. Perform required excavating and backfilling as required under pertinent other Sections of these Specifications.

1. Perform cutting and demolition by methods which will prevent damage to other portions of the Work and provide proper surfaces to receive installation of repair and new work.

2. Perform fitting and adjusting of products to provide finished installation complying with the specified tolerances and finishes.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Clearing and Waste Management - 01 74 00 -1

SECTION 01 74 00

CLEARING AND WASTE MANAGEMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner requires that this project generate the least amount of trash and waste possible.

B. Employ processes that ensure the generation of as little waste as possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

C. Minimize trash/waste disposal in landfills; reuse, salvage, or recycle as much waste as economically feasible.

D. Owner may decide to pay for additional recycling, salvage, and/or reuse based on Landfill Alternatives Proposal specified below.

E. Required Recycling, Salvage, and Reuse: The following may not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration: 1. Aluminum and plastic beverage containers. 2. Corrugated cardboard. 3. Wood pallets. 4. Clean dimensional wood: May be used as blocking or furring. 5. Land clearing debris, including brush, branches, logs, and stumps: See Section 02230 for

use options. 6. Concrete: May be crushed and used as riprap, aggregate, sub-base material, or fill. 7. Bricks: May be used on project if whole, or crushed and used as landscape cover, sub-

base material, or fill. 8. Concrete masonry units: May be used on project if whole, or crushed and used as sub-

base material or fill. 9. Precast concrete panels: May be used for erosion control or landscape features. 10. Asphalt paving: May be recycled into paving for project. 11. Metals, including packaging banding, metal studs, sheet metal, structural steel, piping,

reinforcing bars, door frames, and other items made of steel, iron, galvanized steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

12. Glass. 13. Gypsum drywall and plaster. 14. Plastic buckets. 15. Carpet, carpet cushion, carpet tile, and carpet remnants, both new and removed: DuPont

(http://flooring.dupont.com) and Interface (www.interfaceinc.com) conduct reclamation programs.

16. Asphalt roofing shingles. 17. Paint. 18. Plastic sheeting. 19. Rigid foam insulation. 20. Vinyl siding. 21. Windows, doors, and door hardware. 22. Plumbing fixtures. 23. Mechanical and electrical equipment. 24. Fluorescent lamps (light bulbs). 25. Acoustical ceiling tile and panels.

F. Owner has authorized a waste-management firm to deal with waste generated from this project. The contractor shall contract with selected firm for bins’ provisions and disposal. Subject firm will manage all recyclable materials.


G. Methods of trash/waste disposal that are not acceptable are: 1. Burning on the project site. 2. Burying on the project site. 3. Dumping or burying on other property, public or private. 4. Other illegal dumping or burying. 5. Incineration, either on- or off-site.

H. Regulatory Requirements: Contractor is responsible for knowing and complying with regulatory requirements, including but not limited to Federal, State and local requirements, pertaining to legal disposal of all construction and demolition waste materials.


A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: List of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner.

B. Section 01 31 19 - Administrative Requirements: Additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation.

C. Section 01 53 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.

D. Section 01 65 00 – Storage and Protection: Waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling.

E. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Clean: Untreated and unpainted; not contaminated with oils, solvents, caulk, or the like. B. Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid wastes typically including building materials,

packaging, trash, debris, and rubble resulting from construction, remodeling, repair and demolition operations.

C. Hazardous: Exhibiting the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity or reactivity.

D. Nonhazardous: Exhibiting none of the characteristics of hazardous substances, i.e., ignitibility, corrosivity, toxicity, or reactivity.

E. Nontoxic: Neither immediately poisonous to humans nor poisonous after a long period of exposure.

F. Recyclable: The ability of a product or material to be recovered at the end of its life cycle and remanufactured into a new product for reuse by others.

G. Recycle: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for remanufacture into a new product for reuse by others.

H. Recycling: The process of sorting, cleansing, treating and reconstituting solid waste and other discarded materials for the purpose of using the altered form. Recycling does not include burning, incinerating, or thermally destroying waste.

I. Return: To give back reusable items or unused products to vendors for credit.

J. Reuse: To reuse a construction waste material in some manner on the project site.

K. Salvage: To remove a waste material from the project site to another site for resale or reuse by others.

L. Sediment: Soil and other debris that has been eroded and transported by storm or well production run-off water.


M. Source Separation: The act of keeping different types of waste materials separate beginning from the first time they become waste.

N. Toxic: Poisonous to humans either immediately or after a long period of exposure.

O. Trash: Any product or material unable to be reused, returned, recycled, or salvaged.

P. Waste: Extra material or material that has reached the end of its useful life in its intended use. Waste includes salvageable, returnable, recyclable, and reusable material.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 33 23 – Submittal and Substitutions, for submittal procedures.

B. Once Owner has determined which of the landfill alternatives addressed in the Proposal above are acceptable, prepare and submit Waste Management Plan; submit within 10 calendar days after notification by Design Professional.

C. Submit Waste Management Plan within 10 calendar days after receipt of Notice of Award of Bid, or prior to any trash or waste removal, whichever occurs sooner; submit projection of all trash and waste that will require disposal and alternatives to landfilling.

D. Waste Management Plan: Include the following information: 1. Analysis of the trash and waste projected to be generated during the entire project

construction cycle, including types and quantities. 2. Landfill Options: The name, address, and telephone number of the landfill(s) where

trash/waste will be disposed of, the applicable landfill tipping fee(s), and the projected cost of disposing of all project trash/waste in the landfill(s).

3. Landfill Alternatives: List all waste materials that will be diverted from landfills by reuse, salvage, or recycling. a. List each material proposed to be salvaged, reused, or recycled. b. List the local market for each material. c. State the estimated net cost, versus landfill disposal.

4. Meetings: Describe regular meetings to be held to address waste prevention, reduction, recycling, salvage, reuse, and disposal.

5. Materials Handling Procedures: Describe the means by which materials to be diverted

from landfills will be protected from contamination and prepared for acceptance by designated facilities; include separation procedures for recyclables, storage, and packaging.

6. Transportation: Identify the destination and means of transportation of materials to be recycled; i.e. whether materials will be site-separated and self-hauled to designated centers, or whether mixed materials will be collected by a waste hauler.

7. Recycling Incentives: Describe procedures required to obtain credits, rebates, or similar incentives.

E. Waste Disposal Reports: Submit at specified intervals, with details of quantities of trash and waste, means of disposal or reuse, and costs; show both totals to date and since last report. 1. Submit updated Report with each Application for Progress Payment; failure to submit

Report will delay payment. 2. Submit Report on a form acceptable to Owner. 3. Landfill Disposal: Include the following information:

a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project

disposed of in landfills. c. State the identity of landfills, total amount of tipping fees paid to landfill, and total

disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and

cost.


4. Incinerator Disposal: Include the following information: a. Identification of material. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), of trash/waste material from the project

delivered to incinerators. c. State the identity of incinerators, total amount of fees paid to incinerator, and total

disposal cost. d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and

cost. 5. Recycled and Salvaged Materials: Include the following information for each:

a. Identification of material, including those retrieved by installer for use on other projects.

b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters), date removed from the project site, and receiving party.

c. Transportation cost, amount paid or received for the material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling each material.

d. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices as evidence of quantity and cost.

e. Certification by receiving party that materials will not be disposed of in landfills or by incineration.

6. Material Reused on Project: Include the following information for each: a. Identification of material and how it was used in the project. b. Amount, in tons or cubic yards (cubic meters). c. Include weight tickets as evidence of quantity.

7. Other Disposal Methods: Include information similar to that described above, as appropriate to disposal method.

F. Recycling Incentive Programs: 1. Where revenue accrues to Contractor, submit copies of documentation required to qualify

for incentive. 2. Where revenue accrues to Owner, submit any additional documentation required by Owner

in addition to information provided in periodic Waste Disposal Report.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. See Section 01 33 23 – Submittal and Substitutions for substitution submission procedures.

B. For each proposed product substitution, submit the following information in addition to requirements specified in Section 01 33 23: 1. Relative amount of waste produced, compared to specified product. 2. Cost savings on waste disposal, compared to specified product, to be deducted from the

Contract Sum. 3. Proposed disposal method for waste product. 4. Markets for recycled waste product.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 WASTE MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. See Section 01 10 00 for list of items to be salvaged from the existing building for relocation in project or for Owner.

B. See Section 01 31 19 for additional requirements for project meetings, reports, submittal procedures, and project documentation.

C. See Section 01 74 00 for additional requirements related to trash/waste collection and removal facilities and services.


D. See Section 01 74 00 for waste prevention requirements related to delivery, storage, and handling.

E. See Section 01 74 00 for trash/waste prevention procedures related to demolition, cutting and patching, installation, protection, and cleaning.

3.02 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Manager: Designate an on-site person or persons responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan.

B. Communication: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to job site foreman, each subcontractor, Owner, and Design Professional.

C. Instruction: Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse, and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the project.

D. Meetings: Discuss trash/waste management goals and issues at project meetings. 1. Pre-bid meeting. 2. Pre-construction meeting. 3. Regular job-site meetings. 4. Job safety meetings.

E. Facilities: Provide specific facilities for separation and storage of materials for recycling, salvage, reuse, return, and trash disposal, for use by all contractors and installers. 1. As a minimum, provide:

a. Separate area for storage of materials to be reused on-site, such as wood cut-offs for blocking.

b. Separate dumpsters for each category of recyclable. c. Recycling bins at worker lunch area.

2. Provide containers as required. 3. Provide temporary enclosures around piles of separated materials to be recycled or

salvaged. 4. Provide materials for barriers and enclosures that are nonhazardous, recyclable, or

reusable to the maximum extent possible; reuse project construction waste materials if possible.

5. Locate enclosures out of the way of construction traffic. 6. Provide adequate space for pick-up and delivery and convenience to subcontractors. 7. If an enclosed area is not provided, clearly lay out and label a specific area on-site. 8. Keep recycling and trash/waste bin areas neat and clean and clearly marked in order to

avoid contamination of materials.

F. Hazardous Wastes: Separate, store, and dispose of hazardous wastes according to applicable regulations.

G. Recycling: Separate, store, protect, and handle at the site identified recyclable waste products in order to prevent contamination of materials and to maximize recyclability of identified materials. Arrange for timely pickups from the site or deliveries to recycling facility in order to prevent contamination of recyclable materials.

H. Reuse of Materials On-Site: Set aside, sort, and protect separated products in preparation for reuse.

I. Salvage: Set aside, sort, and protect products to be salvaged for reuse off-site.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Closseout Submittalss - 01 78 00 -1

SECTION 01 78 00

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Project Record Documents.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data.

C. Warranties and bonds.


A. Section 00 72 00 - General Conditions: Performance bond and labor and material payment bonds, warranty, and correction of work.

B. Section 01 33 23 – Submittals and Substitutions: Submittals procedures, shop drawings, product data, and samples.

C. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

D. Individual Product Sections: Specific requirements for operation and maintenance data.

E. Individual Product Sections: Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Design Professional with claim for final Application for Payment.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Submit two copies of preliminary draft or proposed formats and outlines of contents before

start of Work. Design Professional will review draft and return one copy with comments. 2. For equipment, or component parts of equipment put into service during construction and

operated by Owner, submit completed documents within ten days after acceptance. 3. Submit 1 copy of completed documents 15 days prior to final inspection. This copy will be

reviewed and returned after final inspection, with Design Professional comments. Revise content of all document sets as required prior to final submission.

4. Submit two sets of revised final documents in final form within 10 days after final inspection.

C. Warranties and Bonds: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with

Owner's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance. 2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final

Application for Payment. 3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion,

submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda.


4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by Owner.

C. Conversion of schematic layouts: 1. In some cases on the Drawings, arrangements of conduits, circuits, piping, ducts, and

similar items, are shown schematically and are not intended to portray precise physical layout.

a. Final physical arrangement is determined by the Contractor, subject to the Architect’s approval.

b. However, design of future modifications of the facility may require accurate information as to the final physical layout of items that are shown only schematically on the Drawings.

D. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

E. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

F. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

G. Final project record documents.

1. The purpose of the final Project Record Documents is to provide factual information regarding all aspects of the Work, both concealed and visible, to enable future modification of the Work to proceed without lengthy and expensive site measurement, investigation, and examination.

2. Approval of recorded data prior to transfer: a. Following receipt of the electronic file (CADD – latest version), and prior to start of

transfer of recorded data thereto, secure the Architect’s approval of all recorded data. b. Make required revisions. 3. Transfer of data to Drawings: a. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the

corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required. b. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other Drawings a full description of

changes made during construction, and the actual location of items in 3.01-C above. d. Call attention to each entry by drawing a “cloud” around the area or areas affected. d. Make changes neatly, consistently, and with the proper media to assure longevity

and clear reproduction. 4. Transfer of data to other Documents: a. If the Documents other than Drawings have been kept clean during progress of the

Work, and if entries thereon have been orderly to the approval of the Architect, the job set of these Documents other than Drawings will be accepted as final Record Documents.

b. If any such Document is not so approved by the Architect, secure a new copy of that Document from the Architect at the Architect’s usual charge for reproduction and handling, and carefully transfer the change data to the new copy to the approval of the Architect.

5. Review and submittal: a. Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents to the Architect. b. Participate in review meetings as required. c. make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record Documents to

the Architect. H. Changes subsequent to acceptance:

1. The Contractor ahs no responsibility for recording changes in the Work subsequent to Final Completion, except for changes resulting from work performed under Warranty.


3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Drawings: Supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use Project Record Documents as maintenance drawings.

D. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR MATERIALS AND FINISHES

A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Moisture protection and weather-exposed products: Include product data listing applicable reference standards, chemical composition, and details of installation. Provide recommendations for inspections, maintenance, and repair.

D. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.

E. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

3.04 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. For Each Item of Equipment and Each System: 1. Description of unit or system, and component parts. 2. Identify function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. 3. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests. 4. Complete nomenclature and model number of replaceable parts.

B. Panelboard Circuit Directories: Provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications; typed.

C. Include color coded wiring diagrams as installed.

D. Operating Procedures: Include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.

E. Maintenance Requirements: Include routine procedures and guide for preventative maintenance and trouble shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

F. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

G. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

H. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

I. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

J. Provide control diagrams by controls manufacturer as installed.

K. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with color coded piping diagrams as installed.


L. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

M. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

N. Include test and balancing reports.

O. Additional Requirements: As specified in individual product specification sections.

3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare instructions and data by personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products.

B. Prepare data in the form of an instructional manual.

C. Binders: Commercial quality, 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 280 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers; 2 inch (50 mm) maximum ring size. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings.

D. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS; identify title of Project; identify subject matter of contents.

E. Provide tabbed dividers for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

F. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data on 24 pound paper. G. Drawings: Provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to

size of text pages.

H. Arrange content by systems under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents of this Project Manual.

I. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each product or system description identified, in three parts as follows: 1. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Design

Professional, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. 2. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by

specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. Parts list for each component. d. Operating instructions. e. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. f. Maintenance instructions for special finishes, including recommended cleaning

methods and materials, and special precautions identifying detrimental agents.

3. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: a. Shop drawings and product data. b. Air and water balance reports. c. Certificates. d. Photocopies of warranties and bonds.

J. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed dividers and space for insertion of data.

K. Table of Contents: Provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Design Professional, Consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.


3.06 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

E. Include originals of each in operation and maintenance manuals, indexed separately on Table of Contents.

F. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

G. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

H. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

I. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Warranties and Bonds - 01 78 33 -2

SECTION 01 78 33

WARRANTIES AND BONDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Summary B. Form of Warranty C. Submittal Requirements D. Form of Submittal E. Time of Submittals F. Submittals Required

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

Section 01 70 00 – Execution & Closeout Requirements Sections 02 00 00 through 26 00 00

1.03 INCLUDED:

A. Summary

1. Warranties between Contractor and manufacturers and between Contractor and suppliers shall not affect warranties between Contractor and the Owner.

2. In addition to other requirements specified: a. Compile specified service and maintenance contracts. b. Co-execute submittals when so specified.

c. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. d. Submit to the Architect for review and transmittal to the Owner.

B. Form of Warranty

1. Submit two (2) originals of the warranty form provided as Attachment “A”, typed on the Contractor’s letterhead, for the entire Work or special warranties, typed on Subcontractor’s letterhead and notarized, when required by a Specification Section. All work in place shall be guaranteed, at a minimum for one (1) year after date of Substantial Completion.

C. Submittal Requirements

1. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers, and Contractors.

2. Number of Original Signed Copies Required: Two (2) each. 3. Table of Contents: Neatly typed; in orderly sequence. Provide complete information for each

item; include: a. Product or work item. b. Firm (Subcontractor or supplier) name with name of principal, address, and telephone

number. c. Scope of work or service covered. d. Date of beginning of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. e. Duration of warranty, bond, or service and maintenance contract. f. Provide the following information for the Owner.

(1) Proper procedure in case of failure (2) Circumstances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. g. Contractors’ name, name of responsible principal, address, and telephone number.

D. Form of Submittal

1. Prepare in duplicate packets: four (4) complete Submittals; two (2) originals and two (2) copies.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Warranties and Bonds - 01 78 33 -3

2. Format: a. Size: 8 ½ “ x 11" sheets punched for three-ring binder. Fold larger sheets to fit into binders. b. Cover: Identify each packet with typed or printed title, “WARRANTIES AND BONDS.” List:

(1) Title of Project. (2) Name of Contractor.

3. Binders: Commercial quality three-ring, with durable and cleanable plastic covers.

E. Time of Submittals

1. Within thirty (30) days after date of Substantial Completion, prior to final request for payment.

2. For items of work, where acceptance is delayed more than thirty (30) days beyond the date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten (10) days after Final Completion, listing the date of Final Completion as the start of the warranty period.

F. Submittals Required

1. Submit special warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts specified in the individual Sections.

City of Beverly Hills – Library 1st & 2nd Floor Renovation Warranties and Bonds - 01 78 33 -3

SECTION 01 78 33

ATTACHMENT “A” (SAMPLE FORM OF WARRANTY - SUBMIT ON CONTRACTOR/SUBCONTRACTOR LETTERHEAD)

Library 1st & 2nd floor Renovation

BEVERLY HILLS, CALIFORNIA

WRITTEN WARRANTY FOR

(Entire work, in the case of the Contractor, or a specific Specification Section, in the case of a Subcontractor.)

We hereby warrant _ _

(Description of work, equipment, product, etc.)

Which we have provided in __

(Description of location:)

has been completed in accordance with the Specification Section stated above and the Contract Documents requirements and is hereby warranted for a period of

(Indicate overall duration)

commencing on and ending on . (Start date) (End date)

We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any other adjacent work which may be displaced or damaged by so doing, which may prove to be either patently defective in its workmanship or materials within the period of time prescribed by law or latently defective in its workmanship or materials within the period of time prescribed by law from date established in the Certificate of Substantial Completion of the above-named structure, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse or neglect excepted.

We also agree to repair any damages resulting from such defects.

In the event of our failure to comply with above-mentioned conditions within a reasonable time but in no case longer than fourteen (14) calendar days after being notified in writing by the Owner, we collectively and separately do hereby authorize the Owner to have said defective work and damages repaired or replaced and made good at our expense and will honor and pay the costs and charges therefor upon demand.

SIGNED

(Subcontractor’s name, address, license number, and date of signing)

or

SIGNED

(Subcontractor’s name, address, license number, and date of signing)

COUNTERSIGNED

(Contractor’s name, address, license number, and date of signing

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Subsurface Investigation - 02 30 00 -1

SECTION 02 30 00

SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes soils investigation at the site, and use of data resulting from that investigation.

1.02 SOILS INVESTIGATION REPORT

A. General:

1. A soils investigation report has been prepared for the site of this Work by the soil investigation engineer selected by the Owner.

2. The soils investigation report may be obtained from the City office of Project Administration.

B. Use of data: 1. This report was obtained only for the Architect's use in design and is not a part of the Contract

Documents. 2. The report is available for bidders' information, but is not a warranty of subsurface conditions. 3. Bidders should visit the site and acquaint themselves with existing conditions. 4. Prior to bidding, bidders may make their own subsurface investigations to satisfy themselves

as to site and subsurface conditions, but such investigations may be performed only under time schedules and arrangements approved in advance by the Architect.


A. A construction soil engineer will be retained by the Owner to observe performance of work in

connection with excavating, trenching, filling, backfilling, and grading, and to perform compaction tests.

B. Readjust work performed that does not meet technical or design requirements, but make no

deviation from the Contract Documents without specific and written approval from the Architect.

END OF SECTION


Selective Site Demolition - 02 41 13 -1

SECTION 02 41 13 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. In accordance with pertinent provisions of this Section, carefully demolish and remove from

the site those items scheduled to be so demolished and removed.

Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited

to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division I of

these Specifications.


A Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the

necessary crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods

needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 65 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

(No products are required in this Section)

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not

proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.2 DEMOLITION

A By careful study of the Contract Documents, determine the location and extent of

selective demolition to be performed.

B. In company with the Architect, v i s i t the site and verify the extent and location of

selective demolition required. 1. Carefully identify limits of selective demolition. 2. Mark interface surfaces as required to enable workmen also to identify items

to be removed and items to be left in place intact.

C. Prepare and follow an organized plan for demolition and removal of items.

1. Shut off, cap, re-route as shown or as required and otherwise protect existing public utility lines in accordance with the requirements of the public agency or utility having

jurisdiction.


Selective Site Demolition - 02 41 13 -2

2. Review Hazardous Material Survey report, prior to demolition activities which would

disturb ACMs and LCSs a licensed abatement removal contractor should remove the

hazardous materials.

3. Completely remove Items scheduled to be so demolished and removed, leaving

surfaces clean, solid, and ready to receive new materials specified elsewhere.

4. In all activities, comply with pertinent regulations of governmental agencies

having jurisdiction.

D. Demolished material shall be considered to be property of the Contractor and shall

be completely removed from the job site.

E. Use means necessary to prevent dust becoming a nuisance to the public, to neighbors,

and to other work being performed on or near the site.

3.3 REPLACEMENTS

A. In the event of demolition of items not so scheduled to be demolished, promptly replace

such items to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Cast-in-Place Concrete - 03 30 00 -1


03 30 00

CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing Drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Material certificates.

B. Material test reports.

C. Formwork Shop Drawings: Prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer, detailing fabrication, assembly, and support of formwork.

D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified tolerances.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform preconstruction testing on concrete mixtures.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1.



1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

B. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE, GENERAL

A. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301. 2. ACI 117.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60, deformed.

B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed.

C. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded-wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Materials:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II. 2. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260/C 260M.

D. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.



3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.

E. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd when dry.

C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.

B. Cementitious Materials: Use fly ash, pozzolan, slag cement, and silica fume as needed to reduce the total amount of portland cement, which would otherwise be used, by not less than 40 percent.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and -retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low

humidity, or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial

slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a w/c ratio below 0.50.

2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Normal-Weight Concrete:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: As indicated at 28 days. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.50. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.

2.8 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.



1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

3.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections are completed.

B. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete is placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.



3.6 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view>.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view.

C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formed-finished as-cast concrete where indicated:

1. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal, moisten concrete surfaces and rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing a uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other than that created by the rubbing process.

2. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply grout of a consistency of thick paint to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Mix 1 part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding admixture and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Scrub grout into voids and remove excess grout. When grout whitens, rub surface with clean burlap and keep surface damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours.

3. Cork-Floated Finish: Wet concrete surfaces and apply a stiff grout. Mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part fine sand with a 1:1 mixture of bonding agent and water. Add white portland cement in amounts determined by trial patches, so color of dry grout matches adjacent surfaces. Compress grout into voids by grinding surface. In a swirling motion, finish surface with a cork float.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.7 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Scratch Finish: While still plastic, texture concrete surface that has been screeded and bull-floated or darbied. Use stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes to produce a profile amplitude of 1/4 inch (6 mm) in one direction.

1. Apply scratch finish to surfaces [indicated] [and] [to receive concrete floor toppings] [to receive mortar setting beds for bonded cementitious floor finishes] <Insert locations>.

C. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power-driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.



1. Apply float finish to surfaces [indicated] [to receive trowel finish] [and] [to be covered with fluid-applied or sheet waterproofing, built-up or membrane roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo] <Insert locations>.

D. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [exposed to view] [or] [to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system] <Insert locations>.

2. Finish and measure surface, so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed [1/4 inch (6 mm)] [3/16 inch (4.8 mm)] [1/8 inch (3.2 mm)].

E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces [indicated] [where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset method]. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.

F. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.8 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for remainder of curing period.

D. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover

for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape.



3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.9 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.

3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Concrete Unit Masonry - 04 22 00 -1

04 22 00

CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Concrete masonry units. 2. Decorative concrete masonry units. 3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units. 4. Steel reinforcing bars.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).

B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.



B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending, lap lengths, and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315.

C. Samples: For each type and color of the following:

1. Exposed CMUs.


A. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product. For masonry units, include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91/C 91M for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.


B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNIT MASONRY, GENERAL

A. Masonry Standard: Comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6, except as modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.

B. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated. Do not use units where such defects are exposed in the completed Work.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with requirements for fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated.

1. Where fire-resistance-rated construction is indicated, units shall be listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with integral water repellent for exposed units and where indicated.

C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.

1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength as indicated.

2. Density Classification: Medium weight.

2.3 CONCRETE LINTELS

A. Concrete Lintels: ASTM C 1623, matching CMUs in color, texture, and density classification; and with reinforcing bars indicated. Provide lintels with net-area compressive strength not less than that of CMUs.

2.4 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated.

B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91/C 91M.


C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979/C 979M. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar.

D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 2. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce

required mortar color.

E. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

F. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs containing integral water repellent from same manufacturer.

H. Water: Potable.

2.5 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.

B. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells and to hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.

2.6 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie made from 0.25-inch-diameter, hot-dip galvanized-steel wire.

2.7 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:


1. Fabricate metal drip edges from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches into wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees[ and hemmed].

2. Fabricate metal sealant stops from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 1/4 inch to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

3. Fabricate metal expansion-joint strips from [stainless steel] [copper] to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use[ one of] the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: [5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m)] [7-oz./sq. ft. (2-kg/sq. m)] copper sheet bonded between two layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

2. Rubberized-Asphalt Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than [0.030 inch (0.76 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)].


3. Butyl Rubber Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than [0.030 inch (0.76 mm)] [0.040 inch (1.02 mm)].


4. Elastomeric Thermoplastic Flashing: Composite flashing product consisting of a polyester-reinforced ethylene interpolymer alloy.


5. EPDM Flashing: Sheet flashing product made from ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer, complying with ASTM D 4637/D 4637M, 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick.


C. Single-Wythe CMU Flashing System: System of CMU cell flashing pans and interlocking CMU web covers made from UV-resistant, high-density polyethylene. Cell flashing pans have integral weep spouts designed to be built into mortar bed joints and that extend into the cell to prevent clogging with mortar.

1. <Double click here to find, evaluate, and insert list of manufacturers and products.>

D. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=10021&mf=04&src=wd












E. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.8 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise indicated.

B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, use Type N.

D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.

3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:

1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation, do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

2. For location of elements in plan, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch.

3. For location of elements in elevation, do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2-inch total.

B. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls, do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.


2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2-inch (12-mm) maximum.

C. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch or minus 1/4 inch.

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch.

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less-than-nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.

E. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below, and rod mortar or grout into core.

F. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:

1. Bed face shells in mortar and make head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. Bed webs in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. Bed webs in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. Fully bed entire units, including areas under cells, at starting course on footings where

cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid CMUs with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.


D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 FLASHING

A. General: Install embedded flashing at ledges and other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape[ as recommended by flashing manufacturer].

2. At lintels, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall, and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install single-wythe CMU flashing system in bed joints of CMU walls where indicated to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install CMU cell pans with upturned edges located below face shells and webs of CMUs above and with weep spouts aligned with face of wall. Install CMU web covers so that they cover upturned edges of CMU cell pans at CMU webs and extend from face shell to face shell.

3.6 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and that of other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in TMS 602/ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.



A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Special inspections according to TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5.

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar.

2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement.

3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

F. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.

G. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test mortar for compressive strength.

H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.8 PARGING

A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in two uniform coats to a total thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat, and scarify first coat to ensure full bond to subsequent coat.

B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.

C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.

3.9 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Clean concrete masonry by applicable cleaning methods indicated in NCMA TEK 8-4A.


3.10 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil-contaminated sand, waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed.

1. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade.

B. Masonry Waste Recycling: Return broken CMUs not used as fill to manufacturer for recycling.

C. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as described above or recycled, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Structural Steel Framing - 05 12 00 -1

05 12 00

STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Structural steel. 2. Grout.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 05 12 13 "Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing" for additional requirements for architecturally exposed structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator and testing agency.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

D. Source quality-control reports.

E. Field quality-control and special inspection reports.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD or is City of Los Angeles Certified.

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, Category CSE or is a CSE-qualified company with CSE certification or has a minimum of 5 years documented local experience in erection of structural steel for similar projects.


C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. or is City of Los Angeles Certified and RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using

ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade 50.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500/A 500M, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or Type S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with plain finish.

B. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436, Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325, compressible-washer type with

mechanically deposited zinc coating finish.

C. Unthreaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable.

1. Configuration: Straight]. 2. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

D. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

E. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M.


1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating, ASTM B 695, Class 50.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."] [Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."] [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, [Type I] [Type II], zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, nonasphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and nonstaining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," and to AISC 360.

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces of high-strength bolted, slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces. 6. Surfaces enclosed in interior construction.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."


3. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform shop tests and inspections.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test shop-bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Visually inspect shop-welded connections according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Baseplates Bearing Plates and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.


4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

2. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs, back gouge, and grind steel smooth. 3. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that maintain true alignment of axes

without exceeding tolerances in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges," for mill material.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Verify structural-steel materials and inspect steel frame joint details. 2. Verify weld materials and inspect welds. 3. Verify connection materials and inspect high-strength bolted connections.

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Bolted Connections: Inspect and test bolted connections according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: Visually inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, test and inspect field welds according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished

weld. Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration are not accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel Framing - 05 12 13-1

SECTION 05 12 13 ARCHITECTURALLY EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes architecturally exposed structural-steel (AESS).

1. Requirements in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing" also apply to AESS.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. AESS: Structural steel designated as "architecturally exposed structural steel" or "AESS"

in the Contract Documents.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Tour Bus Station West Third Street,

Beverly Hill California, 90210.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of AESS components.[ Shop Drawings for structural

steel may be used for AESS provided items of AESS are specifically identified and requirements below are met for AESS.] 1. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field

welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain.[ Indicate grinding, finish, and profile of welds.]

2. Indicate type, size, and length of bolts, distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify pretensioned and slip-critical, high-strength bolted connections.[ Indicate orientation of bolt heads.]

B. Samples: Submit Samples of AESS to set quality standards for exposed welds. 1. Two steel plates, 3/8 by 8 by 4 inches (9.5 by 200 by 100 mm), with long edges

joined by a groove weld[ and with weld ground smooth]. 2. Steel plate, 3/8 by 8 by 8 inches (9.5 by 200 by 200 mm), with one end of a short

length of rectangular steel tube, 4 by 6 by 3/8 inches (100 by 150 by 9.5 mm), welded to plate with a continuous fillet weld[ and with weld ground smooth and blended].


A. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified fabricator that participates in the AISC Quality

Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Plant, Category STD, or is accredited by the IAS Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC 172).

B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who participates in the AISC Quality Certification Program and is designated an AISC-Certified Erector, [Category ACSE] [Category CSE].

C. Shop-Painting Applicators: Qualified according to AISC's Sophisticated Paint [Endorsement P1] [Endorsement P2] [Endorsement P3] or SSPC-QP 3, "Standard Procedure for Evaluating Qualifications of Shop Painting Applicators."


A. Use special care in handling to prevent twisting, warping, nicking, and other damage.

Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.


1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.


A. Field Measurements: Where AESS is indicated to fit against other construction, verify

actual dimensions by field measurements before fabrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, round-head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: [Plain] [Mechanically deposited zinc coating].

B. Corrosion-Resisting (Weathering Steel), Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 3, round-head assemblies, consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

2.2 FILLER

A. Filler: Polyester filler intended for use in repairing dents in automobile bodies.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123

"Interior Painting."] [Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."] [Section 099113 "Exterior Painting," Section 099123 "Interior Painting," and Section 099600 "High-Performance Coatings."]

B. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: MPI#25. C. Galvanizing Repair Paint: [MPI#18, MPI#19, or SSPC-Paint 20] [ASTM A 780/A 780M].

2.4 FABRICATION

A. In addition to special care used to handle and fabricate AESS, comply with the following:

1. Fabricate with exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust, scale, and roughness.

2. Grind sheared, punched, and flame-cut edges of AESS to provide smooth surfaces and edges.

3. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of mill marks. 4. Fabricate AESS with exposed surfaces free of seams to maximum extent possible. 5. Remove blemishes by filling or grinding or by welding and grinding, before cleaning,

treating, and shop priming. 6. Fabricate with piece marks fully hidden in the completed structure or made with

media that permits full removal after erection. 7. Fabricate AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that [is] [is not]

designated AESS. 8. Seal-weld open ends of hollow structural sections with 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) closure

plates. B. Curved Members: Fabricate indicated members to curved shape by rolling to final shape

in fabrication shop. 1. Distortion of webs, stems, outstanding flanges, and legs of angles shall not be visible

from a distance of 20 feet (6 m) under any lighting conditions. 2. Tolerances for walls of hollow steel sections after rolling shall be approximately 1/2

inch (13 mm). C. Coping, Blocking, and Joint Gaps: Maintain uniform gaps of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) with a

tolerance of 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).


D. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, [mechanically thermal cut, ]or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

E. Cleaning Corrosion-Resisting Structural Steel: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

F. Holes: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel and for other work to pass through steel members. 1. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to steel surfaces.[ Do not thermally cut bolt

holes or enlarge holes by burning.] 2. Baseplate Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch holes perpendicular to

steel surfaces. 3. Weld threaded nuts to framing and other specialty items indicated to receive other

work.

2.5 SHOP CONNECTIONS A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification

for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical].

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M[ and AWS D1.8/D1.8M] for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work, and comply with the following: 1. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods that will maintain true alignment of

axes without exceeding specified tolerances. 2. Use weld sizes, fabrication sequence, and equipment for AESS that limit distortions

to allowable tolerances. 3. Provide continuous, sealed welds at angle to gusset-plate connections and similar

locations where AESS is exposed to weather. 4. Provide continuous welds of uniform size and profile where AESS is welded. 5. Grind butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16

inch, minus zero inch (plus 1.5 mm, minus zero mm). 6. Make butt and groove welds flush to adjacent surfaces within tolerance of plus 1/16

inch, minus zero inch (plus 1.5 mm, minus zero mm). Do not grind unless required for clearances or for fitting other components, or unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

7. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth. 8. At locations where welding on the far side of an exposed connection of AESS occurs,

grind distortions and marking of the steel to a smooth profile aligned with adjacent material.

9. Make fillet welds oversize and grind to uniform profile with smooth face and transition.

10. Make fillet welds of uniform size and profile with exposed face smooth and slightly concave. Do not grind unless directed to correct unacceptable work.

2.6 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel

according to ASTM A 123/A 123M. 1. Do not quench or apply post-galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint

adhesion. 2. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to

remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. 3. Galvanize [lintels] <Insert description> attached to structural-steel frame and

located in exterior walls. 2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.


3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation[ for Nongalvanized Steel]: 1. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, "Brush-off Blast Cleaning." 3. SSPC-SP 14/NACE No. 8, "Industrial Blast Cleaning." 4. SSPC-SP 11, "Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal." 5. SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." 6. SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning."

C. Preparing Galvanized Steel for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean steel of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

D. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces

and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other

embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide temporary shores, guys, braces, and other supports during erection to keep

AESS secure, plumb, and in alignment. 1. If possible, locate welded tabs for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling

where they will be concealed from view in the completed Work.

3.3 ERECTION

A. Set AESS accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360. 1. Erect AESS to the tolerances specified in AISC 303 for steel that [is] [is not] designated AESS.

B. Do not use thermal cutting during erection[ unless approved by Architect. Finish thermally cut sections within smoothness limits in AWS D1.1/D1.1M].

3.4 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for

Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified. 1. Joint Type: [Snug tightened] [Pretensioned] [Slip critical]. 2. Orient bolt heads [as indicated on Drawings] [in same direction for each

connection and to maximum extent possible in same direction for similar connections].

B. Weld Connections: Comply with requirements in "Weld Connections" Paragraph in "Shop Connections" Article. 1. Remove backing bars or runoff tabs; back-gouge and grind steel smooth. 2. Remove erection bolts, fill holes, and grind smooth. 3. Fill weld access holes and grind smooth.


3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting

agency to inspect AESS as specified in Section 051200 "Structural Steel Framing." The testing agency is not responsible for enforcing requirements relating to aesthetic effect.

B. Architect will observe AESS in place to determine acceptability relating to aesthetic effect.

3.6 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove welded tabs that were used for attaching temporary bracing and safety cabling

and that are exposed to view in the completed Work. Grind steel smooth. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and

repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

END OF SECTION 05 12 13

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Steel Decking - 05 31 00 -1

05 31 00

STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roof deck.


A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Include layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.


A. Welding certificates.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of steel deck.

C. Evaluation reports.

D. Field quality-control reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3/D1.3M, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOF DECK

A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following:

1. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 G90 zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated.


4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.

C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Flat Sump Plates: Single-piece steel sheet, 0.0747 inch thick, of same material and finish as deck. For drains, cut holes in the field.

G. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780/A 780M.

H. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section.

B. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

C. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

D. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

E. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

F. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

G. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld flanges to top of deck. Space welds not more than 12 inches apart with at least one weld at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld.


H. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Cold-Formed Metal Framing - 05 40 00 -1

SECTION 05 40 00

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 2. Ceiling joist framing. B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for masonry shelf angles and connections. 2. Division 9 Section "Non-Load Bearing Steel Framing" for nonload-bearing met-

al-stud framing and ceiling suspension systems. 3. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies" for interior non-load-

bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed fram-

ing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold-formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming.

B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indi-

cated. B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independ-

ent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. C. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the follow-

ing complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Power-actuated anchors. 3. Mechanical fasteners. 4. Vertical deflection clips. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.

E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to the Building Department.

F. Certification by manufacturers that products supplied meet or exceed requirements of applicable referenced CBC Standards which may be different from the ASTM or other standard on which they are based.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal

framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.


B. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, ductility, and galvanized-coating thickness.

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E548.

D. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel," and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance- rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per UBC Standard 7-1 (based on ASTM E119-88) by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Re-

sistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Di- rectory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.

F. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold- Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing:

1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections." G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with require-

ments in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."


A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during

delivery, storage, and handling. B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to

avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cold-formed metal

framing by one of the following: 1. Dietrich Industries, Inc. 2. Clark Western Building System, Inc. 3. CEMCO. 4. Current members of Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA). 5. Or equal

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A653/A653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as

follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance (Grade 33 for 18 gauge or lighter;

Grade 50 for 16 gauge or heavier). 2. Coating: G60.

2.3 NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING (EXTERIOR OR INTERIOR)

A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated,

punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Drawings.


B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings (min. 18 ga.). 2. Flange Width: 1½ inch, unless noted otherwise.

C. Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:. 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings (min. 18 ga.). 2. Flange Width: 2 inches.

D. Double Deflection Tracks: Manufacturer's double, deep-leg, U-shaped steel tracks, consisting of nested inner and outer tracks; unpunched, with unstiffened flanges.

1. Outer Track: Of web depth to allow free vertical movement of inner track, with flanges designed to support horizontal and lateral loads, and as follows:

a. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings (min. 16 ga.) b. Flange Width: 2 inches.

2. Inner Track: Of web depth indicated, and as follows: a. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on drawings (min. 18 ga.). b. Flange Width: 2-1/2 inches.

E. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard head or bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web. Mechanical attachment to structure and screw attachment to stud web using step-bushings to permit frictionless vertical move-

ment. The vertical deflection connection products shall have valid ICC ES Report complying with ICC Acceptance Criteria AC 261. See Drawings for size and gauge of vertical deflection clips.

F. Drift Clips: Manufacturer’s standard bypass or head clips, capable of isolating wall stud from upward and downward vertical displacement and lateral drift of primary structure, having a valid ICC ES Report complying with ICC Acceptance Criteria AC261. Mechani- cal attachment to structure and screw attachment to stud web using step-bushing to permit frictionless vertical movement. See Drawings for size and gauge of Drift Clips.

2.4 CEILING JOIST FRAMING

A. Steel Ceiling Joists: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths in-

dicated, unpunched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C955, and as follows: 1. Minimum Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings (0.0428 inch min.) 2. Flange Width: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Section Properties: As indicated on Drawings.

2.5 FRAMING ACCESSORIES

A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing

members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (50 ksi for 16 gauge or heavier). B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless oth-

erwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates.

2.6 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS


A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A36/A36M, as modified by UBC Standard 22-1, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A123.

B. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed, bolts and carbon-steel nuts; and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A153/A153M, Class C.

C. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard else-

where.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I; and clean, natural sand,

ASTM C404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration.

C. Nonmetallic, Nonshrink Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and

with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding. Wire tying of framing

members is not permitted. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.

4. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appear-

ance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with

screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

5. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting, or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch

from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials.

2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square tolerance of 1/8 inch.


PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with re-

quirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Pro- ceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach continuous angles, supplemen-

tary framing, or tracks to structural members indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials.

B. After applying sprayed fire-resistive materials, remove only as much of these materials as needed to complete installation of cold-formed framing without reducing thickness of fire- resistive materials below that are required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Pro- tect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

C. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction.


A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be

field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C1007, unless more stringent re-

quirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting

structure. 1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even,

true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch.

D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as

standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appear-

ance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with

screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads.

E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members.

F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.

G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. In- dependently frame both sides of joints.

H. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work.

I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings.

J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:


1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of

sheathing or other finishing materials.


A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quali-

ty-control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements.


A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated

and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing. Paint framing surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces.

C. Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30 days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air- infiltration barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied.

E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to Manufacturer and Installer that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Completion.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Cold Fluid-Applied Waterproofing - 07 14 16 -1

SECTION 07 14 16 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING


A. Section includes:

Provide a complete polyurethane waterproofing membrane system including all applicable sealants and elastomeric flashings needed to prevent water penetration at locations indicated.


Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340. B. Product data:

1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified

requirements; 3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of

the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when reviewed by

Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.

5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for verification.



crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. Applicator qualifications: 1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types

specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope and complexity.

2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation.

C. Convene a pre-installation job-site conference three weeks prior to commencing work of this Section: 1. Secure attendance by Architect, Contractor, applicator, and authorized representatives of

the membrane system manufacturer and interfacing trades. 2. Examine Drawings and Specifications affecting work of this Section, verify all conditions,

review installation procedures, and coordinate scheduling with interfacing portions of the Work.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use.

B. Maintain the products in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to ensure fitness of material when installed.

C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01620.


1.05 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS

A. General: 1. Provide applicator with surfaces that are broom clean, dry, sound and free of voids,

bugholes, rockpockets, honeycombs, protrusions, excessive roughness, foreign matter, frost, ice and other contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of the waterproofing membrane system.

2. Using suitable abrasive methods, remove residue of form release, curing compound, chemical retarders and other surface treatments, laitance, mortar smear, sawcutting residue, mill scale, rust, loose material and other contaminants from concrete, masonry and ferrous metal surfaces to receive the work of this Section.

B. Concrete: Where work of this Section will be applied to concrete, provide surfaces that are smooth with finish equal to one that is light steel troweled followed by a fine hair broom.

C. Plywood: Where work of this Section will be applied to plywood, provide exterior grade plywood, 5/8" thick minimum, with A-side up, fastened with ring-shank nails.

D. Decks: 1. Slope deck surfaces to drains that have flanges at membrane level which are flush with

deck surfaces. 2. Rigidly install pipe, vents and other surface protrusions, properly flash them, and cover to

prevent entry of membrane materials. E. Metal flashings: Where metal flashings are substrate to waterproofing membrane, set the

flashings in continuous bedding bead of urethane sealant; install sealant S-bead between metal laps and mechanically fasten to substrate along leading edges at every 4" on center, staggered linearly, to lay flat without fishmouths.

F. Joints: Configuration shall be consistent with this Section and with all other requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against defective

materials and workmanship executed for the following periods following date of completion. Warrant that installed waterproofing membrane system shall be free of defects including adhesive failure, cohesive failure, and waterproofing failure resulting from substrate cracking up to 1/16 inch. 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering materials for five year period; 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship for two year period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide a complete fluid applied elastomeric waterproofing membrane system designed for

concealed building components subject to hydrostatic head that is polyurethane, coal-tar free and complies with ASTM C 836: 1. Acceptable product:

a. TREMproof 250 GC; Tremco Inc. b. or prior approved equal

2.02 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: As recommended by waterproofing membrane system manufacturer; B. Joint backing: Closed-cell, polyethylene rod as recommended by membrane manufacturer; C. Reinforcing fabric: Woven fiberglass scrim cloth;

D. Elastomeric sheet flashing: 1/16 inch thick by 12 inch wide uncured neoprene sheeting; E. Elastomeric transition flashing to above-grade: polyurethane liquid-applied coating system with

ultraviolet protective topcoat.


1. Acceptable product: a. Vulkem 350/351; Tremco Inc.

F. Joint Treatment:

1. Acceptable product: a. Dymeric 240FC; Tremco Inc. b. TREMproof 250GCT; Tremco Inc. c. or prior approved equal

G. Protection course: As recommended by waterproofing membrane manufacturer.

1. Acceptable product for walls/slabs: a. Protection Mat; Tremco Inc.

H. Prefabricated Composite Drainage: Two-part prefabricated composite drainage material

consisting of a formed polystyrene core covered on one side with filter fabric. 1. For backfilled walls less than 20 feet in height, a composite drainage mat with non-woven

polypropylene filter fabric, 9 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 10,800 lbs/ft² compressive strength. Acceptable product: a. Tremdrain; Tremco Inc.

2. For backfilled walls 20 feet or greater in height, a composite drainage mat with non-woven

polypropylene filter fabric, 16 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 15,000 lbs/ft² compressive strength. Acceptable product: a. Tremdrain 1000; Tremco Inc.

3. For slabs receiving concrete topping and for planters, a composite drainage mat with woven

monofilament filter fabric, 18 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 21,000 lbs/ft² compressive strength. Acceptable products: a. Tremdrain 2000; Tremco Inc.

4. For slabs receiving pavers, a composite drainage mat with non-woven polypropylene filter

fabric, 9 gpm/ft flow capacity per unit width and 30,000 lbs/ft² compressive strength. Acceptable product: a. Tremdrain S; Tremco Inc.

5. For water collection and high profile section for water flow around the perimeter of the structure, a drainage composite with non-woven needle-punched polypropylene filter fabric, a transition section to couple with adjoining drainage mat, high profile flow capacity of 100 gpm and fitted with compatible factory-molded universal tees, universal outlets and 12” corner guards. Acceptable product: a. TREMDrain Total-Drain; Tremco Inc.

2.03 OTHER MATERIALS

A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper

installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the membrane system manufacturer as compatible, subject to review of the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of

those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be

performed. 1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements;


2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect; 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface preparation and detailing procedures to be in accord with waterproof membrane system

manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Clean all deck surfaces to receive membrane system in accord with manufacturer's instructions; vacuum clean or blow clean with oil-free compressed air all surfaces to receive sealants, detailing materials or membranes immediately prior to installation.

C. Rout, clean, prepare and detail surface cracks in accord with manufacturer's instructions; install backer rod where required.

D. Clean metal surfaces to bright metal by wire brushing or mechanical etching; scuff-sand lead flashing and plastic surfaces.

E. Prime surfaces in accord with manufacturer's instructions. F. Install 1/4" diameter backer rod into corner of all horizontal-to-vertical junctures subject to

movement and cover with 1" detail cant of approved sealant; install 1" detail cants at projections, curbs and other horizontal-to-vertical junctures.

G. Install detail coats, joint and crack treatments, elastomeric flashing and reinforcing fabric in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

H. Allow detail applications to cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to general application of membrane.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. General: Install waterproofing system in accord with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions as applies to the Work except where more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Grid deck surfaces to assure proper coverage rates and verify membrane wet-film mil

thickness with gauges as work progresses. 2. Retain empty product containers during course of work to aid in determining whether

completed membrane complies with required average dry-film thickness. B. Verify proper dry condition of substrate using method recommended by membrane system

manufacturer; perform adhesion checks prior to general application of membrane system using field adhesion test method recommended by manufacturer.

C. Mask off adjoining surfaces not to receive membrane system. D. Wipe clean all detail coats with white rags wetted with Xylene solvent; do not saturate detail

coat.

E. Apply membrane uniformly and allow to cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. Feather terminating edge when entire area cannot be completed in one day; clean area 6" wide

along terminating edge of membrane with Xylene solvent on clean white rags prior to startup on next working day; use interlaminary primer per manufacturer's instructions as needed; overlap existing work by 6" with new work.

G. Flood test: Follow ASTM D 5957. Plug drains on deck surfaces and use sand bags or other means to restrict runoff. Flood deck with water to depth of 2" (50 mm) and allow to stand at least 48 hours.

H. Install protection course over cured membrane in accord with manufacturer's instructions. I. Install drainage material in accord with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEAN-UP

A. Promptly remove primer or membrane system material from adjacent surfaces with MEK, Toluene or Xylene; leave work area in broom clean condition.

B. Prohibit traffic over completed work and protect against work overhead until protection course is installed; protect from damage until protected beneath overlaying work.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Water Repellants - 07 19 00 -1

SECTION 07 19 00

WATER REPELLENT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Water-repellent coating to exterior concrete masonry units surfaces.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. AQMD – Local Air Quality Management District Regulations

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data including details of product description, tests performed, limitations to coating,

cautionary procedures required during application and chemical properties, including

percentage of solids.

B. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

C. Provide qualification data as required by paragraph under Quality Assurance.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of water-repellent coatings with 5 years

minimum experience.

B. Applicator: 5 years experience in the application of the specified product and approved by the

manufacturer.

C. Field sample:

1. Apply coating to maximum 4 square feet vertical or horizontal area of surface.

2. Do not proceed with full application until sample has been subjected to water application

and approved by Architect.

1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not apply coating when surface temperature is lower than 50 degrees F or higher than 100

degrees F.

B. Comply with AQMD regulations.

1. Water repellents less than 400 grams per liter.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranty specified in the article shall not deprive Owner of other

rights Owner may have under other provisions of Contract Documents and shall be in addition

to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of

Contract Documents.

1. Special Warranty: Submit written warranty, executed by applicator and water repellent

manufacturer, covering materials and labor, agreeing to repair or replace materials that fail

to provide water repellency within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include

deterioration or failure of coating due to unusual weather phenomena, failure of prepared

and treated substrate, formation of new joints and cracks in excess of 1/16 inch wide, fire,

vandalism, or abuse by maintenance equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Water Repellants - 07 19 00 -2

2.01 MATERIAL CHARACTERISTICS

A. Self-emulsifying water repellent concentrate for dilution with fresh water at jobsite. Solvent-free

blend of silanes and oligomeric alkoxysiloxanes mixes easily with water, with following

minimum characteristics:

1. Form: Liquid

2. Color: Clear

3. Specific Gravity: 0.96

4. Active Substance: Microemulsion concentrate of silanes and oligomeric alkyl

alkoxysiloxanes.

5. Solids: 100% concentrate

6. VOC: Maximum VOC content 100 grams/liter.

7. Flash point 69°F (in concentrate) (140°F @ 1:9 dilution) (145°F @ 1:14 dilution) ASTM D

3278

B. Provide water repellent, recommended and / or approved by Masonry Unit

Manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.

B. Verify cracks and mortar-joint holes, bee holes are mortared.

C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescense, oil, or other matter

detrimental to application of coating.

D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose particles and foreign matter.

B. Remove oil or foreign substance with chemical solvent that will not affect coating.

C. Scrub and rinse surfaces with water and let dry completely.

D. Protect adjacent surfaces not scheduled to receive coating.

E. If applied on unscheduled surfaces, remove immediately by approved method.

F. Protect landscaping, property and vehicles.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Delay work until masonry mortar substrate is cured minimum of 60 days, or as acceptable to

coating manufacturer.

B. Concrete surfaces: Cured.

C. Apply coating in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions by airless spray to provide

continuous uniform coat.

D. Coatings:

1. Apply multiple coatings recommended by manufacturer for specific porosity of surface

material, minimum two coats. Apply prepared solution within 8 hours of preparation.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Concrete Slab Vapor Emission Treatment - 07 26 00 -1

SECTION 07 26 00

CONCRETE SLAB VAPOR EMISSIONS TREATMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES:

A. Spray-applied concrete sealer system.

B. Install Vapor Emission Treatment Systems where tests reveal presence of more than acceptable moisture level in accordance with Test Method ASTM F1869 or ASTM F2170. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03300, Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Vapor emissions floor treatment shall reduce vapor emissions from on-grade slabs to

levels satisfactory to resilient flooring manufacturer’s requirements and warranties.

B. Vapor emission floor treatment shall prevent negative side moisture migration through

concrete floor and shall allow for all types of flooring surface treatment systems.

C. Vapor emission floor treatment shall be alkali-neutralizing and shall penetrate into

concrete materials and chemically form protective crystalline barrier between surface.

Inner barrier so formed shall not be affected by ultraviolet light, abrasion and chemicals

and shall permanently seal and waterproof concrete against harmful effects of water

intrusion, freeze-thaw cycle damage, de-icing salts and chloride migration.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data describing physical and performance characteristics.

B. Manufacturer’s written installation instructions.

C. Manufacturer’s certificate indicating applicator is accepted installer.

D. Moisture vapor emission test results. Indicate environmental conditions, installation

procedures used, deficiencies and corrective actions taken for filler, vapor emissions’

coating and membrane.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Sealer/Hardener/Vapor Barrier compound, with minimum of 5 years documented

experience to control moisture vapor emission, having 34 percent solid content,

compatible with all flooring material, adhesives, bond breakers and overlayments.

Complying with ASTM C-309, ASTM C1315. Surface treatment applied on cured existing

slabs receiving resilient flooring, sheet vinyl and vinyl composition tile, rubber tile, wood

flooring, carpet, epoxy flooring.


A. Applicator: Company approved and certified by vapor emission floor treatment

manufacturer.

B. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Materials used in formulation of product shall

conform to all local, state, and federal air-quality and environmental control standards.

C. Pre-installation Conference:

1. Pre-installation meeting: Schedule before installing concrete floor slabs.

2. Required attendees: Contractor’s representative, Architect’s representative, Owner’s

representative, Manufacturer’s representative, Subcontractor, Installer.

3. Convene before installation of concrete.

4. Advise Contractor of all Warranty requirements.


1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original sealed containers, clearly marked with manufacturer’s name

and brand name.

B. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Submit under provisions of Division 01, General Requirements.

B. Provide 15-year full-system warranty issued to the Owner of the facility covering all labor

and materials needed to replace all floor covering that fails due to concrete moisture vapor

emission and moisture-borne contaminates such as alkalinity.

1. Issue a certificate of insurance in amount of Two Million Dollars ($2,000,000.00)

C. Include all costs for replacement of failed flooring material installed over moisture seal

membrane, cracks, joints and holes.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Vapor Emission Floor Treatment: Silicate-based or synthetic solution to penetrate on-grade concrete floor surfaces to form protective crystalline or polymer restrictive moisture barrier. B. Accessory Materials: As recommended by manufacturer, or intended application.


3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Manufacturer’s representative shall be onsite to document and oversee the entire

installation process.

B. Verify surfaces are dry and free of dirt and contaminates.

C. Verify moisture tests have been conducted per ASTM F1869 or ASTM F2170.

D. Verify existing concrete conditions are suitable to receive the work of this Section.

E. Repair concrete where required according to manufacturer’s recommendations.

F. Do not begin application until unsuitable conditions have been corrected, and control joints

have been sawcut. Sawcut of control joints after installation of treatment will not be

accepted. Tool joints where indicated prior to installation of treatment.

G. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare surface by removal of laitance, grease, adhesives, unapproved patching

compounds and foreign matter. Use mechanical means (scarifying or bead blasting)

where required for existing slabs.

B. Thoroughly clean all cracks. Apply to structurally sound concrete surfaces, free of voids and cracks. If needed, apply cementitious patch or approved epoxy filler to any voids or cracks. Groove out all cracks/control joints and fill with an approved patching compound. C. Clean expansion joints and control joints as required. C. Maintain building temperature above 65 degrees Fahrenheit for a period of 48 hours prior to start of installation of base coat.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply the products according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Manufacturer technician will be onsite the day of the concrete pour at the beginning of the

work to install or train in application, document and return on every application thereafter

to verify that proper procedures are followed.

C. Apply Concrete Surface Treatment / Sealer / Hardener / Curing Compound after calcium

chloride test and subsequent results have been performed [the day of the concrete pour


or] and as soon as harsh weather permits, prior to any other chemical treatments for

concrete slabs either on grade, below grade or above grade receiving resilient flooring

such as sheet vinyl, vinyl composition tile, rubber, wood flooring, carpet, epoxy coatings

and overlays.

D. Apply materials to the concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are complete,

control joints are tooled and concrete has hardened sufficiently to sustain foot traffic

without damage.

E. Spray-apply at the rate of 200 square feet per gallon. If puddling or bird-bathing occurs,

lightly broom product evenly over the substrate until product has completely penetrated

the surface.

F. If within 2 hours after initial application areas are subjected to heavy rainfall and puddling

occurs, reapply product to these areas as soon as weather conditions permit.

3.04 TESTING

A. Prohibit traffic on finish floor surface prior to installation of finish floor covering.

END OF SECTION


PVC Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing - 07 54 19 -1

SECTION 07 54 19

PVC THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.00 SUMMARY

Roof Assembly - Metal Roof Decks Exposed Internal Finish – Install an adhered thermoplastic 80mils thickness PVC roofing system over adhered ¼ inch thickness cover board and adhered 20 Psi uniform and tapered insulation over a metal deck.

A. Section Includes: The work includes but is not limited to the installation of: 1. Fasteners and Adhesive for Cover Board and Insulation 2. Tapered and Flat Polyisocyanurate (ISO) Rigid Insulation 3. Approved HD Cover board 4. Water Based Adhesive for membrane attachment 5. Glass Fiber Reinforced PVC Roof Membrane 6. PVC Clad Edge Metal and fasteners 7. Low VOC Contact Adhesive for Flashings 8. 60 mils Glass Fiber Reinforced PVC Flashing Membrane 9. Other Metal Flashings 10. Sealants

B. Related Sections 1. 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 2. 0512 00 Steel Framing

1.01 SUBMITTALS

A. Copy of the ASTM Certification for the named roofing membrane product showing Type II

Class I fiberglass reinforced flashing membranes and field membranes.

B. Samples of each primary component to be used in the roof system and the manufacturer's current

literature for each component. C. Sample copy of Manufacturer's warranty. D. Copy of Manufacturer's Platinum level NSF/ANSI 347 Sustainability Assessment certificate E. Copy of Manufacturer's UL recycled content certificate F. Evidence that the proposed roof system meets the requirements of the local building code and has

been tested and approved or listed by the required test organizations. G. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) H. Letter from proposed Roofing Manufacturer indicating the actual polymer thickness of the product

supplied for this project is the minimum thickness specified.

I. Written confirmation from the proposed Roofing Manufacturer stating the number of years it has directly manufactured the roof system under the trade names and/or trademarks as proposed.


A. Use only manufacturers systems certified Platinum by NSF/ANSI 347 Sustainability Assessment for Single Ply Roofing Membranes.

B. Verify that the roofing system is manufactured directly by roofing system provider/supplier with

the current formulation in use for past 20 years minimum to match the term of the warranty. C. Unreinforced or polyester reinforced membrane base flashings are prohibited. D. No “Private Label” or third party membrane manufacturers are approved alternates. E. Qualifications of Roofer: The Roofing Contractor must be authorized by Manufacturer 5 years prior to

bid. F. No deviation from the Project Specification or the approved shop drawings is permitted without

prior written approval by the Owner, the Owner's Representative. G. Only Applicator personnel trained and authorized by manufacturer are permitted to complete work

pertaining to the installation of Sarnafil membrane and flashings.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station PVC Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing - 07 54 19 -2

H. Avoid fastener penetrations through the steel deck in areas visible from below. I. The Manufacturer must provide interim and final roof inspection from a directly employed

dedicated team of experienced inspectors. Sales personnel may not be used for on-site inspection of installations

J. All base flashings and penetrations must have a minimum 8 inch height above the finished roof assembly. Care must be taken to ensure this is possible when installing equipment pads and making allowances for associated crickets.

1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

These requirements are minimum standards do no roofing work without written documentation of the system's compliance, as required in the "Submittals" section of this specification.

A. Field and Flashing membranes shall conform to ASTM D4434 (latest version), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride Sheet Roofing". Classification: Type II Grade I.

B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. Northbrook, IL Class A assembly

1.04 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene a pre installation meeting. B. The meeting shall discuss all aspects of the project including but not limited to:

1. Safety 2. Set up

3. Construction schedule 4. Contract conditions 5. Coordination of the work


A. Accept only products delivered to the job site in the original unopened containers or wrappings

bearing all seals and approvals. B. Handle all materials to prevent damage. Place all materials on pallets and fully protect from moisture. C. Store Membrane rolls lying down on pallets and fully protected from the weather with clean canvas

tarpaulins. Unvented polyethylene tarpaulins are not accepted. D. Store all adhesives at temperatures between 40º F and 80º F.

E. Store flammable materials in a cool dry area away from sparks and open flames. Follow precautions

outlined on containers or supplied by material manufacturer/supplier. F. Remove all damaged materials from the job site. G. Load materials on the rooftop in such a manner to eliminate risk of deck overload due to concentrated

weight.


A. Schedule and execute all work without exposing the interior building areas to the effects of inclement weather.

B. Secure all new and temporary construction, including equipment and accessories, to preclude wind blow-off and roof or equipment damage.

C. Install uninterrupted waterstops at the end of each day's work. Completely remove before proceeding. D. Prior to and during application, remove all excessive moisture, dirt, debris and dust. E. If any water is allowed to enter under the newly completed roofing, remove wet and damaged

materials, provide new.

1.07 SEQUENCING

A. Arrange work sequence to avoid use of newly constructed roofing as a walking surface or

for equipment movement and storage. Where such access is absolutely required, provide all necessary protection and barriers to segregate the work area and to prevent damage to adjacent areas. Provide a substantial protection layer consisting of plywood over Sarnafelt or plywood over insulation board for all roof areas that receive concentrated rooftop traffic during construction.



1.08 WARRANTY

A. Upon successful completion of work the following warranties must be provided:

1. 20 Year Full System Warranty (60 mph maximum wind speed) 2. 2 Year Roofing Contractor Warranty

B. Manufacturers System Warranty Provide a “No Dollar Limit” non-prorated warranty that does not exclude ponding or standing water or contain time limits for standing water. No additional fees or roofing manufacturer inspections will be required to maintain the warranty. The System Warranty includes membrane, insulation, coverboard and attachment components of the roofing system provided by the Manufacturer.

C. Applicator/Roofing Contractor Warranty Provide a separate workmanship warranty. In the event any work related to roofing, flashing, or metal is found to be within the Applicator warranty term, defective or otherwise not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Applicator shall repair that defect at no cost to the Owner. The Applicator's warranty obligation shall run directly to the Owner, and be copied to the Manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. PVC Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: The components of the PVC membrane roof system are to

be products of basis of design manufacturer Sika Corporation – Roofing, Canton, Massachusetts;

local contact (310) 528-3348 or one of the alternate manufacturers subject to compliance with

requirements, provide either the basis of design or the named alternative product listed.

1. Sika Corporation G410 Minimum thickness 80mils (Basis of Design). LA Research Report Number RR 24852.

2. I.B. Roof Systems, Minimum thickness 80mils LA Research Report Number RR 25672. 3. Durolast Inc. Durolast, Minimum thickness 80mils, LA Research Report Number RR 24824

B. Private label and third-party-manufactured membranes are not permitted.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. PVC fiberglass reinforced membrane with a lacquer coating. B. Membrane shall conform to ASTM D4434 (latest version), "Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride

Sheet Roofing". Classification: Type II, Grade I. 1. Field Sheet – Glass Fiber Reinforced PVC Color T24 compliant White). 60 mils thickness 2. Flashing Membranes 60 mils thickness Glass Fiber Reinforced G410 PVC Color T24

compliant White. C. Certified Polymer Thickness

1. Membrane manufacturer is to certify that the overall polymer thickness is the polymer thickness specified above with at least 48% of the polymer above the reinforcement scrim. ASTM +/- tolerance for membrane thickness is not accepted.

2.03 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Wall/Curb Flashing

1. Glass Fiber Reinforced PVC Membrane. A fiberglass reinforced membrane adhered to approved substrate using CA VOC limit compliant adhesive. Consult Product Data Sheets for adhesive options and additional information.

2.04 INSULATION/COVER BOARD

A. Sarnatherm Uniform Thickness Insulation (by Atlas Roofing).

B. ACFoam® III Rigid Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation, ASTM C1289 Type II, Class 2 Grade 2 (20

Psi) with inorganic coated fiberglass facers.


Approximate Square Feet (Meter²) 600 ml cartridge 50-65 (15.24-19.81) of insulation 1,500 ml cartridge 150-200 (15.24-60.96) of insulation

C. Tapered ACFoam® III Rigid Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation, ASTM C1289 Type II, Class 2 Grade 2 (20 Psi) with inorganic coated fiberglass facers. Tapered rigid Polyisocyanurate foam 20 Psi compressive strength to achieve a positive flow to drain. Provide tapered system where major finished slopes are 1/4” per foot minimum (valley slopes will not achieve this).

D. Coverboard provide the following: Fire-tested, glass fiber reinforced gypsum roof board..

DensDeck Prime® is provided in a 4 x 8 ft board size and in 1/4 inch minimum thickness.

2.05 COMPONENTS

A. Roofing System Manufacturer’s Reglet B. A heavy-duty, extruded aluminum flashing termination reglet used at walls and large curbs. C. Universal PVC Prefabricated stack - A prefabricated vent pipe flashing made from 0.060 inch thickness

PVC. D. Prefabricated Corners - Prefabricated outside and inside flashing corners made of 0.060 inch thick

PVC.

2.06 ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Membrane Adhesives

1. Sarnacol 2121 Adhesive .A water-based adhesive used to attach the membrane to horizontal or near-horizontal substrates. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information.

B. Flashing Adhesive 1. Stabond U148A Adhesive. A low VOC reactivating-type adhesive used to attach membrane to

flashing substrate.

C. Peelstop. An extruded aluminum, low profile bar used with certain fasteners to attach to the roof deck or to walls/curbs at terminations, penetrations and at incline changes of the substrate.

D. Insulation and Coverboard Adhesive 1. Sarnacol AD Adhesive:

One step low-rise polyurethane foam used to attach insulation to approved compatible substrates. Adhesive is applied with a gravity fed applicator or by hand with a dual component caulk gun in bands 12 in. on center. Additional adhesive may be required for rougher surfaces. Consult Product Data Sheets for additional information. Application rates are as follows:

2.07 SEALANTS

A. Multi-Purpose Sealant (for termination details). Sika 1A or approved equal. B. Approved two-component urethane adhesive sealant. C. Depending on substrates, the following sealants are options for temporary overnight tie-ins:

1. Spray-applied, water-resistant urethane foam. 2. Mechanical attachment with rigid bars and compressed sealant.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS FASTENERS AND ANCHORS

A. Provide only post-galvanized steel, aluminum or stainless steel fasteners. Take precautions to

avoid galvanic corrosion. Install expansion type fasteners with stainless steel pins for the attachment of metal to masonry. The minimum embedment for all concrete fasteners and anchors is 1¼ inch and for all miscellaneous wood fasteners and anchors used for flashings 1 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 DECK



A. Steel Deck:

Minimum 22-gauge grade E conforming and installed to meet the latest revision of the local

code's current requirements.

3.02 INSULATION AND DENS DECK INSTALLATION

A. Steel Deck Warning: Fasteners must only be used directly over structural elements to avoid

defacing the internal finish of the exposed steel roof deck. B. Install insulation according to insulation manufacturer's instructions and shop drawings. C. Neatly cut Insulation and Sarnatherm Roofboard A to fit around penetrations and projections.

D. Install tapered insulation around drains creating a drain sump. E. Cover all insulation board and Sarnatherm Roofboard A with Sarnafil membrane by the end of the

day or before the onset of inclement weather. F. Use at least 2 layers of insulation when the total insulation thickness exceeds 2-1/2 inches. Stagger

joints at least 12 inches between layers. G. Adhered Insulation: Install each subsequent layer of insulation and coverboard using low rise

polyurethane adhesive. Install all layers of insulation according to the manufacturer’s warranty requirements.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF SARNAFIL MEMBRANE

Remove broken, delaminated, wet or damaged insulation boards and provide new.

A. Sarnacol 2121 Adhesive (or approved equal) 1. Pour Sarnacol 2121 adhesive out of the pail and spread using notched ¼ inch x ¼ inch x

¼ inch rubber squeegees. Apply the 2121 adhesive at a rate of 1 1/2 gallons/100 square feet. No adhesive is applied to the back of the membrane or to seam areas.

2. Unroll the PVC membrane immediately into the wet 2121 adhesive. Adjacent rolls overlap

previous rolls by 3 inches. This process is repeated throughout the roof area. Immediately after application into adhesive, press each roll firmly into place with a water-filled, foam-covered lawn roller by frequent rolling in two directions. Do not allow adhesive to skin-over or surface-dry prior to installation of membrane.

3.04 HOT-AIR WELDING OF SEAM OVERLAPS

A. General

1. Hot air weld all seams in accordance with Manufacturer requirements. 2. Weld only clean and dry membrane.

3.05 MEMBRANE FLASHINGS

A. Install flashings concurrently with the roof membrane as the job progresses. B. Adhere flashing materials to compatible surfaces only. Use caution to ensure adhesive fumes are

not drawn into the building. C. Apply Stabond adhesive in smooth, even coats with no gaps, globs or similar inconsistencies.

Press the bonded sheet firmly in place with a hand roller. Do not apply adhesive in seam areas. Apply membrane panels uniformly.

D. Install peelstop bar according to the Detail Drawings with approved fasteners into the parapet or

the structural deck at the base of parapets, walls and curbs. E. The minimum flashing height is 8 inches above finished roofing level unless otherwise accepted in

writing. F. Mechanically fasten all flashing membranes along the counter-flashed top edge with Peelstop/Reglet

or approved alternate at 6-8 inches on center.

G. Additionally secure all adhered flashings that exceed 30 inches in height. Sheet metal backing is required behind gypsum sheathing to accommodate the required 12 inch fastener spacing. Consult Manufacturers Technical Department for securement methods.


3.06 METAL FLASHINGS

A. Install airtight and continuous metal hook strips behind metal fascias. Fasten hook strips 12 inches on

center into a wood nailer or masonry wall. B. Overlap base flashings with counter flashings at least 4 inches. C. Extend Hook strips past wood nailers over wall surfaces by 1-1/2 inch minimum and be securely

sealed from air entry. D. Space adjacent sheets of PVC coated metal 1/4 inch apart. Fasten the end joints of the metal 6

inches on center. Cover the joints with 1 inch wide aluminum tape. Hot air weld a 4 inch wide

membrane flashing strip over the joint.

3.07 SARNACLAD FLASHINGS/EDGE METAL

A. Form and install PVC clad metal flashings as described in the Detail Drawings.

1. Fasten all metal flashings into approved substrates solid wood nailers with two rows of approved fasteners 4” on center staggered.

2. Install metal to provide adequate resistance to bending and allow for normal thermal

expansion and contraction.

B. Space adjacent sheets of PVC clad metal 1/4 inch apart. Cover the joint with 2 inch wide aluminum

tape. Hot air weld a 4 inch minimum wide strip of Sarnafil flashing membrane over the joint.

3.08 TEMPORARY CUT-OFF

Construct all temporary waterstops to provide a 100% watertight seal. Maintain the stagger of insulation joints by installing partial panels of insulation. Carry the new membrane into the waterstop. Seal the waterstop to the deck and/or substrate so that water will not be allowed to travel under the new or existing roofing. Seal the edge of the membrane in a continuous heavy application of sealant. Cut out all contaminated membrane before resuming work.

3.09 COMPLETION

Correct all punch-list items to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative and Manufacturer prior to demobilization.


A. Quality Control of Welded Seams Check all welded seams for continuity using a rounded screwdriver.

Visible evidence that welding is proceeding correctly is smoke during the welding operation, shiny membrane surfaces, and an uninterrupted flow of dark grey material from the underside of the top membrane. On-site evaluation of welded seams shall be made daily at locations as directed by the Owner's Representative or Manufacturer’s representative. Take one inch wide cross- section samples of welded seams at least three times a day. Correct welds display failure from shearing of the membrane prior to separation of the weld. Each test cut shall be patched by the Applicator at no extra cost to the Owner.

B. Interim and Final Inspections. Upon completion of the installation and the delivery to Manufacturer by

the Applicator of a certification that all work has been done in strict accordance with the contract specifications and Manufacturer’s requirements, an inspection shall be made by a Specialist Technical Representative (Not a salesperson) of Manufacturer to review the installed roof system.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Flashing and Sheet Metal - 07 60 00 -1

SECTION 07 60 00

FLASHING AND SHEET METAL


A. Provide flashing and sheet metal not specifically described in other Sections of these Specifica-

tions but required to prevent penetration of water through the exterior shell of the building. B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division l of these Specifications.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01340.

B. Product data: Within 45 calendar days after the Contractor has received the Owner's Notice to

Proceed, submit: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified

requirements; 3. Shop Drawings in sufficient detail to show fabrication, installation, anchorage, and interface of

the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the

Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work.



crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.

B. In addition to complying with pertinent codes and regulations, comply with pertinent recommendations contained in current edition of "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" published by the Sheet Metal and Air-conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA).

C. Standard commercial items may be used for flashing, trim, reglets, and similar purposes provided such items meet or exceed the quality standards specified.



PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS AND GAGES

A. Where sheet metal is required, and no material or gage is indicated on the Drawings, provide the

highest quality and gage commensurate with the referenced standards, but no less than 24 gage.

2.02 GALVANIZED IRON

A. Provide sheet metal or sheet iron of a standard brand of open-hearth copper-bearing steel,

copper-molybdenum iron, or pure iron sheets.


B. Zinc coating:

1. Where galvanizing is required, provide zinc coating by hot-dip galvanize to all surfaces. 2. Weight:

a. Provide not less than 1-1/4 oz per sq ft, nor more than 1-1/2 oz per sq ft, to surfaces required to be galvanized.

3. Comply with ASTM A123-84. 4. Separation of materials:

a. Sheets or surfaces of different materials, subject to electrolysis shall be thoroughly insulated. Where not otherwise furnished or provided for, the work of this section includes furnishing and installing of a heavy bodied bituminous paint, or non-abrasive tape or gasket, as a separation against galvanic or corrosive action.

5. Where galvanizing is cut or damaged, touch up with Galvaloy or equal. 2.03 NAILS, RIVETS, AND FASTENERS

A. Use only soft iron rivets having rust-resistive coating, galvanized nails, and cadmium plated

screws and washers in connection with galvanized iron and steel. 2.04 FLUX

A. Where flux is required, use raw muriatic acid.

2.05 SOLDER

A. Where solder is required, comply with ASTM B32.

2.06 OTHER MATERIALS


installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed. Correct

conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 WORKMANSHIP

A. General: 1. Form sheet metal accurately and to the dimensions and shapes required, finishing molded

and broken surfaces with true, sharp, and straight lines and angles and, where intercepting other members, coping to an accurate fit and soldering securely.

2. Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Architect, turn exposed edges back 1/2".

B. Form, fabricate, and install sheet metal so as to adequately provide for expansion and contraction in the finished Work.

C. Weatherproofing:

1. Finish watertight and weather-tight where so required. 2. Make lock seam work flat and true to line, sweating full of solder. 3. Make lock seams and lap seams, when soldered, at least 1/2" wide. 4. Where lap seams are not soldered, lap according to pitch, but in no case less than 3". 5. Make flat and lap seams in the direction of flow.


D. Joints:

1. Join parts with rivets or sheet metal screws where necessary for strength and stiffness. 2. Provide suitable watertight expansion joints for runs of more than 40'-0", except where closer

spacing is indicated on the Drawings or required for proper installation.

E. Nailing: 1. Whenever possible, secure metal by means of clips or cleats, without nailing through the

exterior metal. 2. In general, space nails, rivets, and screws not more than 8" apart and, where exposed to the

weather, use lead washers. 3. For nailing into wood, use barbed roofing nails 1-1/4" long by 11 gage. 4. For nailing into concrete, use drilled plugholes and plugs.

3.03 EMBEDMENT

A. Embed metal in connection with roofs in a solid bed of sealant, using materials and methods

described in Section 07920 of these Specifications or other materials and methods approved in advance by the Architect.

3.04 SOLDERING

A. General:

1. Thoroughly clean and tin the joint materials prior to soldering. 2. Perform soldering slowly, with a well heated copper, in order to heat the seams thoroughly

and to completely fill them with solder. 3. Perform soldering with a heavy soldering copper of blunt design, properly tinned for use. 4. Make exposed soldering on finished surfaces neat, full flowing, and smooth.

B. After soldering, thoroughly wash acid flux with a soda solution.

3.05 TESTS

A. Upon request of the Architect, demonstrate by hose or standing water that the flashing and sheet metal are completely watertight.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Joint Sealant - 07 92 00 -1

SECTION 07920 JOINT SEALANT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE

A. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required to perform all sealants

and caulking, backing materials and supplementary work to complete the Contract including, but are not limited to, these major items: 1. At all doors, windows, etc. 2. At perimeter of all change in finish materials, i.e. between EIFS and metal flashings and/or

concrete. 3. Roof penetrations not specified under Mechanical or Electrical Sections. 4. All concrete construction and separation joints in concrete building slab and site concrete. 5. Sealant between storm drainage downspouts and wall outlets. 6. Fire retardant sealants for type of rated penetration, as required. 7. All other Sealants and Caulking as indicated on Drawings.

1.02 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Section 07600: Sheet Metal Work B. Section 08100: Hollow Metal Doors and Frames C. C.Section 08410: Aluminum Window Wall and Storefront D. Section 08800: Glass & Glazing

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C 920 Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants.A sealant qualifying under this

specification shall be classified as to type, grade, class, and use as follows: 1. Type S - Single component sealant 2. Type M - Multi component sealant 3. Grade P - Pourable or self-leveling 4. Grade NS - Nonsag or gunable 5. Class 25 - Adhesion and cohesion under movement shall withstand an increase or

decrease of at least 25% of the joint width. 6. Use T - Pedestrian and vehicular traffic areas. Sealant shall have a

hardness reading, after being properly cured, of not less than 25 or more than 50 when tested in accordance with Test Method C 661.

7. Use NT - Nontraffic applications 8. Use M - Mortar/Masonry 9. Use G - Glass 10. Use A - Aluminum 11. Use O - Other than the Standard Substrates meeting this specification.

ASTM C962 Standard Guide Use of Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. ASTM C1184 Standard Guide for Use of Structural Sealants. ASTM D1565 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers

and Copolymers (Open-Cell form) ASTM D1667 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers

and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam)

B. Federal Specification: FS TT-S-00227E, "Sealing Compound, Rubber Base, Two-Component." FS TT-S-00230, "Sealing Compounds, Synthetic Rubber Base, Single Component, Chemically Curing.

C. Sealant, Waterproofing and Restoration Institute ( SWRI ) - Sealant and Caulking Guide Specifications.


1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Provisions: Comply with Section 01340. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, mixing instructions, application

recommendations and installation instructions, including cleaning and priming instructions and sealant limitations for each type of material required. Include manufacturer's published data, or letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report indicating that each material selected complies or is suitable for the temperatures, movements and weather conditions that will be encountered during the sealants service life.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard bead samples consisting of strips of actual products to be exposed to view showing full range of cured colors available.

D. Contractor's and manufacturers' guarantees and warranties respectively. E. Sealant Schedule: Indicate each sealant type and backer rod type proposed for each appropriate

location and for each appropriate substrate. F. Certificates: Furnish manufacturers certification that sealant systems comply with local

regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. Manufacturer shall certify that sealant systems are compatible with adjacent substrate and related finish materials.

G. Product Testing: Include manufacturer or independent laboratory test results demonstrating hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement per ASTM C719, low temperature flexibility, modulus of elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging and effects of accelerated weathering.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an installer who has successfully completed within the last three

(3) years at least three (3) joint sealer applications similar to type and size to that of this project. B. Single Source for Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each

different product required, for each different application. C. Manufacturer's representative to provide inspection of conditions prior to start of the work and

initial supervision at the start of each application, to insure that any physical conditions which would result in defective work are properly corrected before materials are applied, and that proper procedures are being followed. Provide such inspection and supervision by qualified personnel. Report all unsatisfactory conditions existing at the time of inspection in writing to the Architect for correction before proceeding with the work.

D. Notify the manufacturer's representative at least 72 hours prior to the time inspection is required. and supervision as required hereunder constitutes grounds for non-acceptability of materials manufactured, even though such materials have been specified or approved.

1.06 REQUIREMENTS

A. Sealant system shall include joint preparation, joint back-up or bondbreaker, priming, sealant and caulkings required to seal exterior and interior joints throughout the project, including those not specifically indicated in the Contract Documents, but necessary to completely eliminate active, direct and indirect moisture and weather elements of water, air or dust, from entering through, around, over and under joints of building components, to provide a watertight, moisturetight and weathertight building envelope and seal joints between adjacent materials.

B. Sealants are not to harden or soften more than 10 Shore A durometer points as measured 21 days after original installation.

C. Verify compatibility of sealants with various other sealants or joint systems at any point of interface or possible contact.

1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels, indicating

manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store at 80qF or less in a cool, dry area. Handle materials to prevent their deterioration or

damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants or other causes.


C. Use sealant within the time recommended by the manufacturer. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Weather Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of sealants under adverse weather

conditions, or when ambient and substrate temperatures are below or above manufacturer's recommended limitations for installation or below 40qF. Proceed with the work only when forecasted weather conditions are favorable for proper cure and development of high early bond strength.

B. Surface Conditions: Provide proper primers suited to conditions. Primers may be omitted upon certification by sealant manufacturer that they are not required. Where any doubt exists, prepare sample joints on actual materials as furnished for the job to determine the matter.

1.09 WARRANTY

Contractor shall submit manufacturer's written five (5) year warranty agreeing to replace joint sealers which fail or deteriorate including color resistance compromising system life.

1.10 GUARANTEE

Provide joint installer/manufacturer guarantee of work against inherent or developed defects in material or installation, agreeing to repair or replace joint sealers which fail, leak, crumble, harden, shrink, bleed, sag, stain or loose adhesion. Guarantee installed work to remain watertight for a period of two (2) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS

Use sealants of the following types and manufacturers. Use manufacturer’s standard or custom colored materials to match color of adjacent surfaces. Where adjacent materials on each side of the joint are different colors, the Architect will select sealant colors. If the desired color is not available from one manufacturer, select the proper color from another manufacturer.

2.02 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide one of the following for each different product required:

1. Momentive Performance Material 2. Mameco/International, Inc. 3. Pacific Polymers 4. Pecora 5. Sika 6. Equivalent products meeting performance criteria specified will be acceptable.

2.03 MATERIAL TYPES

A. POLYURETHANE SEALANTS

1. One part, non sag, non staining, gun grade sealants ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, uses NT, M, G, A & O, TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A. a. Location/Use: Exterior/Interior, Horizontal/Vertical joints in concrete, masonry,

steel, aluminum and glass b. Mameco International 'Vulkem 116 or 921'

Pacific Polymers 'Elasto-thane 230-Type II', Elasto-seal 230 Pecora 'Dynatrol 1' Sika - Sikaflex - 1a or 15LM Sonneborn 'Sonolastic NP-1/Ultra/Sonolastic 150

2. Two part, non sag, non staining, gun grade sealant, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, uses

NT, M, A & O, TT-S-00227E, Type II, Class A.


a. Location/Use: Exterior/Interior, Horizontal/Vertical joints in concrete, masonry,

steel, aluminum. b. Mameco International 'Vulkem 227 or 922'

Pacific Polymers 'Elasto-seal 227 or Elasto-thane 920 Type II' Pecora 'Dynatrol II' Sika - Sikaflex - 2c NS/SL Sonneborn 'Sonolastic NP-2'

3. One part, self leveling, pourable sealant, ASTM C920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T,

M, A & 0, TT-S-00230C, Type 1

a. Location/Use: Exterior/Interior, Horizontal expansion and control joints; light traffic.

b. Mameco International 'Vulkem 45' Pecora 'Urexpan NR-201' Sika - Sikaflex - 1 CSL Sonneborn 'Sonolastic SL1'

4. Two part, self leveling, pourable sealant, ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, uses T, M, A & O, TT-S-00227E, Type I.

a. Location/Use: Exterior/Interior, Horizontal expansion and control joints; medium to

heavy traffic. b. Mameco International 'Vulkem 245-255'

Pacific Polymers 'Elasto-thane 227 High Shore' Pecora 'Urexpan NR-200'or ‘Dynatred’ Permapol 'RC-2SL' Sika - Sikaflex 2CSL Sonneborn 'Sonolastic SL2'

B. Silicone Sealants 1. Silicone based, single components, non sag, conforming to Federal Spec. TT-5-0030C

(2) & TT-S-001543A. a. Joints in glass and metal surfaces of walls and other vertical and sloping surfaces of

window surrounds. General Electric - GE1200 Dow Corning - 790 Pecora 864 or 890 Sonneborn - Sonolastic 150/Omniseal

b. Joints in concrete and masonry in vertical and sloping surfaces. General Electric - Silpruf Dow Corning - 795 Pecora 895 Sonneborn - Sonolastic 150/Omniseal

C. Joint Backing: Closed cell materials, neoprene, polypropylene, or polyethylene, ASTM D1565 or

D1667 conforming to manufacturers written recommendations. Material is to be non-staining, free of asphalt, oils or creosote. Sized and shaped to control depth of sealant and to provide 25 - 50 percent compression upon insertion. Open cell polyurethane foam backer rod is not allowed.

D. Primers: As recommended in writing by sealant manufacturer. Verify that recommended primer has been tested not to stain the substrate. Refer to 3.01D.

E. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape, or other type recommended by sealant manufacturer.

F. Fire Retardant Sealant: Products as tested and listed by approved system design as indicated in the U.L.Inc Volume 2, directory. System is to be recognized by UL and ASTM E119 procedures, (and ICBO by report NER #243), for fire rating of penetration to be sealed. Products as distributed by Kirwan Corporation (714) 939-6887.

1. Pecora Ultra-Block fire safing joint system used in conjunction with acrylic latex sealants (AC-20 FTR), polyurethanes or silicones, as approved by the manufacturer,


based on hardness or flexibility of the joint required. Alternate mineral wool safings must comply to approved system designs.

2. 3M - "Fire Barrier Caulk CP25 and Putty 303", or Dow Corning - "Firestop Sealant". G. Fire Retardant Foam: UL tested and listed, conforming to ASTM E119 for rating of penetration to be sealed. 3M 2001 RTV "Firestop Foam" or equal.

H. Structural Glazing Adhesives/Sealants One-component, high-modulus, high-strength, neutral-cure, 100 percent silicone polymer sealant.

1. Acceptable Product: Momentive, GE SSG4000 UltraGlaze Silicone Structural Glazing Adhesive/Sealant as manufactured by Momentive Performance Materials

a) Compliance: (1) ASTM C 1184, Type S, Use G and O. (2) ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, A, G, O. (3) Federal Specification TT-S-001 543A. (4) Federal Specification TT-S-00230C.

b) Dynamic Movement Capability, ASTM C 719: +/- 25 percent. c) Color: Black. d) Color: Grey.

2.04 INCIDENTAL REQUIREMENTS AND MATERIALS

A. Staining Characteristics: All joint fillers, primers, or other materials used in conjunction with sealants shall be of such composition as to not cause staining of the sealant or the materials to which they are applied.

B. Compressible Joint Filler: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use in conjunction with the sealant. Size closed cell joint backing for joint width plus 25 percent.

C. Primers: As recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use in conjunction with the sealant for application onto the various types of materials to which the sealer is applied.

D. Cleaners, where required in lieu of primers, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, which will not stain or damage building materials.

PART 3- EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

Examine substrate surfaces to receive sealant system and associated work and conditions under which work will be installed. Do not proceed with sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. Starting work within a particular area will be construed as applicators acceptance of surface conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturers latest written requirements, recommendations and

specifications for cleaning, surface preparation and priming. Remove loose foreign materials which could impair adhesion or proper performance of sealants.

B. Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer or where required by preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond. Do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Apply epoxy primers to all concrete surfaces to which joints are to be sealed prior to sealant application to increase adhesion, decreasing failure due to temperature exposure, thermal and structural movement.

D. Prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears.


3.03 APPLICATION

A. Install back-up and sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturers written recommendations as recommended for each use type and substrate, or as directed by manufacturer’s technical field representative to ensure proper preparation and application.

B. Accurately install/position joint back-up to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to control/produce the uniform cross sectional shape and depth of installed sealants relative to designated joint thickness/widths to achieve required width to depth ratios, that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of back-up rod. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear back-up rod. 3. Install bond breaker tape where backer rods cannot be used do to shallow joint depth, to

avoid three side adhesions. C. Install/apply sealants by proven techniques using caulking guns with proper nozzles using

sufficient pressure that results in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration, providing uniform, cross sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths, and to assure/obtain uniform adhesion free of air pockets, voids, embedded matter, ridges and sags. During application keep tip of nozzle at bottom of joint, forcing sealant to fill from bottom to top. Finish joints smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, and embedded impurities.

D. Tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads of concave configuration finished below the surface. Use tooling agents that are approved by sealant manufacturer. Remove excess sealants from surface adjacent to joint.

E. Fire Retardant Foam and Sealant: Conform to manufacturer's printed directions for preparation and application of materials per applicable details for fire-rated penetrations. Seal all gaps, cracks, and holes around the perimeter of materials penetrating the fire rated floors and walls.

F. Fire Retardant Putty: Apply to thicknesses required for rating and type of construction, in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from

construction operations or other causes. B. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that areas are

indistinguishable from original work.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Steel Doors & Frame - 08 11 00 -1

SECTION 08 11 00

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.

B. Steel frames for wood doors.

C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames.

D. Thermally insulated steel doors.

E. Sound-rated steel doors and frames.

F. Steel glazing frames.

G. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.


A. Section 087100 - Door Hardware.

B. Section 088100 - Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.

C. Section 099000 - Paints and Coatings: Field painting.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.

B. ANSI A250.3 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Factory-Applied Finish Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1999.

C. ANSI A250.8 - SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.

D. ANSI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).

E. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a.

F. ASTM C 236 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; 1989 (Reapproved 1993).

G. ASTM C 1363 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Hot Box Apparatus; 2005.

H. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements; 2004.

I. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.

J. ASTM E 1408 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991 (Reapproved 2000).

K. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).

L. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition.

M. NAAMM HMMA 840 - Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999.


N. NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1992.

O. NAAMM HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2000.

P. NAAMM HMMA 862 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2003.

Q. NAAMM HMMA 863 - Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2004.

R. NAAMM HMMA 865 - Guide Specifications for Swinging Sound Control Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2003.

S. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007.

T. NFPA 252 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; National Fire Protection Association; 2003.

U. UBC Std 7-2, Part II - Test Standard for Smoke- and Draft-control Assemblies; International Conference of Building Officials; 1997.

V. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

W. UL 10B - Standard for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1997.

X. UL 10C - Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998.

Y. UL 1784 - Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; 2001.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of metal, 2 x 2 inches (50 x 50 mm) in size showing factory finishes, colors, and surface texture.

E. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS


A. Steel Doors and Frames: 1. Steelcraft; www.steelcraft.com. 2. Assa Abloy Ceco,: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Windsor Republic Doors; www.republicdoor.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as

indicated on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in

place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2.03 STEEL DOORS

A. Exterior Doors Type L-Series: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Grade: NAAMM HMMA 861, physical performance Level A. 3. Core: Honeycomb core system. 4. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: a. Flush with top of faces and edges. b. Not less than 16 ga. Flush or inverted. c. Welded to the face sheet. 5. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 6. Texture: Smooth faces. 7. Astragals: Flat security type. 8. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. 9. Finish: Kynar.

2.04 STEEL FRAMES

A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:

a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. ANSI A250.8 Level 4 Doors: 12 gage frames.

2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or

to be grouted. 4. Frames in Masonry Walls: Size to suit masonry coursing with head member 4 inches (100

mm) high to fill opening without cutting masonry units. 5. Frames wider than 48 Inches (1200 mm): Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into

frame head, flush with top. 6. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and

overhead structure. 7. Frame Anchors

a. Existing Masonry or Concrete 1. 3/8 inch countersunk flat head bolt and expansion shields.


2. Locate 6 inches from top and bottom and maximum 24 inches on center. 3. Weld pipe spacers or other type of spacers, per manufacturers standard design, in

back of frame soffit. b. Attachment to Drywall Construction: 1. Steel or Wood Stud type to accommodate frame jamb depth and face dimension

on welded type frame. c. Provide one anchor for every 30 inches of jamb or fraction thereof. d. Floor Anchor: angle clip type. 1. 16 Gauge. 2. Two fasteners per jamb. 3. Weld to bottom of each jamb.

8. Preparation for Hardware a. Reinforce per SDI 107. b. Lock and Closer reinforcement: box type.

c. Door Hinge reinforcement: 7 gauge or equivalent, manufacturer's standard. d. Punch strike jambs to receive three silencers; double leaf frames to receive

manufacturer's standard preparation. e. Hardware locations per "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard

Steel Doors and Frames". f. Provide welded in place guards for all hardware cutouts in frame. g. Electrical preps: provide welded-in-place boxes, special designed anchors, raceways

and access panels as required.

B. Interior Door Frames: F16 Series, SUA (set-up and welded) 3-sided flush frames; meet ANSI A250.8 – 1998.

1. Single rabbet frame. 2. 4” head where shown on the Drawings. 3. Fire-rated when shown on the Drawings. 4. Finish: Factory primed.

C. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, F16 Series, sanded and grinded smooth, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in

accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 2. Finish: Kynar 3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00.

D. Interior Door Frames: See Section 08 11 00.

E. Mullions for Pairs of Doors: Fixed, of profile similar to jambs.

F. Frames for Interior Glazing or Borrowed Lights: Construction and face dimensions to match door frames, and as indicated on drawings.

G. Transom Bars: Fixed, of profile same as jamb and head.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 81 00, factory installed.

B. Removable Stops: Formed sheet steel, shape as indicated on drawings, mitered or butted corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 08 71 00. 1. Exterior Doors: Steel, Z-shaped. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating.

D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited.

E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.


F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames. 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS

A. Interior Doors: Factory primed. Exterior Doors: Factory primed.

B. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.

C. Kynar finish. Color to be selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to installation.

B. Coat inside of other frames with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840.

B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80.

C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.

D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames.

E. Coordinate installation of hardware.

F. Coordinate installation of glazing.

G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

H. Touch up damaged factory finishes.

3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8.

B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.05 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust sound control doors so that seals are fully engaged when door is closed.

C. Test sound control doors for force to close, latch, and unlatch in accordance with ASTM E 1408; adjust as required to comply.

3.06 SCHEDULE

A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this section.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Metal-Framed Skylights- 08 63 00 -1

SECTION 08 63 00 METAL-FRAMED SKYLIGHTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Design, fabrication and erection of the entire modular skylight system. B. Finish on metal and pultruded composite components. C. Related flashing. D. Integral modular skylight glass and glazing. E. Venting and Roller Shade options to modular skylight. F. The modular skylight and all optional accessories shall be the product of a single

manufacturer. G. The modular skylight support curb shall be provided by others, and shall be designed

per modular skylight manufacture’s requirements and be capable of resisting all loading imposed upon it by modular skylight.


A. Section 013329: Sustainable Design Reporting. B. Section 051200: Structural Steel. C. Section 055000: Metal Fabrications. D. Section 072100: Building Insulation E. Section 076000: Flashing and Sheet Metal. F. Section 088000: Glazing. G. Section 260923: Lighting Control Devices

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. E90: Standard Test Method for laboratory measurement of airborn sound

transmission loss. Sound transmission loss as identified in Terminology C634 and calculated by ASTM E 413 & ASTM E 1332

2. E108: Burning Brand Test 3. E283: Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors. 4. E330: Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain

Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 5. E331: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows,

Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 6. E773: Test Method for Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 7. E774: Specification for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. 8. E783: Method for Field Measurement of Air Leakage through Installed

Exterior Windows and Doors 9. D1929: Self Ignition Temperature 10. D 2843: Average Smoke Density Rating 11. D635: Linear Rate of Burn 12. EN12210/12211: Wind Load Factor Class C5 13. EN12208 / EN 1027 – Water Tightness. Class E900 14. EN12207 / EN 1026 – Air Permeability. Class 4 15. OSHA 29CFR 1910.23(e)(8) Fall Resistance test for compliance 16. NFRC 100-2010, 200-2010, 500-2010 requirement standards

B. Council (IGCC): Classification of Insulating Glass Units

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements:


1. Prefabricated, pre-glazed engineered modular fixed and/or vented skylight consisting of factory assembled and sealed glass framing of pultruded composite material and aluminum retention caps.

2. Skylight glass and frame modules, pressure bars and flashings shall employ connections that allow removal and replacement without destruction or loss of integrity to the rest of the modular skylight system.

3. Frame and sash to be of insulated composite material consisting of 80% continuous fiberglass and 20% two-component polyurethane resin with pre-finished interior surface or custom color ready. Optional list of GRC profile beneficial properties: Frame and sash to be made of a choice of material ensures high thermal insulation performance/ low thermal bridging, maintenance free, none-corrosive, and nonconductive. Frames shall ensure low the risk of condensation, free of corrosion, contribute efficient energy profile and low maintenance of the building, further to ensure signal transmission neutral environment for the inhabitants.

4. Weather stripping system such as gasket strips shall be made of engineered prefabricated polymer profiles, which are designed specifically for skylights to ensure superior weather tightness and durability. Striping shall be able to replace without destruction or loss of integrity of the modules. Glazing sealant material to be chosen according to the safest weather stripping performance, ensuring high movement factor and resistance in extreme temperature conditions. Optional level of detail:

B. Performance Requirements:

Using HVC Venting Skylight Module and Type 11 Glazing: 1. Structural framing of sufficient sizes to support design loads as prescribed by

governing building codes. 2. Uniform Load Structural ASTM E 330 maximum uplift 100psf as tested.

NAFS-11 Rating 65psf 3. Uniform Load structural ASTM E 330 maximum download 190 psf as tested.

NAFS-11 Rating 95psf 4. Air Infiltration at 1.57psf static pressure limited to .02 CFM/ft2 when tested in

accordance with ASTM E283 5. Water Penetration: No water penetration shall occur when the system is

tested in accordance with ASTM E331 up to 25psf. Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water other than condensation on the interior surface of any part of the skylight.

6. Compliance with intent of OSHA 29CFR 1910.23(e)(8) where 200 lbs weight dropped from 6 foot height with no damage to panes. 1,200 lb-ft as tested.

7. Self Ignition Temperature ASTM D 1929 for pultruded composite VMS frame: 500 degrees Celsius as tested

8. Flash Ignition Temperature ASTM D 1929 for pultruded composite VMS frame 410 degrees Celsius as tested

9. Average Smoke Density Rating ASTM D 2843 7.0 as tested 10. Linear Rate of Burn ASTM D 635 Class CC1 as tested 11. Burning Brand Test ASTM E 108 Class B burning brand passed as tested 12. Acoustics Testing ASTM E 90 calculated by ASTM E 413 STC Interior Noise

37 as tested 13. Acoustics Testing ASTM E 90 calculated by ASTM E 1332 QITC 28 exterior

noise as tested 14. Thermal Performance tested in accordance with NFRC requirements for

standards NFRC 100-2010, NFRC 200-2010 and NFRC 500-2010 a. Low Energy Dual Pane HFC fixed skylight module U-factor 0.34 and

SHGC 0.49 and Vt 0.67 b. Low energy with solar protection dual pane HFC module U-factor

0.34, SHGC 0.27 and Vt 0.48 c. Super Low Energy Triple Pane HFC fixed skylight module U-factor

0.21, SHGC 0.38 and Vt 0.58


Using HFC/HVC/HFC (fixed skylight module/venting skylight module/fixed skylight module) Ridgelight and Type 11 Glazing:

1. Structural framing of sufficient sizes to support design loads as prescribed by governing building codes.

2. Uniform Load Structural ASTM E 330 maximum uplift 100psf as tested. NAFS-11 Rating 65psf

3. Uniform Load structural ASTM E 330 maximum download 125 psf as tested. NAFS-11 Rating 60psf

4. Air Infiltration at 1.57psf static pressure limited to .01 CFM/ft2 when tested in accordance with ASTM E283

5. Water Penetration: No water penetration shall occur when the system is tested in accordance with ASTM E331 up to 15psf. Water penetration is defined as the appearance of uncontrolled water other than condensation on the interior surface of any part of the skylight.

6. Self Ignition Temperature ASTM D 1929 for pultruded composite VMS frame: 500 degrees Celsius as tested

7. Flash Ignition Temperature ASTM D 1929 for pultruded composite VMS frame 410 degrees Celsius as tested

8. Average Smoke Density Rating ASTM D 2843 7.0 as tested 9. Linear Rate of Burn ASTM D 635 Class CC1 as tested 10. Burning Brand Test ASTM E 108 Class B burning brand passed as tested 11. Acoustics Testing ASTM E 90 calculated by ASTM E 413 STC Interior Noise

37 as tested 12. Acoustics Testing ASTM E 90 calculated by ASTM E 1332 QITC 28 exterior

noise as tested 1.05 SUBMITTALS

B. Submit shop drawings showing plans, elevations and sections as required to fully describe the modular skylight construction for the Architect's approval prior to starting fabrication.

C. Submit 12-inch square samples of each type of glass. D. Submit samples of pultruded pre-finished frame. E. Submit samples of aluminum finish. F. Submit color samples for roller blind option. G. Submit one set of as-built drawings, cleaning and maintenance manual upon

completion of skylight installation.


A. The skylight manufacturer shall be responsible for the complete design, fabrication, finishing and installation of the modular skylight assembly, control components and all optional accessory components.

B. Only factory trained mechanics shall be utilized for the installation of the modular skylight.

C. The modular skylight system shall not require any cutting, drilling, welding or soldering during the installation of the skylight system.

D. The modular skylight system shall not require the application of field sealants during the installation of the skylight system.

E. The skylight manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in custom modular skylight construction and show proof of similar projects completed over the past ten years.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. The system shall be warranted for a period of ten years from the date of modular skylight completion against leakage, defective design and defective materials.

B. Electronics and controls shall be warranted for a period of 5 years from the date of modular skylight completion.


C. Glass is warranted per the manufacturer’s standard warranties regarding delamination, seal failure and coating failure. Glass breakage is not warranted.

D. Painted aluminum finish is warranted per Velux-America’s standard ten-year warranty.

E. Warranty service becomes effective following completion of installation and full payment of the contract amount.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of design: 1. The VELUX VMS Custom Modular Skylight. VELUX Modular Skylight’s to be

“longlights”. a. VELUX-America Inc., 104 Ben Casey Drive, Fort Mill, SC 29708;

Phone: (800) 888-3589, Direct (803) 396-5736; Email: [email protected];

b. Website: www.modularskylights.velux.com 2.02 MATERIALS

A. Frame and sash in pultruded composite material consisting of 20% fiberglass and 80% two-part polyurethane resin with water-based two component clear coating and white base RAL color 9010, gloss 30.

B. Extruded aluminum retention caps.

C. Flashing: 1. Custom prefabricated aluminum sheet shall be the required alloy and temper

to make compatible with the specified finish, with a minimum thickness of 1mm

2. Front surface: polyamide polyester lacquer in color: NCS standard color S 7500-N

3. Aluminium flashing should be provided with 50mm EPS insulation bonded to the back of the flashing.

4. Pre-fitted wind and snow stop bonded to back of flashing base.

D. Bracket and Hinge Fasteners: 1. Galvanized low-carbon steel for cold forming, galvanized structural steel,

high-strength low-alloy steel, galvanized free-cutting steel and sealed passivated cast zinc.

2. Bracket and Hinge are pre-installed to modules. 3. Bracket and Hinge to mount to single steel flange per instruction and

tolerance of modular skylight manufacture. The modular skylight system shall not require any cutting, drilling, welding or soldering.

4. Steel components are electroplated according to European Norm EN ISO 2081:2008 table A1-C iridescent

E. Sealant: 1. All required sealants are factory pre-applied to the modular skylight system.

Additional sealants should not be required during installation F. Finish:

1. Extruded aluminum cladding 1.5mm thick, scratch resistant powder lacquer (60-120 my). Color is “noir 2100 sable YW” Akzo Nobel with Kynar 500

2. Pultruded interior frame and sash finish is a water based two component clear coating in white base RAL color 9010, gloss 30

G. Glazing: 1. Glazing should be chosen from manufacturer’s standard insulating,

laminated glass assemblies. See section 08800 Glazing for project specific requirements. All glazing units include an 8mm toughened outer pane and a 3+3 or 5+5mm safety inner pane with 2 layers of 0.38mm interlayer PVB foil.

2. Glazings are filled with argon gas as a default


3. All glazing units consist of a chromatic warm edge spacer and are produced with warm edge technology to minimize the risk of condensation at the pane edges to provide the glazing units with the most durable insulation capabilities.

4. Double glazing options: a. IGU 10: IGU 8H-20Argon-33.2F / 55.2F LowE b. IGU 11: Sun1: 8H Sun1-20Argon-33.2F / 55.2F LowE c. IGU 12: Sun2: 8H Sun2-20Argon-33.2F / 55.2F LowE

5. Triple Glazing Options a. IGU 16: 8H LowE-12 Argon-8HS-12Argon-33.2F/55.2F b. IGU 17: 8H Sun1-12 Argon-8HS-12Argon-33.2F/55.2F c. IGU 18: 8H Sun2-12 Argon-8HS-12Argon-33.2F/55.2F

H. Ventilating Modules:

1. Optional, integral ventilating modules must be manufactured by Modular Skylight manufacture and pre-engineered into alternating modules within system design.

2. Ventilating modules must be adjacent to fixed modules at both sloped perimeter sides.

3. Venting modules are top-hung and use an integral, hidden chain actuator at the bottom profile to open.

4. All ventilating actuators, motors, and components must not be visual from the interior or exterior of the modular skylight system.

I. Roller Blinds: 1. Optional, integral remote controlled roller blinds must be manufactured by

Modular Skylight manufacture and pre-engineered into individual skylight modules.

2. Blinds consists of four wheels located in each corner of the skylight module and two steel wires, running along the module side frame.

3. Optional blind colors per manufacturer’s standard colors. 2.03 FABRICATION

A. All custom engineered Modular Skylight components must be manufactured, fitted and assembled in the manufacturer’s facilities.

B. Modular components to be marked and packed for delivery and properly sequenced installation of modules.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Prior to starting installation, the skylight erector shall inspect related construction to verify that they are properly prepared in accordance with the approved shop drawings. No work shall proceed until all errors and deviations are corrected.

B. The skylight framing is designed to be self-supporting between the support constructions. The skylights will impose reactions to the support construction. All adjacent and support construction must support the transfer of all loads including horizontal and vertical, exerted by the skylights. Design or structural engineering services for the supporting structure or building components not included in the skylight scope are not included under this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. The modular skylight shall be erected and glazed by an experienced and authorized installer familiar with the manufacturer’s systems and installation procedures.

B. All modular components shall be clearly marked for sequencing of modular installation.

C. All electrical components and connections shall be clearly marked and provided to electrical contractor for required connections.


D. The manufacturer shall provide instructions to the General Contractor for cleaning of all surfaces.

E. Protection and final cleaning of modular skylight system shall be the responsibility of the General Contractor.

F. Furnishing of temporary covering and weather-proofing of the skylight openings, if required, is by the General Contractor, and removal of the protective measures during and after the skylight installation is excluded by the manufacturer and the manufacturer’s erector. Temporary covers shall not interfere with the installation of the skylight in any way.

G. Protection of persons or property below the skylight will be provided by the general contractor, including barricades and traffic control.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. All parts of the work, when completed, shall be within the following tolerances: 1. Maximum variation from plane or location shown on approved shop

drawings: 1/8-in. per 12-ft. length, or 1/2-in. in total length. 2. Maximum offset from true alignment between two members abutting end-to-

end, edge-to-edge in line or separated by less than 3-in.:1/32-in.

End of Section

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Door Hardware - 08 71 00 -1

SECTION 08 71 00

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Hardware for wood, hollow steel and aluminum doors. B. Hardware for fire-rated doors. C. Electrically operated and controlled hardware. D. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections. E. Thresholds. F. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. G. Gate locks.


A. Section 08115 - Steel Door Frames. B. Section 08212 – Plastic Fac Wood Doors C. Section 08216 – Stile and Rail Wood Doors D. Section 08460 - Automatic Entrance Doors: Hardware for same. E. Section 13852 - Fire Alarm System Equipment: Electrical connection to activate door closers. F. Card access system (Allowance # --)

1.03 ALLOWANCES

A. See Section 01210 - Allowances, for allowances affecting this section.

1.04 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.

B. BHMA A156.1 - American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).

C. BHMA A156.2 - American National Standard for Bored and Preassembled Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.2).

D. BHMA A156.3 - American National Standard for Exit Devices; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).

E. BHMA A156.4 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).

F. BHMA A156.5 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.5).

G. BHMA A156.6 - American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).

H. BHMA A156.7 - American National Standard for Template Hinge Dimensions; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.7).

I. BHMA A156.8 - American National Standard for Door Controls - Overhead Stops and Holders; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.8).

J. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).

K. BHMA A156.12 - American National Standard for Interconnected Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.12).

L. BHMA A156.13 - American National Standard for Mortise Locks & Latches; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.13).

M. BHMA A156.14 - American National Standard for Sliding & Folding Door Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2002 (ANSI/BHMA A156.14).

N. BHMA A156.15 - American National Standard for Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.15).


O. BHMA A156.16 - American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2002 (ANSI/BHMA A156.16).

P. BHMA A156.17 - American National Standard for Self Closing Hinges & Pivots; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI/BHMA A156.17).

Q. BHMA A156.18 - American National Standard for Materials and Finishes; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.18).

R. BHMA A156.20 - American National Standard for Strap and Tee Hinges and Hasps; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.20).

S. BHMA A156.21 - American National Standard for Thresholds; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.21).

T. BHMA A156.23 - American National Standard for Electromagnetic Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 2004 (ANSI/BHMA A156.23).

U. BHMA A156.24 - American National Standard for Delayed Egress Locks; Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.24).

V. DHI A115 Series - Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000.

W. DHI A115W Series - Specifications for Wood Door and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000.

X. DHI (LOCS) - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute; 2004.

Y. DHI WDHS.3 - Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; Door and Hardware Institute; 1996.

Z. ITS (DIR) - Directory of Listed Products; Intertek Testing Services NA, Inc.; current edition. AA. NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; National Fire Protection Association; 2007. AB. NFPA 101 - Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection

Association; 2006. AC. UL (BMD) - Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current edition.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and cut sheets. C. Samples: Prior to preparation of hardware schedule:

1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, closer, illustrating style, color, and finish. 2. Samples will be returned to supplier.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of concealed equipment, services, and conduit.

F. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance.

G. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Owner by security shipment direct from hardware supplier. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Standards for Fire-Rated Doors: Maintain one copy of each referenced standard on site, for use by Design Professional and Contractor.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

C. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with _____ years of experience.

D. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section.


1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section.

1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

1.09 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious

manner. D. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide five year warranty for door closers.

1.11 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Provide ten extra key lock cylinders for each master keyed group.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hinges: Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 1. Stanley Hardware: www.stanleyworks.com. 2. Substitutions per Section 01600.

B. Pivots: Dorma Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com/usa 1. Glynn-Johnson: www.glynn-johnson.com. 2. Substitution per Section 01600.

C. Lock and Latch Sets: Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com.1. 1. No substitution.

D. Mortise Locksets: Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com. 1. No substitution.

E. Push/Pulls: Ives: www.ives.com 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 3. Substitutions per Section 01600.

F. Exit Devices: Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com. 1. No substitution.

G. Closers: LCN: www.lcnclosers.com 1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com/usa. 2. Substitution per Section 01600. H. Holder/Release: DORMA 1. Substitutions per Section 06100. I. Overhead Holders/Stops: Glynn-Johnson: www.glynn-johnson.com 1. DORMA Group North America: www.dorma-usa.com/usa. 2. Substitutions per Section 01600. J. Wall, Floor Stops/Holders and Silencers:


1. Ives: www.ives.com 2. Hiawatha, Inc: www.hiawathainc.com.

3. Substitutions per Section 01600. K. Manual and Automatic Bolts: Ives: www.ives.com

1. Glynn-Johnson: www.glynn-johnson.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com.

3. Substitutions per Section 01600. L. Gasketing and Thresholds: Pemko Manufacturing Co: www.pemko.com.

1. National Guard Products, Inc: www.ngpinc.com. 2. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 3. Substitutions per Section 01600.

M. Protection Plates: Ives: www.ives.com 1. Assa Abloy McKinney: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Hager Companies: www.hagerhinge.com. 3. Substitutions per Section 01600.

N. Cylindrical Locksets: Best Access Systems: www.bestlock.com 1. No substitution. O. Locksets: Adams Rite: www.adamsrite.com 1. No substitution P. Electric Strikes: Von Duprin: www.vonduprin.com 1. No substitution Q. Sliding Door Pull: Trimco: www.trimco.com R. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. 4. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 5. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated. 6. Hardware for Smoke and Draft Control Doors (Indicated as "S" on Drawings): Provide

hardware that enables door assembly to comply with air leakage requirements of the applicable code.

7. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section.

2.04 KEYING

All locks shall be supplied with interchangeable cores keyed by the Owner.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop

drawings. B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with code and NFPA 80. D. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: As listed in

Schedule, unless otherwise noted:


1. For steel doors and frames: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames."

2. For steel doors and frames: See Section 08110. 3. For wood doors: Comply with DHI "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Wood Flush Doors." 4. Wood doors: See Section 08211. 5. Locksets: ____ inch (____ mm). 6. Push/Pulls: ____ inch (____ mm). 7. Dead Locks: ____ inch (____ mm). 8. Exit Devices: ____ inch (____ mm).


A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01400. B. Provide an Architectural Hardware Consultant to inspect installation and certify that hardware and

installation has been furnished and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.

3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.06 SCHEDULE HW SET: 01

Location Door # 01 & 02 HW SET: 02

Location Door # 03

END OF SCHEDULE

3 EA HINGE (A) BB1168 4 ½” X 4 ½” 626 1 EA SFIC CYL. CORE (D) BLDG. STANDARD 626 1 EA LOCKSET (D) 45H-7-A-3 626(interior)

690 (exterior) 1 EA CLOSER (G) 4041T ALUM 1 EA STOP (J) WS 401 626

1 SET SEAL (L) S88 BR 1 EA KICK-PLATE (M) 8400 Oil Rubbed Bronze

3 EA HINGE (A) BB1168 4 ½” X 4 ½” 695 1 EA SFIC CYL. CORE (D) BLDG. STANDARD 626 1 EA LOCKSET (D) 45H-7-A-3 690 1 EA CARD READER BY OTHERS HERS

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Glazing - 08 81 00 -1

SECTION 08 81 00

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories.


A. Section 07920 - Sealant & Caulking B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites. C. Section 08212 - Plastic Laminate Faced Wood Doors D. Section 08920 - Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall

1.03 REFERENCES

A. 16 CFR 1201 - Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ANSI Z97.1 - American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety

Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 2004. C. ASTM C 864 - Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005. D. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005. E. ASTM C 1036 - Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2001. F. ASTM C 1048 - Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated

and Uncoated Glass; 2004. G. ASTM C 1172 - Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2003. H. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a. I. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;

2005. J. ASTM E 773 - Standard Test Method for Accelerated Weathering of Sealed Insulating Glass

Units; 2001. K. ASTM E 774 - Standard Specification for the Classification of the Durability of Sealed Insulating

Glass Units; 1997. L. ASTM E 1300 - Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2004. M. ASTM E 2190 - Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation;

2002. N. GANA (GM) - GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2004. O. GANA (SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 1990. P. GANA (LGDG) - Laminated Glazing Reference Manual; Glass Association of North America;

2006. Q. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating

Glass Manufacturers Association; 2004. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder and air

barrier: 1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections. 2. To utilize the inner pane of multiple pane sealed units for the continuity of the air barrier

and vapor retarder seal. 3. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly

from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant. B. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting

normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with Chapter 24, California Building Code, 2001. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness.


2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of glazing materials.

3. Thicknesses listed are minimum. 1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01340 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental

characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size of glass and plastic units,

showing coloration and design. E. Samples: Submit 1-inch (25 mm) long bead of glazing sealant. Color to be selected. F. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.


A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing

installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with

documented experience. 1.07 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING

A. Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C). B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01740 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for sealed glass units from seal failure,

interpane dusting or misting, and replacement of same. C. Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for delamination of laminated glass and

replacement of same. 1.10 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide two of each glass size and each glass type, of insulated glass units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAT GLASS MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com. 2. Pilkington Building Products North America: www.pilkington.com. 3. ACH Glass/Versalux: www.versaluxglass.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

INTERIOR:

B. Safety Glass (Type I): Clear; fully tempered with horizontal tempering.

1. Laminated with 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick plastic interlayer; comply with ASTM C 1172


2. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select) and ASTM C 1048.

3. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II. 4. Comply with ANSI Z97.1. 5. Where glazing is to be installed in fire-rated partition, provide glazing that is also fire-

protection rated in accordance with applicable code. 6. 1/4", 6 mm minimum thick. 7. Provide this type of glazing in the locations required by code.

a. Glazed lites in doors except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors.

C. 1" Insulated Tempered Glass (Type II): Clear, fully tempered. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing

select). 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048. 3. 1”, 25mm insulated

D. Clear Float Glass (Type III): Clear, fully tempered. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing

select). 2. Comply with ASTM C 1048. 3. 3/8”, 10mm thick where indicated on drawings

E. Acid-Etched Laminated Glass (Type IV) by: Vision Glass 1. Distributor: Goldray Industries Ltd., 800.640.3709 2. ¼” thick, tempered, Style # S10663 Royal Satin 3. Comply with ASTM.

EXTERIOR:

F. 1” Insulated Glass Unit (Type 1)

1. By: PPG Industries, 888.774.4332 2. Solarban 60, (2) Starphire/Starphire (1/4” / 1/2"AS / 1/4") 3. Comply with ASTM G. Acid-Etched Dual Glazing (Type 2) by: Walker Glass Co. LTD. 1. Distributor: PPG Industries, 888.774.4332 2. 1/4" thick, tempered acid etched (interior face), 1/2" air space, 1/4" thick tempered

Solarban 60 Starphire. 3. Comply with ASTM.

2.02 GLAZING COMPOUNDS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Bostik, Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. GE Silicones: www.gesilicones.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals, Inc: www.chemrex.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. Glazing Putty: Polymer modified latex recommended by manufacturer for outdoor use, knife grade consistency; custom color.

C. Polyurethane Sealant (Type 2): Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35; color to be selected.

D. Silicone Sealant (Type 3): Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; clear color.

2.03 GLAZING ACCESSORIES

A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100 mm) x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.


B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco, Inc: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

D. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume of 2 percent, designed for compression of 25 percent to affect an air barrier and vapor retarder seal. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Saint-Gobain Performance Plastics: www.plastics.saint-gobain.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

E. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C 864 Option I.

F. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. G. Smoke Removal Unit Targets: Adhesive targets affixed to glass to identify glass units intended

for removal for smoke control. 2.04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTS

A. Provide shop inspection and testing for safety glass. B. Test samples in accordance with ANSI Z97.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may

impede moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING)

A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners.

B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain full contact.

C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact.

3.04 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)

A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with butyl sealant.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners.


C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact.

D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.

E. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.05 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (PREFORMED TAPE AND SEALANT)

A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, 3/16 inch (5 mm) below sight line. Seal corners by butting tape and dabbing with butyl sealant.

B. Apply heel bead of butyl sealant along intersection of permanent stop with frame ensuring full perimeter seal between glass and frame to complete the continuity of the air and vapor seal.

C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from corners.

D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape and heel bead of sealant with sufficient pressure to attain full contact at perimeter of pane or glass unit.

E. Install removable stops, with spacer strips inserted between glazing and applied stops below sight line. Place glazing tape on glazing pane or unit with tape flush with sight line.

F. Fill gap between glazing and stop with sealant to depth equal to bite of frame on glazing, but not more than 3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line.

G. Apply cap bead type sealant along void between the stop and the glazing, to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.06 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR WET METHOD (SEALANT AND SEALANT)

A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points and install glazing pane or unit. B. Install removable stops with glazing centered in space by inserting spacer shims both sides at

24 inch (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with sealant to depth of bite on glazing, but not more than

3/8 inch (9 mm) below sight line to ensure full contact with glazing and continue the air and vapor seal.

D. Apply sealant to uniform line, flush with sight line. Tool or wipe sealant surface smooth.

3.07 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR BUTT GLAZED METHOD (SEALANT ONLY)

A. Temporarily brace glass in position for duration of glazing process. Mask edges of glass at adjoining glass edges and between glass edges and framing members.

B. Temporarily secure a small diameter non-adhering foamed rod on back side of joint. C. Apply sealant to open side of joint in continuous operation; thoroughly fill the joint without

displacing the foam rod. Tool the sealant surface smooth to concave profile. D. Permit sealant to cure then remove foam backer rod. Apply sealant to opposite side, tool

smooth to concave profile. E. Remove masking tape.

3.08 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE)

A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line.


C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous

contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape.

3.09 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT)

A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight line.



C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.

D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch (600 mm) intervals, 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line.

E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and level line.

F. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.10 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET METHOD (COMPOUND AND COMPOUND)

A. Install glazing resting on setting blocks. Install applied stop and center pane by use of spacer shims at 24 inch (600 mm) centers, kept 1/4 inch (6 mm) below sight line.

B. Locate and secure glazing pane using glazers' clips. C. Fill gaps between glazing and stops with glazing compound until flush with sight line. Tool

surface to straight line.

3.11 INSTALLATION - PLASTIC FILM

A. Install plastic film with adhesive, applied in accordance with film manufacturer's instructions. B. Place without air bubbles, creases or visible distortion. C. Fit tight to glass perimeter with razor cut edge

. 3.12 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation of their products.

B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions. 3.13 CLEANING

A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.14 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

3.15 SCHEDULE

A. Aluminum Windows: Type 1. B. Steel Windows: Type 4, exterior wet method with Type 2 compound. C. Metal-Framed Storefronts and Curtain Wall: Type 2, thicknesses required to comply with

performance requirements, exterior dry method. D. Flush Wood Doors:

1. Fire-rated: Firelite glass, interior wet method. 2. Interior: Type 1, 6 mm thick, interior wet method.

E. Stile and Rail Wood Doors: 1. Interior: Type 1, 6 mm thick, interior wet method.

F. Glass Wall: 1. Interior: Type 5

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing - 09 22 16 -1

SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-structural metal studs for wall assemblies. B. Area separation and shaft wall framing products.


A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. C. Section 07 21 26 - Blown Insulation. D. Section 07 84 13 - Penetration Firestopping. E. Section 09 21 16.23 - Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. STM A 653 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)

or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. 2. ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas

of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. 3. ASTM B 633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on

Iron and Steel. 4. ASTM C 645- Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing

Members. 5. ASTM C 754 - Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing

Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products. 6. ASTM C 847 - Standard Specification for Metal Lath. 7. ASTM C 1063 - Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to

Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster (Plaster and Stucco Accessories).

8. ASTM C 1396 - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 9. STM C 1513 - Standard Specification for Steel Tapping Screws for Cold-

Formed Steel Framing Connections. 10. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials. 11. ASTM E 90 - Standard Test Method for Lavatory Measurements of Airborne

Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. 12. ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials. 13. ASTM E 413 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.

B. GA - 600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. C. AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural

Members. D. AISI - Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing General Provisions.

1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Design steel in accordance with American Iron and Steel Institute Publication "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members", except as otherwise shown or specified.

B. Design loads: As indicated on the Architectural Drawings. 5 PSF minimum design lateral load is required for interior walls by the building code. Shaftwall framing minimum design lateral load is typically 5 - 15 PSF.

C. Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following:


1. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/120. 2. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/180. 3. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/240. 4. Interior Non-Load Bearing Walls: Lateral deflection of: L/360.

D. Design framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tolerances.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product specified, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Manufacturer's certification of product compliance with codes and standards.

C. Sustainable Design Submittals: 1. LEED v4 Submittals:

a. MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Environmental Product Declarations: Provide Type III EPDs from manufacturers that have third-party verified environmental impact data.

b. MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Sourcing of Raw Materials: Provide recycled content of products showing the percentage of postconsumer and/or preconsumer recycled content by weight and its associated cost.

c. MR Credit: Building Product Disclosure and Optimization - Material Ingredients: Provide Health Product Declarations (HPDs) from manufacturers with full disclosure of known hazards in compliance with the Health Product Declaration Open Standard.

d. MR Credit: Construction and Demolition Waste Management: Include a statement indicating percentage of materials diverted from disposal in landfills and incinerators, and where recyclable resources are directed back to the manufacturing process.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced in performing work of this section who

has specialized in installation of work similar to that required for this project. B. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project

requirements, substrate conditions, and manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that

incorporate non-structural steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by, and displaying a classification label from, an independent testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. 1. Construct fire-resistance rated partitions in compliance with tested assembly

requirements indicated on the Drawings. 2. Rated assemblies to be substantiated from applicable testing using the

proposed products, by Contractor. D. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and

construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for

installation per requirements of AISI's "Code of Standard Practice". B. Notify manufacturer of damaged materials received prior to installing. C. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with

identification labels intact.



A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer, Metal Framing: ClarkDietrich Building Systems, 9100

Centre Pointe Dr. Suite 210, West Chester, OH 45069. Tel: (513) 870-1100. Fax: (513) 870-1300. E-mail:[email protected] ; Web: www.clarkdietrich.com. 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 4601 North Point Boulevard, Baltimore, MD

21219. Tel: (410) 477-4000. 2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 4200 Cedar Blvd., Baytown, TX 77520. Tel:

(281) 383-1617. 3. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 780 James P. Casey Road, Bristol, CT 06010.

Tel: (866) 921-0023. 4. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 6510 General Drive, Riverside, CA 92509. Tel:

(951) 360-3500. 5. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 1685 Tide Court, Woodland, CA 95776. Tel:

(530) 668-1987. 6. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 501 Steward Road, Suite 100, Rochelle, IL

61068. Tel: (800) 659-0745. 7. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 91-300 Hanua Street, Kapolei, HI 96707. Tel:

(808) 682-5747. 8. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 330 Greenwood Place, McDonough, GA

30253. Tel: (678) 304-5500. 9. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 10340 Denton Drive, Dallas, TX 75220. Tel:

(214) 350-1716. 10. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 38020 Pulp Drive, Dade City, FL 33523. Tel:

(352) 518-4400. 11. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 1985 N. River Road NE, Warren, OH 44483.

Tel: (330) 372-5564. 12. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; 1455 Ridge Road, Vienna, OH 44473. Tel:

(330) 372-4014. B. Substitutions: Not permitted. C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section

01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of

pre-consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C645 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C645; ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120), Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M,G40 (Z120) or DiamondPluscoating; roll-formed from steel meeting mechanical and chemical requirements of ASTM A 1003 with a zinc-based coating. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. a. Coatings shall demonstrate equivalent corrosion resistance with an

evaluation report acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

C. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645. 1. Non-Structural Studs: Cold-formed galvanized steel C-studs, ClarkDietrich

ProSTUD drywall studs as per ASTM C645 for conditions indicated below: a. Flange Size: 1-1/4 inch (32mm). b. Web Depth: As specified on Drawings. c. Web Depth: 1-5/8 inches (41 mm). d. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm).



e. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm). f. Web Depth: 4 inches (102 mm). g. Web Depth: 6 inches (152 mm). h. Member Description: ProSTUD 25 (25ga equivalent drywall stud) 50 ksi.

Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0150 inches (0.3810 mm). Minimum Design Thickness: 0.0158 inches (0.4013 mm).

i. Member Description: ProSTUD 20 (20ga equivalent drywall stud) 65 ksi. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.019 inches (0.4826 mm). Minimum Design Thickness: 0.020 inches (0.508 mm).

2. Non-Structural Track: Cold-formed galvanized steel runner tracks, ClarkDietrich ProTRAK drywall track, in conformance with ASTM C 645 for conditions indicated below: a. Flange Size: 1-1/4 inch (32mm). b. Web Depth: Track web to match stud web size. c. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: Track thickness to match wall stud

hickness or as per design. 3. "EQ" (Equivalent Gauge Thickness) Steel Studs and Runners: Members that

can show certified third party testing with gypsum board in accordance with ICC ES AC86 - 2010 (Approved May 2012) need not meet the minimum thickness limitation or minimum section properties set forth in ASTM C 645. The submission of an evaluation report is acceptable to show conformance to this requirement.

4. Steel Framing Stud and Track Wall System: Self-locking metal studs, and telescoping stud extensions and tracks. a. TRAKLOC Steel Framing System by ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

1) TRAKLOC Fixed Length Stud (TLF). 2) TRAKLOC Adjustable Stud (TLA). 3) TRAKLOC Elevator Stud (TLE). 4) TRAKLOC Track (TTS).

b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). c. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0238 inch (0.60mm). d. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.75 mm). e. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). f. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). g. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm). h. Web Depth: 4 inches (102 mm). i. Web Depth: 6 inches (152 mm).

5. Steel Framing Stud and Deflection Track Wall System: Self-locking metal studs with telescoping stud extension with knockout in each flange to allow for 1 inch (25 mm) of deflection for fire-rated head-of-wall deflection system. a. TRAKLOC Stud Deflection Assembly.

1) TRAKLOC (TLD). b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). c. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0238 inch (0.60 mm). d. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.75 mm). e. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm). f. Web Depth: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). g. Web Depth: 3-5/8 inches (92 mm). h. Web Depth: 4 inches (102 mm). i. Web Depth: 6 inches (152 mm).

D. Slotted Deflection Track: ClarkDietrich Building Systems MaxTrak or BlazeFrame; cold-formed galvanized steel in conformance with AISI's Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Members. 1. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.0329 inches (0.84 mm). 3. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 18 gauge, 0.0428 inches (1.09 mm). 4. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.0538 inches (1.37 mm). 5. Minimum Delivered Thickness: 14 gauge, 0.0677 inches (1.72 mm).


6. Standard leg 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). 7. Standard Vertical Slot of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in leg. 8. Minimum yield strength of 50 ksi in 16 gauge (1.37 mm) and heavier and

minimum yield strength of 33 ksi in 18 gauge (1.09 mm) and lighter.

E. Furring Channel: Cold-formed galvanized steel in conformance with AISI's North American Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; ClarkDietrich Building Systems furring channel: 1. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Designation: 25 gauge, 0.0179 inches (0.45 mm) sheet thickness, 7/8 inches

(22 mm) height, 2-23/32 inches (69 mm) width. 3. Designation: 20 gauge, 0.0296 inches (0.75 mm) sheet thickness, 7/8 inches

(22 mm) height, 2-23/32 inches (69 mm) width. 4. Designation: 25 gauge, 0.0179 inches (0.45 mm) sheet thickness, 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm) height, 2-11/16 7/8 inches (68 mm) width. 5. Designation: 20 gauge, 0.0296 inches (0.75 mm) sheet thickness, 1-1/2 inches

(38 mm) height, 2-11/16 inches (68 mm) width.

F. U Channel: Cold-formed galvanized steel; ClarkDietrich Building Systems U-Channel: 1. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Designation: galvanized, 16 gauge, 0.0538 inches (1.37 mm) steel thickness,

3/4 inches (19.1 mm) size. 3. Designation: galvanized, 16 gauge, 0.0538 inches (1.37 mm) steel thickness, 1

1/2 inches (38 mm) size. 4. Designation: galvanized, 16 gauge, 0.0538 inches (1.37 mm) steel thickness, 2

inches (51 mm) size.

G. Rough Openings: Galvanized steel one-piece header and jamb studs meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C 754; ClarkDietrich RedHeader PRO: 1. Designation and size as indicated on drawings. 2. Header flange length: 3 inches (76mm). 3. Header flange length: 3-1/2 inches (89mm). 4. Jamb flange length: 3 inches (76mm). 5. Jamb flange length: 3-1/2 inches (89mm). 6. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.0329 inch. 7. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 18 gauge, 0.0428 inch.

H. H-Studs and C-Runner: Cold-formed galvanized steel, ClarkDietrich Building Systems H-studs and C-Runner: 1. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Designation: Unhemmed H-stud; 2 inches (51 mm), 10-foot (3 m) length, 25

gauge, 0.0179 inches (0.45 mm). 3. Deflection Limitation at 10-foot (3000 mm): L/240.

I. CT Shaftwall Studs and J-Tabbed Track: Cold-formed galvanized steel, approved for the use intended based on a current Evaluation Report; ClarkDietrich Building Systems CT Shaftwall Studs and J-Tabbed Track. 1. Designation and size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Designation: CT Shaftwall Stud with J-Tabbed Track, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) leg. 3. Designation: CT Shaftwall Stud with J-Tabbed Track, 3 inches (76 mm) leg. 4. Size: 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). 5. Size: 4 inches (102 mm). 6. Size: 6 inches (152 mm). 7. Sheet Thickness: 25 gauge. 8. Sheet Thickness: 20 gauge. 9. Sheet Thickness: 18 gauge. 10. Deflection Limitation: L/120. 11. Deflection Limitation: L/180. 12. Deflection Limitation: L/240. 13. Deflection Limitation: L/360.


J. Metal Trims: Cold-formed galvanized steel. 1. Type and Size as indicated on the drawings. 2. Type: J Trim.

a. Designation: M400, 3/8 inches (9.5 mm) size, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) leg. b. Designation: M401, 1/2 inches (12.7 mm) size, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) leg. c. Designation: M402, 5/8 inches (15.9 mm) size, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) leg.

3. Type: U Trim. a. Designation: 200A, 1/2 inches (12.7 mm) size, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) leg. b. Designation: 200A, 5/8 inches (15.9 mm) size, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) leg.

4. Type: L Trim. a. Designation: 200B, 1/2 inches (12.7 mm) size, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) leg. b. Designation: 200B, 5/8 inches (15.9 mm) size, 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) leg.

K. Drywall Corner Bead: Cold-formed galvanized steel sheet. 1. Type: 103 Deluxe. 2. Flange Length: 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

L. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Galvanized Sheet Steel:

a. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. b. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). c. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.75 mm).

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ClarkDietrich Building Systems; Backing Plate.

M. Backing Plate: Proprietary fire-retardant-treated wood blocking and bracing in width indicated. 1. ClarkDietrich Building Systems Danback Fire-Retardant Treated Wood

Backing Plate D16F. 2. ClarkDietrich Building Systems Danback Fire-Retardant Treated Wood

Backing Plate D24F.

N. Channel Bridging and Bracing: Pre-notched steel bar, 7/8 inch by 7/8 inch by 50 inches (22.2 mm by 22.2 mm by 1270 mm), 0.0329-inch (0.84-mm) minimum base-steel thickness. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ClarkDietrich Building

Systems; Spazzer 9200 Bridging and Spacing Bar (SPZD).

O. Channel Bridging: 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) base-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide flanges. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ClarkDietrich Building

Systems; Cold-Formed U-Channel. a. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. b. Depth: 3/4 inch (19.1 mm). c. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). d. Depth: 2 inches (50.8 mm). e. Clip Angle: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

ClarkDietrich Building Systems; EasyClip U-Series Clip Angle or not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) thick, galvanized steel. 1) Clip Angle: U543. 2) Clip Angle: U545. 3) Clip Angle: U547.

P. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmissions: 1. Provide ClarkDietrich Building Systems; RC Deluxe (RCSD) Resilient Channel.

Q. Radius Framing: Steel sheet runner for non-load-bearing curves, bends, variable radii and arches using expandable ribbon technology.


1. Provide ClarkDietrich Building Systems Interior Contour Track. 2. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm). 4. Minimum Base-Steel Thickness: 0.0259 inch (0.66 mm). 5. Size: 2-1/2 inches. 6. Size: 3-5/8 inches. 7. Size: 6 inches. 8. Size: As indicated on Drawings.

R. Framing Component Accessories: Provide the following accessories as required for a complete system. 1. EasyClip Clip Angle. 2. Angles. 3. Backing Strip.

S. Drywall Penetration Barrier Mesh: Supply and install Barrier Mesh steel expanded metal panels as a penetration barrier behind gypsum wallboard walls and/or ceilings, where noted on the drawings. 1. Barrier Mesh supplied by ClarkDietrich Building Systems.

a. BM75-9F Maximum Security. b. BM50-13F Maximum Security. c. BM15-9F Medium Security. d. BM75-13F Medium Security. e. BM10-16F Minimum Security.

2. ClarkDietrich Barrier Mesh Clips: Barrier Mesh shall be attached to framing members using ClarkDietrich Barrier Mesh Clips and the appropriate threaded fasteners.

T. Fasteners: Self-drilling, self-tapping screws; steel, complying with ASTM C 1513; galvanized coating, plated or oil-phosphate coated complying with ASTM B 633 as needed for required corrosion resistance.

U. Touch-Up Paint: Complying with ASTM A 780 - Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings. Zinc rich, containing 95-percent metallic zinc.

V. Non-Hardening, Flexible Sealant: Latex acrylic.

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Formed Steel: Complying with ASTM C 645; unless indicated otherwise. B. Protective Coating: Comply with ASTM C645; ASTM A 653/A 653M G40 (Z120),

Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M,G40 (Z120) or DiamondPluscoating; roll-formed from steel meeting mechanical and chemical requirements of ASTM A 1003 with a zinc-based coating. A40 galvannealed products are not acceptable. 1. Coatings shall demonstrate equivalent corrosion resistance with an evaluation

report acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

2.4 FABRICATI0N A. General: Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. B. Fabricate panels square, with components attached in a manner so as to prevent

racking or distortion. C. Cut all framing components squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as

required for an angular fit against abutting members. Hold members positively in place until properly fastened.

D. Fasteners: Fasten components using self-tapping screws or welding.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to installation, inspect previous work of all other trades. Verify that all work is

complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly proceed in strict accordance with framing shop drawings.


B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 ERECTION A. Install cold-formed framing in accordance with requirements of ASTM C 754. B. Framing Installation:

1. Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with approved drawings.

2. Handle and lift prefabricated panels in a manner to not cause distortion in any member.

3. Anchor runner track securely to the supporting structure. Install concrete anchors only after full compressive strength has been achieved.

4. Butt all track joints. Securely anchor abutting pieces of track to a common structural element, or splice them together.

5. Align and plumb studs, and securely attach to the flanges or webs of both upper and lower tracks.

6. Attach wall stud bridging when required in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Space bridging rows according to manufacturer's recommendations.

7. Provided temporary bracing until erection is completed. 8. Where indicated in the drawings, provide for structural vertical movement using

means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 9. Cut all framing components square for attachment to perpendicular members

or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. C. Shaftwall Framing Installation:

1. Lay out as shown in construction drawings. Secure J-Tabbed Track at perimeter framing and plumb to ceiling, floor and sides. Attach with suitable fasteners, spaced not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. Apply a bead of non-hardening, flexible sealant to the perimeter.

2. Preplan the stud layout 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. and adjust the spacing at either end so the end studs will not fall closer than 12 inches (305 mm) from the end.

3. Erect the first 1-inch (25.4 mm) shaft wall liner panel, cut 3/4 inch (19 mm) less than the total height of the framed section. Plumb the panel against the web of the J-Tabbed Track and bend out tabs in J-Tabbed Track to secure panels in place. If tabs are not used, screw the liner panel to the J-Tabbed Track.

4. Insert CT Shaftwall Stud, cut 3/4 inch (19 mm) less than the overall height, into the top and bottom J-Tabbed Tracks and fit tightly over the previously installed 1 inch (25.4 mm) panel. Allow equal clearance between top and bottom J-Tabbed Track.

5. Install the next 1-inch (25.4 mm) shaft wall liner panel inside the J-Tabbed Tracks and within the tabs of the CT Shaftwall stud.

6. Progressively install succeeding studs and panels as described above until the wall section is enclosed. The final panel section may be secured with tabs from the J-Tabbed Track at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c.

7. Where wall heights exceed the standard or available length of shaft wall liner panels, the gypsum panels may be cut and stacked with joints occurring within the top or bottom third points of the wall. Joints of adjacent panels should be alternately staggered to prevent a continuous horizontal joint. Any butt joints must be factory edge to factory edge with pieces pushed tightly together. Gypsum panels must engage a minimum of 2 tabs of the CT Shaftwall Stud.

8. CT Shaftwall Studs cannot be spliced. They must be installed full height, one piece. J-Tabbed Track when not attached of the structure shall not be spliced.

9. Do not attach J-Tabbed Track to the CT Shaftwall Studs. 10. For doors, ducts or other large penetrations or openings, install J-Tabbed

Track as perimeter framing. Use 20 gauge, 0.0329 inches (0.83 mm) track with a 3 inches (76 mm) back leg for elevator doors and block cavity with 12 inches (305 mm) wide gypsum filler strips for doors exceeding 7-foot (2 m) height.

D. Drywall Penetration Barrier Mesh Installation:


1. Barrier Mesh sheets may be installed with diamond running in direction most suitable.

2. ClarkDietrich BM-Clips shall be installed to secure the mesh to the framing members.

3. Mesh joints occurring on framing members may either join staggered or butt together.

4. It is acceptable to overlap mesh joints to achieve tie-in. 5. BM sheets shall join, begin and terminate on a framing member. 6. BM sheets not joining on framing member shall be wire tied with 18GA steel tie

wire. 7. Wire tying shall be no less frequent than the installation of Mesh Clips.

3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Gypsum Board - 09 29 00 -1

SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 061600 "Sheathing" for gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 2. Section 092216 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural framing and suspension

systems that support gypsum board panels.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For the following products:

1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- (300-mm-) long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. (9

sq. m) in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following:

a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations. b. Each texture finish indicated.

2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed surfaces for review of mockups.

3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather,

condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board

manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold

damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Assemblies: Provide and install moisture- and mold-resistant

glass-mat gypsum wallboard products with moisture-resistant surfaces complying with ASTM C 1658 and ASTM C 1177 where indicated on Drawings and in all locations which might be subject to moisture exposure during construction.

B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

C. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: For ceiling and wall assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly and complying with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Recycled Content of Gypsum Panel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of

preconsumer recycled content not less than 10% percent. B. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and

that correspond with support system indicated.

2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each type of gypsum board and related products is

based on Georgia-Pacific Gypsum products named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of the following: 1. USG Corporation 2. American Gypsum 3. National Gypsum Company 4. CertainTeed Corp. 5. Lafarge North America Inc. 6. PABCO Gypsum

B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus High-Performance Interior Panel

2. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Fireguard High-

Performance Interior Panel 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more

flexible than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock FlexRoc Gypsum Board". 2. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

E. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.


1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus High-Performance Interior Panel


F. Foil-Backed Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Core: [3/8 inch (9.5 mm), regular type] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [Type C as required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings].

2. Long Edges: Tapered.

G. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, Level 3. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensArmor Plus Abuse-Resistant Panel. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

H. Impact-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus Impact-Resistant Panel".


I. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-

resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific-P Gypsum; "[DensArmor Plus High-Performance

Interior Panel] [DensArmor Plus Fireguard High-Performance Interior Panel] [DensArmor Plus Fireguard C High-Performance Interior Panel]

2. Core: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), type C] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type C].

3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD

A. Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive

capability. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific

Gypsum; "[DensArmor Plus Fireguard C High-Performance Interior Panel] or a comparable product by one of the following: a. USG Corporation b. American Gypsum c. National Gypsum Company d. CertainTeed Corp. e. Lafarge North America Inc. f. PABCO Gypsum

2. Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

B. Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both

sides. Specifically designed for interior use. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus. 2. Core: [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type C] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), abuse

resistant] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), impact resistant] and as indicated on the drawings 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 4. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.


C. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing polymer core. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

a. National Gypsum Company; Sound Break. b. Quiet Solution, Quiet Rock.

2. Core: [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] [1-3/8 inch (35 mm), regular type] and as indicated on the drawings.

3. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Skim-Coated Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured with a factory-applied skim coat. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,

a. Lafarge North America Inc.; Rapid Deco L5. 2. Core: [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X] an as indicated on the

drawings. 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.5 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Soffit Board" or a comparable product by one of the following: a. USG Corporation b. American Gypsum c. National Gypsum Company d. CertainTeed Corp. e. Lafarge North America Inc. f. PABCO Gypsum

2. Core: [As indicated] [1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type] [5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X].

B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific

Gypsum; "DensGlass Sheathing" or a comparable product by one of the following: a. USG Corporation. b. CertainTeed Corp. c. National Gypsum Company. d. Core: As indicated on the drawings.

2. Size: [48 by 96 inches (1219 by 2438 mm)] [48 by 108 inches (1219 by 2743 mm)] [48 by 120 inches (1219 by 3048 mm)] [1200 by 2400 mm] [1200 by 2750 mm] [1200 by 3050 mm].

C. Glass-Mat Gypsum Interior Board: ASTM C 1658/1658M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Georgia-Pacific

Gypsum; "DensArmor Plus" or a comparable product by one of the following: a. National Gypsum Company.

2. Core: As indicated on the drawings 3. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177: 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet]. 4. Weight: 1.9 lb/sq. ft. 5. Edges: Square. 6. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Racking Strength (Ultimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not less than 540 pounds per

square foot, dry. 8. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 80 lbf, parallel. 9. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C1177): Not more than 2/8 inch. 10. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not less than 23 perms.


11. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.56. 12. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufactured. 13. Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, UL Environmental GREENGUARD 3-week protocol):

Will not support microbial growth. 14. Acceptable Products:

a. 1/2 inch DensGlass Sheathing, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. E. Fire-Rated Fiberglass-Mat Faced Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1177, Type X:

1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Width: 4 feet. 3. Length: [8 feet] [9 feet] [10 feet]. 4. Weight: 2.5 lb/sq. ft. 5. Edges: Square. 6. Surfacing: Fiberglass mat on face, back, and long edges. 7. Racking Strength (Ultimate, not design value) (ASTM E72): Not less than 654 pounds per

square foot, dry. 8. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C1177): 100 lbf, parallel. 9. Humidified Deflection (ASTM C1177): Not more than 1/8 inch. 10. Permeance (ASTM E96): Not less than 17 perms. 11. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.67. 12. Mold Resistance (ASTM D3273): 10, in a test as manufactured. 13. Microbial Resistance (ASTM D6329, UL Environmental GREENGUARD 3-week protocol):

Will not support microbial growth. 14. Acceptable Products:

a. 5/8 inch DensGlass Fireguard Sheathing, Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.

2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet 2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. Expansion (Control) Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip

covering slot opening. C. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Flannery c. Pittcon Industries

2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5.

3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified

2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.


2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Exterior Glass Mat Gypsum Soffit: Fiberglass mesh. 4. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wallboard: 10-by-10 fiberglass meh. 5. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 fiberglass mesh. 6. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with

other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use

setting-type taping compound. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Sandable Setting

Compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim

flanges, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Sandable Setting

Compound, ToughRock Ready Mix All-Purpose Joint Compound. b. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Sandable Setting

Compound, ToughRock Ready Mix All-Purpose Joint Compound, ToughRock Ready Mix Topping Joint Compound.

4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Sandable Setting


5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use [setting-type, sandable topping compound] [drying-type, all-purpose compound. a. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Sandable Setting


D. Joint Compound for Exterior Soffit Applications: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; "ToughRock Setting Compound." 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable

topping compound. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer.

E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel

manufacturer. 2. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.

2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and

manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum

panels to continuous substrate. 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50g/L or less when calculated according to

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California

Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to

0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel

manufacturer. D. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced

by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.


1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content of Blankets: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer

recycled content not less than 10% percent. E. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant

complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. b. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. c. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sealant GSC. d. Pecora Corporation; [AC-20 FTR] [AIS-919].

2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

3. Acoustical joint sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

F. Thermal Insulation: As indicated on the drawings. G. Vapor Retarder: As indicated on the drawings.

2.9 FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer.

Part 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer

present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold

damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid

abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings,

coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. (0.7 sq. m) in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs

and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- (6.4- to 9.5-mm-) wide joints to install sealant.


G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage.

J. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

K. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:

1. Wallboard Type: As indicated on drawings. 2. Type X As indicated on drawings. 3. Ceiling Type: As indicated on drawings. 4. Foil-Backed Type: As indicated on drawings. 5. Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on drawings. 6. Impact-Resistant Type: As indicated on drawings. 7. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: As indicated on drawings. 8. Type C: As indicated on drawings. 9. Glass-Mat Interior Type: As indicated on drawings. 10. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on drawings.

B. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of

panels. b. Usually retain first subparagraph below if vertical application of panels is specified.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. 4. Locate edge joints over furring members. 5. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches (400 mm) minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.

3. On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.


D. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate

(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels until fastening adhesive has set.

E. Curved Surfaces: 1. Install panels horizontally (perpendicular to supports) and unbroken, to extent possible,

across curved surface plus 12-inch- (300-mm-) long straight sections at ends of curves and tangent to them.

2. For double-layer construction, fasten base layer to studs with screws 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Center gypsum board face layer over joints in base layer, and fasten to studs with screws spaced 12 inches (300 mm) o.c.

3.4 APPLYING EXTERIOR GYPSUM PANELS FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS A. Apply panels perpendicular to supports, with end joints staggered and located over supports.

1. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) open space where panels abut other construction or structural penetrations.

2. Fasten with corrosion-resistant screws.

3.5 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation

instructions and install at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile]. Install with 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at [showers, tubs, and where indicated] [locations indicated to receive tile].

C. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.6 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners

used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints [at locations indicated on Drawings] [according to ASTM C 840

and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect]. C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:

1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners [unless otherwise indicated]. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use [at outside corners] [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 3. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] <Insert requirements>. 4. L-Bead: Use [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 5. U-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] [where indicated] <Insert requirements>. 6. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.

D. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners. 2. LC-Bead: Use [at exposed panel edges] <Insert requirements>.

E. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations [indicated on Drawings] <Insert requirements>.

3.7 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,

fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints[, rounded or beveled edges,] and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not

intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to

ASTM C 840:


1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: [Panels that are substrate for tile] [Panels that are substrate for acoustical tile]

[Where indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. 3. Level 3 is suitable for surfaces receiving medium- or heavy-textured finishes before painting

or heavy wallcoverings where lighting conditions are not critical. 4. Level 3: [Where indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. 5. Level 4: [At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated] <Insert

locations>. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

6. Level 5: [Where indicated on Drawings] <Insert locations>. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

E. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Panel: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as exposed soffit board.

F. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.8 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces

receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a

uniform texture[ matching approved mockup and] free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.9 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other

non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,

discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Ceramic Tiling - 09 30 00 -1

SECTION 09 30 00 CERAMIC TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services necessary for and reasonably

incidental to complete the tile work as shown on the drawings or specified. B. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section.

C. Related sections 1. Division 7, sealing expansion joints and other joints in tile work (joint sealant types,

colors and manufacturers to be specified by Architect). 07920 2. Division 3, Concrete. 03300

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

Comply with current editions and applicable Specifications of the following:

1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). 3. Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.


A. Provide tile materials of each type, color and finish from SpecCeramics, Inc. MBE. Provide

setting, grouting and related materials of each type, color and finish obtained from one source.

B. Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Tile contractor, by commencing the work of this section, assumes overall responsibility to

assure that all assemblies, components and parts shown or required within the work of this section comply with contract documents and are compatible with each other and with the conditions and expected use.

D. Qualified Labor (Because tile is a permanent finish, the lowest bid should not be the deciding factor but rather, but who is the most qualified to perform the scope of the work being specified. See TCNA Handbook for a list of recognized programs). Engage an installer with a minimum of five (5) commercial tile installations similar in material, design and scope to that indicated.

E. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to tile installation, conduct a pre-installation project meeting. Contractor, Subcontractor, Material Suppliers, Architect and Owner representative shall be notified of the meeting.

F. Field Mock-Up: Recommended scaled to appropriate size of the scope of the work ______ sq ft (Insert) and will be reviewed for joint quality, color range, pattern and workmanship.

G. Extra Stock: Furnish extra stock of quantity equal to ________% of amount installed, in full-size units, for each type, color, size and finish of tile.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Verification Samples: Submit the following for each type, color, size, and finish included in

the work. 1. Full size tile and trim shapes, (indicate number of pieces required). 2. Grout color samples. 3. Sealant color samples or Prefabricated Joint/Transition Strip Samples

B. Product and Installation Data: 1. Porcelain tile manufacturer's product and technical data indicating compliance with

applicable standards.


2. Master Grade Certificates, should they be applicable, for each type of tile issued by tile manufacturer and signed by the installer, only available after the material has shipped from the manufacturer.

3. Mortar and grout manufacturer's technical data sheets indicating suitability for the installation specified and compliance with applicable standards.

4. Sealant or prefabricated joint manufacturer's product and technical data.

1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL A. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of material

manufacturers for environmental conditions before, during and after installation. B. Maintain environmental conditions and protect work during and after installation to comply

with referenced standards and manufacturer's printed recommendations. C. Maintain minimum and maximum temperature limits as recommended by manufacturers. D. Protect adjacent surfaces during progress of the work in this section. E. Illuminate the work area during installation providing the same level and angle of illumination

as will be available for final inspection. The use grazing or cove type lighting where lights are located either at the wall/ceiling interface, or mounted directly to the wall prompts the light to strike the tile finish at a straight down angle, creating unwanted shadows from grout lines giving the tile layout an un-flat irregular appearance. Installing overhead lighting at a wide downward angle 18”-24” away from the tiled wall will provide a flatter more uniform appearance to the tiled surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Furnish tile complying with "Standard/First Grade" requirements per ANSI A137.1 - 2012, or equivalent international standards, for types of tile indicated.

B. Comply with ANSI Standard for Tile Installation Material and current Tile Council of North America (TCNA) Handbook for products and materials indicated for setting and grouting.

2.2 TILE

A. Unglazed and glazed porcelain tile shall be standard/first grade quality as supplied by SpecCeramics, Inc . in Fullerton, CA, and shall conform to the requirements of ANSI A137.1 - 2012. 1. Size: Porcelain and ceramic tile shall be manufactured to specific size after firing and

shall be Nominal -_________________ (Insert). All measurements are in inches unless otherwise specified.

2. Type: Porcelain tile shall be_________________(Insert) 3. Thickness: Porcelain tile shall be manufactured to specific thickness after firing and shall

be nominal _________________ ([3.0 mm or greater] for large unit tile or [6.0mm or greater] for Mosaics).

4. Color: _____________________ (Insert product color name and/or number). 5. Product Test Data:

a. Water Absorption (ASTM C373):______________%. b. Breaking Strength (ASTM C648):_________________lbs. c. Bond Strength (ASTM C482):________________psi. d. DCOF Dynamic Coefficient of Friction (ANSI 137.1-2013)______ wet.

6. According to availability, provide matching trim shapes such as bullnose, corners, borders and cove base when specified.

2.3 SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS:

A. Use appropriate installation mortars according to ANSI A118-2014. B. Grouting Materials: Select grouting materials according to the following types: Tile setting

and grouting epoxy: A118.6-2010 Standard Cement Grout, A118.7-2010, High Performance Cement Grout or A118.8-2010, Modified Epoxy Emulsion Grout. Provide grout in colors selected by the Architect from standard colors available from the approved manufacturers.

C. Use waterproofing/Anti Fracture Membrane as required according to ANSI A118.12.


2.4 EXPANSION JOINTS, CONTROL, CONTRACTION, AND ISOLATION JOINTS:

A. Refer to most current TCNA Handbook, Method EJ171 for recommendations on locating, treating and detailing various types of construction joints. NOTE: Architect must specify type of expansion joints and show location and details on drawings.

B. Use sealant complying with ASTM C920 according to Type, Grade, Class and Uses required.

D. Prefabricated expansion joints can also be used when suitable for installation.


3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates where tile will be installed for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions effecting performance of installed tile. Before tiling concrete surfaces saturated dry (SSD), free of standing water verify that substrates for setting tile are well cured, structurally sound dry, clean, and free from oil or waxy films, curing compounds or other coatings and surface treatments. Nonstructural shrinkage cracks should be pretreated with a crack suppression membrane (to prevent telegraphing of cracks through the finished tile installation) ANSI A118.12.

B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Commencement of work signifies acceptance of substrate and installation conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Substrate Preparation: Prepare and clean substrate in accordance with installation standards and manufacturer's instructions, and as follows: 1. Remove protrusions, bumps and ridges by grinding or chipping. 2. Repair, fill, and level cracks, holes, depressions and rough or chipped areas in substrate

using patching material recommended by setting materials manufacturer. 3. Slab to have light broom finish when tile is installed by thin-set method. 4. Before tiling, verify that all surfaces to be tiled are structurally sound true to plane, and

fall within maximum variations shown below: Ensure that the substrate is within the following tolerances: a. Horizontal surfaces (floors) - Maximum variation in substrate shall not exceed 1/4 "

in ten feet* from required plane, depending on substrate. b. Vertical surfaces (walls) - Maximum variation in substrate shall not exceed 1/4 " in

ten feet* from the required plane, depending on substrate.

* When using large format defined by TCNA Handbook as tiles with at least one edge 15” in length or greater; a more stringent tolerance 1/8” in 10’ or 1/16” in 24” when measure from the high points on the surface is required. Report all unacceptable surfaces to the architect in writing, and do not tile such surfaces until they are leveled enough to meet above requirements.

B. Jobsite Blending: Blend tiles before installing in accordance with reference standards to produce an even range and distribution of color and finish.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Manufacturers' Instructions: Perform work in compliance with standard accepted installation guidelines, SpecCeramics, Inc instructions (as provided by the manufacturer), and setting materials manufacturers' instructions.

B. Comply with appropriate ANSI A108-2014 specification and current Tile Council of North America Handbook (TCNA) for appropriate method of installation for each specification. For thin set adhesive mortar application use following technique:

With the flat side of trowel, key mortar into substrate.

Using the appropriate size trowel, comb mortar in one direction with notched side of the trowel.

Set tile with a sliding motion, perpendicular to the mortar ridges.

Obtain as near 100% coverage as possible of mortar to tile.


Mortar coverage shall be no less than 85% and shall be sufficiently distributed to give full support under all corners and edges of the tile.

Note: 95-100% coverage is mandatory for wet and exterior areas. Periodically, remove sheets or individual tiles to assure proper bond coverage consistent with industry specifications.

C. Installing Tile: 1. Install tile in pattern indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls,

and trim are same size. Adjust to minimize tile cutting and to avoid tile less than half size.

2. When possible, smooth cut edges of tile and/or use appropriate cutter or wet saw to produce smooth cuts. Provide straight cuts which align with adjacent materials.

3. Extend tile into recesses and under equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruption.

4. Terminate tile neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners, without disruption of pattern or joint alignment.

5. Provide tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints smooth and even, without voids, cracks, or excess mortar or grout.

6. Mix mortar in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 7. Apply setting material in accordance with manufacturer's directions and install tile

before mortar has started initial cure. For thin set mortar application, use a notch trowel that will achieve the recommended coverage of mortar after tiles have been installed. Reference standard coverage information and follow manufacturer's recommendations for trowel size when using mortar.

8. Do not spread more material than can be covered within 10 to 15 minutes. If "skinning" occurs, remove mortar and spread fresh material. Spread mortar with notches running in one direction that shall be perpendicular to the pressing, pushing and pulling of tile during placement.

9. Place tile in fresh mortar, press, push and pull the tile slightly to achieve as near 100% coverage and contact of tile with setting material and substrate as possible. The coverage shall be no less than 85% and be sufficiently distributed to give full support of the tile. Make sure that all corners and edges are well supported with mortar. Leave no hollow corners or edges. NOTE: 95-100% coverage is mandatory for wet or exterior areas. A skim coat (“back-butter”) of mortar can be placed onto the entire back of the tile using a trowel in order to assist in optimum adhesion and coverage of the mortar being used.

10. Ensure there is a minimum 1/8" of mortar between tile and substrate after proper bedding. Installer must periodically remove sheets or individual tiles to assure proper bond coverage consistent with industry specifications. If coverage is found to be insufficient, use a larger size notch trowel.

11. Use a beating block and hammer or rubber mallet so that faces and edges of individual tiles are flush and level with faces and edges of adjacent tiles, and to reduce lippage.

12. For running bond/brick joint patterns utilizing tiles (square or rectangular) where the side being offset is greater than 18” (nominal dimension), the running bond offset will be a maximum of 33% unless otherwise specified by the tile manufacturer. If an offset greater than 33% is specified, specifier and owner must approve mock-up and lippage.

D. Grouting:

1. Install grout in accordance with ANSI A108.10, A108.6, A108.8, A108.9-2010 correlating to grout type chosen and manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. Mix grout material in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions. 3. Apply grout to produce full, smooth grout joints of uniform width, and free of voids and

gaps. 4. Before grouting entire area do a test area to assure there will be no permanent staining

or discoloration of the tile and to verify that the grout is easily removed from the surface. If necessary, pre-coat exposed surfaces of tile with a grout release as recommended by the manufacturer, as this will facilitate removal of the grout.

5. Cure all setting and grouting materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

E. Cleaning and Protection:


1. If one has been used, remove grout release and clean tile surfaces so they are free of grout residue and foreign matter, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. If a grout haze or residue remains, use a suitable grout haze remover or cleaner and contact grout manufacturer for recommendations. Flush surface with clean water before and after cleaning. Do not use harsh hydrochloric, muriatic or sulfuric acid or acid-based cleaners to clean glazed tiles or tiles grouted with latex modified grout.

2. When a heavy residue of Portland cement grout is present, acceptable tile cleaning acids may be used. However, the grout should be allowed to cure a minimum of 10 days before this aggressive cleaning method is employed. Tile and grout shall be soaked with water before cleaning. In the absence of a recommendation from th e grout manufacturer, acid cleaning may be done with a saturated solution of phosphoric or sulfamic acid, mixed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Protect all floor tile installations with clean construction paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining or damage. After cleaning, provide protective covering and maintain conditions to protect tile work from damage or deterioration. Where tiled surfaces will be subject to equipment or wheel traffic or heavy construction traffic, and during move-in of furniture and equipment, cover protective covering with 1/4" hardboard, plywood or similar material. No foot or wheel traffic permitted on floor for at least 3 days after grouting. Owner/specifier is responsible for protecting tile from damage including allowing sufficient time for installed materials to cure properly typically 30-45 days is required for full cure of thin set bonding mortars.

4. Leave finished installation clean and free of cracked, chipped, broken, un-bonded, and otherwise defective tile work.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Industrial Interior Exterior Painting- 09 96 00 -1

SECTION 09 90 60

INDUSTRIAL INTERIOR EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions

and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on interior/exterior

substrates. The following interior/exterior substrates include:

Carbon Steel.

1. Stainless Steel.

2. Wrought Iron.

3. Galvanized Metal.

4. Aluminum.

5. Other Non-Ferrous Metals.

6. Anodized Aluminum.

7. Kynar.

8. Drywall/Plaster.

9. CMU.

10. Vertical Concrete and Masonry.

11. Vertical Concrete and Masonry Shower Areas.

12. Fiberglass – FRP.

13. PVC.

14. ABS.

B. Related Requirements:

Factory- or shop-applied primers applied as Work of other Sections must be coordinated with field-

applied finish coats. Review other Sections for factory- or shop-primed products and reference this

Section for product requirements:

1. Division 5 (05 50 00) Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this

Section.

2. Section 09 96 00 "High-Performance Coatings" for high-performance and special-use coatings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions of gloss levels below are from "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" (hereafter,

"MPI Manual").

Gloss Level 1, Matte or Flat finish: 0 to 5 units at 60 degrees and maximum 10 units at 85 degrees.

1. Gloss Level 2, Velvet finish: Maximum 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.

2. Gloss Level 3, Eggshell finish: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees.

3. Gloss Level 4, Satin finish: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and minimum 35 units at 85 degrees.

4. Gloss Level 5, Semi-Gloss finish: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees.

5. Gloss Level 6, Gloss finish: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees.

6. Gloss Level 7, High-Gloss finish: More than 85 units at 60 degrees.

Actual gloss levels may differ by manufacturers. Please refer to Manufacturers Product Data

Sheets/Technical Data Sheets for actual gloss categorization.

B. Blocking: Two painted surfaces sticking together such as a painted door sticking to a painted jamb.


C. ASTM: ASTM International develops international standards for materials, products, systems and

services used in construction, manufacturing and transportation: www.astm.org.

D. Bio-Pruf™: Anti-microbial additive that inhibits the growth of odor and stain causing mold and mildew on

the paint film. “Antimicrobial” is defined as any means or mode of restricting growth or spread of

microbes.

E. CHPS: Collaborative for High Performance Schools. A national movement to improve student

performance and the entire educational experience by building the best possible schools: www.chps.net.

F. CRGI: Coatings Research Group Inc. is an international association of paint and coatings manufacturers

dedicated to the benefits of shared research and development: crgiconnect.com.

G. DTM: Direct to metal. A coating that can be applied directly to a metal surface; refer to manufacturer’s

product information for surface preparation and application instructions.

H. EG: Ethylene Glycol. Ethylene glycol is listed as a hazardous air pollutant (HAP) by the U.S. EPA:

www.epa.gov.

I. EPR: Environmental Performance Rating. Master Painters Institute’s formula that relates VOC,

Performance of Category, Gloss and Appropriate specified use. Higher values equate to greater

ecoefficiency.

J. HAP: Hazardous Air Pollutant: According to the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA),

Hazardous air pollutants, also known as toxic air pollutants or air toxics, are those pollutants that cause

or may cause cancer or other serious health effects, such as reproductive effects or birth defects, or

adverse environmental and ecological effects: www.epa.gov.

K. LEED: LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design) is a voluntary, consensus-based,

marketdriven program that provides third-party verification of green buildings: www.usgbc.org.

L. MPI: Master Painters Institute. An organization that establishes architectural paint standards and quality

assurance programs in North America: www.paintinfo.com.

M. NACE: National Association of Corrosion Engineers www.nace.org.

N. PDCA: Painting & Decorating Contractors of America: www.pdca.org.

O. RAVOC: Reactivity adjusted VOC. ‘Reactivity’ means the ability of a VOC to promote ozone formation.

P. SCAQMD: South Coast Air Quality Management District is defined as most of Los Angeles, Orange,

Riverside, and San Bernardino counties in California.

Q. CARB: California Air Resources Board District is defined as the counties outside of SCAQMD.

R. OTC: Refers to the Ozone Transmission Commission.

S. SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings. Surface preparation standards and specifications.

www.sspc.org.

T. ICRI: International Concrete Repair Institute. www.icri.org.

1.4 DEFINITIONS FOR SERVICE ENVIROMENTS

A. Service Environment: The Service Environment is the condition to which the successfully installed

coatings system specified will be exposed.

B. Service environments listed in the D-E Finish Schedules and specified here-in are defined as follows:

1. Mild Service Environment: Outdoor weathering, mild industrial fumes and normal humidity with

mold and mildew conditions.

2. Moderate Service Environment: Frequent fumes and spills of mild chemical occasional product

spills, occasional chemical cleaning, intermittent high humidity, moisture, mold and mildew

conditions.

3. Severe Service Environment: Frequent fumes and spills of strong chemicals (Acids, Alkalis, and

Solvents) high humidity and, moisture conditions and frequent chemical cleaning.

C. For Service Environments not listed above including but not limited to Immersion, Potable Water

Applications, Anti-Graffiti, High Temperatures, and all others not defined. Please contact your

DunnEdwards Representative for specification choices.


A. Product Data (PDS/TDS & SDS): For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and

application instructions.

http://www.astm.org/


http://www.chps.net/

http://www.chps.net/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.epa.gov/

http://www.usgbc.org/

http://www.usgbc.org/

http://www.paintinfo.com/

http://www.paintinfo.com/

http://www.nace.org/


http://www.pdca.org/

http://www.pdca.org/

http://www.sspc.org/


http://www.icri.org/



B. LEED Submittals:

"Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: Low-Emitting Materials” Subparagraph below applies to LEED.

Coordinate with requirements for paints and coatings.

1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, including printed statement of VOC

content.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and actual gloss level for

topcoat.

1. Contractor to submit samples on rigid backing, no smaller than 7 inches X 10 inches (177 X 254

mm) or larger than 8.5 X 11 inches (216 X 280 mm).

2. Label each Sample for project, architect, general contractor, painting contractor, paint color

name

and number, paint brand name, “P” number if applicable, and application area.

E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations

indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Following the format prescribed in Part 2. PRODUCTS, submit physical properties data and

appropriate test results for each proposed product substitution.

3. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2,

with the proposed product highlighted.

4. VOC content.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents for single

component products. All 2 component products supplied will be un-catalyzed.


A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify

preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set

quality standards for materials and execution. Owner or Owners Representative/General Contractor

may require a mock-up to be provided. If this case occurs please contact your Dunn-Edwards

Representative for details.


A. Store materials in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and acceptable ranges published

in their PDS/TDS and SDS sheets.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.9 SAFETY

1. All jobsite safety procedures shall be in compliance with OSHA and EPA standards, as well as

any other local, state and project requirements.

2. Please refer to Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for each specific product to ensure all proper PPE and

safety requirements are being met for the job by the contractor.

3. Additional project specific safety procedures may exist in other project documents including

those outlined in Division 1.

1.10 PRE-JOB CONFERENCE

1. A pre-job conference to review and clarify the specification is recommended.


2. Those attending the meeting shall consist of, at minimum, a contractor, owner (or owners

representative), coatings inspector (if applicable), architect or engineer.

3. Should certified coatings inspection be required as part of the specifying documents; a prejob

conference shall become a mandatory part of the project.

4. Attendees of this mandatory meeting must include all parties identified above.


A. Manufacturer’s written/published information regarding surface preparation, and coating application

requirements shall over-rule this document. This information can be found in the manufacturer’s

Product Data Sheets/Technical Data Sheets PDS/TDS and is seen as the manufacturers written

instructions for their product.

B. Coatings shall be applied only when air and surface temperatures between 50 and 105 degrees

Fahrenheit (10 and 41 degrees Celsius).

C. Do not apply coatings when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent.

D. Do not apply coatings when surface temperatures are less than 5 degrees F (3 degrees C) above the

dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

E. All bare/exposed steel shall be coated within 8 hours of surface preparation.

F. Painting contractor should follow proper painting practices in accordance with SSPC-PA1 and ensure

environmental conditions are within range of acceptability as documented in manufacturers Product

Data Sheets/Technical Data Sheet (PDS/TDS).

G. Should NACE Certified Coatings Inspection be part of this contract; field conditions shall be verified

at the beginning of shift, and three additional times throughout the shift.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products listed from:

1. Dunn-Edwards

2. Rust-Oleum

3. Devoe

4. US Coatings

5. Carboline

B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product listed in other Part 2 articles for

the paint category indicated.

C. Substitutions of manufacturers products not specified above MUST be submitted with your bid to

insure the Architect has adequate time to review (approve/reject) the proposed systems.

1. Substitutions include but are not limited to the following. Manufacturers not approved in the

original Basis of Design (BOD), Products not originally specified, Surface Preparation, Number

of Coats, or any other alteration to the original scope of work

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

Systems could fail if paints used for individual coats are incompatible. Paint systems match primers and

topcoats and take compatibility into consideration.

1. Provide materials for use, within each paint system, that are compatible with one another and

substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by

manufacturer, based on testing.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers

of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.


B. VOC Content: Paints and coatings to be applied at Project Site shall comply with applicable VOC

limits of the U.S. EPA National Emissions Standards for Architectural Coatings, exclusive of colorants

added to tint bases, as calculated in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method 24), as

follows).

1. Flat Coatings: 250 g/L.

2. Nonflat Coatings: 380 g/L.

3. Nonflat – High Gloss Coatings (default Nonflat): 380 g/L.

4. Floor Coatings: 400 g/L.

5. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 450 g/L.

6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: 780 g/L.

7. Primers and Undercoaters: 350 g/L.

8. Rust Preventative Coatings: 400g/L.

9. Waterproofing Sealers and Treatments: 600g/L.

10. Zinc-Rich Primers (default Industrial Maintenance): 450g/L.

11. All Shop-Primed Metal to be coated in accordance with applicable federal, state, and local

regulations.

C. VOC Content: Paints and coatings to be applied at Project Site shall comply with applicable VOC

limits of the Maricopa County Air Quality Department Rule 335 – Architectural Coatings, exclusive of

colorants added to tint bases, as calculated in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D (EPA Method

24), as follows.





5. Industrial Maintenance Primers and Topcoats: 420 g/L.

6. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers (default Industrial Maintenance): 420 g/L.

7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 350 g/L.

8. Rust Preventative Coatings (default U.S. EPA): 400 g/L.

9. Waterproof Sealers: 400 g/L.

10. Zinc-Rich Primers (default Industrial Maintenance): 420 g/L.


regulations.

D. VOC Content: Paints and coatings to be applied at Project Site shall comply with applicable VOC

limits of the California Air Resources Board 2007 Suggested Control Measure for Architectural

Coatings, exclusive of colorants added to tint bases, as calculated in accordance with 40 CFR 59

Subpart D (EPA Method 24), as follows:



3. Nonflat – High Gloss Coatings: 150 g/L.


5. Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 250 g/L.



8. Rust Preventative Coatings: 250 g/L.

9. (Waterproofing) Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100g/L.

10. Zinc-Rich Primers 340g/L.

11. All Shop-Primed Metal to be coated in accordance with applicable federal, state and local

regulations.

E. VOC Content: Paints and coatings to be applied at Project Site shall comply with applicable VOC

limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1113: Architectural Coatings,

exclusive of colorants added to tint bases, as calculated in accordance with 40 CFR 59 Subpart D

(EPA Method 24), as follows:






5. Industrial Maintenance (IM) Coatings: 100 g/L.



8. Rust Preventative Coatings: 100 g/L.

9. Waterproofing Concrete/Masonry Sealers: 100 g/L.

10. Zinc-Rich IM Primers 100g/L.


regulations.

F. Colorants: The use of colorants containing hazardous chemicals, such as ethylene glycol, and shall

comply with the applicable VOC limits of Rule 1113, as follows:

1. Colorants for Architectural Coatings, excluding IM Coatings: 50 g/L.

2. Colorants for Solventborne Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 600 g/L.

3. Colorants for Waterborne Industrial Maintenance Coatings: 50g/L.

G. Colors: [As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range] [Match Architect's samples] [As

indicated in a color schedule].

1. When the final color has not been selected prior to bid submittal, Contractor may need to bid

additional coats when submitting their bid. The Owner should be aware that if a color is

chosen following the bid process and the color is significantly different from original color, a

change order for an additional finish coat might be required.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure:

1. Owner may engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials.

Contractor will be notified in advance and may be present when samples are taken. If paint

materials have already been delivered to Project site, samples may be taken at Project site.

2. Samples will be provided in new, unopened sealed containers tinted to the colors specified

and certified as valid materials by testing agency.

3. Testing agency may perform tests for compliance with product requirements.

4. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying coatings if test results show materials being

used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint

materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected

materials. Contractor will comply with requirements to use compatible products and systems

as described in 2.2.A. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from

previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are

incompatible.


A. Contractor shall provide verification of conformance with this specification, referenced standards and

related documents. This verification to be performed by a THIRD PARTY, minimum NACE Level 1

Certified Coatings Inspector.

B. Contractor shall provide documentation verifying inspector’s certification is both valid and current.

C. Should coatings inspector verification be required as part of these documents, and unless otherwise

specified within the document or by the coatings manufacturer; the following shall be required of the

coatings inspector.

NOTES FOR INSPECTION: If you choose to hire a THIRD PARTY inspector the following notes are

some of the criteria for the inspector to follow/approve. Additional SSPC, NACE and ASTM testing

criteria can be found at the following websites. (www.astm.org -- www.nace.org -- www.sspc.org –

www.icri.org)











1. All environmental conditions must fall in accordance with manufacturers written instructions

for all phases of the coatings project including surface preparation, coatings application, and

curing.

2. Environmental readings shall be taken a minimum of 4 times per 8 hour shift with the first

reading being taken before shift commencement.

3. All compressed air shall be verified as clean at the beginning of each shift by means of

“blotter test” (ASTM D4285).

4. Any exposed prepared (bare metal) must be coated within 8 hours of preparation.

5. Any prepared metal that displays flash rusting must be re-prepared in accordance with the

standard specified prior to coating application.

6. All levels of cleanliness, profile ranges, DFT ranges, environmental conditions and other

coatings project details must conform with coating manufacturers published instructions.

7. Holiday testing is required for areas subject to immersion or buried service environments.

D. The following standards and notes for compliance and verification of coatings shall apply to the

document. This guide is for your reference and/or for you to include if you so choose for your project

as a guideline for the THIRD PARTY INSPECTOR tying back to the Quality Assurance of Standards

for the project. These guidelines are some of the most applicable standards but are in no way the

only standards that may apply to the referenced project.

1. ASTM D3276, Standard Guide for Painting Inspectors (Metal Substrates) Description: This

standard states that unless otherwise publicized by the coating manufacturer; the minimum

surface temperature for coating application is usually 5°C (40°F). It may be as low as -18°C

(0°F) for cold-curing one or two-component systems or 10°C (50°F) for conventional two-

component systems. Coating specifications may further state that coating should not be

undertaken when the temperature is dropping and within 3°C (5°F) of the lower limit. Also

unless otherwise stated by the coating manufacturer; the maximum surface temperature for

coating application is typically 50ºC (125ºF), unless otherwise clearly specified. A surface that

is too hot may cause the coating solvents to evaporate so fast that application is difficult,

blistering takes place, or a porous film results. Also of note, coatings should only be applied

to a substrate when that substrate is at least 3°C (5°F) above the determined dew point in

order to prevent moisture on the surface from being coated.

2. SSPC-PA1 – Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel

Description: This specification covers procedures for the painting of steel surfaces. The

scope of this specification is rather broad, covering both specific as well as general

requirements for the application of paint. This specification does not provide detailed

descriptions of surface preparation, pretreatments, or selection of primers and finish coats.

This specification does provide detailed coverage of the procedures and methods for

application after the selection of the coating materials has been made.

3. SSPC-PA COM – Commentary on all PA Guidelines (Paint Application)

Description: This commentary is for information only and is not part of the standards and

guides in this chapter. Its purpose is to present a general description of the sections that

comprise this chapter. The documents in this section focus on aspects of the coating

application process. They provide requirements and guidance procedures for applying

coatings to both steel and concrete substrates, measuring film thickness on steel and

concrete substrates after coating application, safety considerations for coating applicators,

and requirements for coating application for specialized services.

4. SSPC-PA5 – Guide to Maintenance Coating of Steel Structures in Atmospheric Service

Description: This guide covers procedures for developing a maintenance coating program for

steel structures. The guide may be used for one-time recoat programs or long-range recoat

programs. The guide is intended for use primarily by owners’ representatives. It is not

intended to be a do-it-yourself guide, but is representative of the processes that a coating

specialist such as a Protective Coating Specialist, (PCS) certified by SSPC or equivalent by

NACE, would follow to develop a maintenance coating plan for specific facilities.

5. SSPC-PA11 – Protecting Edges, Crevices, and Irregular Steel Surfaces by Stripe Coating

Description: This guide discusses the technique called “stripe coating” or “striping” as a way

of providing extra corrosion protection measures on edges, outside corners, crevices, bolt

heads, welds, and other irregular steel surfaces, including optional surface preparation

techniques for sharp edges to improve coating performance. Some details, including the


advantages and limitations of specific methods of obtaining additional coating thickness, are

described to assist the specification writer in assuring that the project specification will

address these details.

6. SSPC-PA10 - Guide to Safety and Health Requirements for Industrial Painting Projects

Description: It is generally recognized that facility owners and specifiers should consider

construction risks as part of their overall risk management programs. This document provides

guidance for facility owners and project specifiers who have a mandate to incorporate

appropriate requirements for safety and health program submittals and associated

acceptance criteria in contract documents. It also alerts contractors to their responsibilities to

protect workers as required by the US. Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA). Both owners and contractors should be familiar with the OSHA Compliance

Directive CPL 02-00-124 of December 10, 1999, which clarifies citation policies for multi-

employer worksites, including owners, contractors, and subcontractors. Guidance and

recommendations made herein are not all-inclusive and are not intended to supplant, replace

or supersede any specific federal, state or local statute or regulation applicable to safety and

health hazards or programs on industrial and marine painting projects.

7. ASTM - D4285 Blotter Test

Description: Standard Test Method for Indicating Oil or Water in Compressed Air. This

requires an absorbent collector, such as white absorbent paper, cloth on a rigid backing, or a

non-absorbent collector 6 mm (1/4in.) made of transparent plastic. Center the collector in the

discharging air stream within 61 cm (24 in.) of the discharge point for one minute. Conduct

the test on the discharging air as close to the use point as possible and after the required

inline oil and water separators. Use the blotter test to check for any visible traces of oil or

water in compressed air for abrasive blasting or spray coating application. According to

ASTM D 4285, any indication of oil discoloration on the collector shall be cause for rejection

of the compressed air for use in abrasive blast cleaning, air blast cleaning, and coating

application operations.

8. ISO 8502-3 Dust Assessment Test on Prepared Surface Description: Tests for the

assessment of surface cleanliness―Part 3: Assessment of dust on steel surfaces prepared

for painting (pressure-sensitive tape method) (Geneva, Switzerland: ISO). Unless otherwise

specified; the maximum allowable dust rating shall be level 3.

9. SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning

Definition: Solvents such as water, xylol, toluol etc., are used to remove solvent-soluble

foreign matter from the surface of ferrous metals. Rags and solvents must be replenished

frequently to avoid spreading the contaminant rather than removing it. Low-pressure (1500 -

4000 psi) high volume (3 - 5 gal/min.) water washing with appropriate cleaning chemicals is a

recognized "solvent cleaning" method. All surfaces should be cleaned per this specification

prior to using hand tools or blast equipment. As a note of caution – solvents which leave a

residue such as mineral spirits, naphtha, lacquer thinner etc. must not be used as they will

lead to adhesion issues and premature coating failure.

10. SSPC-SP2 – Hand Tool Cleaning

Description: hand tool cleaning removes all loose mill scale, rust, paint, and other detrimental

foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be removed by this

process. Mill scale, rust, and paint are considered adherent if they cannot be removed by

“lifting” with a dull putty knife.

11. SSPC-SP3 – Power Tool Cleaning

Description: power tool cleaning removes all loose mill scale, rust, paint, and other

detrimental foreign matter. It is not intended that adherent mill scale, rust, and paint be

removed by this process. Mill scale, rust, and paint are considered adherent if they cannot be

removed by “lifting” with a dull putty knife.

12. SSPC-SP11 – Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal (with a 1 mil profile)

Description: a steel surface cleaned with power tools to bare metal, when viewed without

magnification, shall be free from visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, coating, oxides, mill scale,

corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may also be left

in the bottom of the pits if the original surface is pitted. The surface profile roughness shall be

a minimum of 25.4 μm (1.0 mil) as measured in accordance with Method C of ASTM D 4417

or other mutually agreed upon method. The peaks and valleys on the surface shall form a

continuous pattern with no smooth, “non-profiled” spots in between.


13. SSPC-SP15 – Commercial Grade Power Tool Cleaning Description: a commercial grade

power tool cleaned surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free from visible oil,

grease, dirt, dust, coating, oxides, mill scale, corrosion products, and other foreign

matter, except as noted in Section 2.2. Random staining shall be limited to no more than 33%

of each unit area of surface. Staining may consist of light shadows, slight streaks, or minor

discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of previously applied

coatings. Slight residues of rust and paint may also be left in the bottom of the pits if the

original surface is pitted.

14. SSPC-SP5 / NACE #1 – White Metal Blast Cleaning

NACE No. 1/SSPC-SP5, White Metal Blast Cleaning Description: when viewed without

magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale, rust,

coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. This is the ultimate in blast

cleaning. Use where maximum performance of protective coatings is necessary due to

exceptionally severe conditions such as constant immersion in water or liquid chemicals.

15. SSPC-SP10 / NACE #2

NACE No. 2/SSPC-SP 10, Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning Description: when viewed

without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease, dust, dirt, mill scale,

rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Random staining shall be

limited to no more than 5% of each unit area of surface and may consist of light shadows,

slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill scale, or stains of

previously applied coatings.

16. SSPC-SP6 / NACE #3 NACE No. 3/SSPC-SP 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning Description:

when viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease, dust,

dirt, mill scale, rust, coating, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Random

staining shall be limited to no more than 33% of each unit area of surface and may consist of

light shadows, slight streaks, or minor discolorations caused by stains of rust, stains of mill

scale, or stains of previously applied coatings.

17. SSPC-SP7 / NACE #4 NACE No. 4/SSPC-SP 7, Brush-Off Blast Cleaning Description: when

viewed without magnification, the surface shall be free from visible oil, grease, dust, dirt,

loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose coating. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and coating

may remain on the surface. Mill scale, rust, and coating are considered tightly adherent if

they cannot be removed by lifting a dull putty knife.

18. SSPC-SP16 Brush Off Blast SSPC-SP16, Cleaning of Coated and Uncoated Galvanized

Steel, Stainless Steel and Non-Ferrous Metals Definition: A brush-off blast cleaned

nonferrous metal surface, when viewed without magnification, shall be free of all visible oil,

grease, dirt, dust, metal oxides (corrosion products), and other foreign matter. Intact, tightly

adherent coating is permitted to remain. A coating is considered tightly adherent if it cannot

be removed by lifting with a dull putty knife. Bare metal substrates shall have a minimum

profile of 19 micrometers (0.75 mil). Surface preparation using this standard is used to

uniformly roughen and clean the bare substrate and to roughen the surface of intact coatings

on these metals prior to coating application. Substrates that may be prepared by this method

include, but are not limited to, galvanized surfaces, stainless steel, copper, aluminum, and

brass. For the purpose of this standard, the zinc metal layer of hot-dip galvanized steel is

considered to be the substrate, rather than the underlying steel.

19. SSPC-SP13 / NACE#6 – Surface Preparation of Concrete Description: This standard gives

requirements for surface preparation of concrete by mechanical, chemical, or thermal

methods prior to the application of bonded protective coating or lining systems. The

requirements of this standard are applicable to all types of cementitious surfaces including

cast-in-place concrete floors and walls, precast slabs, masonry walls, and shotcrete surfaces.

An acceptable prepared concrete surface should be free of contaminants, laitance, loosely

adhering concrete, and dust, and should provide a sound, uniform substrate suitable for the

application of protective coating or lining systems. When required, a minimum concrete

surface strength, maximum surface moisture content, and surface profile range should be

specified in the project specifications.

20. ASTM-D4417 – Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of Blast

Cleaned Steel – This standard describes three methods for profile assessment or

measurement, one of which could be a visual or tactile comparison method. The other two

methods measure the peak-to-valley height in different ways. The three methods listed in

ASTM-D4417 include:


1. Method A:

The blasted surface is visually compared to standards prepared with various surface

profile depths and the range determined.

2. Method B:

Profile depth is measured using a fine pointed probe at a number of locations and the

arithmetic mean determined.

3. Method C:

“Replica Tape” produced by the “Testex Corporation” is impressed into the blast

cleaned surface forming a reverse image of the profile and the maximum peak to

valley distance measured with a micrometer. It is suggested that Methods B or C be

used to perform these tests as they are less subjective than Method A and are

quantitative tests. To this point; the method to be used (B or C) must be agreed upon

prior to project commencement to avoid conflict between differing results between the

2 methods.

21. SSPC-PA2 - Procedure for Determining Conformance to Dry Coating Thickness

Requirements Description: This standard describes a procedure for determining shop or field

conformance to a specified coating dry film thickness (DFT) range on ferrous and nonferrous

metal substrates using nondestructive coating thickness gauges (magnetic and eddy current)

described in ASTM D7091.1.

The procedures for adjustment and measurement acquisition for two types of gauges:

“magnetic pull-off” (Type 1) and “electronic” (Type 2) are described in ASTM D7091. This

standard defines a procedure to determine whether coatings conform to the minimum and the

maximum thickness specified. See Note 12.1 for an example of a possible modification when

measuring dry film thickness on over-coated surfaces.

22. NACE SP0188 – Holiday Testing of New Protective Coatings on Conductive Substrates

Description: This standard provides procedures for low-voltage wet sponge testing and high

voltage spark testing of new coatings on conductive substrates.

This standard is not intended to provide data on service life, adhesion, coating cure, or film

thickness.

This standard is intended for use only with new coatings applied to conductive substrates.

Inspecting a coating previously exposed to an immersion service condition could produce an

erroneous detection of discontinuities due to permeation or moisture absorption of the

previously applied coating.

23. ICRI Surface Prep Standards --ICRI has identified nine distinct profile configurations which

may be produced by the methods summarized herein. As a set, these profiles replicate

degrees of roughness considered to be suitable for the application of one or more of the

sealer, coating, or polymer overlay systems, up to a thickness of 1/4 inch (see Appendix B).

Each profile carries a CSP number ranging from a base line of CSP 1 (nearly flat) through

CSP 9 (very rough). The profile capabilities for each preparation method are identified by

CSP number in the "Profile" section of the method summaries.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. For previously coated surfaces: Old coatings allowed to remain, as per the standard specified, shall

be defined as tightly adherent if they cannot be scraped away with a dull putty knife.

C. Initial “Steel Surface Conditions” shall be recorded by use of SSPC Visual Guide #1, #2, #3, #4, #5,

or #6 as applicable to the project and the level of cleanliness specified herein.

D. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as

follows: Percentages in five subparagraphs below are based on "MPI Manual.”

E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth.

F. Verify that plaster is fully cured including pH testing to determine that alkalinity is within limits

established by the manufacturer.


G. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Verify that surfaces are dry.

H. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and

primers.

I. Verify environmental conditions are within coating manufacturer’s specified range. Environmental

conditions shall be monitored at 4 points throughout each shift. Once at beginning, once at end, and

two additional times in between. Recording must be taken at area where work is being performed.

J. Each set of environmental readings shall consist of:

1. Relative humidity

Unless otherwise stated; relative humidity must not exceed 85%

2. Ambient Air Temperature

3. Dew Point

4. ∆ - (+/-Difference between surface temperature and dew point) Surface must be a minimum of

5°F / 3°C above dew point

K. Dust levels remaining on surface shall be verified in accordance with ISO 8502-3. A dust level 3 or

cleaner shall be deemed as acceptable.

L. Surface profile shall be verified in accordance with ASTM D4417. Surface profile ranges must be

within ranges listed in manufacturers published data.

M. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

N. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

O. DFT ranges per coat must fall within manufacturer’s recommended ranges. Measurements shall be

taken in accordance with SSPC-PA2 “method for evaluating DFT”.

P. Holiday testing in accordance with NACE SP0188 shall be performed on all surfaces subject to below

grade or immersion service environments. All holidays must be marked, mapped and repaired by

contractor.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Comply with all manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations pertaining to surface

preparation of the substrate being coated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be coated. If

removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied

protection before surface preparation and coating.

C. After completing coating operations, reinstall items that were removed; use workers skilled in the

trades involved.

D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of coatings, including dirt, oil, grease, and

incompatible paints and encapsulants in accordance with SSPC-PA1.

E. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce

coating systems indicated.

F. Coordination of shop-applied prime coats with topcoats is critical.

G. Remove incompatible primers and re-prime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as

required to produce paint systems indicated.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION COMMENTS REGARDING SPECIFIC SUBSTRATES

A. Concrete Substrates:

1. Prepare all concrete substrates (floors and walls) in accordance with coatings

manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and chalk. Verify removal by

means of a standard water-bead test. Remove all laitance and weak concrete.

3. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be coated exceeds that

permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

4. Concrete surfaces are must pass ASTM D4268 “plastic sheet method prior to

commencement”.

5. Clean surfaces with pressurized water. Use pressure range of [1500 to 4000 psi (10 350 to

27 580 kPa) at 6 to 12 inches (150 to 300 mm)] [4000 to 10,000 psi (27 580 to 68 950 kPa)].

6. Unless otherwise stated by the coatings manufacturer in writing; all concrete/masonry

surfaces shall be prepared in accordance with NACE 6/SSPC-SP13 “Surface Preparation of

Concrete Surfaces”.


7. Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not coat surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of

surfaces to be coated exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Steel Substrates:

1. All oil, grease, dirt, dust and other foreign material must be removed prior to surface

preparation commencement.

2. All loose coatings, mill scale and rust must be removed until only tightly adherent of the

same remain unless otherwise specific with an appropriate reference standard or spelled out

by the coatings manufacturer.

3. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if any. Clean using methods recommended as outlined/written per the manufacturer in the TDS.

SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4 permits tight residues of rust, mill scale, and coatings to remain. Be

aware that blast cleaning methods may not be practical for use at Project site and may not

be allowed by authorities having jurisdiction.

Such areas/projects may be abrasive blasted with newer technologies such as vapor

blasting or sponge blasting. Please contact your D-E Industrial specialist for further

information on such surface preparation methods.

C. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates:

1. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed

areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for

touching up shop-primed surfaces.

2. Acceptable methods of cleaning shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written

instructions.

3. Blast clean according to SSPC/NACE standard specified.

4. [SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, “White Metal Blast Cleaning”] [SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3,

"Commercial Blast Cleaning”] [SSPC-SP 7/NACE No. 4, “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning”]

[SSPC-SP 10/NACE No. 2, "Near-White Blast Cleaning].”

D. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by

mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of

subsequently applied coatings.

2. Blast clean new galvanized metal substrates to receive field-applied fluoropolymer coating to

SSPC-SP7/NACE No. 4, “Brush-Off Blast Cleaning,” to surface profile of 1.0 to 2.0 mils.

Remove all passivator residue.

3. Clean weathered galvanized metal substrates to receive field-applied fluoropolymer coating

to [SSPC-SP3/NACE No. 4, “Power Tool Cleaning,”] [SSPC-SP7/NACE No. 4, “Brush-Off

Blast Cleaning,” to surface profile of 1.0 to 2.0 mils].

E. Aluminum Substrates:

1. Remove surface oxidation and pre-clean substrates in accordance with SSPC-SP1 “Solvent

Cleaning.” Using any acceptable method listed therein.

2. After SSPC-SP1 obtain adequate surface profile using hand sanding with 120 to 220 grit

sandpaper, Scotch-Brite pad, or SSPC-SP2 “Hand Tool Cleaning,” as appropriate to metal

and condition of substrate. Avoid creating surface defects that will not be concealed by new

coating system.

F. Previously Anodized or Painted Metal Substrates:

1. Clean substrates in accordance with SSPC-SP1 “Solvent Cleaning.” Using any acceptable

method listed therein.


2. Extrusions and Small Areas: Abrade surfaces to remove gloss and to obtain adequate

surface profile using hand sanding with 120 to 220 grit sandpaper, Scotch-Brite pad, or

SSPC-SP2 “Hand Tool Cleaning,” as appropriate to metal and condition of substrate. Avoid

creating surface defects that will not be concealed by new coating system.

3. Large Areas: Abrade surfaces to remove gloss and to obtain adequate surface profile using

methods recommended by paint manufacturer.

4. Remove residue, following abrading, in accordance with SSPC-SP1 “Solvent Cleaning”.

5. Test substrates for adhesion as recommended by manufacturer prior to applying bonding

primer.

6. For previously coated surfaces; test coatings for compatibility between existing coating and

new coatings to be applied.

3.4 INTERIOR and EXTERIOR HIGH-PERFORMANCE COATING SCHEDULE

A. Light Duty Service Environments Interior and Exterior Substrates: Outdoor weathering, mild industrial

fumes and normal humidity with mold and mildew conditions.

1. Dunn-Edwards

2. Rust-Oleum

3. Carboline

4. Devoe

5. US Coatings

B. Moderate Service Environment: Frequent fumes and spills of mild chemical occasional product spills,

occasional chemical cleaning, intermittent high humidity, moisture, mold and mildew conditions.

1. Dunn-Edwards

2. Rust-Oleum

3. Carboline

4. Devoe

5. US Coatings

C. Severe Service Environment: Frequent fumes and spills of strong chemicals (Acids, Alkalis, and

Solvents) high humidity and, moisture conditions and frequent chemical cleaning.

1. Dunn-Edwards

2. Rust-Oleum

3. Carboline

4. Devoe

5. US Coatings

D. PAINT SCHEDULE:

1. EXTERIOR:

a. FERROUS METAL (Columns )

Epoxy/Polyurethane System

Surface Preparation: SP-1 and SP-2/SP-3

Prime Carbomastic 15

Or Carboguard 890 Series

Finish Coat Gloss Carbothane 134 Series

Satin Carbothane 133 Series

Epoxy/Polyurethane System

Surface Preparation: SP-1 and SP-2/SP-3

Spot Prime (rust & bare areas) Carbomastic 15


Full Prime Carbomastic 15





*Over existing coating only

Inorganic zinc/Epoxy/Polyurethane

Surface Preparation: ABRASIVE BLAST SSPC SP-6 or SP-10

Prime Shop Carbozinc 11 Series

Spot Prime Field Carbozinc 859 VOC

Intermediate Carboguard 890 Series



b. Exterior CMU – High Performance Acrylic Finish:

1. Clean block of all contaminants – rinse clean

2. Fill any voids prior to painting with patching compound

3. CMU – High Performance Acrylic Finish

Block Filler – Acrylic Carboline Sanitile 100

Finish Coat - Gloss Acrylic Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 DTM Series as

distributed / tinted by Dunn Edwards

OR Semi gloss Acrylic Carboline Carbocrylic 3359 Series as distributed

/ tinted by Dunn Edwards

3. INTERIOR:

a. Galvanized Metal Decking:

Prep – SCME-01 Supreme Chemical Clean and this will clean and etch the Galvanized

prior to painting

Primer - Ultrashield Galvanized Metal Primer

Finish – Everest Enamel Eggshell or Everest Semi Gloss Enamel

OR –

Enduracat Water Based Epoxy Single Component Semi Gloss

b. Interior Gypsum Board Surfaces:

Paint to match porcelain tile.

c. Interior Oil Penetrating and Floor Sealer:

PROSOCO Standoff Stain Barrier – Non film Forming

3.5 APPLICATION

A. Apply high-performance coatings according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Use applicators and techniques suited for coating and substrate indicated.

C. Coat surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before

final installation, coat surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

D. Coat back sides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match

exposed surfaces.

E. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of the

same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of finish coat, but provide sufficient

difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

F. If undercoats or other conditions show through final coat, apply additional coats until cured film has a

uniform coating finish, color, and appearance.

G. Apply coatings to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,

runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Produce sharp glass lines and color breaks.


H. All welds, rivets, bolts, threaded areas and edges shall be “stripe-coated” in advance of coating

application.

I. Apply all coatings according to manufacturer's written instructions producing surface films at DFT

thicknesses within manufacturer’s recommended DFT ranges.

J. When viewed without magnification, coating films shall be without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,

brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.

K. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification,

performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

L. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory

finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturer.

M. Thinning should be avoided unless required to aid in application. If thinning is performed use the

minimum amount required to achieve desired application consistency and not to exceed

manufacturers published instructions.

N. Use only the thinner listed in the coating manufacturer’s published documents. Caution must be

taken when selecting the thinner as thinners are often different from clean-up solvents.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from

Project site.

B. After completing coating application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered coatings by

washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from coating operation. Correct damage by cleaning,

repairing, replacing, and recoating, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. Upon completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced

coated surfaces.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Signage - 10 14 00 -1

SECTION 10 14 00

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Door Signs.

B. Room Signs.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; US Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board; 2016.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01300 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive literature for sign types specified, including components and accessories.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate location of each individual sign in the project.

D. Selection Samples: Two sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors.

E. Verification Samples: Two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color combination specified; include sample graphic and letters in specified typeface.

F. Manufacturer's instructions: Printed installation instructions for each product.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Sign types to comply with ADAAG requirements.


A. Store products of this section in manufacturer's unopened packaging until installation.

B. Maintain dry, heated storage area for products of this section until installation of products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Sign Specialists Corporation, (714) 641-0064; www.signspecialists.com

B. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

C. Unless otherwise specified for an individual product or material, supply all products specified in this section from the same manufacturer.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Braille Signs: 1. Acceptable product: Legal ADA Braille Signs. 2. Colors: Selected by Design Professional from manufacturer's full range of available colors.

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Signage - 10 14 00 -2

2.03 FABRICATIONS

A. General:1/4” thick photopolymer with raised lettering. Signs shall be with beveled edges. Size: Shall meet ADAAG and CBC Title 24 requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces to receive signs have been finished, and that finishes are dry and correctly cured.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install room and door signs in accordance with manufacturer's printed installation instructions.

B. Locate signs in accordance with approved shop drawings and ADAAG requirements.

3.03 SCHEDULES

A. Colors:

1. Dark brown with gold graphics.

2. Gold with dark brown graphics.

Submit sample for approval.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Washroom Accessories - 10 28 13 -1

SECTION 10 28 13

WASHROOM ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Provide toilet room accessories where indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein,

and as needed for a complete and proper installation.

B. Related work:

1. Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications.


A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen who are thoroughly trained and experienced

in the necessary crafts and who are completely familiar with the specified requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide the following products of American Specialties, Inc, or equal product(s) by

Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com approved in advance by the Architect

B. Technical Concepts (Soap Dispensers)

C. Bobrick (Baby Changing Station)

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Electric Hand Dryer:

a. American Specialties INC. Model Turbo Tuff # 0134, Recessed Mounted automatic hand dryer

B. Soap dispenser:

Product: Technical Concept, Model# FG 750140 Auto Foam Dispenser – White / Grey

C. Toilet tissue dispensers: Product: Surface mount, manufactured by ASI.

Model # ASI 0040

D. Toilet Seat Cover Dispenser:

http://www.bradleycorp.com/

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Washroom Accessories - 10 28 13 -1

E. Sanitary Waste Receptacle: Product: American Specialties INC. Surface mount, Model # 20852

F. Grab bars:

Product: American Specialties INC. B-6806 Series Size: Refer to interior elevations and standard ADA / Tile 24 Sheet.

G. Baby Changing Station:

Product: Bobrick, Model #KB110- SSRE

H. Surface Mounted Double Robe Hook: Product: Bobrick, Model # B-6727

2.03 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES

Not used. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS


installation, as selected by the Contractor subject to the approval of the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be performed.

Correct conditions detrimental to timely and proper completion of the Work. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the

work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section.

B. Install each item in its proper location, firmly anchored into position, level and plumb, and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd

Street Tour Bus Station 22 05 11- 1

SECTION 22 05 11 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. The requirements of this Section shall apply to all sections of Division 22.

B. Definitions:

1. Exposed: Piping and equipment exposed to view in finished rooms.

2. Option or optional: Contractor's choice of an alternate material or method.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 01 00 00, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.

B. Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES.

C. Section 31 20 00, EARTH MOVING: Excavation and Backfill.

D. Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE: Concrete and Grout.

E. Section 05 31 00, STEEL DECKING, Section 05 36 00, COMPOSITE METAL DECKING,

Building Components for Attachment of Hangers.

G. Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS.

H. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

I. Section 07 60 00, FLASHING AND SHEET METAL: Flashing for Wall and Roof Penetrations.

J. Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

K. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

L. Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL

COMPONENTS

M. Section 26 05 11, REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS


A. Products Criteria:

1. Standard Products: Material and equipment shall be the standard products of a manufacturer

regularly engaged in the manufacture of the products for at least 3 years. However, digital

electronics devices, software and systems such as controls, instruments, computer work

station, shall be the current generation of technology and basic design that has a proven

satisfactory service record of at least three years.

2. Equipment Service: There shall be permanent service organizations, authorized and trained

by manufacturers of the equipment supplied, located within 160 km (100 miles) of the project.

These organizations shall come to the site and provide acceptable service to restore

operations within four hours of receipt of notification by phone, e-mail or fax in event of an

emergency, such as the shut-down of equipment; or within 24 hours in a non-emergency.

Names, mail and e-mail addresses and phone numbers of service organizations providing

service under these conditions for (as applicable to the project): pumps, critical



instrumentation, computer workstation and programming shall be submitted for project record

and inserted into the operations and maintenance manual.

3. All items furnished shall be free from defects that would adversely affect the performance,

maintainability and appearance of individual components and overall assembly.

4. The products and execution of work specified in Division 22 shall conform to the referenced

codes and standards as required by the specifications. Local codes and amendments

enforced by the local code official shall be enforced, if required by local authorities such as

the natural gas supplier. If the local codes are more stringent, then the local code shall apply.

Any conflicts shall be brought to the attention of the Architect and Engineer or owner's

Representative.

5. Multiple Units: When two or more units of materials or equipment of the same type or class

are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer.

6. Assembled Units: Manufacturers of equipment assemblies, which use components made by

others, assume complete responsibility for the final assembled product.

7. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name or identifiable trademark shall be

securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally

with equipment, stamped or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment.

8. Asbestos products or equipment or materials containing asbestos shall not be used.

B. Welding: Before any welding is performed, contractor shall submit a certificate certifying that

welders comply with the following requirements:

1. Qualify welding processes and operators for piping according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code", Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".

2. Comply with provisions of ASME B31 series "Code for Pressure Piping".

3. Certify that each welder has passed American Welding Society (AWS) qualification tests for

the welding processes involved, and that certification is current.

4. All welds shall be stamped according to the provisions of the American Welding Society.

C. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Where installation procedures or any part thereof are required

to be in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material being installed,

printed copies of these recommendations shall be furnished to the Resident Engineer prior to

installation. Installation of the item will not be allowed to proceed until the recommendations are

received. Failure to furnish these recommendations can be cause for rejection of the material.

D. Execution (Installation, Construction) Quality:

1. All items shall be applied and installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

Conflicts between the manufacturer's instructions and the contract drawings and

specifications shall be referred to the architect for resolution. Written hard copies or computer

files of manufacturer’s installation instructions shall be provided to the design team at least

two weeks prior to commencing installation of any item.



2. Complete layout drawings shall be required by Paragraph, SUBMITTALS. Construction work

shall not start on any system until the layout drawings have been approved.

E. Guaranty: Warranty of Construction, FAR clause 52.246-21.

F. Plumbing Systems: CPC, California Plumbing Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS,

PRODUCT DATA, and SAMPLES.

B. Information and material submitted under this section shall be marked "SUBMITTED UNDER

SECTION 22 05 11, COMNON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING", with applicable paragraph

identification.

C. Contractor shall make all necessary field measurements and investigations to assure that the

equipment and assemblies will meet contract requirements.

D. If equipment is submitted which differs in arrangement from that shown, provide drawings that

show the rearrangement of all associated systems. Approval will be given only if all features of

the equipment and associated systems, including accessibility, are equivalent to that required by

the contract.

E. Prior to submitting shop drawings for approval, contractor shall certify in writing that

manufacturers of all major items of equipment have each reviewed drawings and specifications,

and have jointly coordinated and properly integrated their equipment and controls to provide a

complete and efficient installation.

F. Upon request by Government, lists of previous installations for selected items of equipment shall

be provided. Contact persons who will serve as references, with telephone numbers and e-mail

addresses shall be submitted with the references.

G. Manufacturer's Literature and Data: Manufacturer’s literature shall be submitted under the

pertinent section rather than under this section.

1. Equipment and materials identification.

2. Fire stopping materials.

3. Hangers, inserts, supports and bracing. Provide load calculations for variable spring and

constant support hangers.

4. Wall, floor, and ceiling plates.

H. Coordination Drawings: Complete consolidated and coordinated layout drawings shall be

submitted for all new systems, and for existing systems that are in the same areas. The drawings

shall include plan views, elevations and sections of all systems and shall be on a scale of not less

than 1:32 (3/8-inch equal to one foot). Clearly identify and dimension the proposed locations of

the principal items of equipment. The drawings shall clearly show the proposed location and

adequate clearance for all equipment, piping, pumps, valves and other items. All valves, trap

primer valves, water hammer arrestors, strainers, and equipment requiring service shall be



provided with an access door sized for the complete removal of plumbing device, component, or

equipment. Equipment foundations shall not be installed until equipment or piping until layout

drawings have been approved. Detailed layout drawings shall be provided for all piping systems.

In addition, details of the following shall be provided.

1. Mechanical equipment rooms.

2. Interstitial space.

3. Hangers, inserts, supports, and bracing.

4. Pipe sleeves.

5. Equipment penetrations of floors, walls, ceilings, or roofs.

I. Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions:

1. Maintenance and operating manuals in accordance with Section 01 00 00, GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS, Article, INSTRUCTIONS, for systems and equipment.

2. Listing of recommended replacement parts for keeping in stock supply, including sources of

supply, for equipment shall be provided.

3. The listing shall include belts for equipment: Belt manufacturer, model number, size and

style, and distinguished whether of multiple belt sets.


A. Protection of Equipment:

1. Equipment and material placed on the job site shall remain in the custody of the Contractor

until phased acceptance, whether or not the Government has reimbursed the Contractor for

the equipment and material. The Contractor is solely responsible for the protection of such

equipment and material against any damage.

2. Damaged equipment shall be replaced with an identical unit as determined and directed by

the owner's representative. Such replacement shall be at no additional cost to the owner.

3. Interiors of new equipment and piping systems shall be protected against entry of foreign

matter. Both inside and outside shall be cleaned before painting or placing equipment in

operation.

4. Existing equipment and piping being worked on by the Contractor shall be under the custody

and responsibility of the Contractor and shall be protected as required for new work.

B. Cleanliness of Piping and Equipment Systems:

1. Care shall be exercised in the storage and handling of equipment and piping material to be

incorporated in the work. Debris arising from cutting, threading and welding of piping shall be

removed.

2. Piping systems shall be flushed, blown or pigged as necessary to deliver clean systems.

3. The interior of all tanks shall be cleaned prior to delivery and beneficial use by the

Government. All piping shall be tested in accordance with the specifications and the



California Plumbing Code (CPC), latest edition. All filters, strainers, fixture faucets shall be

flushed of debris prior to final acceptance.

4. Contractor shall be fully responsible for all costs, damage, and delay arising from failure to

provide clean systems.

1.6 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS

A. The publications listed below shall form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The

publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME):

Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC):

SEC IX-2007 .............................. Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IX, Welding and

Brazing Qualifications.

C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A36/A36M-2008 ......................... Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel

A575-96 (R 2007) ....................... Standard Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Merchant Quality,

M-Grades R (2002)

E84-2005 .................................... Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of

Building Materials

E119-2008a ................................ Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction

and Materials

D. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc:

SP-58-02 .................................... Pipe Hangers and Supports-Materials, Design and Manufacture

SP 69-2003 (R 2004) ................. Pipe Hangers and Supports-Selection and Application

E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

MG1-2003, Rev. 1-2007............. Motors and Generators

D. International Code Council, (ICC):

CBC-06, (R 2016) ...................... California Building Code

CPC-06, (R 2016) ...................... California Plumbing Code

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FACTORY-ASSEMBLED PRODUCTS

A. STANDARDIZATION OF COMPONENTS SHALL BE MAXIMIZED TO REDUCE SPARE PART

requirements.

B. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies that include components made by others shall assume

complete responsibility for final assembled unit.

1. All components of an assembled unit need not be products of same manufacturer.

2. Constituent parts that are alike shall be products of a single manufacturer.

3. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for intended

service.



4. Contractor shall guarantee performance of assemblies of components, and shall repair or

replace elements of the assemblies as required to deliver specified performance of the

complete assembly.

C. Components of equipment shall bear manufacturer's name and trademark, model number, serial

number and performance data on a name plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place, or cast

integral with, stamped or otherwise permanently marked upon the components of the equipment.

D. Major items of equipment, which serve the same function, shall be the same make and model

2.2 COMPATIBILITY OF RELATED EQUIPMENT

A. Equipment and materials installed shall be compatible in all respects with other items being

furnished and with existing items so that the result will be a complete and fully operational system

that conforms to contract requirements.

2.3 LIFTING ATTACHMENTS

Equipment shall be provided with suitable lifting attachments to enable equipment to be lifted in

its normal position. Lifting attachments shall withstand any handling conditions that might be

encountered, without bending or distortion of shape, such as rapid lowering and braking of load.

2.4 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS IDENTIFICATION

A. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings, or shown

in the maintenance manuals. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

B. Use symbols, nomenclature and equipment numbers specified, shown on the drawings, or shown

in the maintenance manuals. In addition, provide bar code identification nameplate for all

equipment which will allow the equipment identification code to be scanned into the system for

maintenance and inventory tracking. Identification for piping is specified in Section 09 91 00,

PAINTING.

C. Interior (Indoor) Equipment: Engraved nameplates, with letters not less than 48 mm (3/16-inch)

high of brass with black-filled letters, or rigid black plastic with white letters specified in Section 09

91 00, PAINTING shall be permanently fastened to the equipment. Unit components such as

water heaters, tanks, coils, filters, fans, etc. shall be identified.

D. Exterior (Outdoor) Equipment: Brass nameplates, with engraved black filled letters, not less than

48 mm (3/16-inch) high riveted or bolted to the equipment.

E. Control Items: All temperature, pressure, and controllers shall be labeled and the component’s

function identified. Identify and label each item as they appear on the control diagrams.

F. Valve Tags and Lists:

1. Plumbing: All valves shall be provided with valve tags and listed on a valve list (Fixture stops

not included).

2. Valve tags: Engraved black filled numbers and letters not less than 13 mm (1/2-inch) high for

number designation, and not less than 6.4 mm(1/4-inch) for service designation on 19 gage,

38 mm (1-1/2 inches) round brass disc, attached with brass "S" hook or brass chain.



3. Valve lists: Valve lists shall be created using a word processing program and printed on

plastic coated cards. The plastic coated valve list card(s), sized 216 mm (8-1/2 inches) by

280 mm (11 inches) shall show valve tag number, valve function and area of control for each

service or system. The valve list shall be in a punched 3-ring binder notebook. A copy of the

valve list shall be mounted in picture frames for mounting to a wall.

4. A detailed plan for each floor of the building indicating the location and valve number for each

valve shall be provided. Each valve location shall be identified with a color coded sticker or

thumb tack in ceiling.

2.5 FIRE STOPPING

A. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING specifies an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke

and gases where penetrations occur for piping. Refer to Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING,

AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION, for pipe insulation.

2.6 GALVANIZED REPAIR COMPOUND

A. Mil. Spec. OD-P-21035B,paint.

2.7 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS AND RESTRAINTS

A. In lieu of the paragraph which follows, suspended equipment support and restraints may be

designed and installed in accordance with the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition,

and SECTION 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS FOR NON-STRUCTURAL

COMPONENTS. Submittals based on the International Building Code (IBC), latest edition,

SECTION 13 05 41 requirements, or the following paragraphs of this Section shall be stamped

and signed by a professional engineer registered in a state where the project is located. The

Support system of suspended equipment over 227 kg (500 pounds) shall be submitted for

approval of the Resident Engineer in all cases. See these specifications for lateral force design

requirements.

B. Type Numbers Specified: MSS SP-58. For selection and application refer to MSS SP-69. Refer to

Section 05 50 00, METAL FABRICATIONS, for miscellaneous metal support materials and prime

coat painting.

C. For Attachment to Concrete Construction:

1. Concrete insert: Type 18, MSS SP-58.

2. Self-drilling expansion shields and machine bolt expansion anchors: Permitted in concrete

not less than 102 mm (4 inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job

condition.

3. Power-driven fasteners: Permitted in existing concrete or masonry not less than 102 mm (4

inches) thick when approved by the Resident Engineer for each job condition.

D. For Attachment to Steel Construction: MSS SP-58.

1. Welded attachment: Type 22.



2. Beam clamps: Types 20, 21, 28 or 29. Type 23 C-clamp may be used for individual copper

tubing up to 23 mm (7/8-inch) outside diameter.

E. Attachment to Metal Pan or Deck: As required for materials specified in Section 05 31 00, STEEL

DECKING. Section 05 36 00, COMPOSITE METAL DECKING.

F. For Attachment to Wood Construction: Wood screws or lag bolts.

G. Hanger Rods: Hot-rolled steel, ASTM A36 or A575 for allowable load listed in MSS SP-58. For

piping, provide adjustment means for controlling level or slope. Types 13 or 15 turn-buckles shall

provide 38 mm (1-1/2 inches) minimum of adjustment and incorporate locknuts. All-thread rods

are acceptable.

H. Multiple (Trapeze) Hangers: Galvanized, cold formed, lipped steel channel horizontal member,

not less than 41 mm by 41 mm (1-5/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches), 2.7 mm (No. 12 gage), designed to

accept special spring held, hardened steel nuts. Trapeze hangers are not permitted for steam

supply and condensate piping.

1. Allowable hanger load: Manufacturers rating less 91kg (200 pounds).

2. Guide individual pipes on the horizontal member of every other trapeze hanger with 6 mm

(1/4-inch) U-bolt fabricated from steel rod. Provide Type 40 insulation shield, secured by two

13 mm (1/2-inch) galvanized steel bands, or insulated calcium silicate shield for insulated

piping at each hanger.

I. Pipe Hangers and Supports: (MSS SP-58), use hangers sized to encircle insulation on insulated

piping. To protect insulation, provide Type 39 saddles for roller type supports or insulated calcium

silicate shields. Provide Type 40 insulation shield or insulated calcium silicate shield at all other

types of supports and hangers including those for insulated piping.

1. General Types (MSS SP-58):

a. Standard clevis hanger: Type 1; provide locknut.

b. Riser clamps: Type 8.

c. Wall brackets: Types 31, 32 or 33.

d. Roller supports: Type 41, 43, 44 and 46.

e. Saddle support: Type 36, 37 or 38.

f. Turnbuckle: Types 13 or 15.

g. U-bolt clamp: Type 24.

h. Copper Tube:

1) Hangers, clamps and other support material in contact with tubing shall be painted

with copper colored epoxy paint, plastic coated or taped with isolation tape to prevent

electrolysis.

2) For vertical runs use epoxy painted or plastic coated riser clamps.

3) For supporting tube to strut: Provide epoxy painted pipe straps for copper tube or

plastic inserted vibration isolation clamps.



4) Insulated Lines: Provide pre-insulated calcium silicate shields sized for copper tube.

i. Supports for plastic or glass piping: As recommended by the pipe manufacturer with

black rubber tape extending one inch beyond steel support or clamp. Spring Supports

(Expansion and contraction of vertical piping):

1) Movement up to 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 51 or 52 variable spring unit with integral

turn buckle and load indicator.

2) Movement more than 20 mm (3/4-inch): Type 54 or 55 constant support unit with

integral adjusting nut, turn buckle and travel position indicator.

j. Spring hangers are required on all plumbing system pumps one horsepower and greater.

2. Plumbing Piping (Other Than General Types):

a. Horizontal piping: Type 1, 5, 7, 9, and 10.

b. Chrome plated piping: Chrome plated supports.

c. Hangers and supports in pipe chase: Prefabricated system ABS self-extinguishing

material, not subject to electrolytic action, to hold piping, prevent vibration and

compensate for all static and operational conditions.

d. Blocking, stays and bracing: Angle iron or preformed metal channel shapes, 1.3 mm (18

gage) minimum.

e. Seismic Restraint of Piping: Refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT

REQUIREMENTS FOR NON- STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.

2.8 PIPE PENETRATIONS

A. Pipe penetration sleeves shall be installed for all pipe other than rectangular blocked out floor

openings for risers in mechanical bays.

B. Pipe penetration sleeve materials shall comply with all fire stopping requirements for each

penetration.

C. To prevent accidental liquid spills from passing to a lower level, provide the following:

1. For sleeves: Extend sleeve 25 mm (1 inch) above finished floor and provide sealant for

watertight joint.

2. For blocked out floor openings: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle set in silicone adhesive

around opening.

3. For drilled penetrations: Provide 40 mm (1-1/2 inch) angle ring or square set in silicone

adhesive around penetration.

C. Penetrations are not allowed through beams or ribs, but may be installed in concrete beam

flanges. Any deviation from these requirements must receive prior approval of Resident Engineer.

D. Sheet metal, plastic, or moisture resistant fiber sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through

floors, interior walls, and partitions, unless brass or steel pipe sleeves are specifically called for

below.



E. Cast iron or zinc coated pipe sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through exterior walls

below grade. The space between the sleeve and pipe shall be made watertight with a modular or

link rubber seal. The link seal shall be applied at both ends of the sleeve.

F. Galvanized steel or an alternate black iron pipe with asphalt coating sleeves shall be for pipe

passing through concrete beam flanges, except where brass pipe sleeves are called for. A

galvanized steel Sleeve shall be provided for pipe passing through floor of mechanical rooms,

laundry work rooms, and animal rooms above basement. Except in mechanical rooms, sleeves

shall be connected with a floor plate.

G. Brass Pipe Sleeves shall be provided for pipe passing through quarry tile, terrazzo or ceramic tile

floors. The sleeve shall be connected with a floor plate.

H. Sleeve clearance through floors, walls, partitions, and beam flanges shall be 25 mm (1 inch)

greater in diameter than external diameter of pipe. Sleeve for pipe with insulation shall be large

enough to accommodate the insulation plus 25 mm (1 inch) in diameter. Interior openings shall

be caulked tight with fire stopping material and sealant to prevent the spread of fire, smoke, and

gases.

I. Sealant and Adhesives: Shall be as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

2.9 WALL, FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES

A. Material and Type: Chrome plated brass or chrome plated steel, one piece or split type with

concealed hinge, with set screw for fastening to pipe, or sleeve. Use plates that fit tight around

pipes, cover openings around pipes and cover the entire pipe sleeve projection.

B. Thickness: Not less than 2.4 mm (3/32-inch) for floor plates. For wall and ceiling plates, not less

than 0.64 mm (0.025-inch) for up to 80 mm (3 inch) pipe, 0.89 mm (0.035-inch) for larger pipe.

C. Locations: Use where pipe penetrates floors, walls and ceilings in exposed locations, in finished

areas only. Wall plates shall be used where insulation ends on exposed water supply pipe drop

from overhead. A watertight joint shall be provided in spaces where brass or steel pipe sleeves

are specified.

2.14 ASBESTOS

Materials containing asbestos are not permitted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ARRANGEMENT AND INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPING

A. Location of piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment, access provisions shall be

coordinated with the work of all trades. Piping, sleeves, inserts, hangers, and equipment shall be

located clear of windows, doors, openings, light outlets, and other services and utilities.

Equipment layout drawings shall be prepared to coordinate proper location and personnel access

of all facilities. The drawings shall be submitted for review.

Manufacturer's published recommendations shall be followed for installation methods not

otherwise specified.



B. Operating Personnel Access and Observation Provisions: All equipment and systems shall be

arranged to provide clear view and easy access, without use of portable ladders, for maintenance

and operation of all devices including, but not limited to: all equipment items, valves, filters,

strainers, transmitters, sensors, control devices. All gages and indicators shall be clearly visible

by personnel standing on the floor or on permanent platforms. Maintenance and operating space

and access provisions that are shown on the drawings shall not be changed nor reduced.

C. Structural systems necessary for pipe and equipment support shall be coordinated to permit

proper installation.

D. Location of pipe sleeves, trenches and chases shall be accurately coordinated with equipment

and piping locations.

E. Cutting Holes:

1. Holes through concrete and masonry shall be cut by rotary core drill. Pneumatic hammer,

impact electric, and hand or manual hammer type drill will not be allowed, except as

permitted by RE/COTR where working area space is limited.

2. Holes shall be located to avoid interference with structural members such as beams or grade

beams. Holes shall be laid out in advance and drilling done only after approval by RE/COTR.

If the Contractor considers it necessary to drill through structural members, this matter shall

be referred to RE/COTR for approval.

3. Waterproof membrane shall not be penetrated. Pipe floor penetration block outs shall be

provided outside the extents of the waterproof membrane.

F. Interconnection of Instrumentation or Control Devices: Generally, electrical and pneumatic

interconnections are not shown but must be provided.

G. Minor Piping: Generally, small diameter pipe runs from drips and drains, water cooling, and other

service are not shown but must be provided.

H. Protection and Cleaning:

1. Equipment and materials shall be carefully handled, properly stored, and adequately

protected to prevent damage before and during installation, in accordance with the

manufacturer's recommendations and as approved by the Resident Engineer. Damaged or

defective items in the opinion of the Resident Engineer, shall be replaced.

2. Protect all finished parts of equipment, such as shafts and bearings where accessible, from

rust prior to operation by means of protective grease coating and wrapping. Close pipe

openings with caps or plugs during installation. Pipe openings, equipment, and plumbing

fixtures shall be tightly covered against dirt or mechanical injury. At completion of all work

thoroughly clean fixtures, exposed materials and equipment.

I. Concrete and Grout: Concrete and shrink compensating grout 25 MPa (3000 psi) minimum,

specified in Section 03 30 00, CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE. shall be used for all pad or floor

mounted equipment. Gages, thermometers, valves and other devices shall be installed with due



regard for ease in reading or operating and maintaining said devices. Thermometers and gages

shall be located and positioned to be easily read by operator or staff standing on floor or walkway

provided. Servicing shall not require dismantling adjacent equipment or pipe work.

J. Interconnection of Controls and Instruments: Electrical interconnection is generally not shown but

shall be provided. This includes interconnections of sensors, transmitters, transducers, control

devices, control and instrumentation panels, instruments and computer workstations. Comply with

NFPA-70.

3.2 TEMPORARY PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Continuity of operation of existing facilities may require temporary installation or relocation of

equipment and piping. Temporary equipment or pipe installation or relocation shall be provided

to maintain continuity of operation of existing facilities.

B. The Contractor shall provide all required facilities in accordance with the requirements of phased

construction and maintenance of service. All piping and equipment shall be properly supported,

sloped to drain, operate without excessive stress, and shall be insulated where injury can occur to

personnel by contact with operating facilities. The requirements of Para. 3.1 shall apply.

C. Temporary facilities and piping shall be completely removed and any openings in structures

sealed. Necessary blind flanges and caps shall be provided to seal open piping remaining in

service.

3.3 PIPE AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Where hanger spacing does not correspond with joist or rib spacing, use structural steel channels

secured directly to joist and rib structure that will correspond to the required hanger spacing, and

then suspend the equipment and piping from the channels. Holes shall be drilled or burned in

structural steel ONLY with the prior written approval of the Resident Engineer.

B. The use of chain pipe supports, wire or strap hangers; wood for blocking, stays and bracing, or

hangers suspended from piping above shall not be permitted. Rusty products shall be replaced.

C. Hanger rods shall be used that are straight and vertical. Turnbuckles for vertical adjustments may

be omitted where limited space prevents use. A minimum of 15 mm (1/2-inch) clearance between

pipe or piping covering and adjacent work shall be provided.

D. For horizontal and vertical plumbing pipe supports, refer to the International Plumbing Code

(IPC), latest edition, and these specifications.

E. Overhead Supports:

1. The basic structural system of the building is designed to sustain the loads imposed by

equipment and piping to be supported overhead.

2. Provide steel structural members, in addition to those shown, of adequate capability to

support the imposed loads, located in accordance with the final approved layout of equipment

and piping.

3. Tubing and capillary systems shall be supported in channel troughs.



F. Floor Supports:

1. Provide concrete bases, concrete anchor blocks and pedestals, and structural steel systems

for support of equipment and piping. Concrete bases and structural systems shall be

anchored and doweled to resist forces under operating and seismic conditions (if applicable)

without excessive displacement or structural failure.

2. Bases and supports shall not be located and installed until equipment mounted thereon has

been approved. Bases shall be sized to match equipment mounted thereon plus 50 mm (2

inch) excess on all edges. Structural drawings shall be reviewed for additional requirements.

Bases shall be neatly finished and smoothed, shall have chamfered edges at the top, and

shall be suitable for painting.

3. All equipment shall be shimmed, leveled, firmly anchored, and grouted with epoxy grout.

Anchor bolts shall be placed in sleeves, anchored to the bases. Fill the annular space

between sleeves and bolts with a grout material to permit alignment and realignment.

4. For seismic anchoring, refer to Section 13 05 41, SEISMIC RESTRAINT REQUIREMENTS

FOR NON-STRUCTURAL COMPONENTS.

3.4 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. Prior to final inspection and acceptance of the plant and facilities for beneficial use by the

Government, the plant facilities, equipment and systems shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted.

Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

B. In addition, the following special conditions apply:

1. Cleaning shall be thorough. Solvents, cleaning materials and methods recommended by the

manufacturers shall be used for the specific tasks. All rust shall be removed prior to painting

and from surfaces to remain unpainted. Scratches, scuffs, and abrasions shall be repaired

prior to applying prime and finish coats.

2. The following Material And Equipment shall NOT be painted::

a. Motors, controllers, control switches, and safety switches.

b. Control and interlock devices.

c. Regulators.

d. Pressure reducing valves.

e. Control valves and thermostatic elements.

f. Lubrication devices and grease fittings.

g. Copper, brass, aluminum, stainless steel and bronze surfaces.

h. Valve stems and rotating shafts.

i. Pressure gages and thermometers.

j. Glass.

k. Name plates.



3. Control and instrument panels shall be cleaned and damaged surfaces repaired. Touch-up

painting shall be made with matching paint obtained from manufacturer or computer

matched.

4. Pumps, motors, steel and cast iron bases, and coupling guards shall be cleaned, and shall be

touched-up with the same color as utilized by the pump manufacturer

5. Temporary Facilities: Apply paint to surfaces that do not have existing finish coats.

6. The final result shall be a smooth, even-colored, even-textured factory finish on all items.

The entire piece of equipment shall be repainted, if necessary, to achieve this.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. Laminated plastic signs, with engraved lettering not less than 5 mm (3/16-inch) high, shall be

provided that designates equipment function, for all equipment, switches, motor controllers,

relays, meters, control devices, including automatic control valves. Nomenclature and

identification symbols shall correspond to that used in maintenance manual, and in diagrams

specified elsewhere. Attach by chain, adhesive, or screws.

B. Factory Built Equipment: Metal plate, securely attached, with name and address of manufacturer,

serial number, model number, size, performance shall be placed on factory built equipment.

C. Pipe Identification: Refer to Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

3.6 OPERATING AND PERFORMANCE TESTS

A. Prior to the final inspection, all required tests shall be performed as specified in Section 01 00 00,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS, Article, TESTS and submit the test reports and records to the

Resident Engineer.

B. Should evidence of malfunction in any tested system, or piece of equipment or component part

thereof, occur during or as a result of tests, make proper corrections, repairs or replacements,

and repeat tests at no additional cost to the Government.

C. When completion of certain work or system occurs at a time when final control settings and

adjustments cannot be properly made to make performance tests, then make performance tests

such systems respectively during first actual seasonal use of respective systems following

completion of work.

3.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Provide four bound copies. The Operations and maintenance manuals shall be delivered to

RE/COTR not less than 30 days prior to completion of a phase or final inspection.

B. All new and temporary equipment and all elements of each assembly shall be included.

C. Data sheet on each device listing model, size, capacity, pressure, speed, horsepower, impeller

size, and other information shall be included.

D. Manufacturer’s installation, maintenance, repair, and operation instructions for each device shall

be included. Assembly drawings and parts lists shall also be included. A summary of operating



precautions and reasons for precautions shall be included in the Operations and Maintenance

Manual.

3.8 INSTRUCTIONS TO VA PERSONNEL

Instructions shall be provided in accordance with Article, INSTRUCTIONS, of Section 01 00 00,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS.


City of Beverly Hills – 3

rd Street Tour Bus Station

METER & GAUGES FOR PLBG PIPING 22 05 19- 1

SECTION 22 05 19 - METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section describes the requirements for water meters and pressure gages.

1.2 RELATED WORK

Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, and

SAMPLES.

B. Manufacturer's Literature and Data:

1. Water Meter.

2. Pressure Gages.

3. Product certificates for each type of meter and gauge

C. Operations and Maintenance manual shall include:

1. System Description

2. Major assembly block diagrams

3. Troubleshooting and preventive maintenance guidelines

4. Spare parts information.


A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The


B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)

B40.1-05 ..................................... Gauges-Pressure Indicating Dial Type-Elastic

C. International Code Council (ICC):

CPC-2016 .................................. California Plumbing Code

1.5 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION

A. The electronic documentation and copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual, approved

submittals, shop drawings, and other closeout documentation shall be prepared by a computer

software program. As Adobe Acrobat is a common industry format for such documentation,

following the document, "Creating Accessible Adobe PDF files, A Guide for Document Authors"

that is maintained and made available by Adobe free of charge is recommended.”

B. Four sets of manufacturer’s literature and data updated to include submittal review comments

and any equipment substitutions.




C. Four sets of operation and maintenance data updated to include submittal review comments shall

be inserted into a three ring binder. All aspects of system operation and maintenance

procedures, including piping isometrics, wiring diagrams of all circuits, a written description of

system design shall be included in the operation and maintenance manual. The operations and

maintenance manual shall include troubleshooting techniques and procedures for emergency

situations. Notes on all special systems or devices such as damper and door closure interlocks

shall be included. A List of recommended spare parts (manufacturer, model number, and

quantity) shall be furnished. Information explaining any special knowledge or tools the owner will

be required to employ shall be inserted into the As-Built documentation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 DISPLACEMENT WATER METER

A. Use existing water meter as shown on plans, repair replace as required.

2.2 WATER METER STRAINER

A. All meters sizes 50 mm or DN50 (2 inches) and above, shall be fitted with a bronze inlet strainer

with top access. The strainer shall conform to AWWA 702.

2.7 PRESSURE GAGES FOR WATER USAGE

A. ANSI B40.1 all metal case 114 mm (4-1/2 inches) diameter, bottom connected throughout,

graduated as required for service, and identity labeled. Range shall be 0 to 1375 kPa (0 to 200

psi) gauge.

B. The pressure element assembly shall be bourdon tube. The mechanical movement shall be lined

to pressure element and connected to pointer.

C. The dial shall be non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched scale markings graduated in

kPa and psi.

D. The pointer shall be dark colored metal.

E. The window shall be glass.

F. The ring shall be brass or stainless steel.

G. The accuracy shall be grade A, plus or minus 1 percent of middle half of scale range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Direct mounted pressure gages shall be installed in piping tees with pressure gage located on

pipe at the most readable position.

B. Valves and snubbers shall be installed in piping for each pressure gage.

C. Test plugs shall be installed on the inlet and outlet pipes all heat exchangers or water heaters

serving more than one plumbing fixture.

D. Pressure gages shall be installed where indicated on the drawings and at the following locations:

1. Building water service entrance into building

2. Inlet and outlet of each pressure reducing valve




3. Suction and discharge of each domestic water pump or re-circulating hot water return pump.


A. The meter assembly shall be visually inspected and operationally tested. The correct multiplier

placement on the face of the meter shall be verified.




GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING 22 05 23- 1

SECTION 22 05 23 - GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This section describes the requirements for general-duty valves for domestic water system.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SAMPLES.


1. Valves.

2. Backflow Preventers.

3. Pressure Reducing Valves.

4. All items listed in Part 2 - Products.




B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):A536-84(R 2004) Standard Specification for

Ductile Iron Castings

C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE)

ASSE 1003-01 (R 2003) ............ Performance Requirements for Water Pressure Reducing Valves

ASSE 1012-02 ........................... Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent

ASSE 1013-05 ........................... Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced

Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers

D. International Code Council (ICC)

IPC-06 ....................................... International Plumbing Code

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):

SP-25-98 .................................... Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and

UnionsSP-67-02a (R 2004) Butterfly Valve of the Single flange

Type (Lug Wafer)

SP-70-06 .................................... Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.

SP-72-99 .................................... Ball Valves With Flanged or Butt Welding For General Purpose

SP-80-03 .................................... Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.

SP-110-96 .................................. Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and

Flared Ends





A. Valves shall be prepared for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.

2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.

3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling.

4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces

5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open.

6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Valves shall be prepared for storage as follows:

1. Maintain valve end protection.

2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VALVES

A. Asbestos packing and gaskets are prohibited.

B. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification resistant materials. Bronze valves made with

copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc shall not be permitted.

C. Valves in insulated piping shall have 50 mm or DN50 (2 inch) stem extensions and extended

handles of non-thermal conductive material that allows operating the valve without breaking the

vapor seal or disturbing the insulation. Memory stops shall be fully adjustable after insulation is

applied.

D. Ball valves, pressure regulating valves, gate valves, globe valves, and plug valves used to supply

potable water shall meet the requirements of NSF 61.

F. Shut-off:

1. Cold Water:

a. 50 mm or DN50 (2 inches) and smaller: Ball, MSS SP-72, SP-110, Ball valve shall be full

port three piece or two piece with a union design with adjustable stem package.

Threaded stem designs are not allowed. The ball valve shall have a SWP rating of 1035

kPa (150 psig) and a CWP rating of 4140 kPa (600 psig). The body material shall be

Bronze ASTM B584, Alloy C844. The ends shall be solder,

C. Check:

1. Check valves less than 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) and smaller) shall be class 125, bronze

swing check valves with non metallic Buna-N disc. The check valve shall meet MSS SP-80

Type 4 standard. The check valve shall have a CWP rating of 1380 kPa (200 psig). The

check valve shall have a Y pattern horizontal body design with bronze body material

conforming to ASTM B 62, solder joints, and PTFE or TFE disc.

E. Globe:




1. 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) or smaller: Class 150, bronze globe valve with non metallic disc.

The globe valve shall meet MSS SP-80, Type 2 standard. The globe valve shall have a CWP

rating of 2070 kPa (300 psig). The valve material shall be bronze with integral seal and union

ring bonnet conforming to ASTM B 62 with solder ends, copper-silicon bronze stem, TPFE or

TFE disc, malleable iron hand wheel.

2. Larger than 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches): Similar to above, except with cast iron body and

bronze trim, class 125, iron globe valve. The globe valve shall meet MSS SP-85, Type 1

standard. The globe valve shall have a CWP rating of 1380 kPa (200 psig). The valve

material shall be gray iron with bolted bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 with flanged ends,

bronze trim, malleable iron handwheel.

2.2 WATER PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE AND CONNECTIONS

A. 80 mm or DN80 (3 inches) or smaller: The pressure reducing valve shall consist of a bronze body

and bell housing, a separate access cover for the plunger, and a bolt to adjust the downstream

pressure. The bronze bell housing and access cap shall be threaded to the body and shall not

require the use of ferrous screws. The assembly shall be of the balanced piston design and shall

reduce pressure in both flow and no flow conditions. The assembly shall be accessible for

maintenance without having to remove the body from the line.

B. The regulator shall have a tap for pressure gauge.

C. The regulator shall have a temperature rating of 100° C (210° F) for hot water or hot water return

service. Pressure regulators shall have accurate pressure regulation to 6.9-kPa (+/- 1 psig).

D. Setting: Entering water pressure, discharge pressure, capacity, size, and related measurements

shall be as shown on the drawings.

E. Connections Valves and Strainers: shut off valves shall be installed on each side of reducing

valve and a bypass line equal in size to the regulator inlet pipe shall be installed with a normally

closed globe valve. A strainer shall be installed on inlet side of, and same size as pressure

reducing valve. A pressure gage shall be installed on the low pressure side of the line.

2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. A backflow prevention assembly shall be installed at any point in the plumbing system where the

potable water supply comes in contact with a potential source of contamination. The backflow

prevention assembly shall be ASSE 1013 listed and certified.

B. Reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be installed in the following applications.

1. Water make up to heating systems, cooling tower, chilled water system, generators, and

similar equipment consuming water.

2. Water service entrance from loop system.

3. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: ASSE 1001

a. Hose bibs and sinks w/threaded outlets.

b. Disposers.




C. The reduced pressure principle backflow prevention assembly shall be ASSE listed 1013 with full

port OS&Y gate valves and an integral relief monitor switch. The main body and access cover

shall be epoxy coated duct iron conforming to ASTM A536 grade 4. The seat ring and check

valve shall be Noryl (NSF listed). The stem shall be stainless steel conforming to ASTM A276.

The seat disc elastomer shall be EPDM. The checks and the relief valve shall be accessible for

maintenance without removing the device from the line. An epoxy coated wye type strainer with

flanged connections shall be installed on the inlet.

D. The atmospheric vacuum breaker shall be ASSE listed 1001. The main body shall be either cast

bronze. All internal polymers shall be NSF listed. The seat disc elastomer shall be silicone. The

device shall be accessible for maintenance without removing the device from the service line.

The installation shall not be in a concealed or inaccessible location or where the venting of water

from the device during normal operation is deemed objectionable.

E. The double check detector backflow prevention assembly shall be ASSE listed 1048 and supply

with full port OS&Y gate valves. The main body and access cover shall be epoxy coated ductile

iron conforming to ASTM A536 grade. The seat ring and check valve shall be Noryl (NSF listed).

The stem shall be stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 276. The seat disc elastomers shall be

EPDM. The first and second check valve shall be accessible for maintenance without removing

the device from the line.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Valve interior shall be examined for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.

Special packing materials shall be removed, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement

during shipping and handling.

B. Valves shall be operated in positions from fully open to fully closed. Guides and seats shall be

examined and made accessible by such operations.

C. Threads on valve and mating pipe shall be examined for form and cleanliness.

D. Mating flange faces shall be examined for conditions that might cause leakage. Bolting shall be

checked for proper size, length, and material. Gaskets shall be verified for proper size and that

its material composition is suitable for service and free from defects and damage.

E. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service,

maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

B. Valves shall be located for easy access and shall be provide with separate support. Valves shall

be accessible with access doors when installed inside partitions or above hard ceilings.

C. Valves shall be installed in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe




D. Valves shall be installed in a position to allow full stem movement.

E. Check valves shall be installed for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Valve packing shall be adjusted or replaced after piping systems have been tested and put into

service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves shall be replaced if persistent

leaking occurs.




FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 22 11 00- 1

SECTION 22 11 00 - FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Domestic water systems, including piping, equipment and all necessary accessories as

designated in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING.

B. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING.

D. SECTION 22 08 00, COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING SYSTEMS: Requirements for

commissioning, systems readiness checklist, and training.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND

SAMPLES.






B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)

A13.1 .......................................... Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

B16.3-2011 ................................. Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300

B16.9-2007 ................................. Factory-Made Wrought Butt Welding Fittings

B16.11-2011 ............................... Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded

B16.12-2009 .............................. Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

B16.15-2006 .............................. Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250

B16.18-2001 (R2005)................. Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.22-2012 ............................... Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.51-2011 ............................... Copper and Copper Alloy Press-Connect Fittings

NSF/ANSI 61-2012 .................... Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects


A47/A47M-99(2009) ................... Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings

A53/A53M-12 ............................. Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and

Seamless




A183-03(2009) ........................... Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

A269–10 ..................................... Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for

General Service

A312/A312M-12 ......................... Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic

Stainless Steel Pipes

A403/A403M-12 ......................... Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel Piping Fittings

A536-84(2009) ........................... Ductile Iron Castings

A733-03(2009)e1 ....................... Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel and Austenitic Stainless

Steel Pipe Nipples

B32-08 ........................................ Solder Metal

B61-08 ........................................ Steam or Valve Bronze Castings

B62-09 ........................................ Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings

B75/B75M-11 ............................. Seamless Copper Tube

B88-09 ........................................ Seamless Copper Water Tube

B584-12a .................................... Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications

B687-99(2011) ........................... Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated Pipe Nipples

D1785-12 ................................... Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and

120

D2000-12 ................................... Rubber Products in Automotive Applications

D4101-11 ................................... Propylene Plastic Injection and Extrusion Materials

D2564-04(2009) e1 .................... Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe

and Fittings

E1120-08 .................................... Liquid Chlorine

E1229-08 .................................... Calcium Hypochlorite

D. American Water Works Association (AWWA):

C110/A21.10-12 ......................... Ductile Iron and Gray Iron

C151/A21.51-09 ......................... Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast

C153/A21.53-11 ......................... Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings

C203-08 ..................................... Coal-Tar Protective Coatings and Linings for Steel Water

Pipelines - Enamel and Tape - Hot Applied

C213-07 ..................................... Fusion Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior & Exterior of Steel

Water Pipelines

C651-05 ..................................... Disinfecting Water Mains

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

A5.8/A5.8M-2011 ....................... Filler Metals for Brazing

F. International Plumbing Code

International Plumbing Code – 2009




G. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):

ANSI/ASSE 1001-2008 .............. Pipe Applied Atmospheric Type Vacuum Breakers

ANSI/ASSE 1010-2004 .............. Water Hammer Arresters

ANSI/ASSE 1018-2001 .............. Trap Seal Primer Valves – Potable Water Supplied

ANSI/ASSE 1020-2004 .............. Pressure Vacuum Breaker Assembly

H. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):

PDI WH-201 2010 ...................... Water Hammer Arrestor


A. A certificate of Welder’s certification shall be submitted prior to welding of steel piping. The

certificate shall be current and no more than one year old.

B. All grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, and specialties shall be the products of a single

manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be by the same manufacturer as the groove components.

C. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, etc., shall be date stamped for

quality assurance and traceability.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERGROUND WATER SERVICE CONNECTIONS TO BUILDINGS

A. From inside face of exterior wall to a distance of approximately 5 feet (1500 mm) outside of

building and underground inside building, material to be the same for the size specified inside of

the building.

B. Under 3 inch (75 mm) Diameter: Copper tubing, ASTM B88, Type K, seamless, annealed. Fittings

as specified under Article 2.2, INTERIOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING. Use brazing alloys, AWS

A5.8, Classification BCuP.

C. Flexible Expansion Joint: Ductile iron with ball joints rated for 250 psi (1725 kPa) working

pressure conforming to ANSI/AWWA C153/A21.53, capable of deflecting a minimum of 20

degrees in each direction and expanding simultaneously to the amount shown on the drawings.

Flexible expansion joint size shall match the pipe size it is connected to and shall have the

expansion capability designed as an integral part of the ductile iron ball castings. Pressure

containing parts shall be lined with a minimum of 15 mils of fusion bonded epoxy conforming to

the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C213 and shall be factory tested with a 1500 volt

spark test. Flexible expansion joint shall have flanged connections conforming to ANSI/AWWA

C110. Bolts and nuts shall be 316 stainless steel and gaskets shall be neoprene. The coating

and gaskets shall meet NSF/ANSI 61. The flexible expansion fitting shall not expand or exert an

axial thrust under internal water pressure. Provide piping joint restraints at each mechanical joint

end connection and piping restraints at the penetration of the building wall. The restraints shall be

provided to address the developed trust at the change of piping direction.




2.2 ABOVE GROUND (INTERIOR) WATER PIPING

A. Pipe: Copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K or L, drawn. For pipe 6 inches (150 mm) and larger,

stainless steel, ASTM A312, schedule 10 shall be used.

B. Fittings for Copper Tube:

1. Wrought copper or bronze castings conforming to ANSI B16.18 and B16.22. Unions shall be

bronze, MSS SP72 & SP 110, Solder or braze joints. Use 95/5 tin and antimony for all

soldered joints.

2. Grooved fittings, 2 to 6 inch (50 to 150 mm) wrought copper ASTM B75 C12200, 5 to 6 inch

(125 to 150 mm) bronze casting ASTM B584, CDA 844. Mechanical grooved couplings,

ductile iron, ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron, ASTM A47 (Grade 32510)

housing, with EPDM gasket, steel track head bolts, ASTM A183, coated with copper colored

alkyd enamel.

C. Fittings for Stainless Steel:

1. Stainless steel butt-welded fittings, Type 316, Schedule 10, conforming to ANSI B16.9.

2. Grooved fittings, stainless steel, Type 316, Schedule 10, conforming to ASTM A403.

Segmentally fabricated fittings are not allowed. Mechanical grooved couplings, ductile iron,

ASTM A536 (Grade 65-45-12), or malleable iron, ASTM A47 (Grade 32510) housing, with

EPDM gasket, steel track head bolts, ASTM A183, coated with copper colored alkyd enamel.

D. Adapters: Provide adapters for joining screwed pipe to copper tubing.

E. Solder: ASTM B32 Composition Sb5 HA or HB. Provide non-corrosive flux.

F. Brazing alloy: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP.

2.3 EXPOSED WATER PIPING

A. Finished Room: Use full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping for exposed water piping

connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, equipment and reagent racks when not concealed by

apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections.

1. Pipe: Fed. Spec. WW-P-351, standard weight.

2. Fittings: ANSI B16.15 cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish.

3. Nipples: ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated.

4. Unions: Mss SP-72, SP-110, Brass or Bronze with chrome finish. Unions 2-1/2 inches (65

mm) and larger shall be flange type with approved gaskets.

B. Unfinished Rooms, Mechanical Rooms and Kitchens: Chrome-plated brass piping is not required.

Paint piping systems as specified in Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

2.5 TRAP PRIMER WATER PIPING:

A. Pipe: Copper tube, ASTM B88, type K, hard drawn.

B. Fittings: Bronze castings conforming to ANSI B16.18 Solder joints.

C. Solder: ASTM B32 composition Sb5. Provide non-corrosive flux.




2.6 STRAINERS

A. Provide on high pressure side of pressure reducing valves, on suction side of pumps, on inlet

side of indicating and control instruments and equipment subject to sediment damage and where

shown on drawings. Strainer element shall be removable without disconnection of piping.

B. Water: Basket or "Y" type with easily removable cover and brass strainer basket.

C. Body: Smaller than 3 inches (80 mm), brass or bronze; 3 inches (80 mm) and larger, cast iron or

semi-steel.

2.7 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Provide dielectric couplings or unions between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe.

2.8 STERILIZATION CHEMICALS

A. Hypochlorite: ASTM E1120-08

B. Liquid Chlorine: ASTM E1229-08

2.9 WATER HAMMER ARRESTER:

A. Closed copper tube chamber with permanently sealed 60 psig (410 KpA) air charge above a

Double O-ring piston. Two high heat Buna-N 0-rings pressure packed and lubricated with FDA

approved silicone compound. All units shall be designed in accordance with ASSE 1010 for

sealed wall installations without an access panel. Size and install in accordance with Plumbing

and Drainage Institute requirements (PDI-WH 201). Provide water hammer arrestors at:

1. All solenoid valves.

2. All groups of two or more flush valves.

3. All quick opening or closing valves.

4. All medical washing equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the International Plumbing Code and the following:

1. Install branch piping for water from the piping system and connect to all fixtures, valves,

cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment, including those furnished by the

Government or specified in other sections.

2. Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe, except for

plastic and glass, shall be reamed to full size after cutting.

3. All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work.

4. Install union and shut-off valve on pressure piping at connections to equipment.

5. Pipe Hangers, Supports and Accessories:

a. All piping shall be supported per the International Plumbing Code.

b. Shop Painting and Plating: Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for

pipe supports shall be shop coated with red lead or zinc chromate primer paint.




Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories may be used with copper

tubing.

c. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers:

1) Solid or split un-plated cast iron.

2) All plates shall be provided with set screws.

3) Pipe Hangers: Height adjustable clevis type.

4) Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges: Steel.

5) Concrete Inserts: "Universal" or continuous slotted type.

6) Hanger Rods: Mild, low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end with

two removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in

place.

7) Riser Clamps: Malleable iron or steel.

8) Rollers: Cast iron.

9) Self-drilling type expansion shields shall be "Phillips" type, with case hardened steel

expander plugs.

10) Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180 degree

(min.) metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger and support.

The shield shall be 4 inches in length and be 16 gauge steel. The shield shall be

sized for the insulation.

11) Miscellaneous Materials: As specified, required, directed or as noted on the drawings

for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance

exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the

center of that span. Provide all necessary auxiliary steel to provide that support.

12) With the installation of each flexible expansion joint, provide piping restraints for the

upstream and downstream section of the piping at the flexible expansion joint.

Provide calculations supporting the restraint length design and type of selected

restraints.

6. Install chrome plated cast brass escutcheon with set screw at each wall, floor and ceiling

penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

7. Penetrations:

a. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or

floors, install a fire stop that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke

and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00. Completely fill and seal clearances between

raceways and openings with the fire stopping materials.

b. Waterproofing: At floor penetrations, completely seal clearances around the pipe and

make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00.




8. Mechanical press-connect fitting connections shall be made in accordance with the

manufacturer’s installation instructions. Depth of insertion must be marked on the tube prior

to inserting the tube into the fitting. Ensure the tube is completely inserted to the fitting stop

(appropriate depth) and squared with the fitting prior to applying the pressing jaws onto the

fitting. The joints shall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer. Minimum

distance between fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements. When

the pressing cycle is complete, visually inspect the joint to ensure the tube has remained fully

inserted, as evidenced by the visible insertion mark.

B. Piping shall conform to the following:

1. Domestic Water:

a. Grade all lines to facilitate drainage. Provide drain valves at bottom of risers and all low

points in system. Design domestic hot water circulating lines with no traps.

b. Connect branch lines at bottom of main serving fixtures below and pitch down so that

main may be drained through fixture. Connect branch lines to top of main serving only

fixtures located on floor above.

3.2 TESTS

A. General: Test system either in its entirety or in sections. Submit testing plan to Resident

Engineer/COR 14 days prior to test date.

B. Potable Water System: Test after installation of piping and domestic water heaters, but before

piping is concealed, before covering is applied, and before plumbing fixtures are connected. Fill

systems with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure of 150 psi (1040 kPa) gage for two hours.

No decrease in pressure is allowed. Provide a pressure gage with a shutoff and bleeder valve at

the highest point of the piping being tested.

C. Re-agent Grade Water Systems: Fill system with water and maintain hydrostatic pressure of 200

psi (1040 kPa) gage during inspection and prove tight.

D. All Other Piping Tests: Test new installed piping under 1-1/2 times actual operating conditions

and prove tight.

3.3 STERILIZATION

A. After tests have been successfully completed, thoroughly flush and sterilize the interior domestic

water distribution system in accordance with AWWA C651.

B. Use liquid chlorine or hypochlorite for sterilization.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide commissioning documentation accordance with the requirements of Section 22 08 00.

B. Components provided under this section of the specification will be tested as part of a larger

system.

END OF SECTION



FACILITY SANITARY AND VENT PIPING 22 13 00- 1

SECTION 22 13 00 - FACILITY SANITARY AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section pertains to sanitary sewer and vent systems, including piping, equipment and all

necessary accessories as designated in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Penetrations in rated enclosures.

B. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems.

C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: Pipe Hangers and Supports,

Materials Identification.

D. Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Pipe Insulation.

E. Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants: Sealant products.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


SAMPLES.


1. Piping.

2. Floor Drains.

3. Cleanouts.


C. Detailed shop drawing of clamping device and extensions when required in connection with the

waterproofing membrane or the floor drain.




B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)

A112.6.3-01 (R 2007) ................. Standard for Floor and Trench Drains

A13.1-07 ..................................... Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

B16.3-06 ..................................... Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300.

B16.4-06 ..................................... Standard for Grey Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 125 and 250

B16.12-98 (R 2006) .................... Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

B16.15-06 ................................... Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250


A47/A47M-99 (R 2004) .............. Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the

Hot Dip Process




A53/A53M-07 ............................. Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-coated, Welded and Seamless

A74-06 ........................................ Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

A183-03 ...................................... Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

A536-84(R 2004) ........................ Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

B32-08 ........................................ Standard Specification for Solder Metal

B75-02 ........................................ Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

B306-02 ...................................... Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

B584-06a .................................... Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for

General Applications

C564-03a ................................... Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings

D2000-08 ................................... Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in

Automotive Applications

D2564-04E1 ............................... Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

D2665-08 ................................... Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

D. International Code Council:

IPC-06 ........................................ International Plumbing Code

E. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):

301-05 ........................................ Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm

Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

310-04 ........................................ Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe

and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent

Piping Applications

F. American Society of Sanitary Engineers (ASSE):

1018-01 ...................................... Trap Seal Primer Valves – Potable, Water Supplied

G. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI):

PDI WH-201 ............................... Water Hammer Arrestor

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SANITARY WASTE, DRAIN, AND VENT PIPING

A. Cast iron waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings

1. Cast iron waste, drain, and vent pipe and fittings shall be used for the following applications:

a. pipe buried in or in contact with earth

b. sanitary pipe extensions to a distance of approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of the

building.




c. interior waste and vent piping above grade.

2. Cast iron Pipe shall be bell and spigot or hubless (plain end or no-hub or hubless).

3. The material for all pipe and fittings shall be cast iron soil pipe and fittings and shall conform

to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888, or ASTM A-74.

4. Joints for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation

instructions. Couplings for hubless joints shall conform to CISPI 310. Joints for hub and

spigot pipe shall be installed with compression gaskets conforming to the requirements of

ASTM Standard C-564 or be installed with lead and oakum.

B. Copper Tube, (DWV):

1. Copper DWV tube sanitary waste, drain and vent pipe may be used for piping above ground,

except for urinal drains.

2. The copper DWV tube shall be drainage type, drawn temper conforming to ASTM B306.

3. The copper drainage fittings shall be cast copper or wrought copper conforming to ASME

B16.23 or ASME 16.29.

4. The joints shall be lead free, using a water flushable flux, and conforming to ASTM B32.

2.2 EXPOSED WASTE PIPING

A. Full iron pipe size chrome plated brass piping shall be used in finished rooms for exposed waste

piping connecting fixtures, casework, cabinets, equipment and reagent racks when not concealed

by apron including those furnished by the Government or specified in other sections.

1. The Pipe shall meet Fed. Spec. WW-P-351, standard weight.

2. The Fittings shall conform to ANSI B16.15, cast bronze threaded fittings with chrome finish,

(125 and 250).

3. Nipples shall conform to ASTM B 687, Chromium-plated.

4. Unions shall be brass or bronze with chrome finish. Unions 65 mm (2-1/2 inches) and larger

shall be flange type with approved gaskets.

B. In unfinished Rooms such as mechanical Rooms and Kitchens, Chrome-plated brass piping is not

required. The pipe materials specified under the paragraph “Sanitary Waste, Drain, and Vent

Piping” can be used. The sanitary pipe in unfinished rooms shall be painted as specified in

Section 09 91 00, PAINTING.

2.3 SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS

A. Transition pipe couplings shall join piping with small differences in outside diameters or different

materials. End connections shall be of the same size and compatible with the pipes being joined.

The transition coupling shall be elastomeric, sleeve type reducing or transition pattern and include

shear and corrosion resistant metal, tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. The

transition coupling sleeve coupling shall be of the following material:

1. For cast iron soil pipes, the sleeve material shall be rubber conforming to ASTM C564.




2. For dissimilar pipes, the sleeve material shall be PVC conforming to ASTM D5926, or other

material compatible with the pipe materials being joined.

B. The dielectric fittings shall conform to ASSE 1079 with a pressure rating of 860 kPa (125 psig) at

a minimum temperature of 82°C (180°F). The end connection shall be solder joint copper alloy

and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric flange insulating kits shall be of non conducting materials for field assembly of

companion flanges with a pressure rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig). The gasket shall be neoprene

or phenolic. The bolt sleeves shall be phenolic or polyethylene. The washers shall be phenolic

with steel backing washers.

D. The di-electric nipples shall be electroplated steel nipple complying with ASTM F 1545 with a

pressure ratings of 2070 kPa (300 psig) at 107°C (225°F). The end connection shall be male

threaded. The lining shall be inert and noncorrosive propylene.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, up to 100 mm (4 inches); and not less than 100

mm (4 inches) for larger pipe. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible and shall be gastight and

watertight. Minimum clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) shall be provided for clearing a clogged

sanitary line.

B. Floor cleanouts shall be gray iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated,

gray iron cover conforming to ASME A112.36.2M. A gray iron ferrule with hubless, socket, inside

calk or spigot connection and counter sunk, taper-thread, brass or bronze closure plug shall be

included. The frame and cover material and finish shall be nickel-bronze copper alloy with a

square shape. The cleanout shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches).

When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, clamping collars shall be provided on

the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of wye fittings and eighth bends with brass or bronze screw

plugs. Cleanouts in the resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with

square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In the carpeted areas, carpet cleanout markers shall

be provided. Two way cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings and at every

building exit. The loading classification for cleanouts in sidewalk areas or subject to vehicular

traffic shall be heavy duty type.

C. Cleanouts shall be provided at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug

located approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. If there are no fixtures installed on the

lowest floor, the cleanout shall be installed at the base of the stack. The cleanouts shall be

extended to the wall access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Nickel-bronze square

frame and stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 by 150 mm (6 by 6 inches) shall be

furnished at each wall cleanout. Where the piping is concealed, a fixture trap or a fixture with

integral trap, readily removable without disturbing concealed pipe, shall be accepted as a

cleanout equivalent providing the opening to be used as a cleanout opening is the size required.




D. In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting

or caulked/hubless cast iron ferrule. Plain end (hubless) piping in interstitial space or above

ceiling may use plain end (hubless) blind plug and clamp.

2.5 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drain shall comply with ANSI A112.6.3. The type C floor drain shall have a cast iron body,

double drainage pattern, clamping device, light duty square or round nickel bronze adjustable

strainer and grate with vandal proof screws.

2.6 TRAPS

A. Traps shall be provided on all sanitary branch waste connections from fixtures or equipment

not provided with traps. Exposed brass shall be polished brass chromium plated with nipple and

set screw escutcheons. Concealed traps may be rough cast brass or same material as pipe

connected to. Slip joints are not permitted on sewer side of trap. Traps shall correspond to fittings

on cast iron soil pipe or steel pipe respectively, and size shall be as required by connected

service or fixture.

2.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES AND TRAP SEAL PRIMER SYSTEMS

A. See plans for Manufacturer and model number.

2.9 WATERPROOFING

A. A sleeve flashing device shall be provided at points where pipes pass through membrane

waterproofed floors or walls. The sleeve flashing device shall be manufactured, cast iron fitting

with clamping device that forms a sleeve for the pipe floor penetration of the floor membrane. A

galvanized steel pipe extension shall be included in the top of the fitting that will extend 50 mm (2

inches) above finished floor and galvanized steel pipe extension in the bottom of the fitting that

will extend through the floor slab. A waterproof caulked joint shall be provided at the top hub.

B. Walls: See detail shown on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. The pipe installation shall comply with the requirements of the International Plumbing Code (IPC)

and these specifications.

B. Branch piping shall be installed for waste from the respective piping systems and connect to all

fixtures, valves, cocks, outlets, casework, cabinets and equipment.

C. Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe shall be reamed to

full size after cutting.

D. All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work.

E. The piping shall be installed above accessible ceilings where possible.

F. The piping shall be installed to permit valve servicing or operation.

G. Unless specifically indicated on the drawings, the minimum slope shall be 2% slope.

H. The piping shall be installed free of sags and bends.




I. Seismic restraint shall be installed where required by code.

J. Changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping shall be made using appropriate

branches, bends and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep quarter bends may be

used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Long turn

double wye branch and eighth bend fittings shall be used if two fixtures are installed back to back

or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent

lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Proper size of standard increaser

and reducers shall be used if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage

piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Buried soil and waste drainage and vent piping shall be laid beginning at the low point of each

system. Piping shall be installed true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity

of invert. Hub ends shall be placed upstream. Required gaskets shall be installed according to

manufacturer’s written instruction for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation

requirements.

L. Cast iron piping shall be installed according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Handbook,” Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings”

M. Aboveground copper tubing shall be installed according to CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook”.

N. Aboveground PVC piping shall be installed according to ASTM D2665. Underground PVC piping

shall be installed according to ASTM D2321.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with gasket joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s

“Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for compression joints.

B. Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with calked joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s

“Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for lead and oakum calked joints.

C. Hubless or No-hub, cast iron piping shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for hubless piping coupling joints.

D. For threaded joints, thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. The

threads shall be cut full and clean using sharp disc cutters. Threaded pipe ends shall be reamed

to remove burrs and restored to full pipe inside diameter. Pipe fittings and valves shall be joined

as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is required by the pipe service

2. Pipe sections with damaged threads shall be replaced with new sections of pipe.

E. Copper tube and fittings with soldered joints shall be joined according to ASTM B828. A water

flushable, lead free flux conforming to ASTM B813 and a lead free alloy solder conforming to

ASTM B32 shall be used.





A. Transition coupling shall be installed at pipe joints with small differences in pipe outside

diameters.

B. Dielectric fittings shall be installed at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

3.4 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:

A. All piping shall be supported according to the International Plumbing Code (IPC), Section 22 05 11,

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and these specifications. Where conflicts arise

between these the code and Section 22 05 11, the most restrictive or the requirement that

specifies supports with highest loading or shortest spacing shall apply.

B. Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for pipe supports shall be shop coated

with zinc chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories

may be used with copper tubing.

C. Horizontal piping and tubing shall be supported within 300 mm (12 inches) of each fitting or

coupling.

D. Horizontal cast iron piping shall be supported with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum hanger rod diameters:

1. 40 mm or DN40 to 50 mm or DN50 (NPS 1-1/2 inch to NPS 2 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches)

with 10 mm (3/8 inch) rod.

2. 80 mm or DN 80 (NPS 3 inch): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 13 mm (½ inch) rod.

3. 100 mm or DN100 to 125 mm or DN125 (NPS 4 to NPS 5): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 16.

E. Vertical piping and tubing shall be supported at the base, at each floor, and at intervals no greater

than 4.57 m (15 feet).

F. In addition to the requirements in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR

PLUMBING, floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates, Supports, Hangers shall have the following

characteristics:

1. Solid or split unplated cast iron.

2. All plates shall be provided with set screws.

3. Height adjustable clevis type pipe hangers.

4. Adjustable floor rests and base flanges shall be steel.

5. Hanger rods shall be low carbon steel, fully threaded or threaded at each end with two

removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.

7. Riser clamps shall be malleable iron or steel.

8. Rollers shall be cast iron.

9. See Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, for requirements on

insulated pipe protective shields at hanger supports.

H. Miscellaneous materials shall be provided as specified, required, directed or as noted on the

drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance




exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that

span. All necessary auxiliary steel shall be provided to provide that support.

I. Cast escutcheon with set screw shall be provided at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in

exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

J. Penetrations:

1. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors,

a fire stop shall be installed that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire,

smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Clearances between

raceways and openings shall be completely filled and sealed with the fire stopping materials.

2. Water proofing: At floor penetrations, clearances shall be completely sealed around the pipe

and make watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

K. Piping shall conform to the following:

1. Waste and Vent Drain to main stacks:

Pipe Size Minimum Pitch

80 mm or DN 80 (3 inches) and smaller

2%

100 mm or DN 100 (4 inches) and larger

2%

3.5 TESTS

A. Sanitary waste and drain systems shall be tested either in its entirety or in sections.

B. Waste System tests shall be conducted before trenches are backfilled or fixtures are connected.

A water test or air test shall be conducted, as directed.

1. If entire system is tested for a water test, tightly close all openings in pipes except highest

opening, and fill system with water to point of overflow. If the waste system is tested in

sections, tightly plug each opening except highest opening of section under test, fill each

section with water and test with at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. In testing successive

sections, test at least upper 3 m (10 feet) of next preceding section so that each joint or pipe

except upper most 3 m (10 feet) of system has been submitted to a test of at least a 3 m (10

foot) head of water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in portion under test, for at least 15

minutes before inspection starts. System shall then be tight at all joints.

2. For an air test, an air pressure of 35 kPa (5 psig) gage shall be maintained for at least 15

minutes without leakage. A force pump and mercury column gage shall be used for the air

test.

3. After installing all fixtures and equipment, open water supply so that all p-traps can be

observed. For 15 minutes of operation, all p-traps shall be inspected for leaks and any leaks

found shall be corrected.




3. Final Tests: Either one of the following tests may be used.

a. Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with water, fill

entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of 1.3 kPa (1 inch of water)

with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited.

b. Peppermint Test: Introduce (2 ounces) of peppermint into each line or stack.



Street Tour Bus Station FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE 22 14 00- 1

SECTION 22 14 00 - FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

This section describes the requirements for storm drainage systems, including piping and all

necessary accessories as designated in this section.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING: Penetrations in rated enclosures.

B. Section 09 91 00, PAINTING: Preparation and finish painting and identification of piping systems.

C. Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING: Pipe Hangers and Supports,

Materials Identification.

D. Section 23 07 11, HVAC, PLUMBING, AND BOILER PLANT INSULATION: Pipe Insulation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND

SAMPLES.


1. Piping.

2. Roof Drains.

3. Cleanouts.


C. Detailed shop drawing of clamping device and extensions when required in connection with the

waterproofing membrane.




B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): (Copyrighted Society)

A112.21.2m-83 ........................... Roof Drains

A13.1-07 ..................................... Scheme for Identification of Piping Systems

B16.3-06 ..................................... Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Classes 150 and 300.

B16.9-07 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings

B16.11-05 ................................... Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded B16.12-98

(R 2006) Cast Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings

B16.15-06) ................................. Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250

B16.18-01 (R 2005) .................... Cast Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings

B16.22-01 (R 2005) .................... Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings



D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

A47-99 (R 2004) ......................... Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the

Hot-Dip Process

A53-07 ........................................ Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black And Hot-Dipped,

Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless

A74-06 ........................................ Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

A183-03) .................................... Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts

A312-03 ...................................... Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic

Stainless Steel Pipe

A536-84(R 2004) ........................ Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

A733-03 ...................................... Standard Specification for Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel

and Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe Nipples

B32-04 ........................................ Standard Specification for Solder Metal

B61-08 ........................................ Standard Specification for Steam or Bronze Castings

B62-02 ........................................ Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings

B75-02 ........................................ Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube

B88-03 ........................................ Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube

B306-02 ...................................... Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV)

B584-08 ...................................... Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for

General Applications

B687-99 ...................................... Standard Specification for Brass, Copper, and Chromium-Plated

Pipe Nipples

C564-06a ................................... Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil

Pipe and Fittings

D2000-08 ................................... Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in

Automotive Applications

D4101-07 ................................... Standard Specification for Propylene Plastic Injection and

Extrusion Materials

D2447-03 ................................... Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe,

Schedule 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter

D2564-04e1 ............................... Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings

D2665-07 ................................... Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings

E. American Welding Society (AWS):

A5.8-04 ....................................... Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding



F. International Code Council (ICC):

IPC-06 ........................................ International Plumbing Code

G. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI):

301-05 ........................................ Hubless Cast Iron Soil and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain,

Waste, and Vent Piping Applications

310-04 ........................................ Couplings for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil and

Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping

Applications

H. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS):

SP-72-99 .................................... Standard for Ball Valves with Flanged or Butt Welding For

General Purpose

SP-110-96 .................................. Ball Valve Threaded, Socket Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and

Flared Ends

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STORM WATER DRAIN PIPING

A. Cast Iron Storm Pipe and Fittings:

1. Cast iron storm pipe and fittings shall be used for the following applications:

a. Pipe buried in or in contact with earth.

b. Extension of pipe to a distance of approximately 1500 mm (5 feet) outside of building

walls.

c. Interior storm piping above grade.

2. The cast iron storm Pipe shall be bell and spigot, or hubless (plain end or no-hub) as required

by selected jointing method.

3. The material for all pipe and fittings shall be cast iron soil pipe and fittings and shall conform

to the requirements of CISPI Standard 301, ASTM A-888, or ASTM A-74.

4. Joints for hubless pipe and fittings shall conform to the manufacturer’s installation

instructions. Couplings for hubless joints shall conform to CISPI 310. Joints for hub and

spigot pipe shall be installed with compression gaskets conforming to the requirements of

ASTM Standard C-564 or be installed with leak and oakum.


A. Transition pipe couplings shall join piping with small differences in outside diameters or be of

different materials. End connections shall be of the same size and compatible with the pipes

being joined. The transition coupling shall be elastomeric, sleeve type reducing or transition

pattern and include shear erring and corrosion resistant metal tension band and tightening

mechanism on each end. The transition coupling sleeve coupling shall be of the following

material:

1. For cast iron soil pipes, the sleeve material shall be rubber conforming to ASTM C564.



B. The dielectric fittings shall conform to ASSE 1079 with a pressure rating of 860 kPa (125 psig) at

a minimum temperature of 82°C (180°F). The end connection shall be solder joint copper alloy

and threaded ferrous.

C. Dielectric flange insulating kits shall be of non conducting materials for field assembly of

companion flanges with a pressure rating of 1035 kPa (150 psig). The gasket shall be neoprene

or phenolic.

D. The dielectric nipples shall be electroplated steel nipple comply with ASTM F 1545 with a

pressure ratings of 2070 kPa (300 psig) at 107°C (225°F). The end connection shall be male

threaded. The lining shall be inert and noncorrosive propylene.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Cleanouts shall be the same size as the pipe, up to 100 mm (4 inches); not less than 100 mm (4

inches) for larger pipe. Cleanouts shall be easily accessible and shall be gastight and watertight.

A minimum clearance of 600 mm (24 inches) shall be provided for clearing a clogged storm

sewer line.

B. Floor cleanouts shall be gray iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated,

gray iron cover conforming to ASME A112.36.2M. A gray iron ferrule with hubless, socket, inside

calk or spigot connection and counter sunk, taper-thread, brass or bronze closure plug shall be

included. The frame and cover material and finish shall be nickel-bronze copper alloy with a

square shape. The cleanout shall be vertically adjustable for a minimum of 50 mm (2 inches).

When a waterproof membrane is used in the floor system, clamping collars shall be provided on

the cleanouts. Cleanouts shall consist of wye fittings and eighth bends with brass or bronze screw

plugs. Cleanouts in the resilient tile floors, quarry tile and ceramic tile floors shall be provided with

square top covers recessed for tile insertion. In the carpeted areas, carpet cleanout markers shall

be provided. Two way cleanouts where shall be provided where indicated on the drawings and at

each building exit. The loading classification for cleanouts in sidewalk areas or subject to

vehicular traffic shall be heavy duty.

C. Cleanouts shall be provided at or near the base of the vertical stacks with the cleanout plug

located approximately 600 mm (24 inches) above the floor. The cleanouts shall be extended to

the wall access cover. Cleanout shall consist of sanitary tees. Nickel bronze square frame and

stainless steel cover with minimum opening of 150 mm by 150 mm (6 inch by 6 inch) shall be

provided at each wall cleanout.

D. In horizontal runs above grade, cleanouts shall consist of cast brass tapered screw plug in fitting

or caulked/no hub cast iron ferrule. Plain end (no-hub) piping in interstitial space or above ceiling

may use plain end (no-hub) blind plug and clamp.

2.5 ROOF DRAINS AND CONNECTIONS

A. Roof Drains: Roof Drains (RD) shall be cast iron with clamping device for making watertight

connection. Free openings through strainer shall be twice area of drain outlet. For roof drains not



installed in connection with a waterproof membrane, a soft copper membrane shall be provided

300 mm (12 inches) in diameter greater than outside diameter of drain collar. An integral gravel

stop shall be provided for drains installed on roofs having built up roofing covered with gravel or

slag. Integral no-hub, soil pipe gasket or threaded outlet connection shall be provided.

1. Flat Roofs: The roof drain shall have a beehive or dome shaped strainer with integral flange

not less than 300 mm (12 inches) in diameter. For an insulated roof, a roof drain with an

adjustable drainage collar shall be provided, which can be raised or lowered to meet required

insulation heights, sump receiver and deck clamp. The Bottom section shall serve as roof

drain during construction before insulation is installed.

2. Roof Drains, Overflow: Roof Drains identified as overflow drains shall have a 50 mm (2 inch)

water dam integral to the drain body.

B. Expansion Joints: Expansions joints shall be heavy cast iron with cast brass or copper expansion

sleeve having smooth bearing surface working freely against a packing ring held in place and

under pressure of a bolted gland ring, forming a water and air tight flexible joint. Asbestos packing

is prohibited.

C. Interior Downspouts: An expansion joint shall be provided, specified above, at top of run on

straight, vertical runs of downspout piping 12 m (40 feet) long or more.

D. Downspout Nozzle: The downspout nozzle fitting shall be of brass, unfinished, with internal pipe

thread for connection to downspout.

2.6 WATERPROOFING

A. A sleeve flashing device shall be provided at points where pipes pass through membrane

waterproofed floors or walls. The sleeve flashing device shall be manufactured, cast iron fitting

with clamping device that forms a sleeve for the pipe floor penetration of the floor membrane. A

galvanized steel pipe extension shall be included in the top of the fitting that will extend 50 mm (2

inches) above finished floor and galvanized steel pipe extension in the bottom of the fitting that

will extend through the floor slab. A waterproofed caulked joint shall be provided at the top hub.

B. Walls: See detail shown on drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPE INSTALLATION

A. The pipe installation shall comply with the requirements of the International code and these

specifications.

B. Branch piping shall be installed from the piping system and connect to all drains and outlets.

C. Pipe shall be round and straight. Cutting shall be done with proper tools. Pipe shall be reamed to

full size after cutting.

D. All pipe runs shall be laid out to avoid interference with other work.

E. The piping shall be installed above accessible ceilings to allow for ceiling panel removal.



F. Unless otherwise stated on the documents, minimum horizontal slope shall be one inch for

every1.22 m (4 feet) of pipe length.

G. The piping shall be installed free of sags and bends.

H. Seismic restraint shall be installed where required by code.

I. Changes in direction for storm drainage piping shall be made using appropriate branches, bends

and long sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short sweep ¼ bends may be used on vertical stacks if

change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Long turn double wye branch and 1/8

bend fittings shall be used if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common

drain pipe. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Proper size of standard

increaser and reducers shall be used if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of

drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Buried storm drainage piping shall be laid beginning at the low point of each system. Piping shall

be installed true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Hub ends

shall be placed upstream. Required gaskets shall be installed according to manufacturer’s written

instruction for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements.

K. Caste iron piping shall be installed according to CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

Handbook,” Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings”

L. Aboveground copper tubing shall be installed according to CDA’s “Copper Tube Handbook”.

M. Aboveground PVC piping shall be installed according to ASTM D2665. Underground PVC piping

shall be installed according to ASTM D2321.

3.2 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with gasket joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s

“Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for compression joints.

B. Hub and spigot, cast iron piping with calked joints shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast

Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook” for lead and oakum calked joints.

C. Hubless, cast iron piping shall be joined in accordance with CISPI’s “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and

Fittings Handbook” for hubless piping coupling joints.

D. For threaded joints, thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. The

threads shall be cut full and clean using sharp disc cutters. Threaded pipe ends shall be reamed

to remove burrs and restored to full pipe inside diameter. Pipe fittings and valves shall be joined

as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal

threading is required by the pipe service

2. Pipe sections with damaged threads shall be replaced with new sections of pipe.


A. Transition coupling shall be installed at pipe joints with small differences in pipe outside

diameters.



B. Dielectric fittings shall be installed at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing.

3.4 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND ACCESSORIES:

A. All piping shall be supported according to the International plumbing code, Section 22 05 11,

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING, and these specifications.

B. Hangers, supports, rods, inserts and accessories used for Pipe supports shall be shop coated

with zinc Chromate primer paint. Electroplated copper hanger rods, hangers and accessories

may be used with copper tubing.

C. Horizontal piping and tubing shall be supported within 300 mm (12 inches) of each fitting or

coupling.

D. Horizontal cast iron piping shall be supported with the following maximum horizontal spacing and

minimum hanger rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 to NPS 2 (DN 40 to DN 50): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 10 mm (3/8 inch) rod.

2. NPS 3 (DN 80): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 13 mm (1/2 inch) rod.

3. NPS 4 to NPS 5 (DN 100 to DN 125): 1500 mm (60 inches) with 16 mm (5/8 inch) rod.



E. The maximum support spacing for horizontal plastic shall be 1.22 m (4 feet).

F. Vertical piping and tubing shall be supported at the base, at each floor, and at intervals no greater

than 4.57 m (15 feet).

G. In addition to the requirements in Section 22 05 11, COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR

PLUMBING, floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates shall have the following characteristics:

1. Solid or split unplated cast iron.

2. All plates shall be provided with set screws.

3. Height adjustable clevis type pipe hangers.

4. Adjustable Floor Rests and Base Flanges shall be steel.

5. Hanger Rods shall be low carbon steel, fully threaded or Threaded at each end with two

removable nuts at each end for positioning rod and hanger and locking each in place.

6. Riser Clamps shall be malleable iron or steel.

7. Roller shall be cast iron.

8. Hangers and supports utilized with insulated pipe and tubing shall have 180 degree (min.)

metal protection shield Centered on and welded to the hanger and support. The shield shall

be 4 inches in length and be 16 gage steel. The shield shall be sized for the insulation.

H. Miscellaneous Materials shall be provided as specified, required, directed or as noted on the

drawings for proper installation of hangers, supports and accessories. If the vertical distance

exceeds 6 m (20 feet) for cast iron pipe additional support shall be provided in the center of that

span. All necessary auxiliary steel shall be provided to provide that support.



I. Cast escutcheon with set screw shall be installed at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in

exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork.

J. Penetrations:

1. Fire Stopping: Where pipes pass through fire partitions, fire walls, smoke partitions, or floors,

a fire stop shall be installed that provides an effective barrier against the spread of fire,

smoke and gases as specified in Section 07 84 00, FIRESTOPPING. Clearances between

raceways and openings shall be completely filled and sealed with the fire stopping materials.

2. Water proofing: At floor penetrations, Clearances around the pipe shall be completely sealed

and made watertight with sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00, JOINT SEALANTS.

K. Piping shall conform to the following:

1. Storm Water Drain and Vent Drain to main stacks:

Pipe Size Minimum Pitch

80 mm (3 inches) and smaller 2%

100 mm (4 inches) (4 inches) and larger

2%

3.5 TESTS

A. Storm sewer system shall be tested either in its entirety or in sections.

B. Storm Water Drain tests shall be conducted before trenches are backfilled or fixtures are

connected. A water test or air test shall be conducted, as directed.

1. If entire system is tested with water, tightly close all openings in pipes except the highest

opening, and fill system with water to point of overflow. If system is tested in sections, tightly

plug each opening except highest opening of section under test, fill each section with water

and test with at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of water. In testing successive sections, test at

least upper 3 m (10 feet) of next preceding section so that each joint or pipe except upper

most 3 m (10 feet) of system has been submitted to a test of at least a 3 m (10 foot) head of

water. Water shall be kept in the system, or in portion under test, for at least 15 minutes

before inspection starts. System shall then be tight at all joints.

2. For an air test, an air pressure of 35 kPa (5 psi) gage shall be maintained for at least 15

minutes without leakage. A force pump and mercury column gage shall be used for the test.

3. Final Tests: Either one of the following tests may be used.

a. Smoke Test: After fixtures are permanently connected and traps are filled with water, fill

entire drainage and vent systems with smoke under pressure of 1.3 kPa (1 inch of water)

with a smoke machine. Chemical smoke is prohibited.

b. Peppermint Test: Introduce .06 liters (2 ounces) of peppermint into each line or stack.


City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Electrical General Requirements - 260500

SECTION 260500

ELECTRICAL GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical general requirements. These requirements shall apply to all Division 26 Sections of this Specification.

B. Maintenance of electrical services during various phases of construction.

C. Demolition, dismantling, cutting and alterations of the existing electrical systems

as indicated and/or required for demolition of existing structures and systems.

D. Disconnection and removal of existing electrical services as indicated and required by the demolition process.

E. Removal of debris and demolished equipment.

F. Coordination with the Owner to allow the Owner to salvage specific electrical and

electronic items that the Owner wishes to salvage. Contractor shall allow the Owner personnel reasonable access to the site for the Owner’s salvage operation. Contractor shall coordinate the timing of the salvage operation with the Owner.


A. Division 1: GENERAL

REQUIREMENTS B. Division 23:

MECHANICAL

C. Division 26: ELECTRICAL

1.03 REFERENCES

A. California Building Code(CBC)

B. California Electric Code (CEC)

C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards

D. California State Fire Marshal (CSFM)

E. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA)

F. Occupational Safety and Health Administration OSHA)

G. California Administrative Code Title 24


H. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

I. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)

J. National Electric Manufacturer's Association (NEMA)

K. City, State and other local codes and requirements as applicable

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings for specific electrical equipment and systems as required in the associated Section of this Specification.

C. Product Data: Furnish complete product data for specific electrical equipment and

systems as required in the associated Section of this Specification.

D. Samples: Furnish samples of specific electrical equipment and components as required in the associated Section of this Specification.

1.05 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Refer to each Section of Division 16 for specific qualifications required for manufacturers and

installers for each specific electrical system and component.


A. Division 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

B. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and existing conditions, and shall compare

the Drawings with the existing conditions as it affects the work under this Division. By the act of submitting a bid, the Contractor will be deemed to have made such examination and to have accepted such conditions and to have made allowance therefore in preparing bids.

C. All scaled and figured dimensions are approximate and are given for estimating purposes only.

Before proceeding with the work, the Contractor shall carefully check and verify all dimensions and sizes and shall assume all responsibility for the fitting of his/her equipment and materials to other parts of the equipment and to the structure.

D. Where apparatus and equipment have been indicated on the Drawings, dimensions have

been taken from typical equipment of the class indicated. The Contractor shall carefully check the Drawings to see that the exact equipment contemplated for installation will fit into the spaces provided.

E. Final dimensions, location of stub ups, junction or terminal boxes on equipment shall be

obtained from approved shop or installation Drawings of the equipment being furnished, and shall be coordinated with all other sections as necessary. Do not “scale” the Drawings.

1.07 GENERAL SUMMARY OF ELECTRICAL WORK

A. The work of this section shall include all services, labor, materials, transportation, equipment, plant and facilities to complete the electrical work indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.


B. The work listed or required by this Section of the Specification is not intended to limit or establish the extent of the electrical work. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to establish to extent of the work specified hereunder and indicated on the Drawings.

C. Drawings and Specifications Coordination:

1. For purposes of clearness and legibility, the electrical Drawings are essentially

diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment is shown to scale whenever possible. The Contractor shall verify all conditions, data and information as indicated on the Drawings and in specification sections where electrical work is required.

2. The electrical Drawings show the required size and points of termination of the conduits,

the number and size of wires, and suggest the proper route for the conduit. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to install the conduits with minimum number of bends to conform to the structure, avoid obstructions, preserve headroom, keep openings and passageways clear, and meet all applicable code requirements.

3. The routing of conduits may be changed, if approved by the Architect/Engineer, provided

that the length of any conduit run is not increased or decreased more than 10% of the length shown on the Drawings.

4. It is intended that outlets be located symmetrical with architectural elements, not

withstanding the fact that locations shown on the Drawings may be distorted for clarity.

D. The Specifications and Drawings are intended to cover complete operational systems. The omissions of expressed reference to any item of labor or material for the proper execution of the work in accordance with present practice of the trade shall not relieve the Contractor from providing such additional labor and materials.

E. Refer to the Drawings and shop Drawings of other trades for additional details that affect the

proper installation of this work. Diagrams and symbols showing electrical connection are diagrammatic only. Wiring diagrams do not necessarily show the exact physical arrangement of the equipment.

F. If there are omissions or conflicts between the Drawings and Specifications, clarify these points

with the Architect before submitting bid.

1. If the Contractor believes that there are conflicts within these Electrical Specifications; between the Specifications and the Drawings; or between the Electrical Documents and any Architectural, Mechanical, Plumbing, or Structural Document, the Contractor shall bid the more expensive or elaborate material, process or procedure and shall call the discrepancy to the Architects attention. Should the Owner, in its discretion, choose to implement the less expensive or simpler material, process or procedure after bid opening, a credit Change Order will be issued to the Contractor.

G. This Specification, the Drawings and General Conditions cover the complete furnishing and

installation of the electrical system and all related work.

H. Terminology:

1. The term "signal system" shall apply to the clock, fire alarm, annunciator, sound, public telephone and data network systems.

2. The term "low voltage" shall apply to systems operating at 600 volts and under.


3. The term "provide" used on the Drawings and elsewhere in the Specifications shall be considered to mean "furnish and install".

4. The term "furnish" used on the Drawings and elsewhere in the Specifications shall be

considered to mean "furnish and install".

5. The term "UL" means Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

1.08 WORK INCLUDED

A. Overcurrent devices in existing distribution switchboards complete.

B. Distribution transformers complete.

C. Distribution panelboards complete.

D. Secondary distribution for the lighting and power systems, including panelboards, conduit, raceways, cable trays, outlets, wiring, wiring devices, equipment and miscellaneous items required for a complete and operating system.

E. Lighting fixtures, installed complete with lamps, mounting hardware and all accessories.

F. The complete connecting of all electrical equipment and devices, including motors and equipment or devices furnished under other Sections of the Specifications.

G. Disconnect switches, manual or magnetic motor starters, relays and miscellaneous

control devices indicated or required.

H. Examine all other Sections for work related to those other sections and required to be included as work under this section.

I. General provisions and requirements for electrical work.

J. Conduit, raceways and outlets for signal systems including, telephone and

Data/LAN.

K. Demolition of certain existing electrical components as indicated on the Drawings

1.09 ORDINANCES AND REGULATIONS

A. All work and materials shall be in full accordance with the latest edition of the California Electrical Code, the State of California Administrative Code, Title 24, the Safety Orders of the State Division of Industrial Safety, and the Fire and Panic Safety Standards of the State Fire Marshal and with any prevailing rules and regulations pertaining to adequate protection and/or guarding of any moving parts or otherwise hazardous locations. Material and labor shall conform to the Regulations of the National Board of Fire Underwriters for Electrical Wiring and Apparatus. All new material shall be "UL" listed.

B. Nothing in these Drawings and Specifications is to be construed as permitting work not

conforming to these codes.


C. Should any changes be necessary in the Drawings or Specifications to make the work comply with the requirements, the Contractor shall notify the Architect at once and cease work on all parts of the Contract which are affected.

1.10 PERMITS AND INSPECTION

A. The Contractor shall apply and pay for all permits required by any of the legally constituted public authorities for the installation or construction of the work included under this Division. The Contractor shall arrange and pay for any inspections or examinations so required and deliver certificate of all such inspections to the Architect.

1.11 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Contract Closeout

B. Record (As-Built) Drawings shall be completed and delivered to the Architect prior to or

at the time of final inspection. Record Drawings shall comply with the requirements of Division 1 of the Specifications.

C. Record Drawings shall accurately locate pull boxes and main conduit runs. Conduit runs

between outlets, panels, devices, etc. that are changed from that shown on the drawing shall be clearly noted. All pull boxes indicated for future extension shall be completely dimensioned on Record Drawings.

D. The Drawings shall be complete, legible, and color-coded in the following manner: Red

shall be used for removals and green shall indicate the revised conditions. Blue ink shall not be used. Record Drawings not satisfactorily prepared will be returned to the Contractor.

1.12 GUARANTEE

A. Division 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1.13 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED EQUIPMENT AND APPLIANCES

A. Equipment and Appliances Furnished by the Contractor:

1. The electrical work shall include furnishing and installing wiring enclosures for,

and the complete connection of all electrically operated equipment and appliances and any electrical control devices which are specified to be furnished and installed in this or other electrical sections of the Specifications. All wiring enclosures shall be installed concealed except where exposed work is indicated on the electrical Drawings.

2. Connections shall be made as necessary to completely install the equipment

ready for use. The equipment shall be tested for proper operation.

1.14 PHASING OF WORK

A. The project will be constructed in multiple phases as described elsewhere in the Contract

Documents. B. Contractor shall furnish and install all temporary and/or interim connections as required

for proper operation of all systems during all phases of construction.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Products for Division 26, Electrical Work, shall be new and suited to the intended use.

B. Quality of products shall be established by specified products and substitute products shall be equal or exceed the quality of products specified. Refer to Division I for substitution procedure.

C. Provide Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. examination and label for all products where

such examination and labels are available.

D. Any products judged by Architect and/or Owner not in accordance with the Specifications either before or after installation will be rejected. If after installation, the Contractor shall replace with specified items at no cost to the Owner.

E. Products of similar nature shall be of the same type and manufacturer.

F. Where products are specified by manufacturer's brand name, type and/or catalog

number, such designation is to establish standards for desired quality, style, disposition of warranty items and operating characteristics, and shall be the basis of the bid.

G. Refer to other sections of specifications for method of submittal of required Shop

Drawings, lists and data. Refer to other paragraphs in this Section for other requirements relating to product selection.

H. Confirm the electrical characteristics of powered equipment specified in other Divisions of

the Specifications prior to ordering electrical equipment required for the equipment.

2.02 PROTECTION OF FINISH

A. The Contractor shall provide adequate means for and shall fully protect all finished parts

of the materials and equipment against damage from any cause during the progress of the work and until acceptance by the Owner.

B. All materials and equipment in storage and during construction shall be covered in such

a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred or splattered with paint. All moving parts shall be kept perfectly clean and dry. No paint spraying will be permitted in the building.

C. Verify that there is safe storage for products at the project site prior to authorizing

shipment by the manufacturer.

D. Leave protective crating and wrapping in place until job site conditions will permit removal with no risk of damage to the product finish from construction processes.

E. Store equipment received at the site in a dry location during the construction period.

F. All damaged material or equipment shall be replaced or refinished by the contractor at no

expense to the Owner.

2.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Material lists and Shop Drawings shall comply with the requirements of other sections “SUBMITTALS”. All submittals shall be submitted with a minimum of eight (8) copies (or more if required)


B. A complete list of all proposed materials and equipment specified in Division 26 and the Electrical Drawings shall be submitted after the Contract is awarded. The list shall include the name of the manufacturer and such information required to identify the item. Where the Specifications show a choice, only one brand, type or manufacturer shall be listed.

C. Exact catalog number and fixture cut shall be provided for each lighting fixture.

D. Detailed Drawings, either to scale or adequately dimensioned, shall be provided for the

unit substations, main switchboards, distribution switchboards, transformers, lighting and power panelboards, terminal cabinets, special relay or control cabinets and other equipment with special requirements.

E. Where electrical systems interface with systems specified in other Divisions, the

electrical components shall be reviewed and approved by the Contractor furnishing those other systems, prior to submittal for review by Engineer.

F. More than one manufacturer may be utilized for rough in products, such as conduit,

boxes and wire, but only one manufacturer may be used for finish work equipment or devices.

G. Product samples shall be furnished where required.

2.04 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Where shop Drawings are being submitted for products which are being substituted for

specific products, refer to other Divisions for limitations governing requests for substitutions.

B. For complex products and/or systems, the availability of qualified service organizations,

so located that service can be rendered to the equipment within 24 hours upon receipt of notification, may be significant factor in considering substitution requests.

C. Product substitutions will not be allowed unless approved in writing by the Architect in

accordance with the requirements of other divisions.

D. Only "standard products" of manufacturer shall be offered as substitutions for specified "standard products".

2.05 NON-SPECIFIED EQUIPMENT OR MATERIALS

A. In the event equipment or materials are indicated on the Drawings but not described in

the Specifications, the Contractor shall determine from the Architect, prior to submitting his/her bid, what this descriptive information is and shall base his/her bid accordingly. Should the Contractor fail to do this, the Contractor shall furnish such equipment and material as later indicated to be the intent by the Architect without change in contract price.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. All work specified in Division 16 and indicated on the electrical Drawings shall:

1. Be installed by a qualified installer and skilled craftsman experienced in the

trade.


2. Be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner.

3. Conform to NECA Standards of Installation.

3.02 LOCATIONS

A. The location of conduit, outlets, apparatus and equipment indicated on the Drawings are

approximate only and shall be changed to meet the architectural and structural conditions as required.

B. The location of conduit runs, outlets and pull boxes shall be verified on the job and the

locations shall be adjusted as required to clear obstructions such as equipment racks, structural bracing, cable trays, duct work, piping, conduit and pull boxes.

C. Install all conduit and equipment in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions,

maintaining headroom and keeping openings and passageways clear.

D. The Drawings are essentially diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets, bends, special fittings and exact locations are not indicated. The Contractor shall carefully study the Drawings and the premises in order to determine the best methods, exact locations, routes, obstructions, etc., which affect his/her installation.

E. Furnish and install additional pull boxes, fittings or offsets as required to clear

obstructions or to simplify the pulling in of wires or cables.

F. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing work so as to secure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome difficulties owing to space limitations or interference of structural conditions wherever encountered. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to verify and coordinate the location of all outlets and lighting fixtures with the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings and with all Shop Drawings, including Shop Drawings of other trades. Architectural elevations and reflected ceiling plans shall generally take precedence. However, in the event of large variations between Architectural and Electrical Drawings, the Architect shall be consulted for instructions.

G. In the event changes in the indicated locations or arrangements are necessary due to

developed conditions in the buildings' construction or rearrangement of furnishings or equipment, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no cost, provided the work in place is not affected and no extra materials are required.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. All excavating, trench work and backfilling required for the installation of the work shall be performed in accordance with the applicable portions of the Specifications and Plans on

the subjects ‘Excavation, Backfilling, and Trenching’.

B. After the installation of work requiring excavation has been inspected and approved, all excavations shall be filled with slurry mix or clean earth (as detailed on the Drawings) and tamped to a consistency so that no settlement will occur, and the ground left flush at natural grade. All excavated earth, which is not used for backfill, shall be removed from the premises or otherwise disposed of, by the Contractor, as directed.

3.04 CONCRETE WORK

A. All rough and finished concrete required for the installation of the work shall be installed

in accordance with the applicable portions of other DIVISIONS of the specifications and/or plans.


3.05 COOPERATION WITH OTHERS

A. The Contractor shall so organize his/her work that progress will harmonize with the work of all trades, so that all work may proceed as expeditiously as possible.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for the correct placing of his/her work and the

connection to this work of all related trades.

C. The Contractor shall cross check the Drawings against the Drawings of other trades, to avoid installing work that conflicts with the work of other trades.

3.06 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. Lay out work in advance of construction so that exposed work will be parallel with the

building lines.

3.07 CLEARANCES AND ACCESS

A. Install electrical materials with proper working clearances as required by the California

Electrical Code.

B. Provide specified, indicated or code required access to electrical products. Where access doors in walls or ceilings are required for access to electrical products, such doors shall be of the identical manufacture as the doors utilized for access to mechanical products, and shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor.

3.08 OPENINGS

A. The Contractor shall cooperate with all trades in providing information at the proper times as to openings required in walls, slabs and footings for conduit and equipment.

B. The core drilling, cutting and patching of walls or slabs shall be as specified under the

General Requirements. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for his/her own openings. Refer to Architectural Drawings for location of all masonry and/or fire rated walls. Contractor shall be responsible for all required core drilling even if not specifically indicated or noted on the Electrical Drawings.

3.09 CLEANING EQUIPMENT AND PREMISES

A. Thoroughly clean all parts of the materials and equipment. Exposed parts shall be

thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster and other materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed with a non-flammable cleaning solvent.

B. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out.

C. Exposed metalwork shall be carefully brushed down with steel brushes to remove rust

and other spots and left smooth and clean.

D. The interior of each panelboard, switchboard section or terminal cabinet shall be cleaned of all dust and debris.

E. During the progress of the work the Contractor shall carefully and continuously clean up

after his/her men and shall leave the premises and all parts of the building in which he is working free from his/her debris.


3.10 DISPOSAL AND RECYCLING OF FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

A. It is assumed that all existing fluorescent light fixtures to be demolished contain a

magnetic ballast (or multiple ballasts) that contain polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs). The PCBs are contained in the ballasts’ internal capacitor and possibly in the asphalt-potting compound.

B. The Contractor shall remove all fluorescent ballasts from all demolished light fixtures.

The ballasts shall be recycled in an approved manner. The recycling shall meet all local, state and federal requirements for disposal and recycling of fluorescent ballasts that contain PCBs.

3.11 DISPOSAL AND RECYCLING OF FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. It is assumed that all existing fluorescent light fixtures to be demolished contain

fluorescent lamps that contain small quantities of mercury.

B. The Contractor shall remove all fluorescent lamps from all demolished light fixtures. The lamps shall be recycled in an approved manner. The recycling shall meet all local, state and federal requirements for disposal and recycling of fluorescent lamps that contain mercury.

3.12 MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SERVICES

A. Uninterrupted electrical services shall be maintained to Owner occupied portions of the

buildings at all times, except during pre-scheduled shut-downs of the electrical service.

B. Any work that will require the shutdown of any electrical system shall be pre-scheduled with the Owner. Upon such a shutdown, the work, once started, shall continue uninterrupted until the work has been completed and service is restored.

C. The Contractor shall prepare a written method of procedure and notify the Owner two

weeks in advance of any service shutdown.

D. The bid price shall include all charges for overtime work.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Basic Electrical Requirements - 260501

SECTION 260501

BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SCOPE

A. This section supplements all sections of this division and shall apply to all phases of

work hereinafter specified, shown on the drawings, or required to provide a complete

installation of electrical systems for the Project. The Work required under this division,

is not limited to the Electrical Drawings. Refer to Site, Architectural, Structural, and

Mechanical Drawings that may designate Work to be accomplished. The intent of the

Specifications is to provide a complete electrical system that includes all documents

that are a part of the Contract.

1. Work Included: Furnish all labor, material, services and skilled supervision

necessary for the construction, erection, installation, connections, testing, and

adjustment of all circuits and electrical equipment specified herein, or shown or

noted on the Drawings, and its delivery to the Owner complete in all respects

ready for use.

B. Contract Drawings: The Contract Drawings are shown in part diagrammatic, intended

to convey the Scope of Work indicating the intended general arrangement of

equipment, conduit and outlets. Follow the contract drawings in laying out the work

and verify spaces for the installation of the materials and equipment based on actual

dimensions of equipment furnished. Where conflicts occur, the most stringent

application shall apply

wherever a question exists as to the exact intended location of outlets or equipment,

obtain instructions from the Architect before proceeding with the Work.

C. Equipment or Fixtures: Equipment and fixtures shall be connected to provide circuit

continuity in accordance with the Specifications whether or not each piece of

conductor, conduit, or protective device is shown between such items of equipment

or fixtures, and the point of circuit origin.

D. Work Installed but Furnished under Other Sections: The Electrical Work includes

the installation or connection of certain materials and equipment furnished under

other sections. Verify installation details. Foundations for apparatus and

equipment will be furnished under other sections unless otherwise noted or

detailed.


A. Guarantee: Furnish a written guarantee for a period of one year from date of

substantial completion.

B. Equipment Safety: All electrical materials and equipment shall be new and shall be

listed by Underwriter's Laboratories and bear their label, or listed and certified by a

nationally recognized testing authority where UL does not have an approval.

Custom made equipment must have complete test data submitted by the

manufacturer attesting to its safety.


C. Codes and Regulations:

1. Design, manufacture, testing and method of installation of all apparatus and

materials furnished under the requirements of these specifications shall

conform to the latest publications or standard rules of the following:

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers - IEEE

National Electrical Manufacturers' Association - NEMA

California Fire Code - CFC

California Building Code - CBC Underwriters'

Laboratories, Inc. - UL National Fire

Protection Association - NFPA Federal

Specifications - Fed. Spec.

American Society for Testing and Materials - ASTM

American National Standards Institute - ANSI

American Standard Association - ASA

California Electrical Code - CEC

National Electrical Safety Code - NESC

Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association - IPCEA

Public Utilities Commission - PUC

California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Subchapter 5

California Code of Regulations, Title 24

State & Municipal Codes in Force in the Specific Project Area

Occupational Safety and Health Administration -OSHA

The term "Code", when used within the specifications, shall refer to the Publications,

Standards, ordinances and codes, listed above. In the case where the codes have

different levels of requirements the most stringent rules shall apply.

D. Seismic Design of Electrical Equipment:

1. All electrical prefabricated equipment is to be designed and constructed in such a

manner that all portions, elements, sub-assemblies and/or parts of said equipment

and the equipment as a whole, including their attachments, will resist a horizontal

load equal to the operating weights of those parts multiplied times the following

factors:

Type of Equipment Horizontal CP Vertical CP

Rigid and rigidly supported piping or

equipment such as boilers, chillers, pumps, motors, transformers, unit

substations and control panels. 0.50 0.33

Flexible and flexibly supported

equipment such as air-handling units,

piping and other equipment so

supported that the fundamental

period of vibration of the equipment

and its supporting system is greater

than 0.05 seconds. Communication

equipment and emergency

stand-by equipment. 1.00 0.67

2. Load is to be applied at the center of gravity of the part and to be in any direction


horizontally. Design part and to be in any direction horizontally. Design stresses

shall be in accordance with the specifications for design of the American Institute of

Steel.

Construction. Anchorage, support and/or attachment of said prefabricated

equipment to the structure should be in accordance with the details found in the

plans and specifications.

3. It is the entire responsibility of the Contractor to verify the design of equipment so

that the strength and anchorage of the internal components of the equipment

exceeds the force level used to restrain and anchor the unit itself to the supporting

structure.

E. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Codes, Permits and Fees: Where the Contract Documents exceed minimum

requirements, the Contract Documents take precedence. Where code conflicts

occur, the most stringent shall apply unless variance is approved. Where provisions

in the drawings and specifications differ in regard to code application, size, quality,

quantity or type of equipment, Contractor shall include in the bid, costs for the most

costly provision either denoted in the specifications or on the drawings. This

provision shall apply as an amendment to the California Public Contracts Code.

a. Comply with all requirements for permits, licenses, fees and Code. Permits,

licenses, fees, inspections and arrangements required for the Work shall be

obtained by the Contractor at his expense, unless otherwise specified.

b. Comply with the requirements of the applicable utility companies serving the

Project. Make all arrangements with the utility companies for proper

coordination of the Work.

2. Substitutions: The materials, products, and equipment described in the Contract

Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and

quality. Architect may consider requests for substitutions of specified equipment,

materials, or products and then only when request are submitted in accordance with

the provisions of the Contract Documents and are received by the Architect a

minimum of 21 days prior to the date established for the receipt of the bid. No

substitutions will be considered after the date of the receipt of the bid or contract

award unless there is cause for a substitution which complies in every respect to the

provisions of the Contract Documents. Substitution requests shall be made in

accordance with Public Contracts Code revisions as follows:

a. No substitutions are allowed after bid opening.

b. All substitutions must be requested 14 days prior to bid opening date.

c. Final addendum naming approved substitutions of materials/equipment must

be issued 7 days prior to bid date.

F. Record Drawings: Keep up to date, monthly payments withheld if not updated.

G. Shop Drawings and Submittals: Submittals on all material prior to installation.

1. Drawings shall be submitted, as required.


2. Shop drawings shall be submitted on, but not limited to, the following:

a. 260513 Conductors (600 Volt)

c.

260519 Building Wire and Cable

d.

260534 Boxes

e.

262726 Wiring Devices

f.

262816 Enclosed Switches

g.

262413 Distribution Switchboards and Equipment

h.

262817 Disconnect Switches

i.

262416 Panelboards

j.

265100 Interior Luminaries

H. Trenching and Backfilling: All trenching and backfilling for electrical work shall be the

responsibility of the contractor and shall be done in accordance with other Sections of

this specification. The Contractor shall examine the drawings of all other sections to

determine locations of all existing underground lines. The Contractor shall use extreme

caution when working in the vicinity of these lines and shall be responsible for the

proper and approved repair of any damage caused by his work.

I. Cutting and Patching:

1. Obtain written permission from the Architect before core drilling or cutting any

structural members. Exact method and location of conduit penetrations and/or

openings in concrete walls, floors, or ceilings shall be as approved by the

Architect.

2. All core drilling, cutting and patching for this work shall be performed under this

Section of the specifications. Use craftsmen skilled in their respective sections

for cutting, fitting, repairing, patching of plaster and finishing of materials

including carpentry work, metal work or concrete work required for this Work.

Do not weaken walls, partitions or floor with cutting. Holes required to be cut in

floors must be drilled without excessive breaking out around the holes. Patching

and/or refinishing shall be determined by the Architect.

3. Use care in piercing waterproofing. After the part piercing the waterproofing

has been set in place, seal openings and make absolutely watertight.

4. Seal all openings to meet the fire rating of the particular wall floor or ceiling.

1.03 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions:


1. The contractor shall visit the site and verify existing conditions. Where

existing conditions differ from the drawings, adjustment shall be made and

allowances included for all necessary equipment to complete all parts of

the drawings and specifications.

2. Electrical circuits affecting work shall be de-energized while working on or

near them.

3. Arrange the work so that electrical power is available to all electrical

equipment within existing facility at all times. Schedule all interruptions at the

convenience of the Owner, including exact time and duration. Provide

temporary power during all periods of interruption, which are deemed

excessive by the Owner. Costs of all premium time (overtime) resulting from

the scheduled power interruptions and all costs for providing temporary power

shall be included in the cost of the Work.

B. Protection:

1. Protection of apparatus, materials and equipment. Take such precautions as

necessary to properly protect all apparatus, fixtures, appliances, material,

equipment and installations from damage of any kind. The Engineer may reject

any particular piece or pieces of material, apparatus or equipment scratched,

dented or otherwise damaged.

2. Seal equipment or components exposed to the weather and make watertight

and insect proof. Protect equipment outlets and conduit openings with

temporary plugs or caps at all times that work is not in progress.

C. Sequencing and Scheduling:

1. Work lines and established heights shall be in strict accordance with architectural

drawings and specifications insofar as these drawings and specifications extend.

Verify all dimensions shown and establish all elevations and detailed dimensions

not shown.

2. Lay out and coordinate all work well enough in advance to avoid conflicts or

interferences with other work in progress so that in case of interference the

electrical layout may be altered to suit the conditions, prior to the installation of

any work and without additional cost to the Owner. Conflicts arising from lack of

coordination shall be this Contractor's responsibility. Maintain all code-required

clearances about electrical equipment. Unless specifically noted otherwise,

establish the exact location of electrical equipment based on the actual

dimensions of equipment furnished.

1.04 WORK IN COOPERATION WITH OTHER SECTIONS

A. Examine the drawings and specifications and determine the work to be performed by

the electrical, mechanical and other sections. Provide the type and amount of

electrical materials and equipment necessary to place this work in proper operation,

completely wired, tested and ready for use. This shall include all conduit, wire, motor

starters, disconnects, relays, time clocks and other devices for the required operation

sequence of all electrical, mechanical and other systems or equipment. Where a

conflict occurs on drawings, the most stringent shall apply.


B. Provide conduit and wire for all controls and other devices, both line and low voltage,

described in this or other parts of the contract documents. Install all control housings

and back boxes required for installing conduit and wire to the controls.

C. Install control wiring in separate conduit between each heating, ventilating and air

conditioning sensing device and its control panel and/or control motor. Before

installing any conduit for heating, ventilating and air conditioning control wiring,

verify from the control manufacturer's shop drawings where these separate conduit

runs are required.

D. Plan all work so that it proceeds with a minimum of interference with other sections.

Inform all parties concerned of openings required for equipment or conduit required in

the building construction for Electrical Work and provide all special frames, sleeves and

anchor bolts as required. Coordinate the electrical work with the mechanical

installation. Promptly report to the Architect any delay or difficulties encountered in the

installation of this work which might prevent prompt and proper installation, or make it

unsuitable to connect with or receive the work of other sections. Failure to so report

shall constitute an acceptance of the work of other sections as being fit and proper for

the execution of this work.

1.05 TESTING AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Upon completion of all Electrical Work, the contractor shall provide all testing as follows:

1. Operational Test: Test all circuit breakers, receptacles, motors and all other

electrical and communication equipment. Replace all faulty devices and

equipment discovered during testing with new devices and equipment at no

additional cost, and that part of the system (or devices or equipment) shall then

be retested.

2. Secondary Grounding Resistance: Perform ground continuity test between

main ground system and equipment frame, system neutral and/or derived

neutral point.

3. Ground Fault System Test: Measure system neutral insulation resistances to

ensure no shunt ground paths exist.

4. All test procedure shall be performed by an independent testing firm.

1.06 MAINTENANCE, SERVICING AND INSTRUCTION MANUALS, AND WIRING DIAGRAMS

A. Prior to substantial completion, the contractor shall submit 5 copies of operating and

maintenance and servicing instructions, as well as an equal number of copies of

complete wiring diagrams all neatly bound in hard cover 3-ring binders with table of

contents and tabs for the following items or equipment: (See Section 01730 -

Operation and Maintenance Data):

1. Section 16426 - Distribution Switchboards and Equipment.

2. Section 16470 - Panelboards

B. All wiring diagrams shall specifically cover the installed system indicating zones,


wiring, and components added to the system. Typical drawings will not be

accepted.

1.07 FINAL INSPECTION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. After all requirements of the specifications and/or the drawings have been fully

completed, representatives of the Owner will inspect the Work. The Contractor shall

provide competent personnel to demonstrate the operation of any item of system, to

the full satisfaction of each representative. The Contractor shall provide 4 hours of

minimum scheduled operation and maintenance training for school maintenance staff

on each system indicated in 1.06A above. See specific sections for additional

training/operation hours required for school personnel.

B. Final acceptance of the work will be made by the Owner after receipt of approval and

recommendation of acceptance from each representative.

C. The Contractor shall furnish Record Drawings before final payment of retention.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Basic Electrical Materials and Methods - 260502

SECTION 260502

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electrical identification. 5. Utility company electricity-metering components. 6. Concrete equipment bases. 7. Cutting and patching for electrical construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For utility company electricity-metering components.

B. Shop Drawings: Dimensioned plans and sections or elevation layouts and single-line diagram of electricity-metering component assemblies specific to this Project.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Devices for Utility Company Electricity Metering: Comply with utility company published standards.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings for electrical supports, raceways, and cable with general construction work.

B. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment that requires positioning before closing in the building.

C. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies.

1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground utilities and services, including provision for service entrances and electricity-metering components.


D. Coordinate location of access panels and doors for electrical items that are concealed by finished surfaces. Access doors and panels are specified in Division 8 Section "Access Doors and Frames."

E. Where electrical identification devices are applied to field-finished surfaces, coordinate installation of identification devices with completion of finished surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RACEWAYS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing; ANSI C80.3, zinc-coated steel, with set-screw fittings.

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel.

C. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit; ANSI C80.6, zinc-coated steel, with threaded fittings.

D. LFMC: Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit; zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket.

E. RMC: Rigid metal conduit; galvanized rigid steel; ANSI C80.1.

F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit; NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 PVC, with NEMA TC3 fittings.

G. Raceway Fittings: Specifically designed for raceway type with which used.

2.2 WIRES, CABLES, AND CONNECTIONS

A. Conductors, No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper.

B. Conductors, Larger than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper.

C. Insulation: Thermoplastic, rated 600 V, 75 deg C minimum, Type THW, THHN-THWN, or USE depending on application..

D. Cable: Type MC with ground wire.

E. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class suitable for service indicated.

2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating.

B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.

C. Slotted-Steel Channel: Flange edges turned toward web, and 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter slotted holes at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c., in webs. Strength rating to suit structural loading.


D. Nonmetallic Slotted Channel and Angle: Structural-grade, factory-formed, glass-fiber-resin channels and angles with 9/16-inch- (14-mm-) diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches (203 mm) o.c., in at least one surface. Strength rating to suit structural loading.

E. Slotted Channel Fittings and Accessories: Recommended by the manufacturer for use with the type and size of channel with which used.

1. Materials: Same as channels and angles, except metal items may be stainless steel.

F. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers.

G. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

H. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Plugs have number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Body constructed of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

I. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

J. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

K. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel.

2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Identification Device Colors: Use those prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, and these Specifications.

B. Colored Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires, and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape, not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick (25 mm wide by 0.08 mm thick).

C. Tape Markers for Conductors: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters.

D. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon, self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme.

E. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed, vinyl tape compounded for permanent direct-burial service, and with the following features:

1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick (150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 3. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line.

F. Engraved-Plastic Labels, Signs, and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. (129 sq. cm) and 1/8-inch (3.2-mm) minimum thickness for larger sizes. Engraved legend in black letters on white background.

G. Warning and Caution Signs: Preprinted; comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII. Colors, legend, and size appropriate to each application.


1. Interior Units: Aluminum, baked-enamel-finish, punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.

2. Exterior Units: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate with 0.0396-inch (1-mm), galvanized-steel backing. 1/4-inch (6-mm) grommets in corners for mounting.

H. Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.

2.5 EQUIPMENT FOR UTILITY COMPANY'S ELECTRICITY METERING

A. Comply with requirements of electrical power utility company for current transformer cabinets, meter sockets and modular meter centers.

2.6 CONCRETE BASES

A. Concrete Forms and Reinforcement Materials: As specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION

A. Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated, arrange and install components and equipment to provide maximum possible headroom.

B. Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.

D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.

3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoor Installations:

1. Exposed: IMC, RMC, RNC. 2. Concealed: IMC, RMC, RNC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC, RMC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R or Type 4, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Indoor Installations:

1. Exposed: EMT except in wet or damp locations, use IMC. 2. Concealed in Walls or Ceilings: EMT. 3. In Concrete Slab: RNC, IMC, RMC, EMT.


4. Below Slab on Grade or in Crawlspace: RNC, IMC, RMC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC; except in wet or damp locations: LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION

A. Conceal raceways and cables, unless otherwise indicated, within finished walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Keep legs of raceway bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel.

C. Use RMC elbows where RNC turns out of slab.

D. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use No. 14 AWG zinc-coated steel or woven polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wires.

E. Install telephone and signal system raceways, 2-inch trade size (DN 53) and smaller, in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or equivalent. Add pull boxes where necessary to accomplish this.

F. Connect motors and equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement with a maximum of 72-inches (1830-mm) flexible conduit. Install LFMC in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

G. Set floor boxes level and trim after installation to fit flush to finished floor surface.

3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER, LIGHTING, AND CONTROL CIRCUITS

A. Application: Use wiring methods specified below to the extent permitted by applicable codes as interpreted by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Exposed Feeders: Insulated single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Armored cable.

C. Concealed Feeders in Ceilings Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Armored cable.

D. Concealed Feeders in Concrete, below Floors on Grade, in Crawlspaces: Insulated single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits Including in Crawlspaces: Insulated single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Armored cable.

F. Concealed Branch Circuits in Ceilings Walls, Gypsum Board Partitions: Insulated single conductors in raceway, Metal-clad cable, Armored cable.

G. Concealed Branch Circuits in Concrete, below Floors on Grade: Insulated single conductors in raceway.

H. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Insulated single conductors in raceway.

I. Remote-Control Signaling and Power-Limited Circuits, Classes 1, 2, and 3: Insulated conductors in raceway unless otherwise indicated.


3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.

3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION

A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, slotted channel system components.

B. Dry Locations: Steel materials.

C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads, times a safety factor of at least four with, 200-lb (90-kg) minimum design load for each support element.

3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.

B. Size supports for multiple raceway or cable runs so capacity can be increased by a 25 percent minimum in the future.

C. Support individual horizontal single raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps except use spring-steel fasteners for 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller single raceways above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.

D. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless core-drilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

E. Secure electrical items and their supports to building structure, using the following methods unless other fastening methods are indicated:

1. Wood: Wood screws or screw-type nails. 2. Gypsum Board: Toggle bolts. Seal around sleeves with joint compound, both sides of

wall. 3. Masonry: Toggle bolts on hollow block and expansion bolts on solid block. Seal around

sleeves with mortar, both sides of wall. 4. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. 5. Existing Concrete: Expansion bolts or threaded studs driven by powder charge and

provided with lock washers. 6. Structural Steel: Spring-tension clamps, Threaded studs driven by powder charge and

provided with lock washers.

a. Comply with AWS D1.1 for field welding.

7. Light Steel Framing: Sheet metal screws. 8. Fasteners for Damp, Wet, or Weather-Exposed Locations: Stainless steel. 9. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. 10. Fasteners: Select so load applied to each fastener does not exceed 25 percent of its

proof-test load.


3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES

A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

B. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations indicated in the Contract Documents or required by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.

C. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before applying.

D. Tag and label circuits designated to be extended in the future. Identify source and circuit numbers in each cabinet, pull and junction box, and outlet box. Color-coding may be used for voltage and phase identification.

E. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, control, signal, and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate 6 to 8 inches (150 to 200 mm) below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches (400 mm), overall, use a single line marker.

F. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where required to comply with 29 CFR 1910.145, Chapter XVII, and where needed to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Indoors install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.

G. Install engraved-laminated emergency-operating signs with white letters on red background with minimum 3/8-inch- (9-mm-) high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, and other emergency operations.

3.9 ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT

A. Install utility company metering equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding and empty conduits as required by utility company.

3.10 FIRESTOPPING

A. Apply firestopping to cable and raceway sleeves and other penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original undisturbed fire-resistance ratings of assemblies. Firestopping installation is specified in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

3.11 CONCRETE BASES

A. Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger, in both directions, than supported unit. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's anchorage recommendations and setting templates for anchor-bolt and tie locations, unless otherwise indicated.


3.12 DEMOLITION

A. Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal capacity, quality, and functionality.

B. Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be demolished, in their entirety.

C. Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in place, 2 inches (50 mm) below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to match existing finish.

D. Remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components indicated for relocation.

3.13 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.

B. Repair, refinish and touch up disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed surfaces.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Conductors and Cables - 260513

SECTION 260513

CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors, splices, and terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with NFPA 70.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Alcan Aluminum Corporation; Alcan Cable Div. 2. American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company. 3. General Cable Corporation. 4. Senator Wire & Cable Company. 5. Southwire Company.

B. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings.

C. Conductor Material: Copper, stranded conductor, solid conductor for No. 10 AWG and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.


D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THW, THHN-THWN, XHHW, UF, USE and SO.

E. Multi-conductor Cable: Armored cable, Type AC. Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM, Type SO and Type USE with ground wire.

2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. AMP Incorporated/Tyco International. 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company; Electrical Products Division.

B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, XHHW, single conductors in raceway, SE or USE multi-conductor cable.

B. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, [Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM.

C. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM.

D. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

E. Exposed Branch Circuits, including in Crawlspaces: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM]

F. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway, Armored cable, Type AC, Metal-clad cable, Type MC, Nonmetallic-sheathed cable, Type NM.

G. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors in raceway.

H. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits: Type UF multi-conductor cable.

I. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord.

J. Fire Alarm Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit cable.

K. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway.


L. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, in raceway, Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes, Power-limited tray cable, in cable tray.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

C. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."

F. Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems."

G. Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods and Electrical Identification."

H. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than un-spliced conductors.

1. Use oxide inhibitor in each splice and tap conductor for aluminum conductors.

I. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack.


A. Testing: Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. Certify compliance with test parameters.

B. Test Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following:

1. Test procedures used. 2. Test results that comply with requirements. 3. Test results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve

compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Building Wire and Cable - 260519

SECTION 260519

BUILDING WIRING AND CABLE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Building wire and cable.

B. Underground feeder and branch circuit cable. C.

Service entrance cable.

D. Armored cable. E.

Metal clad cable.

F. Wiring connectors and connections.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300.

B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type.

C. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained.

D. Design Data: Indicate voltage drop and ampacity calculations for aluminum

conductors substituted for copper conductors.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations

of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this

Section with minimum ten years documented experience.


A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70.

B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.


1.06 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Provide under provisions of other Sections.

B. Submit two lengths, each 18 inches of cable assembly from each reel. C.

Select each length to include complete set of manufacturer markings. D.

Attach tag indicating cable size and application information.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B.

Conductor sizes are based on copper.

C. Aluminum conductors shall not be used.

D. Wire and cable routing shown on Drawings is approximate unless dimensioned.

Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions.

E. Where wire and cable routing is not shown, and destination only is indicated,

determine exact routing and lengths required.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039

B. Determine required separation between cable and other work. C.

Determine cable routing to avoid interference with other work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS - BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

A. Anaconda Power Cable. B.

Carol Cable.

C. Rome Wire and Cable. D.

Alpha Wire.

2.02 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE

A. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. B.

Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation: ANSI/NFPA 70; Type THHN/THWN or XHHN insulation for feeders and

branch circuits.


2.03 MANUFACTURERS - UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH-CIRCUIT CABLE

A. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.04 UNDERGROUND FEEDER AND BRANCH CIRCUIT CABLE

A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type UF. B.

Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts.

D. Insulation Temperature Rating: 90 degrees C.

2.05 MANUFACTURERS - SERVICE-ENTRANCE CABLE

A. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600.

2.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE

A. Description: ANSI/NFPA 70, Type USE. B.

Conductor: Copper.

C. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. D.

Insulation: Type XHHW.

2.07 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Split Bolt Connectors:

1. Ilsco, Model SK.

2. Burndy, Model KSU.

3. Blackburn, Model HPS.

B. Solderless Pressure Connectors:

1. Ilsco, Model SLUH.

2. Burndy, Model KA-U.

3. Panduit, Model LAM.

C. Spring Wire Connectors:

1. Buchanan, Model 31, 33, 35 and 37. 2. 3M.

3. Ideal Wirenut.

D. Compression Connectors:


1. Burndy, Model HYLUG / HYLINK

2. Panduit, Model LAA.

3. Blackburn, Model ATL.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire.

3.03 WIRING METHODS

A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN or

XHHN insulation, in raceway.

B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN or


C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN or XHHN

insulation, in raceway.

D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THHN/THWN or


E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway. F.

Underground Installations: Use only building wire, Type XHHW insulation, in raceway.

G. Use wiring methods indicated on Drawings.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturers instructions.

B. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller.

C. Use stranded conductors for control circuits.

D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits.

E. Use conductor not smaller than 16 AWG for control circuits.

F. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.


G. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet.

H. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time.

I. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger.

J. Protect exposed cable from damage.

K. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal or

plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling

panels.

L. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.

M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors.

O. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise.

P. Terminate aluminum conductors with tin-plated aluminum-bodied compression

connectors only. Fill with anti-oxidant compound before installing conductor.

Q. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for

connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors.

R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger.

Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor.

S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor

splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller.

T. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor

splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. 3.05 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Identify wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195.

B. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated on

Drawings.


A. Perform field inspection and testing under provisions of other Sections.

B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.

C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values.


D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Grounding and Bonding - 260526

SECTION 260526

GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by requirements of other Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For ground rods.

B. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled under UL 467 as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Comply with NFPA 70; for overhead-line construction and medium-voltage underground construction, comply with IEEE C2.

C. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. 2. Boggs, Inc. 3. Chance/Hubbell. 4. Copperweld Corp. 5. Dossert Corp. 6. Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group. 7. Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical. 8. Galvan Industries, Inc. 9. Harger Lightning Protection, Inc. 10. Hastings Fiber Glass Products, Inc. 11. Heary Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 12. Ideal Industries, Inc. 13. ILSCO. 14. Kearney/Cooper Power Systems. 15. Korns, C. C. Co.; Division of Robroy Industries. 16. Lightning Master Corp.


17. Lyncole XIT Grounding. 18. O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group. 19. Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell. 20. Robbins Lightning, Inc. 21. Salisbury, W. H. & Co. 22. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. 23. Thomas & Betts, Electrical.

2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables."

B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.

C. Isolated Ground Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation with yellow stripe. On feeders with isolated ground, use colored tape, alternating bands of green and yellow tape to provide a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow.

D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.

E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Bare, Solid-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 3.

G. Assembly of Bare, Stranded-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 8.

H. Bare, Tinned-Copper Conductors: ASTM B 33.

I. Copper Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.

J. Copper Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.

K. Tinned-Copper Bonding Jumper: Tinned-copper tape, braided copper conductors, terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (42 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) thick.

L. Ground Conductor for Overhead Distribution: No. 4 AWG minimum, soft-drawn copper.

M. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulated spacer.

N. Connectors: Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items. Bolted type, compression type, or exothermic-welded type, in kit form, selected per manufacturer's written instructions.

2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods: [Copper-clad steel.

B. Ground Rods: Sectional type; copper-clad steel.

1. Size: [3/4 by 120 inches (19 by 3000 mm) in diameter.

C. Chemical Electrodes: Copper tube, straight or L-shaped, filled with nonhazardous chemical salts, terminated with a 4/0 bare conductor. Provide backfill material recommended by manufacturer.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.

B. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.

C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections.

D. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Use insulated spacer; space 1 inch (25.4 mm) from wall and support from wall 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

2. At doors, route the bus up to the top of the door frame, across the top of the doorway, and down to the indicated height above the floor.

E. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum. Bury at least 24 inches (600 mm) below grade or bury 12 inches (300 mm) above duct bank when installed as part of the duct bank.

F. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated.

1. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in feeders and branch circuits receptacle circuits.

2. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from the grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment grounding bar terminal on busway.

3. Computer Outlet Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from computer-area power panels or power-distribution units.

4. Isolated Grounding Receptacle Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor connected to the receptacle grounding terminal. Isolate grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

5. Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install an insulated equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.

6. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.

7. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct.

8. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install an insulated equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.


9. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other

communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.

a. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch (6.4-by-50-by-300-mm) grounding bus.

b. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.

10. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Provide a grounding electrode in addition to installing an insulated equipment grounding conductor with supply branch-circuit conductors.

11. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.

G. Metal Frame Grounding for Buildings: Drive a ground rod at the base of every corner column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet (18 m) apart. Connect rod to column with an underground grounding conductor.. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for underground conductor, and bury 18 inches (450 mm) below grade, minimum.

H. Ground Rods: Install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding electrodes.

1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 inches (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds, except as otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating.

I. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.

J. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation hangers or supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.

K. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.

L. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with grounding clamp connectors.

M. Comply with NFPA 780 and UL 96 when interconnecting with lightning protection system.


N. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps.

O. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system upstream from equipment shutoff valve.

P. Connections: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.

2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical

clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and

mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future

penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 6. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

Welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.

7. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.

8. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.

9. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A[ and UL 486B].

10. Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.

11. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of insulation and cable.

Q. Duct Banks: Install a grounding conductor with at least 50 percent ampacity of the largest phase conductor in the duct bank.

R. Manholes and Handholes: Install a driven ground rod close to wall and set rod depth so 4 inches (100 mm) will extend above finished floor. If necessary, install ground rod before manhole is placed and provide a No. 1/0 AWG bare, tinned-copper conductor from ground rod into manhole through a waterproof sleeve in manhole wall. Protect ground rods passing through concrete floor with a double wrapping of pressure-sensitive tape or heat-shrunk insulating sleeve from 2 inches (50 mm) above to 6 inches (150 mm) below concrete. Seal floor opening with waterproof, nonshrink grout.

S. Connections to Manhole Components: Connect exposed-metal parts, such as inserts, cable racks, pulling irons, ladders, and cable shields within each manhole or handhole, to ground rod or grounding conductor. Make connections with No. 4 AWG minimum, stranded, hard-drawn copper conductor. Train conductors level or plumb around corners and fasten to


manhole walls. Connect to cable armor and cable shields as recommended by manufacturer of splicing and termination kits.

T. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and counterpoise circling pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Use tinned-copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for counterpoise and for taps to equipment ground pad. Bury counterpoise not less than 18 inches (450 mm) below grade and 6 inches (150 mm) from the foundation.


A. Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:

1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is indicated and at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after the last trace of precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests, by the fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.

3. Provide drawings locating each ground rod, ground rod assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods driven and their depth at each location and include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. Nominal maximum values are as follows:

a. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. b. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. c. Equipment Rated More Than 1000 kVA: 3 ohms. d. Overhead Distribution Line Equipment: 25 ohms. e. Substations and Pad-Mounted Switching Equipment: 5 ohms. f. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Supporting Devices - 260529

SECTION 260529

SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Conduit and equipment

supports. B. Anchors and fasteners.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors

Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National

Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog data for fastening systems.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product.



B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing

firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance.

B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the

loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products.

C. Anchors and Fasteners:

1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use precast insert system, expansion

anchors, powder-actuated anchors and preset inserts.

2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beams clamps with seismic safety strap,

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Supporting Devices - 260529

spring steel clips, steel ramset fasteners, and welded fasteners.

3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners.

5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts.

6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of

Installation".

C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and

conduit.

D. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps.

E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors.

F. Obtain permission from Architect before drilling or cutting structural members.

G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts.

H. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four

anchors.

I. In wet and damp locations uses steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall.

J. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and

panelboards recessed in hollow partitions.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Raceway and Boxes - 260533

SECTION 260533

RACEWAY AND BOXES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for electrical wiring.

B. See Division 2 Section "Underground Ducts and Utility Structures" for exterior ductbanks, manholes, and underground utility construction.

C. See Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestopping materials and installation at penetrations through walls, ceilings, and other fire-rated elements.

D. See Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and identification products.

E. See Division 16 Section "Seismic Controls for Electrical Work" for seismic restraints and bracing of raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.

F. See Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes and for floor-box service fittings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of components for raceways, fittings, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.


2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Electri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co.

B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

C. Aluminum Rigid Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

D. IMC: ANSI C80.6.

E. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

1. Fittings: Set-screw type.

F. FMC: Aluminum Zinc-coated steel.

G. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.

H. Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers:

1. American International. 2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose. 3. Arnco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. 5. Certainteed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. ElecSYS, Inc. 8. Electri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 12. Spiralduct, Inc./AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 13. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

B. ENT: NEMA TC 13.

C. RNC: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 PVC.

D. ENT and RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.

E. LFNC: UL 1660.


2.4 METAL WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. Square D.

B. Material and Construction: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 1 and 3R.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type.

F. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

2.5 NONMETALLIC WIREWAYS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hoffman. 2. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.

B. Description: PVC plastic, extruded and fabricated to size and shape indicated, with snap-on cover and mechanically coupled connections with plastic fasteners.

C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for complete system.

D. Select features, unless otherwise indicated, as required to complete wiring system and to comply with NFPA 70.

2.6 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. Surface Metal Raceways: Galvanized steel with snap-on covers. Finish with manufacturer's standard prime coating.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Airey-Thompson Sentinel Lighting; Wiremold Company (The). b. Thomas & Betts Corporation. c. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). d. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

B. Surface Nonmetallic Raceways: Two-piece construction, manufactured of rigid PVC compound with matte texture and manufacturer's standard, color.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Butler Manufacturing Co.; Walker Division. b. Enduro Composite Systems.


c. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Device Division. d. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products. e. Panduit Corp. f. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). g. Wiremold Company (The); Electrical Sales Division.

C. Types, sizes, and channels as indicated and required for each application, with fittings that match and mate with raceways.

2.7 BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal. 7. RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc. 8. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.; Adalet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. 11. Thomas & Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems, Inc.; Wiremold Company (The). 13. Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.

B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.

D. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2.

E. Floor Boxes: Cast metal, fully adjustable, rectangular.

F. Floor Boxes: Nonmetallic, nonadjustable, round.

G. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.

H. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.

I. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch.

1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint.

J. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.

2.8 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.


B. Finish: For raceway, enclosure, or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled surface raceways, enclosures, and cabinets before shipping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors:

1. Exposed: Rigid steel or IMC. 2. Concealed: Rigid steel or IMC. 3. Underground, Single Run: RNC. 4. Underground, Grouped: RNC. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. 6. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors:

1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,

Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet locations.

4. Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows:

a. Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.

C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1/2-inch trade size (DN 16).

D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.

1. Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings approved for use with that material. Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduits.

E. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve.

F. Do not install aluminum conduits embedded in or in contact with concrete.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

B. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods."


D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.

E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab.

F. Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in shortest practical distance, considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave at least 2 inches (50 mm) of concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement.

2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size (DN 27) parallel or at right angles to main

reinforcement. Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

4. Change from nonmetallic tubing to Schedule 80 nonmetallic conduit, rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor.

I. Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and follow surface contours as much as possible.

1. Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports. 2. Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows

can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.

J. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints tight.

1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

K. Tighten set screws of thread-less fittings with suitable tools.

L. Terminations:

1. Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside box.

2. Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

M. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire.

N. Telephone and Signal System Raceways, 2-Inch Trade Size (DN 53) and Smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet (45 m) and with a maximum of two 90-deg ree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.


O. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points:

1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces.

2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

P. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used 6 inches (150 mm) above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future equipment connections.

Q. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures; for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

R. Surface Raceways: Install a separate, green, ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals.

S. Set floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

T. Set floor boxes level. Trim after installation to fit flush with finished floor surface.

U. Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Boxes - 260534

SECTION 260534

BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes.

B. Floor boxes.

C. Pull and junction boxes.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Association.

B. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.

C. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box

Supports.

D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).



B. Accurately records actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull and

junction boxes.



B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or testing

firm acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.


A. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify locations of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior to rough

in.

C. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless

dimensioned. Install at location required for box to serve intended purpose. Include installation within 10 feet of location shown.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 OUTLET BOXES

A. She et Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.

1.

Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2-inch male fixture studs where required.

2.

Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete type.

B.

C.

Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 2.

Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum or cast ferroalloy. Provide gasketed

cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs.

2.02

FLO

OR BOXES

A.

Floor Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, fully adjustable semi-adjustable.

B.

Material: Cast metal.

C.

Shape: Rectangular.

D.

Conform to regulatory requirements for concrete-tight floor boxes.

2.03

PUL

L AND JUNCTION BOXES

A.

Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.

B.

Surface-Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface- mounted junction box.

1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum.

2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

C.

In-Ground Cast Metal Boxes: NEMA 250; Type 6, inside flanged, recessed cover box for flush mounting.

1. Material: Galvanized cast iron or cast aluminum.

2. Cover: Nonskid cover with neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws.

3. Cover Legend: ELECTRIC.

D.

Fiberglass Handholes: Die-molded fiberglass handholes.

1. Cable Entrance: Pre-cut 6 x 6-inch cable entrance at center bottom of each side.

2. Cover: Fiberglass weatherproof cover with nonskid finish.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install electrical boxes as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps,

wire pulling, equipment connections, and compliance with regulatory requirements.

B. Install electrical boxes to maintain headroom and to present neat mechanical

appearance.

C. Install pullboxes and junction boxes above accessible ceiling and in unfinished

areas only.

D. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches

from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire.

E. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements,

using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270.

F. Align adjacent wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar

devices with each other.

G. Use flush mounting outlet boxes in finished area.

H. Do not install flush mounting boxes back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6-inch

separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls.

I. Secure flush mounting boxes to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately

position to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs.

K. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness.

L. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box.

M. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires.

N. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits, both supported within 12 inches of box.

O. Use gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use

sectional boxes.

P. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets.

Q. Use cast outlet boxes in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet

locations.

R. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are

acceptable for other installations.

S. Set floor boxes level.


T. Large Pullboxes: Boxes larger than 100 cubic inches in volume or 12 inches in any dimension.

1. Interior Dry Locations: Use hinged enclosure under provisions of Section

16160.

2. Other Locations: Use surface-mounted cast metal box.

3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with Section 08305.

B. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening.

C. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters,

benches, and backsplashes.

D. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material.

B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material.

C. Install knockout closure in unused box opening.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Conduit - 260535

SECTION 260535

CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Metal conduit.

B. Flexible metal conduit.

C. Electrical metallic tubing. D.

Nonmetal conduit.

E. Electrical nonmetallic tubing. F.

Flexible nonmetallic conduit. G.

Fittings and conduit bodies.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.

B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C.

ANSI C80.5 - Rigid Aluminum Conduit.

D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies.

E. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. F.

NECA "Standard of Installation."

G. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit.

H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Plastic Tubing (EPT) and Conduit (EPC-40 and EPC-80). I.

NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of other Sections.

B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquid-tight flexible metal

conduit, metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and conduit bodies.




B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches.


A. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction] as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

1.07 FIELD SAMPLES

A. Provide under provisions of other Sections.

B. Provide field sample of conduit, two each at 2 feet long.

C. Provide field sample of expansion/deflection fitting, two each.


A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site as recommended by the manufacturer of

the item.

B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering.

D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.


A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings.

B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough in.

C. Conduit routing is shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned.

Route as required to complete wiring system.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch unless otherwise specified. B.

Underground Installations:

1. More than Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, concrete encased PVC Schedule 40 or as indicated on drawings.

2. Within Five Feet from Foundation Wall: Use intermediate metal conduit, concrete

encased PVC Schedule 40 or as indicated on drawings.


C.

4. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.

Outdoor Locations, Above Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, and intermediate metal conduit

for locations from finished grade to 10 feet above finished grade or electrical metallictubing may be used for locations exceeding, 10 feet above grade as indicated on drawings.

D.

In Slab Above Grade:

1. Use rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit.

2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab: 3/4 inch; 1/2 inch for conduits crossing each other.

OR

3. Conduit shall not be installed in any floor slabs.

E.

Wet and Damp Locations: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit and electrical metallic tubing.

F.

Dry Locations:

1. Concealed: Use rigid steel, intermediate metal conduit, and electrical metallic tubing.

2. Exposed: Use rigid steel intermediate metal conduit, and electrical metallic tubing.

2.02

MET

L CONDUIT

A.

Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B.

Rigid Aluminum Conduit: ANSI C80.5.

C.

Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel.

D.

Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88; all steel fittings.

3. In or Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit, and plastic coated conduit and thickwall nonmetallic conduit.

A

2.03 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: NEMA RN 1; rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil

thick.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88; steel fittings with external PVC coating to match conduit.

2.04 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT

A. Description: Interlocked steel construction.

B. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88.

2.05 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (MET)


A. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1-88; steel or malleable iron, compression indenter type.

2.06 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT

A. Description: NEMA TC 2; Schedule 40 PVC. B.

Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

2.07 NONMETALLIC TUBING

A. Description: NEMA TC 2.

B. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation."

B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. C.

Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation.

D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers.

E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel;

provide space on each for 25 percent additional conduits.

F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190.

G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for

temporary supports

H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires.

I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J.

Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls.

K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L.

Route conduit under slab from point-to-point.

M. Do not cross conduits in slab.

N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping.

O. Maintain 12-inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F.

P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends.


Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely.

R. Join nonmetallic conduit using cement as recommended by manufacturer. Wipe

nonmetallic conduit dry and clean before joining. Apply full even coat of cement to entire area

inserted in fitting. Allow joint to cure for 20 minutes, minimum.

S. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and

wet locations and to cast boxes.

T. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2-inch size.

U. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system.

V. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic, control and expansion joints.

W. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples.

X. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture.

Y. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of other Sections.

Z. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195.

3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods under the provisions of other Sections.

B. Route conduits through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Seismic Controls For Electrical Systems - 260548

SECTION 260548

SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes seismic restraints and other earthquake-damage-reduction measures for electrical components. It applies to and complements optional seismic-restraint requirements in the various electrical component Sections of these Specifications.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Seismic Restraint: A fixed device (a seismic brace, an anchor bolt or stud, or a fastening assembly) used to prevent vertical or horizontal movement, or both vertical and horizontal movement, of an electrical system component during an earthquake.

B. Mobile Structural Element: A part of the building structure such as a slab, floor structure, roof structure, or wall that may move independently of other structural elements during an earthquake.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Illustrate and indicate types, styles, materials, strength, fastening provisions, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used. Include documentation of evaluation and approval of components by agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Shop Drawings: For components, physical arrangements, and installation details not defined by Drawings. Indicate materials and show calculations, design analysis, details, and layouts, signed and sealed by a professional engineer.

C. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an agency approved by authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraints.

D. Qualification data.

E. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in California Building Code, SBC, UBC, unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing and inspection agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the inspection indicated.


A. Project Seismic Zone and Zone Factor as Defined in UBC.


B. Select categories and factors in first two paragraphs below in coordination with structural engineer.

C. Occupancy Category as Defined in UBC.

D. Acceleration Factor as Defined in UBC, BOCA, or SBC.

E. Project Seismic Hazard Exposure Group as Defined in BOCA or SBC.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structure, architectural features, and mechanical, fire-protection, electrical, and other building systems.

B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. B-Line Systems, Inc. 3. Erico, Inc. 4. GS Metals Corp. 5. Loos & Company, Inc. 6. Mason Industries, Inc, 7. Powerstrut. 8. Thomas & Betts Corp. 9. Unistrut Corporation.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Use the following materials for restraints:

1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated. 2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel. 3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.

2.3 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS

A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components shall be at least twice the maximum seismic forces for which they are required to be designed.

B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type.


C. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.

D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325.

E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.

F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not acceptable.

G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of anchor bolts and studs used.

H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.

2.4 SEISMIC-BRACING COMPONENTS

A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch (41-by-41-mm) cross section, formed from 0.1046-inch- (2.7-mm-) thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch (14-by-22-mm) slots at a maximum of 2 inches (50 mm) o.c. in webs, and flange edges turned toward web.

1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 570, GR 33. 2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 575, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A 36. 3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and

designed for use with that product. 4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and

phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel brackets and bolts.

C. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels, installed vertically, with internally bolted connections to hanger rod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install seismic restraints according to applicable codes and regulations and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Install structural attachments as follows:

1. Use bolted connections with steel brackets, slotted channel, and slotted-channel fittings to spread structural loads and reduce stresses.

2. Attachments to New Concrete: Bolt to channel-type concrete inserts or use expansion anchors.

3. Attachments to Existing Concrete: Use expansion anchors. 4. Holes for Expansion Anchors in Concrete: Drill at locations and to depths that avoid

reinforcing bars. 5. Attachments to Solid Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Use expansion anchors. 6. Attachments to Hollow Walls: Bolt to slotted steel channels fastened to wall with

expansion anchors. 7. Attachments to Wood Structural Members: Install bolts through members.


8. Attachments to Steel: Bolt to clamps on flanges of beams or on upper truss chords of bar joists.

C. Install electrical equipment anchorage as follows:

1. Anchor panelboards, motor-control centers, motor controls, switchboards, switchgear, transformers, unit substations, fused power-circuit devices, transfer switches, busway, battery racks, static uninterruptible power units, power conditioners, capacitor units, communication system components, and electronic signal processing, control, and distribution units as follows:

a. Anchor equipment rigidly to a single mobile structural element or to a concrete base that is structurally tied to a single mobile structural element.

b. Size concrete bases so expansion anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from the edge of the concrete base.

c. Concrete Bases for Floor-Mounted Equipment: Use female expansion anchors and install studs and nuts after equipment is positioned.

d. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Install to allow for resilient media between anchor bolt or stud and mounting hole in concrete.

e. Anchor Bolt Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment: Install to allow for resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

f. Torque bolts and nuts on studs to values recommended by equipment manufacturer.

D. Install seismic bracing as follows:

1. Install bracing according to spacings and strengths indicated by approved analysis. 2. Expansion and Contraction: Install to allow for thermal movement of braced

components. 3. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to the

structure at flanges of beams, upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

E. Accommodation of Differential Seismic Motion: Make flexible connections in raceways, cables, wireway, cable trays, and busway where they cross expansion- and seismic-control joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where they terminate at electrical equipment anchored to a different mobile structural element from the one supporting them.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to inspect seismic-control installation for compliance with indicated requirements.

B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing and inspection agency to inspect seismic-control installation for compliance with indicated requirements.

C. Reinspection: Correct deficiencies and verify by re-inspection that work complies with requirements.

D. Provide written report of tests and inspections.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Electrical Identifications - 260553

SECTION 260553

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates and labels.

B. Wire and cable markers.

C. Conduit markers.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated

by Product testing agency specified under regulatory requirements. Include instructions

for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of Product.



B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or testing firm

acceptable to authority having jurisdiction as suitable for purpose specified and shown.

1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish under provisions of other Sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background.

B. Locations:

1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure.

2. Communication cabinets.

C. Letter Size:

1. Use 1/8-inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads.


2. Use 1/4-inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

2.02 WIR

A.

B.

E MARKERS

Description: Tape, split sleeve, or tubing type wire markers.

Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes,

and each load connection.

C.

Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings.

2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection

diagrams on drawings or shop drawings.

2.03 CONDUIT MARKERS

A. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet.

B. Spacing: 20 feet on center.

C. Color:

1. 480 Volt System:

2. 208 Volt System:

3. Fire Alarm System: Red.

4. Telephone System:

D. Legend:

1. 480 Volt System:

2. 208 Volt System:

3. Fire Alarm System:


2.04 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE

A. Description: 4 inch wide plastic tape, detectable type, colored yellow with suitable warning

legend describing buried electrical lines.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.


3.02 APPLICATION

A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines.

B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws, rivets, or adhesive.

C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished

locations.

D. Identify conduit using field painting under provisions of Section 09900.

E. Paint colored band on each conduit longer than 6 feet.

F. Paint bands 20 feet on center.

G. Color:

1. 480 Volt System:

2. 208 Volt System:

3. Fire Alarm System: Red


H. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench

at 6 inches below finished grade.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Wiring Devices - 262726

SECTION 262726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Receptacles. 2. Connectors. 3. Switches. 4. Finish plates. 5. Multi-outlet assemblies. 6. Poke-through floor service outlets and fittings. 7. Telephone/power poles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Samples: For devices, device plates, multioutlet assemblies, poke-through floor service outlets, and telephone/power poles for finish and color selection, and evaluation of technical features.

C. Field quality-control test reports.



B. Comply with NEMA WD 1.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following

1. Wiring Devices:

a. Bryant Electric, Inc. b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. c. GE Company; GE Wiring Devices.


d. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. e. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. f. Leviton Manufacturing Co., Inc. g. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. h. Pyle-National, Inc.; an Amphenol Co. i. Lutron (dimmer and wall switch devices)

2. Multioutlet Assemblies:

a. Airey-Thompson Co. b. Wiremold.

3. Poke-through Assemblies, Floor Service Outlets and Telephone/Power Poles:

a. American Electric. b. Hubbell, Inc.; Wiring Devices Div. c. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div. d. Square D Co. e. Wiremold.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty grade.

B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type, with integral NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) deep outlet box without an adapter.

2.3 SWITCHES

A. Snap Switches: Heavy-duty, quiet type.

B. Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on/off switches and audible and electromagnetic noise filters.

1. Control: Continuously adjustable slide. Single-pole or three-way switch to suit connections.

2. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular, 120 V, 60 Hz, single pole with soft tap or other quiet switch; electromagnetic filter to eliminate audible noise, and RF, and TV interference.

3. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming to a maximum of one percent of full brightness.

2.4 FINISH COLOR FOR RECEPTACLES AND SWITCHES

A. Color: matte finish, unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.

2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices.

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.


2. Material: Dimmer switches; Lutron, New Architectural Style, matte finish, square corners, beveld edges and screwless. Switches and Receptacles; Lutron, Claro series.

2.6 FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS

A. Type: Modular, flush-type dual-service units suitable for wiring method used.

B. Compartmentation: Barrier separates power and signal compartments.

C. Housing Material: Die-cast aluminum, satin finished.

D. Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Signal Outlet: Blank cover with bushed cable opening, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES

A. Description: Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box unit with multichannel, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet assembly.

1. Size: Selected to fit nominal 3-inch (75-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness.

2. Fire Rating: Unit is listed for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. 3. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 3-inch (75-mm) cored openings and

reestablish fire rating of floor. 4. Minimum Wiring Capacity: Three No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors; one 75-

ohm coaxial telephone/data cable; and one four-pair, 75-ohm telephone/data cable.

2.8 MULTIOUTLET ASSEMBLIES

A. Components of Assemblies: Products from a single manufacturer designed for use as a complete, matching assembly of raceways and receptacles.

B. Raceway Material: Metal, with manufacturer's standard finish.

C. Wire: No. 12 AWG.

2.9 TELEPHONE/POWER SERVICE POLES

A. Description: Factory-assembled and -wired units to extend power, telephone, and data service from distribution wiring concealed in ceiling to devices or outlets in pole near floor.

1. Poles: Nominal 2.5-inch- (65-mm-) square cross section with height adequate to extend from floor to at least 6 inches (150 mm) above ceiling, and separate channels for power and signal wiring.

2. Mounting: Ceiling trim flange with concealed bracing arranged for positive connection to ceiling supports, and pole foot with carpet pad attachment.

3. Finish: Ivory 4. Wiring: Sized for three No. 12 AWG power and ground conductors; one 75-ohm coaxial

telephone/data cable; and one four-pair, 75-ohm telephone/data cable.


5. Power Receptacles: Two single; 20-A; heavy-duty; NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-20R units.

6. Signal Outlets: Blank insert with bushed cable opening.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure.

B. Install wall plates when painting is complete.

C. Install wall dimmers to achieve indicated rating after derating for ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

E. Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates.

F. Protect devices and assemblies during painting.

G. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.


A. Test wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times.

B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Replace damaged or defective components, and prepare written report of tests.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers - 262816

SECTION 262816

ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches and circuit breakers, rated 600 V and less, used for disconnecting and protection functions.

B. See Division 26 Section "Fuses" for fuses for fusible disconnect switches.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of switch and circuit breaker indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include wiring diagrams for shunt-tripped circuit breakers.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and maintenance data.



B. Source Limitations: Obtain switches and circuit breakers through one source from a single manufacturer.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Eaton Corp.; Cutler-Hammer Products. 2. General Electric Co.; Electrical Distribution & Control Division. 3. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. 4. Square D Co.


2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES

A. Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle, interlocked with cover.

B. Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 800 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to accommodate specified fuses, and lockable handle, interlocked with cover.

2.3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents.

1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger.

2. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with front-mounted, field-adjustable trip setting.

3. Current-Limiting Circuit Breakers: Frame sizes 400 A and smaller; let-through ratings less than NEMA FU 1, RK-5.

4. GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with 30-mA trip sensitivity.

B. Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker Features and Accessories: Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles.

1. Lugs: Suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and material of conductors. 2. Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent

lighting loads; Type HACR for heating, air-conditioning, and refrigerating equipment. 3. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup

and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. 4. Shunt Trip: 120-V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of

rated voltage.

2.4 ENCLOSURES

A. Listed for environmental conditions of installed locations, including:

1. Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R. 2. Food Service Areas: NEMA 250, Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Provisions: Remove temporary lifting provisions and blocking of moving parts.

B. Identify components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods, Electrical Identification."



A. Testing: After installing disconnect switches and circuit breakers and after electrical circuits have been energized, demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.

B. Inspections and Tests for Switches and Circuit Breakers: Make internal and external inspections and perform tests, including the following:

1. Inspect for freedom from physical damage, proper unit rating, mechanical condition, enclosure integrity, cover operation, unit anchorage, clearances, and tightness of electrical connections. If a loose electrical connection is observed on any unit, check each electrical connection for each switch and circuit breaker with a torque wrench for compliance with manufacturer's torquing instructions.

2. Test insulation resistance of each pole, phase-to-phase, and phase-to-ground, following manufacturer's written instructions. Test insulation resistance of shunt trip circuits. Use 500-V minimum test voltage for units and circuits rated up to 250 V, 1000-V minimum test voltage for units rated more than 250 V. Measured insulation resistance must be 25 megohms, minimum, for switches rated up to 250 V, and 100 megohms, minimum, for switches rated more than 250 V.

3. Test cover and other interlocks and interlock release devices for proper operation.

C. Additional Inspections and Tests for Switches: Include the following:

1. Inspect for proper rating and fuse provisions. 2. Check adequacy and integrity of fuseholders by removing and installing fuses. 3. Check integrity of phase barriers. 4. Inspect blade alignment visually while operating switch to observe adequacy of blade

pressure.

D. Additional Inspections and Tests for Circuit Breakers: Include the following:

1. Inspect for proper frame, trip, and fault current interrupting rating. 2. Test shunt trip devices, circuits, and actuating components for proper operation.

E. Correct defective and malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and re-inspect and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Disconnect Switches - 262817

SECTION 262817

DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. Disconnect

switches. B. Fuses.

C. Enclosures.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting

Types. B. ANSI/UL 198E - Class R Fuses.

C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge

Fuses). D. FS W-S-865 - Switch, Box, (Enclosed), Surface-

Mounted.

E. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Square D.

B. Cutler

Hammer

C. Siemens

ITE.

D. General Electric.

2.02 DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; FS W-S-865; quick-make, quick-break,

load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to

prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF

position. Fuse Clips: FS W-F- 870.

B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type HD; FS W-S-865; quick-

make, quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable

handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Disconnect Switches - 262817

lockable in OFF position.

C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1; Type 1, for interior dry locations; Type 3R for exterior or

wet locations.

D. Switch Ratings: Number of poles, voltage, current and horsepower rating as required

for particular installation.

2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - FUSES

A. Littelfuse.

B. Gould

Shawmut.

C. Bussman.

2.04 FUSES

A Fuses 600 Amperes and Less: ANSI/UL 198C, Class J; ANSI/UL 198E, Class RK1;

current limiting, one-time fuse, 250,

600V.

B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000

rms amperes.

C. Size fuses based on motor nameplate rating.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on Drawings.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches, otherwise required by Code.

C. Properly align switches and support independent of the connecting raceway.

END OF

SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Interior Lighting - 265100

SECTION 265100

INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes interior lighting fixtures, lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units, and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture and lamp indicated. Include illustrations and dimensions of fixtures, and showing photometric performance.

B. Shop Drawings: Show details of nonstandard and custom fixtures. Indicate dimensions, weights, components, features, accessories, and methods of field assembly and mounting.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Product Certificates: Include the following:

1. Photometric Performance Certificates: For fixture type-lamp combinations for which certification is required in schedule or details, furnish results of laboratory tests.

2. Dimming Ballast Compatibility Certificates: Signed by manufacturer of ballast certifying that ballasts are compatible with dimming systems and equipment with which they are used.

3. Air and Thermal Performance Certificates: For air-handling fixtures. Furnish data required in "Submittals" Article in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

4. Sound Performance Certificates: For air-handling fixtures. Indicate sound power level and sound transmission class in test reports certified according to ADC.




1.4 COORDINATION

A. Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures with ceiling system and other construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS



1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.

2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.2 LIGHTING FIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Air-Handling Fixtures: Arranged for use with plenum ceiling for air return and heat extraction and for attaching an air-diffuser boot assembly specified in Division 15 Section "Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles."

1. Sound-Pressure Levels: Certified according to ADC. 2. Air-Movement Performance Requirements: Certified according to ADC. 3. Supply Units: Equip with slots in one or both side trims and join with air-diffuser boot

assemblies. 4. Heat Removal Units: An air path through lamp cavity. 5. Dampers: Operable from outside fixture for control of return-air volume. 6. Static Fixtures: Supply slots are blanked off, and fixture appearance matches active

units.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. General Requirements: Comply with UL 924 and the following:

1. Sign Colors and Lettering Size: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction

B. Internally Lighted Signs: Features as follows:

1. Lamps for AC Operation: Two or more for each fixture; LED. 2. Internal Source for Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger

in a self-contained power pack.

a. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. b. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. c. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from unit when circuit voltage

drops to 80 percent of nominal or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.

C. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Luminous-Source Type): Licensed for public use by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission. Signs have solid-state tritium gas energy source and provide legibility in total darkness at 100 feet (30 m) after 10 years of service.

2.4 LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Fixture Type: REFER TO LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE ON SHEET E-1.

2.5 FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS

A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.

B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (12-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fitting and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture.


C. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch- (5-mm-) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.

D. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line connection and equipped with threaded attachment cord and locking-type plug.

2.6 FINISHES

A. Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects. 2. Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

PART 4 - INSTALLATION

A. Support for Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings: Support fixture using grid plus the following:

1. Install a minimum of four ceiling support system rods or wires for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from fixture corners.

2. Support Clips: Fasten to fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner.

3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Arrange as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently of panel, with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees.

B. Suspended Fixture Support:

1. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with two separate stem hangers. 2. Continuous Rows: Use stem for wiring at one point and stem for suspension for each

unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 3. Bracing for Pendants and Rods: If longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit

swinging.

C. Air-Handling Fixtures: Install with dampers closed.


A. Tests:

1. Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation. 2. Emergency Lighting: Interrupt electrical supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify

normal transfer to battery source and retransfer to normal. 3. Report results in writing.

B. Defective and Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure until units are acceptable.

C. Report test results in writing.


4.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust aim-able fixtures to provide required light intensities.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Site Clearing - 31 10 00 -1

SECTION 31 10 00

SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Protecting existing vegetation to remain. 2. Removing existing vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Stripping and stockpiling topsoil. 5. Removing above- and below-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing/abandoning site utilities

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary utility services, construction and support facilities, security and protection facilities, and temporary erosion/sedimentation and storm water pollution control measures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

B. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

C. Topsoil: Top layer of the soil profile consisting of existing native surface topsoil or existing in-place surface soil and is the zone where plant roots grow.

D. Tree-Protection Zone: Area surrounding individual trees, groups of trees, shrubs, or other vegetation to be protected during construction, and indicated on Drawings.

E. Vegetation: Trees, shrubs, groundcovers, grass, and other plants.

1.4 MATERIAL OWNERSHIP

A. Except for stripped topsoil and other materials indicated to be stockpiled or otherwise remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be removed from Project site.



A. Existing Conditions: Documentation of existing trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that establishes preconstruction conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

1. Use sufficiently detailed photographs or videotape. 2. Include plans and notations to indicate specific wounds and damage conditions of each

tree or other plants designated to remain.

B. Record Drawings: Identifying and accurately showing locations of capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. Provide copy to Engineer of Record.


A. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at project site.


A. Existing Improvements: Provide protections necessary to prevent damage to existing improvements indicated to remain in place.

1. Protect improvements on adjoining properties, public right-of-way and on Owner's property.

2. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to property owners. The full width of pavements damaged due to construction access and other construction-related activities shall be replaced with a structural section (pavement and base) at least equal to the adjacent existing section.

3. Protect existing utility lines indicated to remain. Notify Architect immediately of any damage to or encounter with an unknown existing utility line. Immediately repair damage to existing utility lines.

B. Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place against unnecessary cutting, breaking or skinning of roots, skinning or bruising of bark, smothering of trees by stockpiling construction materials or excavated materials within drip line, excess foot or vehicular traffic, or parking of vehicles within drip line. Provide temporary guards to protect trees and vegetation to be left standing.

1. Water trees and other vegetation to remain within limits of contract work as required to maintain their health during course of construction operations.

2. Provide protection for roots over 1-1/2 inch in diameter that are cut during construc-tion operations. Coat cut faces with an emulsified asphalt or other acceptable coat-ing formulated to use on damaged plant tissues. Temporarily cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out; cover with earth as soon as possi-ble.

3. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations in a manner acceptable to Architect. Employ a licensed ar-borist to repair damage to trees and shrubs.

4. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as deter-mined by arborist.


C. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent

occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by Owner or authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Improvements on Adjoining Property: no work shall be performed on adjoining property.

1. Contractor shall delineate the property line with construction stakes,

2. Contractor shall document the pre-construction condition and photograph the existing conditions.

3. Do not proceed with work on adjoining property unless directed by Architect.

E. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on Owner's premises per owner’s direction.

F. Utility Locator Service: Notify UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT for area where Project is located before site clearing.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soil Material: Requirements for satisfactory soil material are specified in Division 31 "Earthwork."

1. Obtain approved borrow soil material off-site when satisfactory soil material is not available on-site.

B. Tree Wound Paint: Bituminous based paint of standard manufacture specially formulated for the intended use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CLEARING

A. Remove trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions, as required, to permit installation of new construction. Remove similar items elsewhere on site or premises as specifically indicated. Removal includes digging out and off-site disposal of stumps and roots.

1. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction.

2. Unless specifically designated to remain, strip the upper two inches (minimum) of soil containing vegetation and root growth within the Limits of Work shown on the Drawings.


B. Removal of Improvements: Remove existing above-grade and below-grade improvements as

indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

1. Abandonment or removal of certain underground pipe or conduits may be indicated on mechanical or electrical drawings. Removing abandoned underground piping or conduits interfering with construction is included under this Section.

2. Contractor shall refer to the project’s Asbestos Abatement Report for removal of asbestos containing materials and other potential hazardous materials.

C. Clearing and Grubbing: Clear site of trees, shrubs, and other vegetation, except for those indicated to be left standing.

1. Completely remove stumps, roots, and other debris protruding through ground sur-face.

2. Use only hand methods for grubbing inside drip line of trees indicated to remain. 3. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil

material, unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. a. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 6 to 8 inch loose depth, and

thoroughly compact each layer and compact in accordance with the require-ments specified in Section 02300 “Earthwork” to make the new surface conform with the existing adjacent surface of the ground.

4. Trim trees, designated to be left standing within the cleared areas, of dead branches 1-1/2 inches or more in diameter; and trim all branches to heights and in a manner as indicated. Neatly cut limbs and branches to be trimmed close to the bole of the tree or main branches. Paint cuts more than 1-1/4 inches in diameter with specified tree-wound paint.

D. Topsoil is defined as friable clay loam surface soil found in a depth of not less than 4 inches. Satisfactory topsoil is reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, stones, and other objects over 2 inches in diameter, and without weeds, roots, and other objectionable material.

1. Strip topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other objectionable material. Remove heavy growths of grass from areas before stripping.

a. Where existing trees are indicated to remain, leave existing topsoil in place within drip lines to prevent damage to root system.

2. Stockpile topsoil in storage piles in areas indicated or directed. Construct storage piles to provide free drainage of surface water. Cover storage piles, if required, to prevent wind and sediment erosion.

3. Dispose of unsuitable or excess topsoil as specified for disposal of waste material.

E. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

F. Locate and clearly identify trees, shrubs, and other vegetation to remain.

3.2 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Arrange with Owner for disconnecting and sealing of all overhead and underground utilities that serve adjoining existing structures before site clearing.

1. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before proceeding with site clearing.


B. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap utilities indicated to be abandoned in place.

1. Arrange with utility companies to shut off indicated utilities. 2. Arrange with owner scheduling of utilities shut off.

C. Locate, identify, and disconnect utilities indicated to be removed.

D. Interrupting Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Architect's written permission.

E. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

F. Contractor shall note that various unknown and undocumented underground utilities exist at the project site. Contractor shall ensure that utilities are inactive or shut off prior to removal or abandonment. Contractor shall document all found underground utilities and notify engineer of record for further direction.

3.3 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut along line of existing pavement to remain before removing adjacent existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

2. Paint cut ends of steel reinforcement in concrete to remain with two coats of antirust coating, following coating manufacturer's written instructions. Keep paint off surfaces that will remain exposed.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

B. Separate recyclable materials produced during site clearing from other nonrecyclable materials. Store or stockpile without intermixing with other materials and transport them to recycling facilities. Do not interfere with other Project work.

END OF SECTION

KSA Design Studio Inc. April 1, 2018 3rd Street Tour Bus Station 05.9881.000 Issue for 50% CD West Third Street Beverly Hills, CA 90210

Site Remediation 39 93 00 - 1

SECTION 020500 - SITE REMEDIATION PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Work of this section, as shown or specified, shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.2 WORK INCLUDED

A. The Work of this Section includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete all clearing and grubbing together with the removal and disposal of items, as shown on the drawings and as specified herein, complete.

1. Remove all trees, plants and site materials that have been designated for demolition, after receiving approval from Agency’s Representative.

1.3 RELATED WORK

A. Plant Protection and Pruning. Section 329100

B. Landscape Irrigation. Section 328000

C. Landscaping. Section 329300

D. Operation and Maintenance. Section 320100

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Condition of Premises: Accept the premises as found and clear the Project site as specified.

B. Protection:

1. Existing Vegetation: Protect from damage individual trees, groups of trees, shrubbery, lawns and other vegetation designated to remain. Replace at Contractor’s expense items damaged or destroyed with like items in sizes and quantity of the damaged or destroyed material. Assessment of material value shall be established by a Certified Arborist.

2. Protect existing utilities shown to remain.

3. Provide barricades and guards as required to protect trees or existing improvements.

4. Existing irrigation lines watering areas outside the limit of work line.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not used


Site Remediation 39 93 00 - 2

PART 3 - PRODUCTS

3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Verify all trees and shrubs to be removed with Agency’s Representative prior to starting any demolition work.

B. Clearing: Fell trees, dispose of the trees and other vegetation designated for remove together with the downed timber, snags, brush and rubbish, occurring within the construction limits. All limbs, branches, and roots damaged during construction, together with those required to be trimmed, shall be neatly cut next to the bole of the tree or main branch or root under the direction of a certified Arborist.

C. Grubbing: Remove and dispose of all stumps above grade, all matted roots and all roots larger than 3 inches in diameter to a depth of 12".

D. Removal: All cleared and grubbed plants and construction debris shall be promptly removed completely away from the Project site. Do not store or permit materials to accumulate on the Project site.

1. Do not burn materials or debris on the premises.

2. Remove all debris from the Project site to a legal dumping area.

3.2 TREE AND TREE STUMP REMOVAL

A. Trees and tree stumps designated for removal shall be removed to 2 feet below finish grade minimum.

END OF SECTION


ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 33 00 - 1

SECTION 03 33 00 - ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Work includes: 1. Architectural concrete finishes, including the following:

a. Exterior concrete work: 1) Formed concrete, integrally colored, with sacked finish.: 2) Flatwork, integrally colored with smooth sand finish.

2. Note that the work of this Section supplements Section 03100, 03200, and 03300.

B. Related work includes: 1. Concrete formwork, reinforcement, and cast-in-place concrete: See Division 3

Sections. 2. Synthetic wood inlays in architectural concrete flatwork: Section 06150. 3. Water feature waterproofing: Section 07140. 4. Clear concrete sealers: Section 07190.


A. Applicable referenced specifications, standards and publications: 1. “Specifications for Structural Concrete” ACI 301. 2. “Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction” ACI 302. 3. "Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice" (ACI 303R. 4. “Standard Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and of Levelness Using

the F-number System” ASTM F1155.

B. Reference publications by the Portland Cement Association (PCI): 1. “Concrete Finishers Guide”, by Collins, Panarese, and Bradley. 2. “Finishing Concrete with Color and Texture”, by Kosmatka and Collins. 3. “Working Safely with Concrete”.

C. Finished architectural concrete surfaces shall be uniform in color and texture when viewed from a distance of 3', as approved by the Architect. All concrete edges shall be sharp and undamaged. No form or pour joints will be permitted between reveals shown on exterior elevation Drawings. See Article 3.10 of this Section for unacceptable defects in Architectural Concrete.

D. Contractor's qualifications: Architectural concrete contractor shall have five years recent experience with satisfactory performance in architectural concrete of similar scope and type to that proposed for use on this Project.

E. Mockups: Construct mockups of each type and color of architectural concrete finish for the Architect’s review. Mockups shall be of sufficient size to show all design features, suface textures, and variations in color. 1. Locate mockups as directed by the Architect. 2. Make any adjustments to the mockups requested by the Architect.



3. Remove all unsatisfactory mockups from the jobsite, and dispose of them legally.

4. The approved mockups may be incorporated into the finished work provided that they are temporarily identified.

F. The applicable requirements of Section 03100, 03200, and 03300 shall apply to the work of this Section as though repeated verbatim herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer’s data: Submit manufacturer’s data and application instructions for all manufacturered materials, including form release, color agents, sealers and hardener, bonding agents, etc.

B. Form design: 1. The design of forms for architectural concrete shall conform to the standards of

appearance indicated on the Drawings. 2. Design all forms for architectural concrete and prepare detailed drawings

showing the typical forming proposed for the different elements of the structure. Drawings shall be minimum 1/4" scale and shall show all typical and nontypical areas. Indicate all locations where typical details will be used.

C. Shop drawings: Submit complete shop drawings showing all conditions where architectural cast-in-place concrete occurs. Shop drawings shall include but are not limited to the following: 1. Type of forming material. 2. Dimensioned locations of form joints, and construction, pour, and control joints

and reveals. 3. Dimensioned locations of pour joints. 4. Dimensioned locations and types of all form ties, cones, inserts and blockouts. 5. Include detailed description of exact construction methods proposed for the

work, sealing forms between construction joints. 6. Methods of sealing form joints. 7. Procedures of placing concrete (placement sequence in relation to other

concrete work, depositing sequence within each placement). PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Forms: All forms and form material shall be new at start of work. Forms may be re-used providing quality of finished architectural concrete does not deteriorate by their re-use, as approved by the Architect. 1. Forms for architectural concrete shall be completely rigid, strong enough to stay

within deflection limits specified, without movement or leakage, and shall be able to withstand the high hydraulic pressures which result from rapid filling and high frequency vibration.

2. Materials: Steel, fiberglass, "Finn Form", or Simpson's "Formguard" fir plywood with phenolic resin-impregnated cellulose fiber sheet bonded on face in contact with concrete. Back and all edges of "Finn Form" and fir plywood shall be sealed. Thickness shall be as required to comply with specified deflection limits and good trade practice.



3. Form accessories: a. Fasteners: Formed of galvanized steel or other approved non-corrosive

materials. b. Form ties (she-bolt or he-bolt): Use removable tapered she-bolts where

possible. Where conditions require a stronger tie use a removable he-bolt without cones. Leave-in inside rods shall be stainless steel with no metal closer than 1-1/8" from the concrete surface. Ties shall be used with external spreading hardware to maintain alignment. Approved tie manufacture's shall be Williams Forms Engineering Co., Grand Rapids, Mich., or Richmond Screw Anchor, or equal. Tie holes shall be size indicated on Drawings.

c. Stripping gaskets: Resilient, rectangular material non-absorbent and non-staining at junctions of formwork as required to permit their removal without damage to concrete surfaces.

d. Form gaskets (for sealing form panel joints): Gaskets shall be closed cell, completely skinned, foam rubber or neoprene, with pressure sensitive paperbacked adhesive on surfaces to be bonded to forms. Gaskets shall be 1/4" thick minimum and shall be of sufficient widths and compressibility for specific use.

e. Form joint sealer: Contractor's option as required to prevent concrete leakage but must be invisible on formed concrete after form removal.

f. Reveal strips: Sealed (polyurethane) milled clear fir, dressed and sanded, for straight reveals, as indicated on Architectural Drawings.

g. Form release agent (compatible with any required clear sealers or other coatings): Chemically neutral, non-staining, non-toxic, commercially blended, emulsion based form release agent, complying with AQMD VOC requirements. Form release agent shall be specifically selected to produce exposed concrete surfaces with uniform appearance with minimum bugholes and other surface defects. Release agent shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Final acceptance of form release agent depends on proved performance on sample panel(s).

h. Form edge sealer: Proprietary edge sealer as approved by form material manufacturer.

i. Reglets (if required): "Type I Springlock Flashing Reglets" for casting into concrete, constructed from 24 gage galvanized steel for concealed locations and .020 stainless steel for exposed locations.

4. Multiple use of forms: Forms may only be re-used if in like new condition. No damaged or repaired forms may be used to produce exposed architectural concrete surfaces. Take special care in erection, stripping, and storage of forms (corners and surfaces).

B. Concrete materials: 1. Aggregate for exposed aggregate concrete:

a. Type: As selected by Architect. b. Size: As selected by Architect. c. Design mix: Coordinate with the work of Section 03300 and the

Structural Drawings. 2. Cement: Standard gray or white as required to match Architect’s approved color

samples when used with the specifed coloring agents, dyes or stains. Types as specified for all other cast-in-place concrete, as approved by Architect.



C. Concrete coloring compounds: 1. Color hardener: Manufacturer and color as selected by Architect. 2. Integral coloring compound: Manufacturer and color as selected by the Architect

D. Clear concrete sealers: As specified in Section 07190.

E. Miscellaneous materials: 1. Repair materials:

a. Bonding agent: Larsen’s or equal approved by the Architect. b. Cement types and aggregates shall be determined on job site mix, and

shall match those used on approved mock-ups. 2. A general surface cleaner shall be a commercial concrete cleaner containing

solvents, stain removers, detergents and a maximum of 2% chloride acid will be accepted for use. Acceptable cleaner shall be "Limestone Cleaner" by ProSoCo, Inc. Cleaner shall have neutral run-off complying with requirements of governing authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Other materials proposed for use will be considered based on successful performance based on the mock-up.

2.2 MATERIALS TESTING TO BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR BEFORE PLACING

ANY CONCRETE

A. As specified for cast-in-place concrete. 2.3 MIXES

A. As specified for cast-in-place concrete, and as required for each type of architectural concrete, as approved by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine adjacent surfaces and construction and make sure that conditions detrimental to the proper and timely execution of this work are corrected before proceeding.

3.2 FORMED ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE

A. Tolerances: 1. Formwork shall be constructed and finished so that concrete surfaces will

conform to the tolerance limits listed hereafter. Failure to comply with these limits will result in the Contractor's removing the defective concrete section and reconstructing at no expense to the Owner.

2. Variation from plumb for lines and surface of walls and arises: a. In any 10' length: 1/8". b. Maximum for entire length: 1/2". c. Deflection of facing materials between studs, as well as deflection of

studs and walers, shall not exceed 0.0025 times their spans.

B. Forms: 1. Design, engineering and construction of the forms shall be the Contractor's

responsibility.



2. Construct forms to shape, lines and dimensions of architectural concrete members using extruded aluminum walers and studs. Deflection of facing materials between studs, as well as deflection of studs and walers, shall not exceed 0.0025 times their spans. Due to additional placing and consolidating requirements for architectural concrete take particular care in the choice of formwork design in order to eliminate bulges, offsets, and other defects. Comply with the applicable requirements of ACI 303R, Chapter 4. a. Prior to pouring concrete permit the Architect to inspect forms where any

incised lettering occurs. Make any adjustments required to satisfy the Architect. Finished work shall comply with the reviewed sample letter and artwork.

3. Final concrete surfaces shall conform to tolerances specified previously. a. All form joints and pour joints shall be as indicated on approved shop

drawings. Do not modify locations of these joints without the Architect's approval.

4. Fasteners shall be non-corrosive nails or screws. Reveal strips where indicated shall be screw applied with heads countersunk and filled.

5. All form joints shall be tightly butted, gasketed, and/or sealed with approved means so that they will withstand the full concrete hydraulic pressures and will remain watertight. Form ties shall be located in a uniform pattern as indicated on the Drawings and as approved by the Architect. Make every effort, including using high-strength ties and additional bracing, to locate form ties as shown on the Drawings. If locations shown are not adequate to maintain form integrity, propose alternate patterns for the Architect's approval. Use stripping gaskets at junctions of forms to facilitate stripping forms without damage to the concrete. a. Ties shall be designed and installed so as to prevent the loss of paste or

moisture. All snapties left in the concrete shall be minimum of 1-1/2" back from the concrete surface. Tie system shall not leak. Form tie bolts shall be greased using silicone grease to facilitate removal without spalling of the concrete. Ties shall be removed with a special tool as recommended by the manufacturer.

6. Forms shall be tight to prevent concrete loss and visible joints; chamfer strips are not allowed. Provide girts and blocking behind all butt joints not backed. All exterior positive corners shall be formed square and sealed with approved form gaskets.

7. Provide openings in architectural concrete where indicated on the Drawings. Locate temporary openings in forms for cleaning and inspecting on side of forms facing interior of building at least conspicuous locations possible.

8. Formwork shall be cambered to compensate for construction deflections plus deadload deflections. The Contractor shall confer with the Engineer to determine the correct amount.

9. Construction joints: Locate only where specifically shown on the Drawings, unless otherwise specifically approved by the Architect.

10. A form release agent approved by satisfactory results on the mock-up shall be applied before each use of the forms. All forms shall be cleaned of loose material with compressed air, and thoroughly wetted just before concrete placement. Have sufficient equipment available to allow for these procedures as they will be strictly enforced.

C. Concrete Reinforcement: 1. Complying with applicable requirements of ACI 303R, Chapter 5.



D. Concrete Placing and Consolidation: 1. General:

a. All concrete shall be from one batch plant. Clean trucks, dedicated silos.

b. Concrete slump: As specified in Section 03300. c. Place no concrete before forms are complete, reinforcement secured in

place, all built-in items in place, form ties at construction joints tightened and the work inspected by the Architect.

d. Keep a record of time and date of placing of concrete in each portion of the building for Architect's inspection.

e. Carry on concreting as a continuous operation until each section has been completed. Concrete shall be poured in vertical lifts coinciding with major horizontal architectural features.

f. Provide the Architect with 48 hours notice before concrete is to be placed.

g. Provide such equipment and employ only those methods and arrangements of equipment which will reduce a minimum separation of coarse aggregate from the concrete. Select the equipment for its ability to handle concrete of the lowest slump that can be consolidated by means of vibration after placement.

2. Placement in accordance with Chapter 6, ACI 304 and Chapter 7, ACI 303R: a. Concrete shall be deposited as nearly as practicable directly in its final

position and shall not be caused to flow such that the lateral movement will cause segregation of the coarse aggregate mortar or water from the concrete mass.

b. Placement methods: 1) Pumping will only be accepted if the pumping system is

compatible with the accepted architectural concrete mix and the written approval of the Architect for each instance of placement pumping.

2) Placing concrete with overhead cranes with buckets, conveyors and buggies, will generally be acceptable.

c. Retempering of mix which has partially set is prohibited. Place all concrete in forms not more than 1-1/2 hours after water is added to the mixture. Place no concrete when sun, wind, heat or limitations of provided facilities will prevent proper curing.

d. Clean transporting and handling equipment at frequent intervals and thoroughly flush with water before and after each day's run. Discharge of wash water into forms or pump hopper is not permitted.

e. When depositing in vertical sections greater than 5' deep, a tremie shall be placed between the reinforcing steel to a depth so that the freefall of concrete will not exceed 5'.

f. Deposit concrete vertically in its final position. Horizontal layers deeper than 48" will not be permitted. Placing procedures permitting escape of mortar or the flow of concrete itself not permitted. No vertical pour joints (gang joints) permitted.

g. Take special care to completely fill forms by depositing as near final position as possible, and to force concrete under and around reinforce-ment without displacement. After deposited concrete has taken initial set, exercise care to avoid jarring forms or placing strain on ends of pro-jecting reinforcement.

h. Pour joints shall occur only at locations indicated on approved shop



drawings. 3. Consolidation:

a. Concrete shall be compacted thoroughly be vibrating to produce dense, homogenous mass without voids or pockets. Vibrators shall be placed in accordance with Chapter 7, ACI 303R. Vibrating techniques shall assure that the matrix is thoroughly and uniformly distributed around all coarse aggregate, including form faces, thereby providing uniform dense concrete throughout entire concrete volume. Vibration shall not be used as a means of transporting concrete. Following top-out levelling concrete shall be allowed to set for 10 to 15 minutes, and shall then be given a final vibration.

b. In the event during placement operation there is a delay of more than 15 minutes, manipulate previous lift with vibrators just prior to placement of fresh concrete.

E. Stripping, Curing and Cleaning: 1. Form removal: Do not remove forms until concrete has attained sufficient

strength to permit removal with safety. 2. Design forms to permit their removal without damaging architectural concrete.

Do not pry against exposed concrete surfaces when removing the forms.

F. Curing: 1. Use no curing method which could impair the appearance of architectural

concrete surfaces. 2. Film forming liquid curing compounds shall not be used for concrete that will be

dyed or stained. Use unwrinkled non-staining, high quality curing paper for concrete receiving this type of finish, except where concrete is sandblasted prior to application of dye or stain.

3. Curing material used shall restrict the loss of moisture to not more than 0.055 grams per square centimeter of surface.

4. All concrete shall be cured for a period of not less than 14 days, however some colors may require 30 to 60 days (see each manufacturer’s printed requirements). During this curing period no part of the concrete shall be permitted to become dry even for a short while. The curing medium shall be applied so as to prevent checking and cracking of the surface of the concrete immediately after placing and it shall be maintained so as to prevent loss of water from the concrete for the duration of the entire curing period. Fresh concrete shall be protected from heavy rains, flowing water and mechanical injury.

5. Methods of curing: If cured with water, concrete shall be kept wet by mechanical sprinklers or by any other approved method which will keep the surfaces continuously wet with "fresh" water.

6. The temperature of the concrete shall not be allowed to fall below 50 deg. F (10 deg. C) during the curing period.

G. Finishes for Formed Architectural Concrete, including unformed tops of formed concrete work: Formed architectural concrete finishes, including the following: 1. Comply with the requirements of ACI 303R, as applicable. Formed concrete

shall have a sacked finish, as approved by the Architect. a. Concrete surfaces that will receive the water feature waterproofing

specified in Section 07140 shall be finished as specified in that Section.



3.3 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FLATWORK

A. Screed all slabs, for whatever finish, to true levels or slopes, work surfaces only to the degree required to produce the desired finish in compliance with applicable ACI 301 and ACI A303R requirements. Carefully finish all joints and edges with proper tools, unless otherwise specified.

B. Tolerances for architectural concrete flatwork: Conform with applicable requirements of ACI 117 and ASTM E1155. 1. The finished plane shall not vary more than 1/8-inch from the elevation

indicated. 2. Very Flat Tolerance (Interior slab on grade only): FF 50, FL30. True plane with

maximum variation of 1/8-inch in 10 feet when measured with a 10-foot straightedge placed anywhere on the slab in any direction.

C. Defective Work: Remove and replace when directed by the Architect, at no additional cost to the Owner.

D. Curing: 1. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and excessively hot or

cold temperatures; maintain minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for necessary hydration time and proper relatively constant temperature for necessary hydration time and proper hardening of concrete.

2. Duration of Curing: In addition to the initial overnight curing, continue final curing operations until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof (not necessarily consecutive) occurs, during which time the temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is above 50 degrees F, equals 14 days. If high-early strength concrete has been used, continue final curing operation for 3 days total time, calculated as before. Take care to prevent rapid drying at the end of the curing period. If early removal of forms is approved and forms are removed during the curing period, apply one of the a curing method approved for this use and which will not interfere with subsequent finishing materials and methods.

3. Colored concrete shall be curing for number of days recommened by the coloring materials manufacturer for the conditions of use.

E. Architectural Concrete Flatwork finishes, inlcuding the following: 1. Smooth sand float finish, as approved by the Architect. Finish shall comply with

Code coefficient of friction requirements for each type of surface. a. Concrete surfaces that will receive the water feature waterproofing

specified in Section 07140 shall be finished as specified in that Section.

F. Concrete sealers: As specified in Section 07190.

3.4 PROTECTING

A. Protecting: 1. Protect architectural concrete from any damage by the elements and

defacement of any nature during construction operations. 2. All corners and surfaces subject to possible damage shall be suitably protected

with boards or hoardings. 3. Keep all exposed concrete free from laitance caused by spillage, leaking forms

or other contaminants. In no event shall laitance be allowed to penetrate, stain



or harden on surfaces. 3.5 REPAIRS

A. General: 1. No repairs shall be performed prior to approval by Architect. 2. Areas to be patched shall be approved by the Architect and shall not exceed 2

square feet for each 1,000 square feet of surface area, and shall be widely dispersed. Patches shall match the surrounding area. Architectural concrete requiring repair in excess of above standard is subject to rejection by the Architect and subsequent removal and replacement with new work at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Before commencing any patching, the Contractor shall confirm patching procedures with the Architect, and establish by trial mix the formula for the patching of the finish. The Contractor shall demonstrate his patching techniques on the mockup.

4. The following are the key steps to making a patch in architectural concrete: a. Prepare the area to be patched. This should include achieving the

desired finish in the surrounding area. Remove loose particles and chip out part of the sound concrete to avoid feather edge patches.

b. Proportion the batch mix by weight according to the same proportions as used in the con-crete mix. This should be based on tests to determine what is required to match the finished surface.

c. Apply a coat of bonding material to the root of the patch being careful to avoid dripping on any surface to be exposed.

d. Fill in the patch and brush it out to match the surrounding area. e. Cure the patch. f. Clean the patched area to remove laitance and match the surrounding

area.

B. Patching: 1. It is the intent of these specifications that no patching of architectural concrete

will be required. In the event that remedial work is required, it shall consist of patching with the approved patching mortar. Only areas designated by the Architect shall be patched.

2. Patch samples: Prepare patch samples for Architect’s approval at areas designated by Architect.

3. Patching method: a. Usual good practices, i.e., cutting out of loose honeycombs, squaring off

edges, etc., will be followed during preparation. Soak the area to be patched with water. Placing a stiff, color matching mortar, in the void, striking flush with the wood float and texturing as required for the finish designated.

b. Repair mortar patch mix shall be especially formulated matching mortar. It shall be nonshrink and have the same 28 day strength as the architectural concrete.

c. The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. A mixture of one part bonding agent, to four parts water shall be used as mixing water.



d. The patch mix shall be consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface to permit initial shrinkage. The patch shall be left undisturbed for at least one hour before being finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for seven days.

4. No grinding shall be permitted without prior written approval of the Architect. 3.6 PROTECTING/CLEANING

A. Protect architectural concrete from discoloration. Diaper all equipment being used on architectural concrete surfaces. Do not cut metals on architectural concrete surfaces.

3.7 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE

A. As specified in the project concrete specifications, with the added provision that architectural concrete that has surface defects including color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning, concrete pour lines, and other defects that cannot be satisfactorily repaired to the Architect's satisfaction, will be considered defective, and shall be replaced with satisfactory architectural concrete at no additional cost to the Owner.

END OF SECTION


LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION SYSTEM 32 84 00 - 1

SECTION 32 84 00 - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings that the finished system is complete in every respect and shall be ready for operation satisfactory to the Owner.

B. The work shall include all materials, labor, services, transportation, and equipment necessary to perform the work as indicated on the drawings, in these specifications, and as necessary to complete the contract.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS

A. Due to the scale of the drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc. which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc. as may be required to meet such conditions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features.

B. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and installed whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications. When an item is shown on the plans but not shown on the specifications or vice versa, it shall be deemed to be as shown on both. The Landscape Architect shall have final authority for clarification.

C. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engineering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Landscape Architect as soon as detected. In the event this notification is not performed, the Irrigation Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revision necessary.


A. Provide at least one English speaking person who shall be present at all times during execution of this portion of the work and who shall be thoroughly familiar with the type of materials being installed and the manufacturer's recommended methods of installation and who shall direct all work performed under this section.

B. Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturer of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications.

C. All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is



required by the above rules and regulations, the provisions of these specifications and drawings shall take precedence.

D. All materials supplied for this project shall be new and free from any defects. All defective materials shall be replaced immediately at no additional cost to Owner.

E. The Contractor shall secure the required licenses and permits including payments of charges and fees, give required notices to public authorities, verify permits secured or arrangements made by others affecting the work of this section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Water Pressure Test 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from

suppliers or delivered to the job site, submit to the Owner a written verification of the existing water pressure on the project at each of the points of connection shown.

2. The water pressure test shall be performed to measure the dynamic water pressure at the point of connection at the maximum flow rate of the proposed irrigation system as shown on the point of connection note. Dynamic water pressure is when water is flowing through the point of connection. Static water pressure readings, water is not flowing, are not acceptable.

3. Written dynamic water pressure test confirmation shall be made on the contractor’s letterhead and include the flow rate during the test, the recorded water pressure, the date of the test and the time of the test.

B. Material List: 1. After award of contract and before any irrigation system materials are ordered from

suppliers or delivered to the job site, submit to the Owner a complete list of all irrigation system materials, or processes proposed to be furnished and installed as part of this contract.

2. The submittals materials list shall include the following information: a. A title sheet with the job name, the contractor’s name, contractor’s address and

telephone number, submittal date and submittal number. b. An index sheet showing the item number (i.e. 1,2,3, etc.); an item description (i.e.

sprinkler head); the manufacturer’s name (i.e. Hunter Industries); the item model number (i.e. I-40-ADV/36V); and the page(s) in the submittal set that contain the catalog cuts.

c. The catalog cuts shall be one or two pages copied from the most recent manufacturer’s catalog that indicate the product submitted. Do not submit parts lists, exploded diagrams, price lists or other extra information.

d. The catalog cuts shall clearly indicate the manufacturer’s name and the item model number. The item model number, all specified options and specified sizes shall be circled on the catalog cuts.

e. Submittals for equipment indicated on the legend without manufacturer names, or “as approved”, shall contain the manufacturer, Class or Schedule, ASTM numbers and/or other certifications as indicated in these specifications.

3. Submittal materials list format requirements: a. Submittals shall be provided as one complete package for the project. Multiple

partial submittals will not be reviewed. b. Submittal package shall be stapled or bound in such a way as to allow for

disassembly for review processing. Submittals shall not have tabs, tab sheets, spiral binding, or any other type of binding that will interfere with automated copying of submittals.



c. Submittal package shall have all pages numbered in the lower right hand corner. Page numbers shall correspond with submittal index.

d. Re-submitted packages must be revised to include only the equipment being re-submitted. Equipment previously reviewed and accepted shall not be re-submitted in the materials list/index sheet or in the catalog cut sheet package.

C. Substitutions: If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative for approval. 1. Provide a written statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. 2. Provide catalog cut sheets, technical data, and performance information for each

substitute item. 3. Provide in writing the difference in installed price if the item is accepted.

D. The Landscape Architect or Owner’s authorized representative will allow no substitutions without prior written acceptance

E. No substitutions of pump manufacturers, distributors or assemblies will be accepted.

F. Manufacturer's warranties shall not relieve the Contractor of his liability under the guarantee. Such warranties shall only supplement the guarantee.

G. The Landscape Architect or Owner’s authorized representative will not review the submittal package unless provided in the format described above.

1.5 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the locations, size and detail of points of connection provided as the source of water, and electrical supply connection to the irrigation system.

B. Irrigation design is based on the available static water pressure shown on the drawings. Contractor shall verify static water on the project prior to the start of construction. Should a discrepancy exist, notify the Landscape Architect and Owner's authorized representative prior to beginning construction.

C. Prior to cutting into the soil, the Contractor shall locate all cables, conduits, sewer septic tanks, and other utilities as are commonly encountered underground and he shall take proper precautions not to damage or disturb such improvements. If a conflict exists between such obstacles and the proposed work, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Landscape Architect and Owner who will arrange for relocations. The Contractor will proceed in the same manner if a rock layer or any other such conditions are encountered.

D. The Contractor shall protect all existing utilities and features to remain on and adjacent to the project site during construction. Contractor shall repair, at his own cost; all damage resulting from his operations or negligence.

E. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate with the General Contractor for installation of required sleeving as shown on the plans prior to paving operations.

F. The Contractor shall verify and be familiar with the existing irrigation systems in areas adjacent to and within the Project area of work.



G. The Contractor shall protect all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, from damage due to his operations.

H. Contractor shall notify Owner’s Representative if any existing system is temporarily shut off, capped or modified. Provide 48-hour notice, prior to turning off or modifying any existing irrigation system.

I. The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing irrigation systems, in areas adjacent to and within the project area of work, damaged by the construction of this project. Adjacent irrigation systems shall be made completely operational and provide complete coverage of the existing landscaped areas. All repairs shall be complete to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

J. The contractor shall provide bore holes under any existing pavement or paving encountered for the required lateral, mainline and low voltage control wire sleeving. Bore holes under 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be made with a BulletMole® underground boring tool as manufactured by Dimension Tools, LLC (Contact telephone number (888)-650-5554 or at www.bulletmole.com). Bore holes larger than 2 inches in diameter shall be made with an approved mechanical boring tool. No air jacking or hydraulic boring of any kind shall be allowed.

1.6 INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall permit the Landscape Architect and Owner's authorized representative to visit and inspect at all times any part of the work and shall provide safe access for such visits.

B. Where the specifications require work to be tested by the Contractor, it shall not be covered over until accepted by the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and/or governing agencies. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing. Should any work be covered without testing or acceptance, it shall be, if so ordered, uncovered at the Contractor's expense.

C. Inspections will be required for the following at a minimum: 1. Pre-construction meeting. 2. System layout. 3. Pressure test of irrigation mainline (Four hours at 125 PSI or 120% of static water

pressure, whichever is greater.) Mainline pressure loss during test shall not exceed 2 PSI.

4. Coverage test of irrigation system. Test shall be performed prior to any planting. 5. Final inspection prior to start of maintenance period. 6. Final acceptance prior to turnover.

D. Site observations and testing will not commence without the field record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor. Record drawings must be complete and up to date for each site visit.

E. Work that fails testing and is not accepted will be retested. Hourly rates and expenses of the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies for re-inspection or retesting will be paid by the Irrigation Contractor at no additional expense to Owner.



1.7 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Use all means necessary to protect irrigation system materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installation work and materials of all other trades. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the acceptance of the Landscape Architect and Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing plastic pipe and fittings under cover until ready to install. Transport plastic pipe only on a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lay flat to avoid undue bending and concentrated external load.

1.8 CLEANUP AND DISPOSAL

A. Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris will not be permitted. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of rubbish and debris generated by his work and workmen at frequent intervals or when ordered to do so by the Owner's authorized representative.

B. At the time of completion the entire site will be cleared of tools, equipment, rubbish and debris which shall be disposed of off-site in a legal disposal area.

1.9 TURNOVER ITEMS

A. Record Drawings: 1. Record accurately on one set of drawings all changes in the work constituting

departures from the original contract drawings and the actual final installed locations of all required components as shown below.

2. The record drawings shall be prepared to the satisfaction of the Owner. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative.

3. All record drawings shall be prepared using AutoCAD 2017 drafting software and the original irrigation drawings as a base. No manual drafted record drawings shall be acceptable. The Contractor may obtain digital base files from the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative.

4. If the Contractor is unable to provide the AutoCAD drafting necessary for the record drawings the irrigation designer does provide record drawing drafting as a separate service.

5. Prior to final inspection of work, submit record drawings plotted onto vellum sheets for review by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative. After acceptance by the Landscape Architect, City Inspector or Owner’s authorized representative re-plot the record drawings onto reproducible Mylar sheets. The Contractor shall also provide record drawing information on a digital AutoCAD Release 2017 drawing file. All digital files shall be provided on a compact disc (CD) clearly marked with the project name, file descriptions and date. a. Record drawing information and dimensions shall be collected on a day-to-day

basis during the installation of the pressure mainline to fully indicate all routing locations and pipe depths. Locations for all other irrigation equipment shall be collected prior to the final inspection of the work.

b. Two dimensions from two permanent points of reference such as buildings, sidewalks, curbs, streetlights, hydrants, etc. shall be shown for each piece of irrigation equipment shown below. Where multiple components are installed with no reasonable reference point between the components, dimensioning may be



made to the irrigation equipment. All irrigation symbols shall be clearly shown matching the irrigation legend for the drawings. All lettering on the record drawings shall be minimum 1/8 inch in size.

6. Show locations and depths of the following items: a. Point of connection (including water POC, backflow devices, master control

valves, flow sensors, etc.) b. Routing of sprinkler pressure main lines (dimensions shown at a maximum of 100

feet along routing) c. Isolation valves d. Automatic remote control valves (indicate station number and size) e. Quick coupling valves f. Drip air relief and flush valves g. Routing of control wires where separate from irrigation mainline h. Irrigation controllers (indicate controller number and station count) i. Related equipment (as may be directed)

B. Controller Charts: 1. Provide one controller chart for each automatic controller. Chart shall show the area

covered by the particular controller. The areas covered by the individual control valves shall be indicated using colored highlighter pens. A minimum of six individual colors shall be used for the controller chart unless less than six control valves are indicated.

2. Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative must approve record drawings before controller charts are prepared.

3. The chart is to be a reduced copy of the actual "record" drawing. In the event the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to a readable size.

4. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically sealed between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils in thickness.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 1. Two individually bound copies of operation and maintenance manuals shall be delivered

to the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative at least 10 calendar days prior to final inspection. The manuals shall describe the material installed and the proper operation of the system.

2. Each complete, bound manual shall include the following information: 3. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, duration of guarantee

period, list of equipment including names and addresses of local manufacturer representatives. a. Operating and maintenance instructions for all equipment. b. Spare parts lists and related manufacturer information for all equipment.

D. Equipment: 1. Supply as a part of this contract the following items:

a. Two (2) wrenches for disassembly and adjustment of each type of sprinkler head used in the irrigation system.

b. Three 30-inch sprinkler keys for manual operation of control valves. c. Two keys for each automatic controller. d. Two quick coupler keys with a 1" bronze hose bib, bent nose type with hand wheel

and two coupler lid keys. e. One valve box cover key or wrench. f. Six extra sprinkler heads of each size and type. g. For specified ball valves if required: One (1) 5-foot long valve handle, to fit the

specified ball valves.



2. The above equipment shall be turned over to Owner's authorized representative at the final inspection.

1.10 COMPLETION

A. At the time of the pre-maintenance period inspection, the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies will inspect the work, and if not accepted, will prepare a list of items to be completed by the Contractor. Punch list to be checked off by contractor and submitted to Landscape Architect or Owner’s authorized representative prior to any follow-up meeting. This checked off list to indicate that all punch list items have been completed. At the time of the post-maintenance period or final inspection the work will be re-inspected and final acceptance will be in writing by the Landscape Architect, Owner's authorized representative, and governing agencies.

B. The Owner's authorized representative shall have final authority on all portions of the work.

C. After the system has been completed, the Contractor shall instruct Owner's authorized representative in the operation and maintenance of the irrigation system and shall furnish a complete set of operating and maintenance instructions.

D. Any settling of trenches which may occur during the one-year period following acceptance shall be repaired to the Owner's satisfaction by the Contractor without any additional expense to the Owner. Repairs shall include the complete restoration of all damage to planting, paving or other improvements of any kind as a result of the work.

1.11 GUARANTEE

A. The entire sprinkler system, including all work done under this contract, shall be unconditionally guaranteed against all defects and fault of material and workmanship, including settling of backfilled areas below grade, for a period of one (1) year following the filing of the Notice of Completion.

B. Should any problem with the irrigation system be discovered within the guarantee period, it shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional expense to Owner within ten (10) calendar days of receipt of written notice from Owner. When the nature of the repairs as determined by the Owner constitute an emergency (i.e. broken pressure line) the Owner may proceed to make repairs at the Contractor's expense. Any and all damages to existing improvement resulting either from faulty materials or workmanship, or from the necessary repairs to correct same, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner by the Contractor, all at no additional cost to the Owner.

C. Guarantee shall be submitted on Contractors own letterhead as follows: GUARANTEE FOR SPRINKLER IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby guarantee that the sprinkler irrigation system we have furnished and installed is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications, ordinary wear and tear and unusual abuse, or neglect excepted. We agree to repair or replace any defective material during the period of one year from date of filing of the Notice of Completion and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within 10 calendar days following written notification by the Owner. In the event of our failure to



make such repairs or replacements within the time specified after receipt of written notice from Owner, we authorize the Owner to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense and we will pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. PROJECT NAME: PROJECT LOCATION: CONTRACTOR NAME: ADDRESS: TELEPHONE: SIGNED: DATE:

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 SUMMARY

Use only new materials of the manufacturer, size and type shown on the drawings and specifications. Materials or equipment installed or furnished that do not meet Landscape Architect's, Owner's, or governing agencies standards will be rejected and shall be removed from the site at no expense to the Owner.

2.2 PIPE

A. Pressure supply line between the water meter and the backflow prevention device shall be type K copper, one size larger than backflow device.

B. Backflow prevention assemblies, and all other above grade assemblies, shall be constructed of threaded brass pipe and threaded brass fittings the same size as the backflow device, unless otherwise directed.

C. Pressure supply lines 1 1/2 inches in diameter and smaller downstream of the backflow prevention unit shall be Schedule 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.

D. Non-pressure lines 3/4 inch in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control valve shall be SCH 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.

2.3 METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Brass pipe shall be 85 percent red brass, ANSI, IPS Standard 125 pounds, Schedule 40 screwed pipe.

B. Fittings shall be medium brass, screwed 125-pound class.

C. Copper pipe and fittings shall be Type "K" sweat soldered, or brazed as indicated on the drawings.



2.4 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe shall be marked continuously with manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, PVC type and grade, National Sanitation Foundation approval, Commercial Standards designation, and date of extrusion.

B. All plastic pipe shall be extruded of an improved PVC virgin pipe compound in accordance with ASTM D2672, ASTM D2241 or ASTM D1785.

C. All solvent weld PVC fittings shall be standard weight Schedule 40 (and Schedule 80 where specified on the irrigation detail sheet, all mainline fittings shall be Schedule 80 PVC) and shall be injection molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound. Slip PVC fittings shall be the "deep socket" bracketed type. Threaded plastic fittings shall be injection molded. All tees and ells shall be side gated. All fittings shall conform to ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466.

D. All threaded nipples shall be standard weight Schedule 80 with molded threads and shall conform to ASTM D1785.

E. All solvent cementing of plastic pipe and fittings shall be a two-step process, using primer and solvent cement applied per the manufacturer's recommendations. Cement shall be of a fluid consistency, not gel-like or ropy. Solvent cementing shall be in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855.

F. When connection is plastic to metal, female adapters shall be hand tightened, plus one turn with a strap wrench. Joint compound shall be non-lead base Teflon paste, tape, or equal.

G. All pressure mainlines installed with solvent weld PVC fittings shall be installed with concrete thrust blocking at all directional changes in the mainline routing. Concrete thrust blocking shall not be required when ductile iron fittings and mechanical restraints are specified.

2.5 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS

A. The backflow prevention unit shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

B. The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local codes.

C. The backflow enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

2.6 VALVES

A. Ball Valves: 1. Ball valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings. 2. All ball valves shall have a minimum working pressure of not less than 150 PSI and

shall conform to AWWA standards.

B. Quick Coupler Valves: 1. Quick coupler valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the

drawings.



2. Quick coupler valves shall be brass with a wall thickness guaranteed to withstand normal working pressure of 150 psi without leakage. Valves shall have 1” female threads opening at base, with two-piece body. Valves to be operated only with a coupler key, designed for that purpose. Coupler key is inserted into valve and a positive, watertight connection shall be made between the coupler key and valve.

C. Automatic Control Valves: 1. Automatic control valves shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the

drawings. 2. Automatic control valves shall be electrically operated. 3. Provide Christy's valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number.

2.7 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be fabricated from a durable, weather-resistant plastic material resistant to sunlight and chemical action of soils.

B. The valve box cover shall be green in color and secured with a hidden latch mechanism or bolts.

C. The cover and box shall be capable of sustaining a load of 1,500 pounds.

D. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box.

E. The plastic irrigation valve box cover shall be an overlapping type.

F. Automatic control valve, master valve, and flow sensor boxes shall be 17"x11"x12" ‘nominal’ rectangular size. Valve box covers shall be marked "RCV" with the valve identification number, or “MV”, “FS” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters / numbers.

G. Drip air relief valve boxes shall be 6" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with “ARV” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters.

H. Quick coupler and ball valve boxes shall be 10" circular size. Valve box covers shall be marked with "QCV" or “BV” "heat branded" onto the cover in 1-1/4 inch high letters.

2.8 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER

A. Automatic controller shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

B. Controller enclosure shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

C. Controller shall be grounded according to local codes using equipment of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings; or as required by local codes and ordinances.

2.9 ELECTRICAL

A. All electrical equipment shall be NEMA Type 3, waterproofed for exterior installations.

B. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances.



2.10 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRING

A. Remote control wire shall be direct-burial AWG-UF type, size as indicated on the drawings, and in no case smaller than 14 gauge.

B. Remote control wire shall be 14 AWG solid core twisted pair, type as indicated on the irrigation drawings.

C. Connections shall of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

D. Common wires shall be white in color. Control wires shall be red (where two or more controllers are used, the control wires shall be a different color for each controller. These colors shall be noted on the "Record Drawings" plans located on controller door).

E. Ground wires shall be green in color or bare copper and in no case smaller than 6 gauge.

2.11 IRRIGATION HEADS AND DRIP EMITTERS AND INLINE DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be of the manufacturer, size, type, with radius of throw, operating pressure, and discharge rate indicated on the drawings.

B. Irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be used as indicated on the drawings.

2.12 DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT

Drip tubing equipment such as flush valves, air relief valves, wye strainers and pressure regulators shall be of the manufacturer, size, and type indicated on the drawings.

2.13 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Landscape Fabric: 1. Landscape fabric for valve box assemblies shall be 5.0- oz. weight woven

polypropylene weed barrier. Landscape fabric shall have a burst strength of 225 PSI, a puncture strength of 60 lbs. and capable of water flow of 12 gallons per minute per square foot.

2. Type: DeWitt Pro 5 Weed Barrier or approved equal.

B. Equipment such as flow sensors, rain sensors, flush valves, air relief valves, wye strainers, and master valves shall be of the manufacturer, size and type indicated on the drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Inspections: 1. Prior to all work of this section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades

and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

2. Verify that irrigation system may be installed in strict accordance with all pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, the referenced standards, and the manufacturer's recommendations.



B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Landscape Architect or Owner's

authorized representative. 2. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all discrepancies have

been resolved.

C. Grades: 1. Before starting work, carefully check all grades to determine that work may safely

proceed, keeping within the specified material depths with respect to finish grade. 2. Final grades shall be accepted by the Engineer before work on this section will be

allowed to begin.

D. Field Measurements: 1. Make all necessary measurements in the field to ensure precise fit of items in

accordance with the original design. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all irrigation materials with all other work.

2. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions prior to proceeding with work under this section.

3. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities, which are caused by his operations or neglect.

E. Diagrammatic Intent: The drawings are essentially diagrammatic. The size and location of equipment and fixtures are drawn to scale where possible. Provide offsets in piping and changes in equipment locations as necessary to conform with structures and to avoid obstructions or conflicts with other work at no additional expense to Owner.

F. Layout: 1. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and

location of sprinkler heads, valves, backflow preventer, and automatic controller. 2. Layout irrigation system and make minor adjustments required due to differences

between site and drawings. Where piping is shown on drawings under paved areas, but running parallel and adjacent to planted areas, install the piping in the planted areas.

G. Water Supply: Connections to, or the installation of, the water supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings. Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to Owner.

H. Electrical Service: 1. Connections to the electrical supply shall be at the locations shown on the drawings.

Minor changes caused by actual site conditions shall be made at no additional expense to Owner.

2. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. Electrical power source to controller locations shall be provided by others.

3. Contractor shall make electrical connections to the irrigation controller. 230-volt single-phase electrical power source to pump assembly location shall be provided by others per NEC codes.



3.2 TRENCHING

A. Excavations shall be straight with vertical sides, even grade, and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on drawings to the depths below finished grade and as noted. Where lines occur under paved area, these dimensions shall be considered below subgrade.

B. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches on pressure supply lines 2 ½ inches and smaller.

C. Provide minimum cover of 18 inches for control wires within planters.

D. Provide minimum cover of 24 inches for control wires within sleeves below paving.

E. Provide minimum cover of 36 inches on pressure supply lines under vehicular travel ways.

F. Provide minimum cover of 12 inches for non-pressure lines.

G. Pipes installed in a common trench shall have a 4-inch minimum space between pipes.

3.3 BACKFILLING

A. Backfill material on all lines shall be the same as adjacent soil free of debris, litter, and rocks over 1/2 inches in diameter.

B. Backfill shall be tamped in 4-inch layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides for the full width of the trench and the full length of the pipe. Backfill materials shall be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction, free of voids. Backfill shall be compacted to dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil and shall conform to adjacent grades.

C. Flooding in lieu of tamping is not allowed.

D. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact backfill.

E. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 4 inches over and under all piping under paved areas.

3.4 PIPING

A. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving. No hydraulic driving is permitted under asphalt pavement.

B. Cutting or breaking of existing pavement is not permitted.

C. Carefully inspect all pipe and fittings before installation, removing dirt, scale, burrs, and reaming. Install pipe with all markings up for visual inspection and verification.

D. Remove all dented and damaged pipe sections.

E. All lines shall have a minimum clearance of 4 inches from each other and 12 inches from lines of other trades.

F. Parallel lines shall not be installed directly over each other.



G. In solvent welding, use only the specified primer and solvent cement and make all joints in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommended methods including wiping all excess solvent from each weld. Allow solvent welds at least 15 minutes setup time before moving or handling and 24 hours curing time before filling.

H. PVC pipe shall be installed in a manner, which will provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by the pipe manufacturer.

I. Center load all plastic pipe prior to pressure testing.

J. All threaded plastic-to-plastic connections shall be assembled using Teflon tape or Teflon paste.

K. For plastic-to-metal connections, work the metal connections first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope an all threaded plastic-to-metal connections, except where noted otherwise. All plastic-to-metal connections shall be made with plastic male adapters.

3.5 CONTROLLER

A. The exact location of the controller shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative before installation. The electrical service shall be coordinated with this location.

B. The Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for the final electrical hook up to the irrigation controller.

C. The irrigation system shall be programmed to operate during the periods of minimal use of the design area.

3.6 CONTROL WIRING

A. Low voltage control wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as the pressure supply lines whenever possible.

B. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together in a bundle at intervals of 10 feet. Bundle shall be secured to the mainline with tape at intervals of 20 feet.

C. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an 18-inch service loop at each connection.

D. An expansion loop of 12 inches shall be provided at each wire connection and/or directional change, and one of 24 inches shall be provided at each remote control valve.

E. A continuous run of wire shall be used between a controller and each remote control valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval.

3.7 VALVES

A. Automatic control valves, quick coupler, and ball valves are to be installed in the approximate locations indicated on the drawings.

B. Valve shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible.



C. Install all valves as indicated in the detail drawings.

D. Valves to be installed in valve boxes shall be installed one valve per box.

E. Provide valve ID tags for each remote control valve with valve number.

3.8 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes shall be installed in shrub areas whenever possible.

B. Each valve box shall be installed on a foundation of 3/4 inch gravel backfill, 3 cubic feet minimum. Valve boxes shall be installed with their tops 1/2 inch above the surface of surrounding finish grade in lawn areas and 2 inches above finish grade in ground cover areas.

3.9 IRRIGATION HEADS DRIP EMITTERS AND INLINE DRIP TUBING

A. Irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be installed as indicated on the drawings.

B. Spacing of heads and inline drip tubing shall not exceed maximum indicated on the drawings.

C. Riser nipples shall be of the same size as the riser opening in the sprinkler body.

3.10 BACKFLOW PREVENTION UNITS

A. Backflow Prevention Units shall be installed as indicated on the drawings. The backflow prevention unit shall be installed in accordance with the requirements set forth by local codes.

B. The exact location of the backflow device shall be approved by the Landscape Architect or owner's authorized representative before installation.

C. The contractor shall be responsible for the testing and certification of the backflow device for proper operation. Testing and certification shall be performed by a state qualified backflow tester.

3.11 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

A. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail drawings or specifications, using best standard practices.

B. Quick coupler valves shall be set approximately 18 inches from walks, curbs, header boards, or paved areas where applicable.

C. Install devices such as rain sensors, flush valves, and air relief valves, master valves and flow sensors as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer.

3.12 FLUSHING THE SYSTEM

A. Prior to installation of irrigation heads, the valves shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the lines and risers.

B. Irrigation heads shall be installed after flushing the system has been completed.



3.13 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM

A. Contractor shall adjust valves, align heads, and check the coverage of each system prior to coverage test.

B. If it is determined by the Landscape Architect or Owner's authorized representative that additional adjustments or nozzle changes will be required to provide proper coverage, all necessary changes or adjustments shall be made prior to any planting.

C. The entire system shall be operating properly before any planting operations commence.

D. Automatic control valves are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer.

3.14 TESTING AND OBSERVATION

A. Do not allow or cause any of the work of this section to be covered up or enclosed until it has been observed, tested and accepted by the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies.

B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for notifying the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies, a minimum of 48 hours in advance, where and when the work is ready for testing.

C. When the sprinkler system is completed, the Contractor shall perform a coverage test of each system in its entirety to determine if the water coverage for the planted areas is complete and adequate in the presence of the Landscape Architect.

D. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and perform all work required to correct any inadequacies of coverage due to deviations from the plans, or where the system has been willfully installed as indicated on the drawings when it is obviously inadequate, without bringing this to the attention of the Landscape Architect. This test shall be accepted by the Landscape Architect and accomplished before starting any planting.

E. Areas to be maintained for the formal maintenance period shall start maintenance at the same time, as directed by the Landscape Architect, Owner, and governing agencies. Partial areas will not be released into maintenance prior to completion of items listed in the pre-maintenance review. The maintenance period may not be phased.

F. If, after the maintenance review, the irrigation systems are not accepted by the Landscape Architect, the contractor shall reimburse the Architect for additional site visits, or additional time required to review work. All additional time will be billed at the Architect’s hourly rate and will be paid for by the contractor at no additional cost to the owner.

G. Final inspection will not commence without record drawings as prepared by the Irrigation Contractor.

3.15 MAINTENANCE

During the maintenance period the Contractor shall adjust and maintain the irrigation system in a fully operational condition providing complete irrigation coverage to all intended plantings.



3.16 COMPLETION CLEANING

Clean up shall be made as each portion of the work progresses. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site, all walks and paving shall be swept, and any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions.

END OF SECTION


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 1

SECTION 32 93 00 - LANDSCAPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work includes all services, labor, materials, transportation and equipment necessary to perform the work indicated on the Drawings and as specified.

B. Reference ANSI A300 (Best Management Practices)

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit list of soil amendments, fertilizers, plant materials, topsoil, with quantities of each, along with the source of the supplier and results of (2) phases of agronomy tests taken both prior to amending soil and after soil has been amended per 1.9. Planting recommendations may be revised based on soil tests.

B. Plants shall be subject to observation and preliminary acceptance by owner’s representative at place of growth or upon delivery to job site. Such observation shall not impair the right of observation and rejection during progress of the work. Tagging of plant material is for conformance w/ design intent only, and does not constitute the landscape architect’s approval of plant materials in regards to their health. The health and vigor of plant material is solely the responsibility of the contractor.

C. Submit written reports by certified arborists for all trees to be planted on site, that such trees meet the criteria of arboricultural health, as established by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA). Arboricultural reports shall be provided at cost of Landscape Contractor.

D. Submit documentation to the owner’s representative within 75 calendar days of award of contract to the General Contractor that all plant material is available. The contractor shall be responsible for procuring all the material listed on the planting legends.

1.3 GUARANTEES AND REPLACEMENTS

A. Plant Materials: Shrubs shall be guaranteed to remain healthy and vigorously growing for one year. Groundcovers shall be guaranteed to remain healthy and vigorously growing for 6 months.

B. Trees: See above

C. Plant Replacement: Plants found to be dead or not in a vigorous condition, or if root balls have been damaged, within the Installation, Maintenance and Guarantee Periods, shall be replaced within fourteen (14) days from date of discovery. Contractor shall include, at his expense, a timely written diagnosis of plant health by a certified Arborist, should a dispute arise. Arborist's report shall indicate reason for lack of vigor, potential remedies, if any, and estimate of time required to regain vigor and specified size.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 2

D. Plant Replacement: Plants used for replacement shall be same kind and size as specified and shall be furnished, planted and fertilized as originally specified. Cost of all repair work to existing improvements damaged during replacements shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.4 SITE OBSERVATION

A. Site observations herein specified shall be made by the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) working days notice before Observation is required.

B. Site observation will be required for the following parts of the work: 1. Pre-Job Meeting: Explain Owner Representative’s role to Contractor. 2. Incorporation of soil conditioning and fertilizing into the soil, after approval of first

soil report. 3. Application of pre-emergent herbicide. 4. Soil preparation for approval to plant, after approval of second soils report. 5. Upon the completion of grading prior to planting. 6. Irrigation coverage test 7. Confirmation of corrected finish grades. 8. Approval of samples of plant materials. 9. Approval of tree & shrub locations for planting, prior to planting holes being

excavated. 10. Plant installation: Check size of planting holes and backfill mix. 11. Observation after completion of planting, and all other indicated or specified

work. Written approval to commence maintenance period by client representative is required and shall establish beginning of the maintenance period.

12. Maintenance observation after thirty (30) days to coincide with fertilizer application.

13. Final Observation at the completion of the ninety (90) day Maintenance Period. This observation shall establish the beginning date for the one (1) year guarantee of all trees.

C. Upon completion of the Final Observation and the work of this section, the Contractor will be notified in writing: (1) whether the work is acceptable; (2) of any requirements necessary for completion and acceptance.

D. Contractor shall be on the site at the time of each observation. Contractor shall speak English.

E. No site visits shall be made unless all items in previous observation reports are either completed or remedied, unless owner has waived in writing such compliance. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursement to the Client for Architect’s time incurred in making untimely site visits at Architect’s current billing rates.

F. Construction observation visits shall be made in proper sequence of the installation of the work. No visits will be made until all soil submittals have been made and approved. Out of sequence construction visits shall make the Landscape Contractor responsible for reimbursement of the Architect at current billing rates.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 3

1.5 MAINTENANCE

A. The Maintenance Period begins on the first day after all landscape work on this project is complete, checked, accepted and written approval from the Owner’s Representative is given to begin the Maintenance Period and shall continue thereafter for no less than ninety (90) continuous calendar days.

B. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all involved areas of the Contract during the progress of the work and during the Maintenance Period until the Final Acceptance of the work.

C. Regular planting maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is planted. Plants shall be kept in a healthy, growing condition and in a visually pleasing appearance by watering, pruning, mowing, rolling, trimming, edging, fertilizing, re-staking, pest and disease controlling, spraying, weeding, cleaning up and any other necessary operation of maintenance. Landscape areas shall be kept free of weeds, noxious grass and all other undesired vegetative growth and debris. All plants found to be dead or in an impaired condition shall be replaced within seven (7) days. Maintenance operations shall also include: 1. Filling and replanting of any low areas which may cause standing water. 2. Adjusting of sprinkler head height and watering pattern. 3. Filling and re-compaction of eroded areas. 4. Weekly removal of trash, litter, clippings and foreign debris.

D. The Contract completion date of the Contract Maintenance Period shall be extended when, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, improper maintenance and/or possible poor or unhealthy condition of planted material is evident at the termination of the scheduled Maintenance Period. The Contractor shall be responsible for additional maintenance of the work at no change in price until all of the work is completed and acceptable.

E. When in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, improper maintenance, possible poor or unhealthy condition of plant materials, or unestablished lawns are evident or when maintenance work is not being performed, the Contractor shall be responsible for additional maintenance of the work at no charge to the Owner until Final Completion is delivered.

F. The Contractor shall provide protection of all planting areas against traffic or other damage by erecting fencing or temporary twine immediately after planting is completed. Warning signs and barricades shall be placed in various high traffic areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor.

G. Watering by hand will be required when soil moisture is below optimum level for best plant growth or when ordered by the Owner’s Representative. Hand watering may be required when high or hot wind conditions exist, or to promote vigorous root growth.

H. Plants shall be inspected by the Contractor at least twice per week and needed maintenance shall be performed promptly.

I. At conclusion of maintenance period an observation shall be made by the Owner’s Representative, to determine the acceptability of work, including maintenance. The Contractor will be notified by the Owner’s Representative of all deficiencies revealed by


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 4

the observation before acceptance. Owner must accept all maintained areas, in writing, prior to end of maintenance period.

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with installation of underground irrigation system utilities, piping and watering heads.

1.7 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall employ, at his own expense, a registered Civil Engineer or licensed Land Surveyor to lay out the work of the project, to establish all reference points set for construction and the certification of finish grades with Civil Engineer drawings.


A. The term "Planting Area" shall mean all areas to be planted with trees, shrubs, groundcovers, seed and sod.

B. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice. California Natives are to be planted in the fall.

C. All rock, gravel and other growth or debris accumulated during construction of the project shall be removed from the site. Soil areas used for construction clean-up, washing, debris, stockpiling.

D. Conservation of Topsoil: Contractor shall identify and protect areas of arable topsoil to stockpile during construction for re-use during landscape construction activities. Top soil shall be defined as top 6” of undisturbed soil only, in accordance with these specifications. 1. Maintain the topsoil stockpile tree from debris, trash, and contamination in a

manner in which will not obstruct the natural flow of drainage. 2. Keep the sampled or tested stockpiled topsoil separate from other topsoil. 3. Keep the stockpiled topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out. 4. Procure approval of Owner or Landscape Architect for topsoil material and

storage conditions at time of the stockpile.

E. Prior to excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, locate all underground utility lines still in use and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements. In the event of a conflict between such lines and plant locations, notify the Owner’s Representative who shall arrange for the relocation of one or the other. The Contractor assumes all responsibility for making any and all repairs for damages from work as herein specified.

F. Grading, planting and soil preparation work shall be performed only during the period when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. If the moisture content of the soil should reach such a level that working it would destroy soil structure, spreading grading operations shall be suspended until the moisture content is increased or reduced to acceptable levels and the desired results are likely to be obtained.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 5

G. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions and immediately inform the Owner’s Representative of any discrepancy between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions.

H. Quantities for plant materials are shown for convenience only, and not guaranteed. Check and verify count and supply sufficient number to fulfill intent of drawings. Notify the Owner’s Representative of discrepancies between quantities and symbols shown prior to installation.

I. Adequately stake, barricade and protect all irrigation equipment, manholes, utility lines and other existing property during all phases of the soil amending and grading operation.

J. Tree Selection: Not used

K. Shrub and Tree Samples: Typical samples, three each of all varieties and sizes (5 gallon and under - shrubs, 15 gallon and under - trees) of all plant materials shall be submitted for inspection approval at the site a minimum of fifteen (15) working days prior to planting operations. Approved samples shall remain on the site and shall be maintained by the Contractor as standards of comparison for plant materials to be furnished. Samples will be incorporated into the work.

L. Rejection and Substitution: All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and be immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with acceptable plant materials. The plant materials shall meet all applicable inspections required by law. All plants shall be of the species, variety size, age, flower color and condition as specified herein and/or as indicated on the Drawings. Plants with buried root flares, girdled roots, poor branch attachment, evidence of poor pruning, significant trunk scars, or with pest or diseases are unacceptable. Under no condition will there be any substitution of plant species, variety or reduced sizes for those listed on the accompanying Drawings, except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative.

M. All utilities (water and electricity) used during the installation of the landscaping and irrigation systems for this project shall be paid for by the Owner. During the ninety (90) day Maintenance Period, the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of the utilities.

1.9 INVOICING OF PLANT MATERIAL

A. After installation of plant materials but prior to the pre-maintenance inspection, the Owner’s Representative, with the heretofore specified signed copies of the required certificates, trip slips and invoices for the plant materials and related items, shall invoice such material comparing the total area and/or the amounts specified. If the minimum amounts have not been furnished, the contractor shall install additional materials to fulfill the minimum requirements specified.

B. Upon delivery of materials and/or completion of all soil conditioning and grading, but prior to initiating planting operations, the Owner’s Inspector on site with the heretofore specified signed copies of required certificates, trip slips and invoices for soil preparation materials, shall require Owner’s Inspector on site to compare the total quantities of each material furnished against the total area required to each operation. If the minimum rates of application have not been met, the Contractor will be required to distribute additional quantities of these materials to fulfill the minimum application requirements specified.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 6

1.10 SOIL PREPARATION AND SOIL PREPARATION CONFORMANCE TEST

A. Conform to Wallace Laboratories, LLC report recommendations Date November 7,2014

1.11 NURSERY STANDARDS

A. Trees shall be selected from qualified tree farms which conform to the professional standards of the California Association of Nurseries, meet all standards for arboricultural health, and which have certified arborists on staff.

B. Landscape Contractor pretag all trees from reputable tree nurseries. Pretagged trees shall have appropriate form and specifications. The nursery's certified arborist shall provide written confirmation to the Owners authorized representative that the trees meet arboricultural standards. Written confirmation shall include Arborist's Certification number and name. If nursery does not have a Certified Arborist on staff, the Landscape Contractor shall contract with an independent Certified Arborist to review all trees at the tree nurseries and provide confirmation of the above, at Landscape Contractor's sole expense.

C. No trees will be accepted without written confirmation of the tree's health, including but not limited to the following: Trees shall have exposed root flares, shall be pest free, free of trunk scars, have excellent branch attachment, and shall be free of girdled roots.

D. Contractor shall submit photographs of all pretagged trees to OAR and Landscape Architect, along with written confirmation by certified arborist, for review and approval. Landscape architect may elect, at Landscape Architect’s discretion, to make trip to tree nursery to review trees 36" box size or over. In the event that the trees show evidence of arboricultural flaws, including those listed above, the landscape architect reserves the right to reject the trees and require the Landscape contractor to select trees from other nurseries.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Fertile, agriculturally acceptable, clean and on-site topsoil from within the top 6” of undisturbed site, with imported topsoil accepted by the Client Representative. Supply topsoil for all plants to bring finished grades to 2 inches below tops of curbs, sidewalks and driveways. Topsoil shall not be used for planting operations while in a muddy condition.

B. In the top 30” of on site soil, no subsoil, soil from construction excavation operations, soil from beneath previously paved areas, or soil from other sites shall be used in any planting area. Should any question about the quality of the topsoil arise the contractor shall provide soil test to determine suitability of topsoil before installation.

C. Imported Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural sandy loam, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site, free of subsoil, clay, rocks, impurities, plants, weeds and roots; minimum pH value of 5.4 and maximum 7.0. Salinity shall not exceed 6 (SAR).

D. Structural Soil: Not used


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 7

E. Native soil mix shall be composed of approved amended soil mixed at a ratio of 1 part amended soil to 5 parts soil.

F. Container Planting: To be specified

G. Soil Amendment and Fertilizer: Soil Conditioner shall contain a special blend of organic fractions to supply several degrees of breakdown rate, a portion of inorganic amendment that resists further breakdown, a long-lasting form of iron, pH of 5.5 to 6.0, salinity of 1.75, organic matter (dry weight basis) more than 90%, non-ionic wetting agent and total nitrogen content of 0.5%. (Loamex, Organo Life, Forest Humus or equal).

H. Gypsum: Gypsum shall be commercially processed and packaged gypsum (CaSo4, 2H2O) with minimum 80% grade containing 14% minimum combined sulfur.

I. Iron Sulfate: Ferric sulfate or ferrous sulfate in pellet or granular form containing not less than 18.5% iron expressed as metallic iron. Registered as an agricultural mineral with the State Department of Agriculture in compliance with Article 2, "Fertilizing Materials", and Section 1030 of the Agriculture Code.

J. Soil Sulphur: 99% of approved quality by Owner’s Representative.

K. Pre-Plant Fertilizer: (10-10-10) shall be a combination of natural organic and inorganic granular fertilizers, free flowing, and shall contain the following minimum available percentage by weight of plant food:

Nitrogen 1.0% minimum Phosphoric Acid 10.0% minimum Potash 10.0% minimum

L. Post-Plant Fertilizer: (7-9-4) shall be a long-lasting, organic and controlled release plastic-coated, uniform in composition, free flowing and shall contain the following minimum available percentages by weight of plant food:

Nitrogen 7% minimum Phosphoric Acid 9% minimum Potash 4% minimum

M. Planting Tablets: Planting tablets shall be Agriform (20-10-5) or equal (no known equal) as reviewed by the Owner’s Representative.

N. Planting soil mix ratio for bidding purposes only: Thoroughly blended mixture of topsoil and soil amendments at the following ratio:

Soil amendment per approved soils test 1 Part Accepted Topsoil 2 Parts Iron Sulphate 2 Lbs. Per Cu. Yd. of Mix Gypsum 10 Lbs. Per Cu. Yd. of Mix Pre-plant Fertilizer 4 Lbs. Per Cu. Yd. of Mix

O. Container Planting Backfill – Not used


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 8

2.2 STAKING MATERIALS

A. Tree Staking: Stakes shall be of lodge pole pine. These shall be straight shafts, shaved and cut clean and bare of branches and stubs, of uniform thickness with a minimum diameter of 2 inches, free of loose knots, splits or bends. Stakes shall be no less than ten feet in length, treated with copper napthenate.

B. Tree ties shall be flexible, non-deteriorating, self-fastening, black vinyl tree ties of sizes required to adequately support trees.

2.3 GUYING MATERIALS

A. Guy wires shall be of pliable, zinc-coated steel of No. 12 gauge.

B. Anchors (deadman) for holding guy wires shall be of 4 inches x 4 inches solid lumber, 1-foot-6 inches in length.

C. Hose for covering wire shall be of 2-ply reinforced rubber, used or new, garden hose type of at least 1/2 inches in diameter.

D. Flags, to be attached to guys, shall be of surgical tubing, 1/8 inch diameter and 4 feet long, of uniform thickness.

E. Tree ties shall be Bordon Cinch-Tie or equal (no known equal).

2.4 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Nomenclature: The scientific and common names of plants herein specified conform with the approved names given in "A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants of California", published by the Owner of California, College of Agriculture, Manual 32 (1963). See list of plant material on Drawings.

B. All material provided shall be well branched and proportioned, with respect to width-height relationship.

C. Labeling: Materials shall be clearly labeled as to species and variety. All patented plants (cultivar) shall be delivered with a proper plant patent attached.

D. Quality and size of all plants shall be of No. 1, of Pinto Tag stock. They shall be vigorous, of normal growth, free from disease, insects, insect eggs and meet or exceed the measurements specified. Pinto Tags must be submitted to the Owner’s Representative. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well "hardened off", self-supporting. Plants shall have well-developed branch systems, vigorous and fibrous root systems not root or container bound.

E. Container stock (1 gal., 5 gal., 15 gal. boxes) shall have grown in containers for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years. No container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth, when taken from the container, shall be planted, except upon special approval. No trees with damaged roots or broken balls shall be planted.

F. Pruning shall not be done, prior to delivery, except by written approval by the Owner’s Representative.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 9

G. Inspection of plant materials shall be a responsibility of the Contractor and where necessary the Contractor shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants to site.

H. Protection: Plants shall be handled, stored and maintained to prevent drying out, wind burn, wilting or root or stem damage. Evidence of these conditions will be grounds for plant replacement.

I. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection at the project site at any time before or during the progress of work for size, variety, condition, latent defects and injuries. Rejected plants shall be removed from the project site immediately.

J. Substitutions will not be permitted except that if proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety and cost. All substitutions subject to Owner Representative’s written approval.

K. Quantities shall be furnished as needed to complete work as shown on Drawings.

L. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to inspect root condition of any species, particularly those grown from seed, and if found defective, to reject the plants represented by the defective sample.

M. Identify plant species or varieties correctly on legible, weather-proof labels attached securely to the job site. There shall be a minimum of one labeled plant for each five plants in a lot.

N. Groundcover plants shall be healthy, vigorous rooted cuttings grown in flats until transplanting.

O. Hydroseed/Stolon Material: Not used

P. Pre-emergence herbicide shall be Surflan, Treflan, Dymid or equal.

Q. Weed contact spray shall be Phytar 560, Broadside, Round-Up or equal.

2.5 BARK MULCH

A. All shrub and groundcover areas shall be covered with fine-size nitrolized fir bark, 2 inches minimum deep, as designated on plans. Fir bark shall be screened bark. Mulch shall contain no Eucalyptus. Mulch to be Forest Blend from Tierra Verde.

B. All shrub and groundcover areas shall be covered with fine-size nitrolized fir bark, 3 inches minimum deep, for mulch that contains Eucalyptus as designated on plans, Fir bark shall be screened bark. Mulch to be Forest Blend from Tierra Verde.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 10

2.6 JUTE MATTING

Not used.

2.7 CONCRETE MOWCURBS

Not used

2.8 TREE STAND PIPES

A. Tree stand pipes shall be 4 inches rigid, perforated PVC pipe wrapped with filter fabric and placed upright in augured hole surrounded with gravel; one per tree. Keep stand pipe free of gravel to facilitate monitoring of water level at bottom of pit and cover with black plastic.

2.9 STRUCTURAL SOIL

A. Gravel:

B. Soil:

2.10 FILTER FABRIC

A. Filter fabric at drain pipe shall be non-woven polypropelene with a weight of 4.5 ounces per square yard, grab strength of 120 pounds, tensile elongation of 55%, burst strength of 210 PSI, tear strength of 50 pounds and puncture strength of 70 pounds.

2.11 ROOT BARRIERS

A. Biological root control device as manufactured by Biobarrier: 1-800-352-6776, or equal (no known equal). Width shall be 19.5 inches.

2.12 TREE GRATES: As per plan.

2.13 DECOMPOSED GRANITE

A. Provide 3” min. of material of 1/4” minus fines, light brown to gold in color. Decomposed granite shall conform to R-value test of 73 min., and sand equivalent test of 30 min.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Beginning of installation indicates Contractor’s acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Clearing and Grubbing: Prior to tillage operations, vegetation growth shall be grubbed, raked and cleared from the site. The ground surface shall be cleared of material which might hinder grading, tillage, planting and maintenance operations and be disposed of off the site.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 11

3.2 SOIL CONDITIONING, FERTILIZING AND ROTOTILLING

A. Grade shall ensure positive drainage of site, directing surface drainage toward curbs, gutters, swales and drains; away from building foundations, free of irregularities and depressions. Provide a minimum of 2% slope over planted areas and 1% slope over hardscape. Provide a minimum of 2% slope away from all building foundations.

B. Finish grade below adjacent paving, curbs, or headers shall be 2-inches in shrub or ground cover areas.

C. After rough grading, prior to adding soil amendments, the Contractor shall provide analysis of imported and existing soil obtained from three (3) soil samples each from locations as approved by Owner’s Representative. The samples shall be analyzed by an approved testing laboratory and amendments applied as outlined in the soils report. The contract prices shall be adjusted to reflect any differences between the amendments as specified in the agronomy test.

D. After the areas have been graded, all planting areas shall be conditioned and amended in accordance with soil test analysis recommendations. Soil conditioning and amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be thoroughly scarified to an average depth of 6 inches by rototilling a minimum of 2 alternating passes: (The following quantities and reates are for bid purposes only.)

Soil Conditioner 4 Cu. Yd. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Soil Sulphur 20 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Iron Sulphate 20 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Gypsum 100 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Pre-Plant Fertilizer 20 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.

E. Contractor shall procure new soil analysis from approved soil testing laboratory, from (3) location on site to be approved by client representative. Contractor shall reapply amendments and conditioners, or leaching, or any other action as recommended by soil test laboratory’s recommendations.

F. Fertilizer (pre-plant) shall be incorporated into the top 6 inches of finish grade. Fertilizer shall be applied after leaching operation.

*Caution: Iron Sulphate will stain concrete, granite and other paved surfaces. Avoid contact between these surfaces and any soil mix containing iron sulphate. After iron sulphate application, broom all surfaces free of material before any water application, including impending rains.

G. Soil Preparation Procedure for all Landscaped Areas: 1. After landscape areas have been graded, compacted and sloped to drain as

shown and specified, Contractor shall accept the areas for landscape soil preparation.

2. Areas that have not been graded and will be planted shall be thoroughly irrigated for a minimum of two weeks or until weeds germinate and vigorous weed growth is evident. Apply contact herbicide per manufacturers specifications. Repeat process if required by Owner’s Representative until weed kill is achieved.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 12

3. All areas shall be deep ripped to a depth of 12 inches and all rocks 1 inch or larger, construction debris, soil from previously paved areas shall be removed from the top 8 inches of soil. The thoroughness of rock removal shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to incorporation of amendments. Accepted topsoil shall be imported to equal volume of rock removed. (See Topsoil Specification).

4. Incorporate Agricultural Gypsum and soil sulphur to a depth of 8-12 inches. 5. Deep Water Leaching: Due to the type of soil in the site, it is mandatory that

soils be leached and that the soil be re-tested for suitability prior to incorporating nutritional amendments. All areas shall be leached two times to a depth of 8 inches each time. Soil test must be approved by an approved, reputable soil laboratory and meet the following requirements prior to planting:

ECe - maximum 3.1 pH - maximum 7.50 - minimum 6.00

6. Soil testing labs: Agri Service Soil and Plant Lab, 2142-B Industrial Court, Vista, CA 92083, (619)727-5451; Soil and Plant Laboratory, 421 South Lyon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92107; Wilbur Ellis, 7982 Irvine Boulevard, East Irvine, CA 92650,(800) 792-5983 or (714) 551-0363, or equal.

7. Reapplication of soil amendment, conditioning and leaching or other actions shall be required by the Contractor if tests so recommend. Expense of test, reapplication of soil amendment and leaching operation shall be borne by the Contractor.

8. Add nutritional amendments to a depth of 6 inches. The thoroughness and completeness of the rototilling and incorporation of the soil conditioners/amendments shall be as approved by the Owner’s Representative. Slopes 2:1 and steeper, or as per the Drawings, omit soil conditioner application of tilling.

9. Deep water leaching shall be done prior to the application of the commercial fertilizer 1-10-10.

10. Grades: Planting areas which have been soil conditioned and/or graded shall be maintained in a true and even condition prior to planting. Contractor shall include repairs to previously graded areas, if disruption of these areas should occur prior to end of Maintenance Period.

11. Settling of Soil: When grading, deep ripping, topsoiling, addition of soil conditioning and tilling have been accomplished, areas shall be compacted and settled by heavy irrigation to a minimum depth of 12 inches without causing erosion or sloughing of soils. Soil tests will be required after leaching to assure conformance to soil test results.

12. Final Grading of Planting Areas: Planting areas shall be free of rocks larger than 1 inch with no more than 5% by volume of rocks smaller than 1 inch. All depressions, voids, erosion, settled trenches and excavations shall be filled with approved topsoil or amended soil and/or removed by the Contractor leaving a smooth, even finish grade. Final grade shall be as shown and specified, and in conformance the following directives: a. Drainage away from buildings shall be maintained. b. Molding and rounding of grades shall be provided at all changes in slope.

Blend slopes into level areas. c. Grades shall be 2 inches below adjacent paved areas and sidewalks and

flush with valve boxes, mowing strips, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., and shall have a minimum slope of 1% to drains.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 13

d. Maintain grades within a tolerance of +/- 0.1 foot of grades shown on the Civil Engineering plans. Open lawn areas may be within +/- 0.5 foot of grades shown on Civil plans.

e. No planting shall be installed until approval has been given by the Owner’s Representative.

f. Contractor shall install accepted topsoil to bring finish grades to 2” below tops of curbs sidewalks and driveways, sloped in accordance with grading and drainage specifications.

g. Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does not cause erosion or sloughing of soils.

h. All depressions, voids, erosion scars and settled trenches generated by the deep watering shall be filled with approved topsoil or amended soil and brought to finish grade.

3.3 FINISH GRADING

A. Finish grades shall be indicated on Civil drawings.

B. Finish grades shall be measured as the final water compacted and settled surface grades and shall be within +/- 0.1 foot of the spot elevations and grade lines indicated.

C. Finish grades shall be measured at the top surface of surface materials.

D. Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all changes in slope.

E. All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces resulting from tillage, rototilling and all other operations shall be leveled and floated out before planting operations are initiated.

F. The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and avoid damage to sprinkler heads, irrigation lines and other underground utilities during his grading and conditioning operations.

G. Final finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site with all surface drainage away from buildings, walls and toward roadways, drains and catch basins.

H. Final grades shall be acceptable to the Owner’s Representative before planting operations will be allowed to begin.

I. Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than two (2) percent surface slope for positive drainage.

J. Areas shown on plans as turf areas to receive soil preparation and conditioning (amend and fine grade soil) shall have all stones removed from the surface of the lawn bed.

3.4 PLANTING

A. The layout of locations for plants and outlines of groundcover to be planted shall be approved on the site by the Owner’s Representative prior to their planting. All such locations shall be checked for possible interference with existing underground piping prior to excavation of holes. If underground construction or utility lines are encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other locations for the planting may be selected by the


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 14

Owner’s Representative. Damage to existing utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Planting Trees and Shrubs: 1. All excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces and shall

be of the minimum sizes indicated on drawings. Holes shall be, in all cases, large enough to permit handling and planting without injury or breakage of root balls or roots. Center of planting pit shall not exceed depth of soil on container, measured from exposed root flare of plant to bottom of container.

2. Excavation shall include the stripping and staking of all acceptable soil encountered within the areas to be excavated for plant pits and planting beds. Protect all areas that are to be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily stacked pending its reuse for the filling of holes, pits and beds.

3. Remove nursery stakes and ties from all container stock. Maintain side growth on all trees.

4. Loosen roots and soil at edges of root ball of plant being installed and mix with native soil.

5. Excess soil generated from the planting holes shall be spread on the site as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

6. All used cans shall be removed to the storage area or from the site daily. 7. The plants shall be planted at approved locations with the heretofore specified

soil planting backfill & amended soils. 8. The plants shall be placed in the planting pits on the backfill material which has

been hand-tamped and water settled to the root ball base levels prior to the placement of the plants. After setting the plants, the remaining backfill material shall be carefully tamped and settled around each root ball to fill all voids.

9. Each tree and shrub shall be placed in the center of the hole and shall be set plumb and held rigidly in position until the planting back fill has been tamped from around each root ball.

10. All plants shall be set at such a level, that after settling, the root flare shall be set as specified on the contract documents.

11. Planting tablets shall be placed in each planting hole at the following rates:

One (1)-5 gram tablet per liner and flat size plant. One (1)-21 gram tablet per gallon container. Three (3)-21 gram tablets per 5 gallon container. Four (4)-21 gram tablets per 15 gallon container. One (1)-21 gram tablet per each 4 inch of box size.

12. No plant will be accepted if the root ball is broken or cracked, either before, during or after the process of installation.

13. All plants shall be thoroughly watered into the full depth of each planting hole immediately after planting, and shall be watered by hand as required to promote establishment.

14. All trees, 15 gallon and larger, shall be staked with two wood stakes, driven into the ground. The stakes shall be driven in plumb and secure. Special care shall be taken that the driving in of the stakes does not damage the tree root ball. Tree ties shall be fastened to each tree and stake by looping figure eights with the inside diameter of the tie at two or three times the diameter of the tree and by tacking the back of the tie to the stake (See Detailed Drawings).

15. The staking method shall be accomplished in such a manner as to insure the proper and healthy growth and the safety of the plants, property and public.

16. Plants shall not be placed within 12 inches of sprinkler heads.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 15

17. Shrubs shown in plant areas shall be under planted with groundcover shown by adjacent symbol to within 12 inches of main plant stem.

18. The Contractor shall be responsible for all surfaces and subsurface drainage required which may affect his guarantee of the trees, shrubs and vines.

19. Pruning after planting shall be required on all trees and shrubs when necessary to provide the specified or approved standard shapes, form and/or sizes characteristic to each plant. Pruning may include thinning, topping and/or cutting and shall be as approved by the Owner’s Representative. Cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree sealant.

20. All trees 24 inches box and larger shall be spotted in place prior to digging of the hole.

21. Install vines as per plans and details.

C. Groundcovers: 1. Groundcovers shall be planted in the areas indicated on the Drawings. The

groundcover plants shall be rooted cuttings grown in flats and shall remain in those flats until transplanting.

2. All groundcover plants shall be planted with soil around roots in staggered rows, evenly spaced at the intervals called out on the Drawings.

3. The groundcover plants shall be planted sufficiently deep to cover all roots and shall be immediately watered after planting until the entire area is soaked to the full depth of all holes.

4. The groundcover planting areas shall be hand-smoothed after planting to provide an even, smooth final finish grade. All groundcover areas to receive 2 inches layer fir bark mulch.

3.5 CONCRETE MOWCURB

A. Concrete mow curbs shall be installed as per plan and details.

3.6 STANDPIPES AT TREES

A. Install PVC standpipe at all trees. Wrap standpipes with filter fabric and cap standpipe with plastic drain grate, spot glue to pipe to reduce vandalism.

3.7 FREE ZONE

A. Contractor shall install a planting and irrigation "Free Zone" at the base of all buildings to minimize water contact with the building.

3.8 HERBICIDE APPLICATION

A. Pre-emergence herbicide shall be applied to groundcover areas only and in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Do not apply in lawn or hydroseed areas. Owner’s Representative shall be notified and present at the time of application.

3.9 BARK MULCH

A. Install 2 inches layer in all shrub and groundcover areas. Do not install on slope areas 3:1 or greater.


LANDSCAPE

32 93 00 - 16

3.10 JUTE MATTING

A. Not used.

3.11 ROOT BARRIER

A. Install root barriers for all trees located within six (6) feet of paving. Install root barrier along the edge of paving for a distance of ten (10) feet in each direction from the tree for a total of twenty (20) feet per tree. Where trees are closer than twenty feet apart a single continuous piece of root barrier shall be used. Overlap root barrier a minimum of twelve (12) inches at splices. Root barriers shall be installed at a minimum depth of (30) inches. Top of root barriers shall be set at 2” below adjacent paved surfaces.

3.12 CLEAN UP

A. As project progresses, Contractor shall maintain all areas in a neat manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of project, Contractor shall remove all debris and containers used in accomplishing work. The Contractor shall sweep and clean all sidewalks, asphalt and concrete areas adjacent to plantings.

3.13 TREE GRATES Per manufacturer’s specifications.

3.14 STRUCTURAL SOIL

A. As shown on plans.

END OF SECTION


Tree Grates 32 94 43

Division 32

Section 32 94 43

Tree Grates

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Tree grates as shown on drawings and as specified herein.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit set(s) of drawings of tree grates and frames for review by architect prior to purchase and installation.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 15 years tree grate manufacturing experience

B. Installer qualifications: 2 years minimum experience installing tree grates and support frames.


A. Store product in manufacturer's packaging until ready to install.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Tree grates and frames shall be warranted by the Manufacture against defects in materials and workmanship for a minimum of five (5) years

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TREE GRATES AND FRAMES:

A. Manufacturer: Tree grates and frames shall be as supplied by IRONSMITH,INC., 41-701 Corporate Way, Unit 3, Palm Desert, CA 92260 (800) 338-4766, no exceptions taken.

B. Matching steel angle frames provided by tree grate manufacturer model 9600FCS shall be provided with installation detail(s) per plans.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until site is properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials and systems in proper relation with adjacent construction and with uniform appearance. Coordinate with work of other sections.


Tree Grates 32 94 43

B. Install grates and frames where indicated on plans flush and leveled with surrounding pavement surface.

C. Install steel angle frame

1. flush and leveled with surrounding paving surface, maintain flush and leveled at all times. Frames MUST NOT slope in more than one direction.

2. Use spreaders or stakes to keep frame from being distorted by concrete pressure.

3. Install frames per details on plans and manufacturer's recomendations

D. Clean concrete and debris from frame prior to tree grate installation.

E. If needed, grind pads on underside of tree grates to level and prevent rocking in frame.

3.4 PILFER PROOF BOLTING (OPTIONAL)

A. Position tree grates to meet in the center of tree well and have uniform spacing around outside edges of castings. Drill through counter bored holes in the grates and install pilfer proof bolts per manufacturer’s instructions.

(On new frames with standard cement anchors when installed in new concrete)

B. Use 1" thick wood or foam block out under the frame to allow pilfer proof screw to extend below angle.

3.5 CLEAN-UP and PROTECTION

A. Protect installed product until completion of project.

B. DO NOT ALLOW water from new concrete to run off or wash onto tree grates to prevent damage from concrete exudates, lime, and efflorescence.

C. Touch up, repair or replace damaged products.

D. DO NOT ALLOW ANY CONTAMINATION OF TREE PLANTING AREA!. This includes, but is not limited to, construction debris, excess concrete, paint or other chemical contaminants. Any contamination of the planting area may be detrimental to the long term health of the tee.

END OF SECTION


PLANTING 32 95 00-1

SECTION 32 95 00 - PLANTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work includes all services, labor, materials, transportation and equipment necessary to perform the work indicated on the Drawings and as specified.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor shall submit list of soil amendments, fertilizers, plant materials, topsoil, with quantities of each, along with the source of the supplier and results of (2) phases of agronomy tests taken both prior to amending soil and after soil has been amended per 1.9. Planting recommendations may be revised based on soil tests.

B. Plants shall be subject to observation and preliminary acceptance by owner’s representative at place of growth or upon delivery to job site. Such observation shall not impair the right of observation and rejection during progress of the work. Tagging of plant material is for conformance w/ design intent only, and does not constitute the landscape architect’s approval of plant materials in regards to their health. The health and vigor of plant material is solely the responsibility of the contractor.

C. Submit written reports by certified arborists for all trees to be planted on site, that such trees meet the criteria of arboricultural health, as established by the International Society of Arboriculture (ISA). Arboricultural reports shall be provided at cost of Landscape Contractor.

D. Submit documentation to the owner’s representative within 75 calendar days of award of contract to the General Contractor that all plant material is available. The contractor shall be responsible for procuring all the material listed on the planting legends.

1.3 GUARANTEES AND REPLACEMENTS

A. Plant Materials: Shrubs and vines shall be guaranteed to remain healthy and vigorously growing for one year. Groundcovers shall be guaranteed to remain healthy and vigorously growing for 6 months.

B. Trees: All trees that have been supplied and installed under this Contract shall be guaranteed to live in a healthy condition for a period of one (1) year from date of final acceptance of project.

C. Plant Replacement: Plants found to be dead or not in a vigorous condition, or if root balls have been damaged, within the Installation, Maintenance and Guarantee Periods, shall be replaced within fourteen (14) days from date of discovery. Contractor shall include, at his expense, a timely written diagnosis of plant health by a certified Arborist, should a dispute arise. Arborist's report shall indicate reason for lack of vigor, potential remedies, if any, and estimate of time required to regain vigor and specified size.


PLANTING 32 95 00-2

D. Plant Replacement: Plants used for replacement shall be same kind and size as specified and shall be furnished, planted and fertilized as originally specified. Cost of all repair work to existing improvements damaged during replacements shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.4 SITE OBSERVATION

A. Site observations herein specified shall be made by the Owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall provide a minimum of three (3) working days notice before Observation is required.

B. Site observation will be required for the following parts of the work: 1. Pre-Job Meeting: Explain Owner Representative’s role to Contractor. 2. Incorporation of soil conditioning and fertilizing into the soil, after approval of first

soil report. 3. Application of pre-emergent herbicide. 4. Soil preparation for approval to plant, after approval of second soils report. 5. Upon the completion of grading prior to planting. 6. Irrigation coverage test 7. Confirmation of corrected finish grades. 8. Approval of samples of plant materials. 9. Approval of tree & shrub locations for planting, prior to planting holes being

excavated. 10. Plant installation: Check size of planting holes and backfill mix. 11. Observation after completion of planting, and all other indicated or specified

work. Written approval to commence maintenance period by client representative is required and shall establish beginning of the maintenance period.

12. Maintenance observation after thirty (30) days to coincide with fertilizer application.

13. Final Observation at the completion of the ninety (90) day Maintenance Period. This observation shall establish the beginning date for the one (1) year guarantee of all trees.

C. Upon completion of the Final Observation and the work of this section, the Contractor will be notified in writing: (1) whether the work is acceptable; (2) of any requirements necessary for completion and acceptance.

D. Contractor shall be on the site at the time of each observation. Contractor shall speak English.

E. No site visits shall be made unless all items in previous observation reports are either completed or remedied, unless owner has waived in writing such compliance. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for reimbursement to the Client for Architect’s time incurred in making untimely site visits at Architect’s current billing rates.

F. Construction observation visits shall be made in proper sequence of the installation of the work. No visits will be made until all soil submittals have been made and approved. Out of sequence construction visits shall make the Landscape Contractor responsible for reimbursement of the Architect at current billing rates.


PLANTING 32 95 00-3

1.5 MAINTENANCE

A. The Maintenance Period begins on the first day after all landscape work on this project is complete, checked, accepted and written approval from the Owner’s Representative is given to begin the Maintenance Period and shall continue thereafter for no less than ninety (90) continuous calendar days.

B. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all involved areas of the Contract during the progress of the work and during the Maintenance Period until the Final Acceptance of the work.

C. Regular planting maintenance operations shall begin immediately after each plant is planted. Plants shall be kept in a healthy, growing condition and in a visually pleasing appearance by watering, pruning, mowing, rolling, trimming, edging, fertilizing, re-staking, pest and disease controlling, spraying, weeding, cleaning up and any other necessary operation of maintenance. Landscape areas shall be kept free of weeds, noxious grass and all other undesired vegetative growth and debris. All plants found to be dead or in an impaired condition shall be replaced within seven (7) days. Maintenance operations shall also include: 1. Filling and replanting of any low areas which may cause standing water. 2. Adjusting of sprinkler head height and watering pattern. 3. Filling and re-compaction of eroded areas. 4. Weekly removal of trash, litter, clippings and foreign debris.

D. The Contract completion date of the Contract Maintenance Period shall be extended when, in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, improper maintenance and/or possible poor or unhealthy condition of planted material is evident at the termination of the scheduled Maintenance Period. The Contractor shall be responsible for additional maintenance of the work at no change in price until all of the work is completed and acceptable.

E. When in the opinion of the Owner’s Representative, improper maintenance, possible poor or unhealthy condition of plant materials, or unestablished lawns are evident or when maintenance work is not being performed, the Contractor shall be responsible for additional maintenance of the work at no charge to the Owner until Final Completion is delivered.

F. The Contractor shall provide protection of all planting areas against traffic or other damage by erecting fencing or temporary twine immediately after planting is completed. Warning signs and barricades shall be placed in various high traffic areas. Damaged areas shall be repaired immediately by the Contractor.

G. Watering by hand will be required when soil moisture is below optimum level for best plant growth or when ordered by the Owner’s Representative. Hand watering may be required when high or hot wind conditions exist, or to promote vigorous root growth.

H. Plants shall be inspected by the Contractor at least twice per week and needed maintenance shall be performed promptly.

I. At conclusion of maintenance period an observation shall be made by the Owner’s Representative, to determine the acceptability of work, including maintenance. The Contractor will be notified by the Owner’s Representative of all deficiencies revealed by the observation before acceptance. Owner must accept all maintained areas, in writing, prior to end of maintenance period.


PLANTING 32 95 00-4

1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the work of this Section with installation of underground irrigation system utilities, piping and watering heads.

1.7 LAYOUT OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall employ, at his own expense, a registered Civil Engineer or licensed Land Surveyor to lay out the work of the project, to establish all reference points set for construction and the certification of finish grades with Civil Engineer drawings.


A. The term "Planting Area" shall mean all areas to be planted with trees, shrubs, groundcovers, seed and sod.

B. Actual planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice. California Natives are to be planted in the fall.

C. All rock, gravel and other growth or debris accumulated during construction of the project shall be removed from the site. Soil areas used for construction clean-up, washing, debris, stockpiling.

D. Conservation of Topsoil: Contractor shall identify and protect areas of arable topsoil to stockpile during construction for re-use during landscape construction activities. Top soil shall be defined as top 6” of undisturbed soil only, in accordance with these specifications. 1. Maintain the topsoil stockpile tree from debris, trash, and contamination in a

manner in which will not obstruct the natural flow of drainage. 2. Keep the sampled or tested stockpiled topsoil separate from other topsoil. 3. Keep the stockpiled topsoil damp to prevent dust and drying out. 4. Procure approval of Owner or Landscape Architect for topsoil material and

storage conditions at time of the stockpile.

E. Prior to excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, locate all underground utility lines still in use and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements. In the event of a conflict between such lines and plant locations, notify the Owner’s Representative who shall arrange for the relocation of one or the other. The Contractor assumes all responsibility for making any and all repairs for damages from work as herein specified.

F. Grading, planting and soil preparation work shall be performed only during the period when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. If the moisture content of the soil should reach such a level that working it would destroy soil structure, spreading grading operations shall be suspended until the moisture content is increased or reduced to acceptable levels and the desired results are likely to be obtained.

G. All scaled dimensions are approximate. Before proceeding with any work, carefully check and verify all dimensions and immediately inform the Owner’s Representative of any discrepancy between the drawings and/or specifications and actual conditions.

H. Quantities for plant materials are shown for convenience only, and not guaranteed. Check and verify count and supply sufficient number to fulfill intent of drawings. Notify


PLANTING 32 95 00-5

the Owner’s Representative of discrepancies between quantities and symbols shown prior to installation.

I. Adequately stake, barricade and protect all irrigation equipment, manholes, utility lines and other existing property during all phases of the soil amending and grading operation.

J. Tree Selection: 1. One photograph of each tree variety and size, called out on Drawings, shall be

delivered to the Owner’s Representative for approval prior to delivery to site or installation.

2. The Contractor shall immediately remove from the site any trees not approved after the Owner’s Representative has seen them.

3. The Contractor, at his option and expense, can retain the services of the Owner’s Representative to review trees 15 gallon and larger tagged at the nursery and/or at its place of growth, or submit color photographs of trees for approval.

K. Shrub and Tree Samples: Typical samples, three each of all varieties and sizes (5 gallon and under - shrubs, 15 gallon and under - trees) of all plant materials shall be submitted for inspection approval at the site a minimum of fifteen (15) working days prior to planting operations. Approved samples shall remain on the site and shall be maintained by the Contractor as standards of comparison for plant materials to be furnished. Samples will be incorporated into the work.

L. Rejection and Substitution: All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected and be immediately removed from the site of the work and replaced with acceptable plant materials. The plant materials shall meet all applicable inspections required by law. All plants shall be of the species, variety size, age, flower color and condition as specified herein and/or as indicated on the Drawings. Plants with buried root flares, girdled roots, poor branch attachment, evidence of poor pruning, significant trunk scars, or with pest or diseases are unacceptable. Under no condition will there be any substitution of plant species, variety or reduced sizes for those listed on the accompanying Drawings, except with the written consent of the Owner’s Representative.

M. All utilities (water and electricity) used during the installation of the landscaping and irrigation systems for this project shall be paid for by the Owner. During the ninety (90) day Maintenance Period, the Owner shall be responsible for the payment of the utilities.

1.9 INVOICING OF PLANT MATERIAL

A. After installation of plant materials but prior to the pre-maintenance inspection, the Owner’s Representative, with the heretofore specified signed copies of the required certificates, trip slips and invoices for the plant materials and related items, shall invoice such material comparing the total area and/or the amounts specified. If the minimum amounts have not been furnished, the contractor shall install additional materials to fulfill the minimum requirements specified.

B. Upon delivery of materials and/or completion of all soil conditioning and grading, but prior to initiating planting operations, the Owner’s Inspector on site with the heretofore specified signed copies of required certificates, trip slips and invoices for soil preparation materials, shall require Owner’s Inspector on site to compare the total quantities of each material furnished against the total area required to each operation. If the minimum rates of application have not been met, the Contractor will be required to distribute additional quantities of these materials to fulfill the minimum application requirements specified.


PLANTING 32 95 00-6

1.10 SOIL PREPARATION AND SOIL PREPARATION CONFORMANCE TEST

A. Contractor shall provide, within (30) days of award of contract, (3) soil tests per acre, from approved locations, of existing soil (calculated as area of property including building and parking footprints). Such soil tests shall be submitted to an approved laboratory source for analysis and recommendations for amendments to be used. Planting and amendment recommendations may be revised based on soil test results. Such soil tests shall be provided at cost of Landscape Contractor.

B. A sample of the soil amendments shall be delivered to the Owner’s Representative within thirty (45) days after recording of the Contract for submittal to a testing laboratory at cost of Landscape Contractor.

C. After approved soil amendments have been thoroughly mixed into the site and prior to planting, three (3) samples of the mixed soil will be taken at approved locations by the Contractor and submitted to an approved soil laboratory for comparison to a control mix. Cost of the above testing by the soils laboratory shall be borne by the Contractor. Soil amendment may be modified based on test results at sole cost of Landscape Contractor.

D. Soil amendments shall be added to the areas where native plants are to be installed.

1.11 NURSERY STANDARDS

A. Trees shall be selected from qualified tree farms which conform to the professional standards of the California Association of Nurseries, meet all standards for arboricultural health, and which have certified arborists on staff.

B. Landscape Contractor pretag all trees from reputable tree nurseries. Pretagged trees shall have appropriate form and specifications. The nursery's certified arborist shall provide written confirmation to the Owners authorized representative that the trees meet arboricultural standards. Written confirmation shall include Arborist's Certification number and name. If nursery does not have a Certified Arborist on staff, the Landscape Contractor shall contract with an independent Certified Arborist to review all trees at the tree nurseries and provide confirmation of the above, at Landscape Contractor's sole expense.

C. No trees will be accepted without written confirmation of the tree's health, including but not limited to the following: Trees shall have exposed root flares, shall be pest free, free of trunk scars, have excellent branch attachment, and shall be free of girdled roots.

D. Contractor shall submit photographs of all pretagged trees to OAR and Landscape Architect, along with written confirmation by certified arborist, for review and approval. Landscape architect may elect, at Landscape Architect’s discretion, to make trip to tree nursery to review trees 36" box size or over. In the event that the trees show evidence of arboricultural flaws, including those listed above, the landscape architect reserves the right to reject the trees and require the Landscape contractor to select trees from other nurseries.


PLANTING 32 95 00-7

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Topsoil: Fertile, agriculturally acceptable, clean and on-site topsoil from within the top 6” of undisturbed site, with imported topsoil accepted by the Client Representative. Supply topsoil for all plants to bring finished grades to 2 inches below tops of curbs, sidewalks and driveways. Topsoil shall not be used for planting operations while in a muddy condition.

B. In the top 30” of on site soil, no subsoil, soil from construction excavation operations, soil from beneath previously paved areas, or soil from other sites shall be used in any planting area. Should any question about the quality of the topsoil arise the contractor shall provide soil test to determine suitability of topsoil before installation.

C. Imported Topsoil: Fertile, agricultural sandy loam, typical for locality, capable of sustaining vigorous plant growth, taken from drained site, free of subsoil, clay, rocks, impurities, plants, weeds and roots; minimum pH value of 5.4 and maximum 7.0. Salinity shall not exceed 6 (SAR).

D. Structural Soil: To be specified

E. Native soil mix shall be composed of approved amended soil mixed at a ratio of 1 part amended soil to 5 parts soil.

F. Container Planting: To be specified

G. Soil Amendment and Fertilizer: Soil Conditioner shall contain a special blend of organic fractions to supply several degrees of breakdown rate, a portion of inorganic amendment that resists further breakdown, a long-lasting form of iron, pH of 5.5 to 6.0, salinity of 1.75, organic matter (dry weight basis) more than 90%, non-ionic wetting agent and total nitrogen content of 0.5%. (Loamex, Organo Life, Forest Humus or equal).

H. Gypsum: Gypsum shall be commercially processed and packaged gypsum (CaSo4, 2H2O) with minimum 80% grade containing 14% minimum combined sulfur.

I. Iron Sulfate: Ferric sulfate or ferrous sulfate in pellet or granular form containing not less than 18.5% iron expressed as metallic iron. Registered as an agricultural mineral with the State Department of Agriculture in compliance with Article 2, "Fertilizing Materials", and Section 1030 of the Agriculture Code.

J. Soil Sulphur: 99% of approved quality by Owner’s Representative.

K. Pre-Plant Fertilizer: (10-10-10) shall be a combination of natural organic and inorganic granular fertilizers, free flowing, and shall contain the following minimum available percentage by weight of plant food:

Nitrogen 1.0% minimum Phosphoric Acid 10.0% minimum Potash 10.0% minimum

L. Post-Plant Fertilizer: (7-9-4) shall be a long-lasting, organic and controlled release plastic-coated, uniform in composition, free flowing and shall contain the following minimum available percentages by weight of plant food:


PLANTING 32 95 00-8

Nitrogen 7% minimum Phosphoric Acid 9% minimum Potash 4% minimum

M. Planting Tablets: Planting tablets shall be Agriform (20-10-5) or equal (no known equal) as reviewed by the Owner’s Representative.

N. Planting soil mix ratio for bidding purposes only: Thoroughly blended mixture of topsoil and soil amendments at the following ratio:

Soil amendment per approved soils test 1 Part Accepted Topsoil 2 Parts Iron Sulphate 2 Lbs. Per Cu. Yd. of Mix Gypsum 10 Lbs. Per Cu. Yd. of Mix Pre-plant Fertilizer 4 Lbs. Per Cu. Yd. of Mix

O. Container Planting Backfill – To be specified.

2.2 STAKING MATERIALS

A. Tree Staking: Stakes shall be of lodge pole pine. These shall be straight shafts, shaved and cut clean and bare of branches and stubs, of uniform thickness with a minimum diameter of 2 inches, free of loose knots, splits or bends. Stakes shall be no less than ten feet in length, treated with copper napthenate.

B. Tree ties shall be flexible, non-deteriorating, self-fastening, black vinyl tree ties of sizes required to adequately support trees.

2.3 GUYING MATERIALS

A. Guy wires shall be of pliable, zinc-coated steel of No. 12 gauge.

B. Anchors (deadman) for holding guy wires shall be of 4 inches x 4 inches solid lumber, 1-foot-6 inches in length.

C. Hose for covering wire shall be of 2-ply reinforced rubber, used or new, garden hose type of at least 1/2 inches in diameter.

D. Flags, to be attached to guys, shall be of surgical tubing, 1/8 inch diameter and 4 feet long, of uniform thickness.

E. Tree ties shall be Bordon Cinch-Tie or equal (no known equal).

2.4 PLANT MATERIALS

A. Nomenclature: The scientific and common names of plants herein specified conform with the approved names given in "A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants of California", published by the Owner of California, College of Agriculture, Manual 32 (1963). See list of plant material on Drawings.

B. All material provided shall be well branched and proportioned, with respect to width-height relationship.


PLANTING 32 95 00-9

C. Labeling: Materials shall be clearly labeled as to species and variety. All patented plants (cultivar) shall be delivered with a proper plant patent attached.

D. Quality and size of all plants shall be of No. 1, of Pinto Tag stock. They shall be vigorous, of normal growth, free from disease, insects, insect eggs and meet or exceed the measurements specified. Pinto Tags must be submitted to the Owner’s Representative. Tree trunks shall be sturdy and well "hardened off", self-supporting. Plants shall have well-developed branch systems, vigorous and fibrous root systems not root or container bound.

E. Container stock (1 gal., 5 gal., 15 gal. boxes) shall have grown in containers for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years. No container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth, when taken from the container, shall be planted, except upon special approval. No trees with damaged roots or broken balls shall be planted.

F. Pruning shall not be done, prior to delivery, except by written approval by the Owner’s Representative.

G. Inspection of plant materials shall be a responsibility of the Contractor and where necessary the Contractor shall have secured permits or certificates prior to delivery of plants to site.

H. Protection: Plants shall be handled, stored and maintained to prevent drying out, wind burn, wilting or root or stem damage. Evidence of these conditions will be grounds for plant replacement.

I. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval or rejection at the project site at any time before or during the progress of work for size, variety, condition, latent defects and injuries. Rejected plants shall be removed from the project site immediately.

J. Substitutions will not be permitted except that if proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety and cost. All substitutions subject to Owner Representative’s written approval.

K. Quantities shall be furnished as needed to complete work as shown on Drawings.

L. The Owner’s Representative reserves the right to inspect root condition of any species, particularly those grown from seed, and if found defective, to reject the plants represented by the defective sample.

M. Identify plant species or varieties correctly on legible, weather-proof labels attached securely to the job site. There shall be a minimum of one labeled plant for each five plants in a lot.

N. Groundcover plants shall be healthy, vigorous rooted cuttings grown in flats until transplanting.

O. Hydroseed/Stolon Material: Not used

P. Pre-emergence herbicide shall be Surflan, Treflan, Dymid or equal.

Q. Weed contact spray shall be Phytar 560, Broadside, Round-Up or equal.


PLANTING 32 95 00-10

2.5 BARK MULCH

A. All shrub and groundcover areas shall be covered with fine-size nitrolized fir bark, 2 inches minimum deep, as designated on plans. Fir bark shall be screened bark. Mulch shall contain no Eucalyptus.

2.6 JUTE MATTING

A. Not used.

2.7 CONCRETE MOWCURBS

A. Mowcurbs shall be Class A concrete with No. 3 rebar as noted on plans and details to separate lawn from groundcover. See Section 32 1600 Curbs & Gutters

2.8 TREE STAND PIPES

A. Tree stand pipes shall be 4 inches rigid, perforated PVC pipe wrapped with filter fabric and placed upright in augured hole surrounded with gravel; one per tree. Keep stand pipe free of gravel to facilitate monitoring of water level at bottom of pit and cover with black plastic.

2.9 STRUCTURAL SOIL

A. Gravel:

B. Soil:

2.10 FILTER FABRIC

A. Filter fabric at drain pipe shall be non-woven polypropelene with a weight of 4.5 ounces per square yard, grab strength of 120 pounds, tensile elongation of 55%, burst strength of 210 PSI, tear strength of 50 pounds and puncture strength of 70 pounds.

2.11 ROOT BARRIERS

A. Biological root control device as manufactured by Biobarrier: 1-800-352-6776, or equal (no known equal). Width shall be 19.5 inches.

2.12 TREE GRATES: As per plan.

2.13 DECOMPOSED GRANITE

A. Provide 3” min. of material of 1/4” minus fines, light brown to gold in color. Decomposed granite shall conform to R-value test of 73 min., and sand equivalent test of 30 min.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Beginning of installation indicates Contractor’s acceptance of existing conditions.



B. Clearing and Grubbing: Prior to tillage operations, vegetation growth shall be grubbed, raked and cleared from the site. The ground surface shall be cleared of material which might hinder grading, tillage, planting and maintenance operations and be disposed of off the site.

3.2 SOIL CONDITIONING, FERTILIZING AND ROTOTILLING

A. Grade shall ensure positive drainage of site, directing surface drainage toward curbs, gutters, swales and drains; away from building foundations, free of irregularities and depressions. Provide a minimum of 2% slope over planted areas and 1% slope over hardscape. Provide a minimum of 2% slope away from all building foundations.

B. Finish grade below adjacent paving, curbs, or headers shall be 2-inches in shrub or ground cover areas.

C. After rough grading, prior to adding soil amendments, the Contractor shall provide analysis of imported and existing soil obtained from three (3) soil samples each from locations as approved by Owner’s Representative. The samples shall be analyzed by an approved testing laboratory and amendments applied as outlined in the soils report. The contract prices shall be adjusted to reflect any differences between the amendments as specified in the agronomy test.

D. After the areas have been graded, all planting areas shall be conditioned and amended in accordance with soil test analysis recommendations. Soil conditioning and amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be thoroughly scarified to an average depth of 6 inches by rototilling a minimum of 2 alternating passes: (The following quantities and reates are for bid purposes only.)

Soil Conditioner 4 Cu. Yd. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Soil Sulphur 20 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Iron Sulphate 20 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Gypsum 100 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft. Pre-Plant Fertilizer 20 Lbs. Per 1,000 Sq. Ft.

E. Contractor shall procure new soil analysis from approved soil testing laboratory, from (3) location on site to be approved by client representative. Contractor shall reapply amendments and conditioners, or leaching, or any other action as recommended by soil test laboratory’s recommendations.

F. Fertilizer (pre-plant) shall be incorporated into the top 6 inches of finish grade. Fertilizer shall be applied after leaching operation.

*Caution: Iron Sulphate will stain concrete, granite and other paved surfaces. Avoid contact between these surfaces and any soil mix containing iron sulphate. After iron sulphate application, broom all surfaces free of material before any water application, including impending rains.

G. Soil Preparation Procedure for all Landscaped Areas: 1. After landscape areas have been graded, compacted and sloped to drain as

shown and specified, Contractor shall accept the areas for landscape soil preparation.



2. Areas that have not been graded and will be planted shall be thoroughly irrigated for a minimum of two weeks or until weeds germinate and vigorous weed growth is evident. Apply contact herbicide per manufacturers specifications. Repeat process if required by Owner’s Representative until weed kill is achieved.

3. All areas shall be deep ripped to a depth of 12 inches and all rocks 1 inch or larger, construction debris, soil from previously paved areas shall be removed from the top 8 inches of soil. The thoroughness of rock removal shall be approved by the Owner’s Representative prior to incorporation of amendments. Accepted topsoil shall be imported to equal volume of rock removed. (See Topsoil Specification).

4. Incorporate Agricultural Gypsum and soil sulphur to a depth of 8-12 inches. 5. Deep Water Leaching: Due to the type of soil in the site, it is mandatory that

soils be leached and that the soil be re-tested for suitability prior to incorporating nutritional amendments. All areas shall be leached two times to a depth of 8 inches each time. Soil test must be approved by an approved, reputable soil laboratory and meet the following requirements prior to planting:

ECe - maximum 3.1 pH - maximum 7.50 - minimum 6.00

6. Soil testing labs: Agri Service Soil and Plant Lab, 2142-B Industrial Court, Vista, CA 92083, (619)727-5451; Soil and Plant Laboratory, 421 South Lyon Street, Santa Ana, CA 92107; Wilbur Ellis, 7982 Irvine Boulevard, East Irvine, CA 92650,(800) 792-5983 or (714) 551-0363, or equal.

7. Reapplication of soil amendment, conditioning and leaching or other actions shall be required by the Contractor if tests so recommend. Expense of test, reapplication of soil amendment and leaching operation shall be borne by the Contractor.

8. Add nutritional amendments to a depth of 6 inches. The thoroughness and completeness of the rototilling and incorporation of the soil conditioners/amendments shall be as approved by the Owner’s Representative. Slopes 2:1 and steeper, or as per the Drawings, omit soil conditioner application of tilling.

9. Deep water leaching shall be done prior to the application of the commercial fertilizer 1-10-10.

10. Grades: Planting areas which have been soil conditioned and/or graded shall be maintained in a true and even condition prior to planting. Contractor shall include repairs to previously graded areas, if disruption of these areas should occur prior to end of Maintenance Period.

11. Settling of Soil: When grading, deep ripping, topsoiling, addition of soil conditioning and tilling have been accomplished, areas shall be compacted and settled by heavy irrigation to a minimum depth of 12 inches without causing erosion or sloughing of soils. Soil tests will be required after leaching to assure conformance to soil test results.

12. Final Grading of Planting Areas: Planting areas shall be free of rocks larger than 1 inch with no more than 5% by volume of rocks smaller than 1 inch. All depressions, voids, erosion, settled trenches and excavations shall be filled with approved topsoil or amended soil and/or removed by the Contractor leaving a smooth, even finish grade. Final grade shall be as shown and specified, and in conformance the following directives: a. Drainage away from buildings shall be maintained. b. Molding and rounding of grades shall be provided at all changes in slope.

Blend slopes into level areas.



c. Grades shall be 2 inches below adjacent paved areas and sidewalks and flush with valve boxes, mowing strips, clean-outs, drains, manholes, etc., and shall have a minimum slope of 1% to drains.

d. Maintain grades within a tolerance of +/- 0.1 foot of grades shown on the Civil Engineering plans. Open lawn areas may be within +/- 0.5 foot of grades shown on Civil plans.

e. No planting shall be installed until approval has been given by the Owner’s Representative.

f. Contractor shall install accepted topsoil to bring finish grades to 2” below tops of curbs sidewalks and driveways, sloped in accordance with grading and drainage specifications.

g. Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does not cause erosion or sloughing of soils.

h. All depressions, voids, erosion scars and settled trenches generated by the deep watering shall be filled with approved topsoil or amended soil and brought to finish grade.

3.3 FINISH GRADING

A. Finish grades shall be indicated on Civil drawings.

B. Finish grades shall be measured as the final water compacted and settled surface grades and shall be within +/- 0.1 foot of the spot elevations and grade lines indicated.

C. Finish grades shall be measured at the top surface of surface materials.

D. Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all changes in slope.

E. All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces resulting from tillage, rototilling and all other operations shall be leveled and floated out before planting operations are initiated.

F. The Contractor shall take every precaution to protect and avoid damage to sprinkler heads, irrigation lines and other underground utilities during his grading and conditioning operations.

G. Final finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site with all surface drainage away from buildings, walls and toward roadways, drains and catch basins.

H. Final grades shall be acceptable to the Owner’s Representative before planting operations will be allowed to begin.

I. Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than two (2) percent surface slope for positive drainage.

J. Areas shown on plans as turf areas to receive soil preparation and conditioning (amend and fine grade soil) shall have all stones removed from the surface of the lawn bed.

3.4 PLANTING

A. The layout of locations for plants and outlines of groundcover to be planted shall be approved on the site by the Owner’s Representative prior to their planting. All such locations shall be checked for possible interference with existing underground piping prior to excavation of holes. If underground construction or utility lines are encountered in the



excavation of planting areas, other locations for the planting may be selected by the Owner’s Representative. Damage to existing utilities shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Planting Trees and Shrubs: 1. All excavated holes shall have vertical sides with roughened surfaces and shall

be of the minimum sizes indicated on drawings. Holes shall be, in all cases, large enough to permit handling and planting without injury or breakage of root balls or roots. Center of planting pit shall not exceed depth of soil on container, measured from exposed root flare of plant to bottom of container.

2. Excavation shall include the stripping and staking of all acceptable soil encountered within the areas to be excavated for plant pits and planting beds. Protect all areas that are to be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily stacked pending its reuse for the filling of holes, pits and beds.

3. Remove nursery stakes and ties from all container stock. Maintain side growth on all trees.

4. Loosen roots and soil at edges of root ball of plant being installed and mix with native soil.

5. Excess soil generated from the planting holes shall be spread on the site as approved by the Owner’s Representative.

6. All used cans shall be removed to the storage area or from the site daily. 7. The plants shall be planted at approved locations with the heretofore specified

soil planting backfill & amended soils. 8. The plants shall be placed in the planting pits on the backfill material which has

been hand-tamped and water settled to the root ball base levels prior to the placement of the plants. After setting the plants, the remaining backfill material shall be carefully tamped and settled around each root ball to fill all voids.

9. Each tree and shrub shall be placed in the center of the hole and shall be set plumb and held rigidly in position until the planting back fill has been tamped from around each root ball.

10. All plants shall be set at such a level, that after settling, the root flare shall be set as specified on the contract documents.

11. Planting tablets shall be placed in each planting hole at the following rates:

One (1)-5 gram tablet per liner and flat size plant. One (1)-21 gram tablet per gallon container. Three (3)-21 gram tablets per 5 gallon container. Four (4)-21 gram tablets per 15 gallon container. One (1)-21 gram tablet per each 4 inch of box size.

12. No plant will be accepted if the root ball is broken or cracked, either before, during or after the process of installation.

13. All plants shall be thoroughly watered into the full depth of each planting hole immediately after planting, and shall be watered by hand as required to promote establishment.

14. All trees, 15 gallon and larger, shall be staked with two wood stakes, driven into the ground. The stakes shall be driven in plumb and secure. Special care shall be taken that the driving in of the stakes does not damage the tree root ball. Tree ties shall be fastened to each tree and stake by looping figure eights with the inside diameter of the tie at two or three times the diameter of the tree and by tacking the back of the tie to the stake (See Detailed Drawings).

15. The staking method shall be accomplished in such a manner as to insure the proper and healthy growth and the safety of the plants, property and public.

16. Plants shall not be placed within 12 inches of sprinkler heads.



17. Shrubs shown in plant areas shall be under planted with groundcover shown by adjacent symbol to within 12 inches of main plant stem.

18. The Contractor shall be responsible for all surfaces and subsurface drainage required which may affect his guarantee of the trees, shrubs and vines.

19. Pruning after planting shall be required on all trees and shrubs when necessary to provide the specified or approved standard shapes, form and/or sizes characteristic to each plant. Pruning may include thinning, topping and/or cutting and shall be as approved by the Owner’s Representative. Cuts over 3/4 inch in diameter shall be painted with an approved tree sealant.

20. All trees 24 inches box and larger shall be spotted in place prior to digging of the hole.

21. Install vines as per plans and details.

C. Groundcovers: 1. Groundcovers shall be planted in the areas indicated on the Drawings. The

groundcover plants shall be rooted cuttings grown in flats and shall remain in those flats until transplanting.

2. All groundcover plants shall be planted with soil around roots in staggered rows, evenly spaced at the intervals called out on the Drawings.

3. The groundcover plants shall be planted sufficiently deep to cover all roots and shall be immediately watered after planting until the entire area is soaked to the full depth of all holes.

4. The groundcover planting areas shall be hand-smoothed after planting to provide an even, smooth final finish grade. All groundcover areas to receive 2 inches layer fir bark mulch.

3.5 CONCRETE MOWCURB

A. Concrete mow curbs shall be installed as per plan and details.

3.6 STANDPIPES AT TREES

A. Install PVC standpipe at all trees. Wrap standpipes with filter fabric and cap standpipe with plastic drain grate, spot glue to pipe to reduce vandalism.

3.7 FREE ZONE

A. Contractor shall install a planting and irrigation "Free Zone" at the base of all buildings to minimize water contact with the building.

3.8 HERBICIDE APPLICATION

A. Pre-emergence herbicide shall be applied to groundcover areas only and in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. Do not apply in lawn or hydroseed areas. Owner’s Representative shall be notified and present at the time of application.

3.9 BARK MULCH

A. Install 2 inches layer in all shrub and groundcover areas. Do not install on slope areas 3:1 or greater.

3.10 JUTE MATTING

A. Not used.



3.11 ROOT BARRIER

A. Install root barriers for all trees located within six (6) feet of paving. Install root barrier along the edge of paving for a distance of ten (10) feet in each direction from the tree for a total of twenty (20) feet per tree. Where trees are closer than twenty feet apart a single continuous piece of root barrier shall be used. Overlap root barrier a minimum of twelve (12) inches at splices. Root barriers shall be installed at a minimum depth of (30) inches. Top of root barriers shall be set at 2” below adjacent paved surfaces.

3.12 CLEAN UP

A. As project progresses, Contractor shall maintain all areas in a neat manner and remove unsightly debris as necessary. After completion of project, Contractor shall remove all debris and containers used in accomplishing work. The Contractor shall sweep and clean all sidewalks, asphalt and concrete areas adjacent to plantings.

3.13 TREE GRATES Per manufacturer’s specifications.

3.14 STRUCTURAL SOIL

A. As shown on plans.

END OF SECTION

KSA Design Studio Inc. April 1,, 2018 3rd Street Tour Bus Station 05.9881.000 Issue for 50% CD West Third Street Beverly Hills, CA 90210

PLANT PROTECTION PRUNING 32 95 10 - 1

SECTION 32 95 10 - PLANT PROTECTION AND PRUNING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Protect existing plant material specified on the drawings during the duration of the construction period in a healthful state, free from damage or harm as the result of any work performed.

1.2 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Prior to construction of any nature on the site, Contractor shall call for a site meeting with the Owner’s Representative. The purpose of the meeting shall be to establish the conditions of all existing plant material to be preserved upon receipt of the site by the Contractor. Failure to call for said meeting implies acceptance by the Contractor of plant material to be preserved in its existing condition.

B. An irrigation system and/or quick coupler valve will be fully operational so that plant material can be regularly watered.

C. Coordinate and cooperate with other work to enable the work to proceed as rapidly and efficiently as possible.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. The work of this section includes all labor, materials, equipment, transportation and services necessary to complete the work in this section as shown on the drawings and as specified herein, including but not necessarily limited to, the following: 1. Protection and welfare of all existing plant material within the Contract Limits

which is noted to remain, including trimming, cabling, and repair of such plant material as necessary and all labor, materials and equipment necessary.

2. Perform all pruning operations. 3. Submit plant material maintenance plan before commencing landscape work for

review by the Owner’s Representative.

1.4 RELATED WORK

A. Clearing and Grubbing. Section 31 1000

B. Irrigation. Section 32 8400

C. Landscape. Section 32 9300

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. “Injury” is defined, without limitation, as any bruising, scarring, tearing, or breaking of roots, branches, or trunk.

B. “Dripline” is defined as the outermost limits of the tree or shrub canopy.

C. “Certified Arborist” is a consulting arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture.




A. Reference Standards: 1. International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) “Guide for Plant Appraisal” prepared

by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers (CTLA). 2. “Cabling, Bracing and Guying Standards for Shade Trees”, as published by the

National Arborist Association (NAA), 174 TR 101, Bedford, New Hampshire.

B. Qualification of Workman: 1. Trimming and pruning of trees shall be performed only under the direction of a

certified Arborist.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Pruning materials

B. Fencing materials.

C. Maintenance plan.

1.8 GUARANTEE

A. During the Guarantee to Repair Period specified in the General Conditions the Contractor shall be liable for damages to all trees covered by the provisions of this Section. Compensation to the Owner shall be as outlined in section 3.04.

B. Contractor will not be held responsible for damages due to vandalism or freak acts of nature during the guarantee period. Immediately report such conditions to the Owner's Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FENCING MATERIALS

A. Fencing-11 gauge galvanized 6' high chain-link fence with galvanized steel posts at 10' o.c. minimum.

2.2 PRUNING MATERIALS

A. Pruning materials shall be in accordance with current horticultural practices.

B. Pruning sterilant shall be Physan 20 Fertilome Type A, or diluted bleach.


3.1 FENCING

A. Fencing-A continuous 6' high temporary chain-link fence will be erected around trees with a caliper of 4” or larger at the dripline, in order to prevent soil compaction, limb damage, or the accidental introduction of toxic materials into the root zone. Fence can be erected around groups of adjacent trees where possible. Otherwise, fence to be erected around individual tree.

B. The fence will be removed only at the end of construction, as approved by the Owner’s Representative.



3.2 PLANT MATERIAL PROTECTION

A. Provide protection for all plant materials designated to be retained. Contractor is responsible for replacing damaged plant life with approved equivalent.

B. New and existing plant materials shall not be allowed to deteriorate and shall be maintained in a healthy and vigorous condition during the course of construction and maintenance period.

C. During the course of construction the Contractor shall take all necessary precautions, as outlined herein, to protect existing plant materials to be preserved from injury and death. Protection shall be given to the roots, trunk, and foliage.

D. The Contractor shall conduct operations continually to completion, unless weather conditions are prohibitive.

E. Provide ample water supply of potable quality and sufficient quantity for all operations required under this Section.

F. Trees subject to the provisions of this Section, which have been injured shall be repaired immediately by a certified Arborist. Repairs shall include removal of rough edges, sprung bark and severely injured branches as directed by the Arborist.

G. Necessary measures shall be taken to maintain healthy living conditions for existing plant materials to be preserved. Such measures shall include monthly washing of leaves for the removal of dust, regular irrigation, root feeding, etc.

H. Tree protection fencing shall be installed for the protection of existing trees to be preserved. No construction, demolition, or work of any nature will be allowed within the fenced area without prior written approval by the Owner’s Representative. 1. Approval by the Owner’s Representative for work within the fenced area shall

not release the Contractor from any of the provisions specified herein for the protection of existing trees to be preserved.

2. During the course of construction of approved work within the fence area, no roots shall be cut without prior written approval by the Owner’s Representative.

I. During construction, the existing site surface drainage patterns shall not be altered within the area of the drip line of existing plant materials.

J. Contractor shall not alter the existing water table within the area of the drip line of existing plant materials.

K. Do not permit the following within the drip line of any existing tree or shrub to be preserved: 1. Storage or parking of automobiles or other vehicles. 2. Stockpiling of building materials, refuse or excavated materials. 3. Skinning or bruising of bark. 4. Use of trees as support posts, power poles, or signposts; anchorage for ropes,

guy wires, or power lines; or other similar functions. 5. Dumping of poisonous materials on or around plant materials and roots. Such

materials include but are not limited to paint, petroleum products, dirty water, or other deleterious materials.

6. Cutting roots by utility trenching, foundation digging; placement of curbs and trenches, and other miscellaneous excavation without prior written approval by the Owner’s Representative.

7. Damage to the trunk, limbs, or foliage caused by maneuvering vehicles or stacking material or equipment to close to the plant.



8. Compaction of the root area by movement of trucks or grading machines; storage of equipment, gravel, earth fill, or construction supplies; etc.

9. Excessive water or heat from equipment, utility line construction, or burning of trash under or near shrubs or trees.

10. Damage to root system from flooding, erosion, and excessive wetting and drying resulting from watering and other operations.

L. Excavation Around Trees 1. Excavation within the drip lines of trees shall be done only where absolutely

necessary, under the direction of a Certified Arborist and with prior approval from the Owner’s Representative.

2. Where trenching for utilities is required within driplines, tunneling under and around roots shall be by hand digging. Main lateral roots and taproots shall not be cut. Smaller roots that interfere with installation of new work may be cut with prior approval from certified Arborist.

3. Where excavation of new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand excavation shall be employed to minimize damage to root system. Roots shall be relocated in backfill areas wherever possible. If large, main lateral roots are encountered, they shall be exposed beyond excavation limits as required to bend, and relocate without breaking. If encountered immediately adjacent to location of new construction and relocation is not practical, roots shall be cut approximately 6 inches back from new construction under the direction of a certified Arborist.

4. Exposed roots shall not be allowed to dry out before permanent backfill is placed. Temporary earth cover shall be provided, or roots shall be packed with wet peat moss or four layers of wet, untreated burlap and temporarily supported and protected from damage until permanently relocated and covered with backfill. The cover over the roots shall be wetted to the point of runoff daily.

5. Branching structure shall be thinned in accordance with National Arborists Association “Pruning Standards and Principles” to balance loss of root system caused by damage or cutting of root system. Thinning shall not exceed 30 percent of existing branching structure.

3.3 TREE TRIMMING

A. A Certified Arborist, shall be engaged to direct removal of branches from trees if necessary to protect the health of the tree or if required to clear for construction.

B. In company with the Owner’s Representative, Owner and a certified Arborist, ascertain the limbs and roots which are to be trimmed. Clearly mark them to designate the approved point of cutting.

C. Dead and damaged trees that are determined by the Certified Arborist to be incapable of restoration to normal growth pattern shall be removed.

D. Cut evenly, using proper tools and skilled workmen, to achieve neat severance with the least possible damage to the tree.

E. In the case of root cuts, apply wet burlap or other protection, approved as noted herein, to prevent drying out, and maintain in a wet condition as long as necessary for temporary protection.

3.4 REPAIR COMPENSATION

A. Damage: 1. Damage to existing tree crowns or roots over 1” in diameter shall be immediately

reported to the Owner’s Representative.



2. A Certified Arborist shall direct all repairs to trees. Repairs shall be made promptly after damage occurs to prevent progressive deterioration of damaged trees. Repairs shall be at the Contractor’s expense.

B. Irreparable Damage: Any tree to be protected which is irreparably damaged owing to the Contractor’s negligence or failure to provide adequate protection, shall be compensated for in accordance with the following schedule of values using the “tree caliper” method (greatest trunk diameter, measured 18 inches above the ground): 1. For trees with diameters up to and including 6 inches, compensation shall be the

actual cost of replacement with item similar in species, size, and shape, including: a. Actual cost of item boxed out of the ground. b. Transportation or delivery of boxed item to site. c. Planting and staking. d. Maintenance, including watering, fertilizing, pruning, pest control, and

other care to bring replacement to same general condition of original item.

2. For trunks up to: 7”..............................$ 1,200 8”.............................. 1,700 9”.............................. 2,200 10”............................. 2,600 11”............................. 3,100 12”............................. 3,600 13”............................. 4,100 14”............................. 4,600 15”............................. 5,000 16”............................. 5,500 17”............................. 6,000 18” and over, add for each caliper inch.... $600

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Plant material will be maintained throughout the duration of the construction period in a healthful manner. Plant material identified which requires special pruning, insect control, fertilization or other remedial health action will be treated during this period. Methods and rates of pesticide and fertilizer application will be reviewed by the Owner’s Representative prior to approval.

B. Watering: Plant materials will be watered on a regular basis, at a rate consistent with their particular requirements. Verification of the proposed watering schedule shall be reviewed by the Owner’s Representative prior to commencement of the maintenance. 1. The maintenance of the plant materials shall comply with standard horticultural

practice for the correct watering, fertilizing, pruning and spraying of the specimen boxed trees.

2. The maintenance and quality of the plant materials shall be subject to monthly checks. The dates of these checks shall be outlined in the Owner’s Representative's field notification relating to the establishment of the plant maintenance period. Additional checks shall be scheduled as determined by the Owner’s Representative.

3. Contractor shall be responsible for performing periodic inspections of existing plant materials to be protected and relocated throughout the construction period, and submit written proposals to the Owner’s Representative for additional maintenance work as may be required to ensure the health and general well-being of the plant material. Contractor shall retain, at the direction of the Owner’s Representative additional specialists as may be required to perform this work.



C. Contractor shall keep plant material free from weeds and debris at all times.


A. General: The Contractor guarantees the protection of all plant material included as part of this work, in a healthful manner during the duration of the construction period. Destruction of, or significant damage to, any or all of the plant materials to be protected, as determined by the Owner’s Representative, will result in compensation by the Contractor of 3-36" box trees, installed on the site, for each existing tree damaged.

END OF SECTION

City of Beverly Hills – 3rd Street Tour Bus Station Concrete Paving 32 13 13 -1

SECTION 32 13 13

CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes exterior Portland cement concrete paving for the following:

1. Curbs and gutters 2. Walkways 3. Driveways 3. Concrete pavement 4. Concrete wheel stops

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section 02300: Earthwork for subgrade preparation, grading and base course. 2. Section 03300: Cast-in-Place Concrete for general building applications of concrete.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide concrete pavement according to the materials, workmanship, and other applicable

requirements of the following standard specifications: 1. Reference Specification: Perform all work in accordance with applicable provisions of

"Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction", 2009; and City of Beverly Hills Standard drawings. Unless otherwise noted, mention herein of section numbers refers to sections of the Reference Specification. Where Reference Specification refers to "Agency", substitute the word "Owner". Where Reference Specification refers to "Engineer", substitute the word "Architect". Where Reference Specification is in conflict with these Specifications, these Specifications shall govern.

2. Measurement and payment provisions and safety program submittals included in Reference Specifications do not apply to this Section.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01

Specification Sections. B. Design mixes for each class of concrete. Include revised mix proportions when characteristics

of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

C. Description of Methods and Sequence of Placement. For each type of specially-finished

concrete provide description of methods and sequence of placement.

D. Submit manufacturer's product data for the following: 1. Form release agent. 2. Concrete coloring additive. 3. Prefabricated control joint. 4. Preformed joint filler. 5. Sealants. 6. Slip plane joint. 7. Concrete mix design.


E. Submit two (2) 12” x 12” mockup samples of colored concrete in colors selected by the Architect.


A. Concrete Standards: Comply with provisions of the following standards, except where more

stringent requirements are indicated. 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." 4. Standard Specifications for PWC (Green Book) latest edition, section 201-1.

B. Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products

complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment. C. Paving work, base course etc., shall be done only after excavation and construction work,

which may damage them, have been completed. Damage caused during construction shall be repaired before acceptance.

D. Existing paving area shall, if damaged or removed during the course of this project, be

repaired or replaced under this section of the specification. Workmanship and materials for such repair and replacement, except as otherwise noted, shall match as closely as possible those employed in existing work.

E. Pavement, base, or subbase shall not be placed on a muddy subgrade. F. Provide control joints as required to construct 100 sq. ft. maximum panel sizes. Provide

sawcut joints. Note on shop drawings. G. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform materials

evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other

construction activities. 1.7 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. The owner reserves the right to inspect and test paving and associated work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS

A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other acceptable panel-type

materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces. 1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves of a 100-foot or less radius.

B. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form-release agent with a maximum of

350 g/L volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Debond Form Coating, L & M Construction Chemicals. b. Crete-Lease 880 VOC, Cresset Chemical Company.


2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. Reinforcing Bars and Tie Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 40 for #3 bars and Grade 60 for bars

larger than #3, deformed. B. Plain, Cold-Drawn Steel Wire: ASTM A 82. C. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends

square and free of burrs. D. Dowel Sleeves: Speed Dowel, Aztec Concrete Accessories, Inc. E. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt

joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt.

F. Supports for Reinforcement: Chairs, spacers, dowel bar supports and other devices for

spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and dowels in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications. 1. Use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base material will not support

chair legs.

G. Welded wire fabric reinforcement shall conform to the applicable requirements of ASTM A185. Fabric reinforcement shall be furnished in flat sheets. Fabric reinforcement in rolls will not be permitted.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II

1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project. Coordinate with Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place Concrete."

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4M non-reactive, and as follows. Provide

aggregates from a single source. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-inch. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances that cause spalling. 3. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce

concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect.

C. Water: Potable. D. Admixtures: Comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place

Concrete." 1. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride or chloride ions.

2.4 COLOR ADMIXTURE

A. Refer to Architectural plans for concrete color. B. Color admixture shall be suitable for flatwork concrete and shall meet or exceed the

requirements set by Portland Cement Association (PCA) and ATSM C 494. B. Color admixture shall be of a type and quality which will not adversely affect workability,

setting, or strength of concrete. Color pigments shall consist of chemically inert, non-fading, alkali-fast mineral oxides, finely ground and specially prepared for the use in both cement and mortar. Admixture shall not contain calcium chloride.

C. Color admixture shall be Chromix admixture, manufactured by L.M. Scofield Company, Los

Angles, CA 90040.


D. Mix design shall conform to manufacturer's recommendations, and directions of the Architect

to achieve proposed color. Strictly monitor additive / cement ratio throughout job to ensure uniform color.

2.5 CURING MATERIALS

A. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq.

yd., complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171.

1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. White burlap-polyethylene sheet.

C. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B. Moisture loss

not more than 0.55 kg./sq. meter in 72 hours when applied at a rate of 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350

g/L. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. L & M Cure R, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. b. 1100-Clear, W.R. Meadows, Inc.

3. Do not use sodium silicate type curing agents. D. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab

surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Eucobar; Euclid Chemical Co. b. E-Con; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. c. Confilm; Master Builders, Inc.

2.6 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Bonding Agent: Acrylic or styrene butadiene, complying with ASTM C 1059, Type 2. B. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for dry or damp surfaces.

Provide material type, grade, and class to suit requirements. C. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1. Bonding Agent: b. SBR Latex; Euclid Chemical Co. c. Daraweld C; W.R. Grace & Co. d. Everbond; L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. e. Acryl-Set; Master Builders Inc.

2. Epoxy Adhesive: a. Burke Epoxy M.V., The Burke Co. b. Concresive Standard Liquid; Master Builders, Inc. c. Rezi-Weld 1000; W.R. Meadows, Inc.

D. Concrete Sealer: Water-based, deep penetrating, non-staining, non-darkening silane micro emulsion. 1. Positive chloride-ion screening, prevents water intrusion, minimizes rebar corrosion and

potential concrete spalling, and protects against damaging effects of alkalis and other contaminants.

2. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of 350 g/L.

3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:


a. Pentane WB, L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc. This product is intended to establish the characteristics and level of quality intended for this Project.

D. Expansion and Isolation Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, cellulosic fiber.

2.7 CONCRETE MIX

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of normal-weight concrete by either

laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. 1. Do not use the Owner's field quality-control testing agency as the independent testing

agency. B. Proportion mixes according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301 to provide normal-weight concrete with

the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength (28-Day): 2500 psi for concrete for non-vehicular sidewalks;

3200 psi for concrete for traffic areas, curbs and gutters. 2. The minimum cement content shall be 5-1/4 sacks per cubic yard. 3. The maximum concrete slump shall be 3 inches, plus or minus 1/2 inch, for all walks;

and 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch for all other Portland cement concrete paving. 4. Water/Cement Ratios:

a. 0.5 maximum for concrete for pavement and site flatwork. b. 0.45 maximum for all other concrete.

C. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when

characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant.

D. Admixtures: Comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-In-Place

Concrete". 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements and with ASTM C 94.

1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2.9 GROUT

A. Grout shall be mixed in the proportions of one part Portland cement to two parts sand, by volume. Only sufficient water shall be used to enable grout to barely hold its shape when squeezed into a ball in the hand. Sand for grout shall be "Fine Aggregate", conforming to ASTM C 33.

B. Non-shrink grout shall be pre-mixed non-shrinking, high strength grout. Compressive strength in 28 days shall be 5,000 psi minimum, but in no case less than the specified strength of the adjacent concrete. Manufacturer shall provide evidence that the material meets the requirements of the COE CRD-C 621 (558). Grout permanently exposed to view shall be non-oxidizing; metallic grout may be used in other locations. 1. Non-shrink grout shall be one of the following or approved equal: Manufacturer Product Gifford-Hill Co. Supreme Master Builders Co. Embeco U.S. Grout Corporation Five Star Grout


2.10 SANDBLASTING MATERIAL

A. Material for sandblasting shall be 16/20 mesh sand. 2.11 HERBICIDE TREATMENT

A. Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by Environmental Protection Agency.

Provide granular, liquid, or wettable powder form. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers

offering products that may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Ciba-Geigy Corp. b. Dow Chemical U.S.A. c. E.I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Inc. d. FMC Corp. e. Thompson-Hayward Chemical Co. f. U.S. Borax and Chemical Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Areas to be paved shall be compacted and brought to subgrade elevation per soils report before work of this section is performed. Final fine grading, filling, and compaction of areas to receive paving, as required to form a firm, uniform, accurate, and unyielding subgrade at required elevations and to required lines, shall be done under this Section.

B. Existing subgrade material which will not readily compact as required shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory materials. Additional materials needed to bring subgrade to required line and grade and to replace unsuitable material removed shall be material conforming to this Section.

C. Subgrade of areas to be paved shall be re-compacted per soils report.

D. Excavation required in pavement subgrade shall be completed before fine grading and final compaction of subgrade are performed. Where excavation must be performed in completed subgrade, base, or pavement, subsequent backfill and compaction shall be performed per soils report.

E. Areas being graded or compacted shall be kept shaped and drained during construction. Ruts greater than or equal to 2 in. deep in subgrade, shall be graded out, reshaped as required, and re-compacted before placing pavement.

F. Materials shall not be stored or stockpiled on subgrade.

G. Disposal of debris and other material excavated under this section, and material unsuitable for or in excess of requirements for completing work of this section shall be disposed of off-site.

H. Prepared subgrade will be inspected by Soils Engineer. Subgrade shall be approved before installation of gravel base course. Disturbance to subgrade caused by inspection procedures shall be repaired under this section of the specification.

I. Proof-roll subgrade or base surface prepared by others to check for unstable areas and verify

need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.

J. Herbicide Treatment: Apply chemical weed control agent in strict compliance with

manufacturer's recommended dosages and application instructions. Apply to compacted, dry subgrade prior to installation of base course.


3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for paving to

required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Check completed formwork and screeds for grade and alignment to following tolerances:

1. Top of Forms: Not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face on Longitudinal Axis: Not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet.

C. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation

from concrete without damage. 3.3 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for

"Placing Reinforcing Bars" for placing and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, or other bond-reducing materials.

Where there is delay in placing concrete after reinforcement is in place, bars shall be re inspected and cleaned when necessary.

C. Any bar showing cracks after bending shall be discarded. D. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during

concrete placement. Maintain minimum cover to reinforcement. E. Install fabricated bar mats in lengths as long as practicable. Handle units to keep them flat

and free of distortions. Straighten bends, kinks, and other irregularities or replace units as required before placement. Set mats for a minimum 2-inch overlap to adjacent mats.

F. After forms have been coated with form release agent, but before concrete is placed,

reinforcing steel anchors shall be securely wired in the exact position called for, and shall be maintained in that position until concrete is placed and compacted. Chair bars and supports shall be provided in a number and arrangement satisfactory to the Architect.

3.4 JOINTS A. General: Construct contraction, construction, and isolation joints true to line with faces

perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. 1. When joining existing paving, place transverse joints to align with previously placed

joints, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Make joints, including sawed joints, full depth required and from edge to edge of paving.

B. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas

as shown on Drawings. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 of the concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form contraction joints in fresh concrete by grooving and finishing each

edge of joint with a radiused jointer tool. 2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof

abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch-wide joints into hardened concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before development of random contraction cracks.

3. Inserts: Form contraction joints by inserting pre-molded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strips into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with paving surface. Radius each joint edge with a jointer tool. Carefully remove strips or caps of two-piece assemblies after concrete has hardened. Clean groove of loose debris.


C. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than 1/2 hour, unless paving terminates at isolation joints. 1. Continue reinforcement across construction joints unless indicated otherwise. Do not

continue reinforcement through sides of strip paving unless indicated. 2. Provide tie bars at sides of paving strips where indicated. 3. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete.

D. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint filler strips abutting concrete curbs,

catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, walks, other fixed objects, and where indicated. 1. Locate expansion joints at intervals of 50 feet, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than 1/2 inch or more than 1 inch

below finished surface where joint sealant is indicated. Place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface when no joint sealant is required.

3. Furnish joint fillers in one-piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together.

4. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal, plastic, or other temporary preformed cap. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint.

E. Install dowel bars and support assemblies at joints where indicated. Lubricate or asphalt-coat

one half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. F. Where spacing is not shown, locate expansion joints at 10-foot maximum spacing. G. Where plastic "zip strips" are used to construct concrete joints, cut and remove, as a minimum,

the top 1/4 inch of these strips after concrete has cured, and coordinate installation of joint filler, if shown on the Drawings.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing

steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. Moisten subgrade or base to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is

placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at the required finish elevation and alignment.

C. Comply with requirements and with ACI 304R for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing

concrete. D. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not

push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place. E. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially

hardened concrete surfaces. F. Consolidate concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading,

rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures to consolidate concrete complying with ACI 309R. 1. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an

internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use only square-faced shovels for hand-spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocating reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices.

G. Screed paved surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to form a

smooth surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.


H. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not acceptable, remove and replace with formed concrete.

I. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306R and as follows. Protect

concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C),

uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or

chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. J. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete complying with ACI 305R and as specified when hot

weather conditions exist. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to

below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING

A. Float Finish: Begin floating when bleed water sheen has disappeared and the concrete

surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet as determined by a 10-foot-long straightedge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to a uniform granular texture. 1. Burlap Finish: Drag a seamless strip of damp burlap across concrete, perpendicular to

line of traffic, to provide a uniform gritty texture finish. 2. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft bristle broom across concrete

surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform fine line texture finish. 3. Medium-to-Coarse-Textured Broom Finish: Provide a coarse finish by striating surface

1/16 inch to 1/8 inch deep with a stiff-bristled broom, perpendicular to line of traffic. 4. Do not use troweling machines within 12 inches of electrical junction and outlet boxes

which are set to finish flush with concrete slabs. Float and trowel such areas by hand with wood floats and steel trowels, taking care to see that concrete is finished flush with box cover and matches adjacent surfaces.

B. Slip-Resistant Aggregate Finish: Before final floating, spread slip-resistive aggregate finish on

pavement surface in accordance with manufacture’s written instructions 1. Cure concrete with curing compound recommended by slip-resistive aggregate

manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. 2. After Curing, lightly work surface with a steel wire brush or abrasive stone and water to

expose non-slip aggregate. C. Finishing formed surfaces:

1. Curb forms shall leave a smooth face. 2. Remove all fins.

D. Provide steel trowel finish on tops of curbs and flow lines of curbs, gutters and integral curb

and gutters.


E. Final Tooling: Tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints formed in fresh concrete with a

jointing tool to the following radius. Repeat tooling of edges and joints after applying surface finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. 1. Radius: 1/4 inch. 2. Radius: 3/8 inch.

F. Finish surfaces to produce a uniform appearance throughout area involved and throughout adjacent areas with the same treatment.

G. Sandblast finish shall be consistent finish throughout and match approved mock-up. H. Where concrete finishing occurs adjacent to finished metal or other surfaces, particularly where

serrated or indented surfaces occur, remove all traces of cement film before allowing to harden.

I. Apply integral wood float and broom finish to the all concrete pavements and walkways, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 1. After screeding and compacting, finish with a wood float using a circular motion to

produce a uniform texture and finish throughout. 2. For vehicular traffic areas, the finish shall be coarse enough to provide a non-slip

surface with a minimum static friction coefficient of 0.6. 3. For pedestrian traffic areas, finish shall be a non-slip surface with a minimum static

coefficient of friction of 0.6. a. For ramps, the static coefficient of friction shall be a minimum of 0.8. Ramps are

defined as any sloping path of travel with a slope in the direction of travel of 5.0%, or greater.

4. Tests for coefficient of friction shall be either ASTM C-1028 (field test) or ASTM D-2047 (laboratory test).

3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot

temperatures. Comply with the recommendations of ACI 306R for cold weather protection and ACI 305R for hot weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Control: In hot, dry, and windy weather, protect concrete from rapid moisture loss

before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before floating.

C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete

surface.

D. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing compound, or a combination of these as follows: 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than 7 days with the

following materials: a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete

surfaces and edges with a 12-inch lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches, and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within


3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

E. Spray-apply concrete sealer to all concrete pavement. Comply with sealer manufacturer's

application instructions. 3.8 CURING COLORED CONCRETE

A. Colored concrete shall not, under any circumstances, be cured using water fog misting or ponding, burlap, plastic sheeting, or other wet covering.

B. Curing material and method shall be in strict conformance with manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations.

C. Only if additional protection is absolutely required, the surface should remain uncovered for at least 4 days, after which time new and unwrinkled non-staining reinforced waterproof kraft curing paper may be used.

3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL TESTING

A. The Owner will employ a qualified testing and inspection agency to sample materials, perform

tests, and submit test reports during concrete placement. Sampling and testing for quality control may include the following: 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with

ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of placement for each compressive-

strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of concrete. Additional tests will be required when concrete consistency changes.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each compressive-strength test but no less than one test for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless directed otherwise. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour of each concrete class exceeding 5 cu. yd. but less than 25 cu. yd., plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. Test one specimen at 7 days, test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

3. When total quantity of a given class of concrete is less than 50 cu. yd., Architect may waive strength testing if adequate evidence of satisfactory strength is provided.

4. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, evaluate current operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing the in-place concrete.

5. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three

consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

B. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor

within 24 hours of testing. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing agency, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in paving, design compressive strength at


28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day and 28-day tests.

C. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be

permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection. D. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of the concrete when test

results indicate slump, air entrainment, concrete strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: When placing integral colored concrete, arrange for the services

of a qualified technical representative of the color pigment manufacturer, equipped with wet-batch color control test devices to ensure concrete of uniform color and matching approved mock-up.


A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective, or does not meet

the requirements of this Section. Concrete which is not true to line and plane, which is not thoroughly troweled and properly surfaced as required, which varies in excess of 1/4-inch along a 10-foot straight edge, which is scuffed or has a rough top surface, except where required, or which does not connect properly to adjoining work, does not slope as required for drainage or is not properly cured, will be deemed defective. 1. General: Patch defective areas immediately following form removal. Remove defective

concrete to a width and depth necessary for proper patching, but in no case less than 1 inch deep. Make the walls of the cut area perpendicular to the surface and do not feather out the edge. Dampen the patch area and the adjacent area 6 inches around the patch area.

2. Exposed concrete: Prepare a patching mortar of one part Portland cement, adjusted to match the color of the surrounding concrete, and 2-1/2 parts sand with the least water required to produce a workable mass. Re-work this mortar until it is the stiffest consistency that will permit placing. Brush the patch area with a bond of neat cement and water paste and apply patching mortar when the water sheen is off the bond. Strike off the mortar slightly higher than the surrounding surface, let set for 1 hour and finish flush with the surrounding surface.

B. Drill test cores where directed by Architect when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks

or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with Portland cement concrete bonded to paving with epoxy adhesive.

C. Protect concrete from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after

placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

D. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep

concrete paving not more than 2 days prior to date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.

END OF SECTION